Home

Command - Electrical and Computer Engineering

1. lt filename gt Specifies the name of a VCD file to create Required Multiple files can be opened during a single simulation however you can create only one file at a time If you want to create multiple files invoke ved files multiple times map lt mapping pairs gt Affects only VHDL signals of type std_logic Optional It allows you to override the default mappings The mapping is specified as a list of character pairs The first character in a pair must be one of the std_logic characters UX01ZWLH and the second character is the character you wish to be recorded in the VCD file For example to map L and H to z ved files map L z H z Note that the quotes in the example above are a Tcl convention for command strings that include spaces nomap Affects only VHDL signals of type std_logic Optional It specifies that the values recorded in the VCD file shall use the std_logic enumeration characters of UX01ZWLH This option results in a non standard VCD file because VCD values are limited to the four state character set of x01z By default the std_logic characters are mapped as follows ModelSim SE Command Reference vcd files CR 307 Examples The following example shows how to mask outputs from a VCD file until a certain time after the start of the simulation The example uses two ved files commands and the ved on CR 311 and ved off CR 310 commands to accomplish this task ved files in_i
2. signals cur value name process process fullpath fullpath label ModelSim SE Command Reference search CR 263 Window n 3 default variables cur value name wave cur value name list fullname label Default behavior for the List window is to attempt to match the label and if that fails try to match the full signal name toggle Adds objects found to the selection Does not do an initial clear selection Optional Otherwise deselects all and selects only one object wrap Specifies that the search continue from the top of the window after reaching the bottom Optional This is the default nowrap Specifies that the search stop at the bottom of the window and not continue searching at the top Optional The default is to wrap Arguments Source window only Description See also exact Search for an exact match Optional regexp Use the pattern as a Tcl regular expression Optional nocase Ignore case Optional Default is to use case count lt n gt Search for the nth match Optional Default is to search for the first match With the all option the entire window is searched the last object matching the pattern is selected and a Tcl list of all corresponding indices is returned With the toggle option objects found are selected in addition to the current selection For the List window the search is done on the names of the objects listed that is across the head
3. quiet lt wlffile gt help Displays a list of command options with a brief description for each Optional o lt outfile gt Specifies a filename for the output By default the VCD output goes to stdout Optional quiet Disables warning messages that are produced when an unsupported type e g records is encountered in the WLF file Optional lt wlffile gt Specifies the ModelSim WLF file that you are converting Required ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 418 wifman wlifman Syntax The wlfman command allows you to get information about and manipulate WLF files The command performs four functions depending on which mode you use e wlfman info generates file information resolution versions etc e wlfman items generates a list of HDL objects i e signals from the source WLF file and outputs it to stdout When redirected to a file the output is called an object_list_file and it can be read in by wlfman filter The object_list_file is a list of objects one per line Comments start with a and continue to the end of the line Wildcards are legal in the leaf portion of the name Here is an example top foo signal foo top ul all signals under ul top ul same as line above r ftop uZ recursively all signals under u2 Note that you can produce these files from scratch but be careful with syntax wlfman items always creates a legal object_list_file wlfman filter reads in a WLF file and option
4. The concat_range directive completely specifies the index range concat_ascending lt concatenationExpr gt The concat_ascending directive specifies that the index start at zero and increment upwards concat_flatten lt concatenationExpr gt The concat_flatten directive flattens the signal structure hierarchy concat_noflatten lt concatenationExpr gt The concat_noflatten directive groups signals together without merging them into one big array The signals become elements of a record and retain their original names When expanded the new signal looks just like a group of signals The directive can be used hierarchically with no limits on depth concat_sort_wild_ascending lt concatenationExpr gt The concat_sort_wild_ascending directive gathers signals by name in ascending order the default is descending concat_reverse lt concatenationExpr gt The concat_reverse directive reverses the bits of the concatenated signals Examples amp mybusbasename Gathers all signals in the current context whose names begin with mybusbasename sorts those names in descending order and creates a bus with index range n 1 downto 0 where n is the number of matching signals found Note that it currently does not derive the index name from the tail of the one bit signal name concat_range 13 4 amp mybusbasename Specifies the index range to be 13 downto 4 with the signals gathered by name in descending order c
5. clears all coverage data obtained during previous run commands coverage exclude CR 130 loads an exclusion filter file or allows you to exclude specific coverage reload CR 132 seeds the coverage statistics with the output of a previous coverage save command coverage report CR 133 produces a textual output of the coverage statistics that have been gathered up to this point coverage save CR 137 saves current coverage statistics to a file that can be reloaded later preserving instance specific information dataset alias CR 138 assigns an additional name to a dataset dataset clear CR 139 clears the current simulation WLF file dataset close CR 140 closes a dataset dataset info CR 141 reports information about the specified dataset dataset list CR 142 lists the open dataset s dataset open CR 143 opens a dataset and references it by a logical name dataset rename CR 144 changes the logical name of an opened dataset dataset save CR 145 saves data from the current WLF file to a specified file dataset snapshot CR 146 saves data from the current WLF file at a specified interval delete CR 148 removes objects from either the List or Wave window describe CR 149 displays information about the specified HDL object disablebp CR 150 turns off breakpoints and when commands disable_menu CR 151 ModelSim S
6. do lt command_string gt lt macro_file_name gt Instructs vsim to use the command s specified by lt command_string gt or the macro file named by lt macro_file_name gt rather than the startup file specified in the ini file if any Optional Multiple commands should be separated by semi colons dumpportstdirection Modifies the format of extended VCD files to contain direction information Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference vsim CR 377 dumpportstunique Generates unique VCD variable names for ports in a VCD file even if those ports are connected to the same collapsed net Optional elab lt filename gt Creates an elaboration file for use with load_elab Optional See Simulating with an elaboration file UM 138 for more information elab_cont lt filename gt Creates an elaboration file for use with load_elab and then continues the simulation Optional elab_defer_fli Defers the initialization of FLI models until the load of the elaboration file Use this argument along with elab to create elaboration files for designs with FLI models that don t support checkpoint restore Note that FLI models sensitive to design load ordering may still not work correctly even if you use this argument See Simulating with an elaboration file UM 138 for more information error lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Changes the severity level of the specified message s to error Optional Edit the error
7. dumplog64 CR 157 The dumplog64 command dumps the contents of the specified WLF file in a readable format to stdout The WLF file cannot be opened for writing in a simulation when you use this command The dumplog64 command cannot be used in a DO file dumplogo4 lt filename gt lt filename gt The name of the WLF file to be read Required ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 158 echo echo Syntax Arguments Examples The echo command displays a specified message in the Transcript pane echo lt text_string gt lt text_string gt Specifies the message text to be displayed Optional If the text string is surrounded by quotes blank spaces are displayed as entered If quotes are omitted two or more adjacent blank spaces are compressed into one space echo The time is Snow ns If the current time is 1000 ns this command produces the message The time is 1000 ns If the quotes are omitted all blank spaces of two or more are compressed into one space echo The time is Snow ns If the current time is 1000ns this command produces the message The time is 1000 ns echo can also use command substitution such as echo The hex value of counter is examine hex counter If the current value of counter is 21 15 hex this command produces The hex value of counter is 15 ModelSim SE Command Reference edit CR 159 The edit command invokes the editor specified by the EDITOR environment variabl
8. dutycycle lt value gt The duty cycle of the clock which is the percentage of the period that the clock is high or low Acceptable values range from 0 to 100 Required period lt value gt The period of the signal Required Arguments constant patterns only value lt value gt The value for the constant Required Arguments random patterns only period lt value gt The period after which the value should change Required random_type lt value gt The type of random pattern to generate Required Choices for lt value gt include Normal Uniform Poisson or Exponential Default is Uniform seed lt value gt A seed value for the random generator If omitted ModelSim uses the value 5 Optional Arguments repeater patterns only period lt value gt The period after which the value should change Required repeat forever never lt _of_times gt The number of times to repeat Required sequence vall val2 val3 The set of values that you want repeated Required Arguments counter patterns only direction lt value gt The direction which the counter should increment or decrement Optional The default is Up Choices for lt value gt include Up Down UpThenDown and DownThenUp type Binary Range Johnson OneHot ZeroHot Gray The type of counter to create Default is Range Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See also wave create CR 401 endvalue lt value gt T
9. fcover clear Syntax See also The fcover clear command removes all functional coverage count data and comment meta data from the current simulation It doesn t affect the configuration of coverage directives fcover clear Chapter 15 Functional coverage with PSL and ModelSim Clearing functional coverage data UM 399 feover configure command CR 171 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 170 fcover comment fcover comment The fcover comment command adds comment meta data to the current functional coverage database Use the command to encode the characteristics arguments randomization seed etc of the set of tests that produced the current functional coverage so that there is some traceability from coverage to tests When coverage databases are merged comment meta data is accumulated so that a merged database has a set of multiple comments associated with it Syntax fcover comment append lt text_string gt clear Arguments append lt text_string gt Adds the specified lt text_string gt to the current functional coverage database Optional clear Clears all comments from the current functional coverage database Optional Examples fcover comment append Testl 2 seed 1023 op add Adds the test description to the current comments fcover comment Displays all comments in the current database fcover comment clear Clears all comments from the current database See also Chapte
10. in Specifies that the scope of the search is to include ports of mode IN Optional inout Specifies that the scope of the search is to include ports of mode INOUT Optional internal Specifies that the scope of the search is to include internal non port objects Optional lt object_name gt Specifies the net or signal for which you want to search Required Multiple nets and signals and wildcard characters are allowed Wildcards cannot be used inside of a slice specification Spaces square brackets and extended identifiers require special syntax see the examples below for more details nofilter Specifies that the WildcardFilter Tcl preference variable be ignored when finding signals or nets Optional out Specifies that the scope of the search is to include ports of mode OUT Optional ports Specifies that the scope of the search is to include all ports Optional Has the same effect as specifying in out and inout together recursive Specifies that the scope of the search is to descend recursively into subregions Optional If omitted the search is limited to the selected region Arguments for instances recursive Specifies that the scope of the search is to descend recursively into subregions Optional If omitted the search is limited to the selected region lt object_name gt Specifies the instance for which you want to search Required Multiple instances and wildcard characters are allowe
11. pli lt object list gt Loads a space separated list of PLI shared objects Optional The list must be quoted if it contains more than one object This is an alternative to specifying PLI objects in the Veriuser entry in the modelsim ini file see Preference variables located in INI files UM 526 You can use environment variables as part of the path lt plusarg gt Arguments preceded with are accessible by the Verilog PLI routine mc_scan_plusargs Optional pulse_e lt percent gt Controls how pulses are propagated through specify path delays where lt percent gt is a number between 0 and 100 that specifies the error limit as a percentage of the path delay Optional A pulse greater than or equal to the error limit propagates to the output in transport mode transport mode allows multiple pending transitions on an output A pulse less than the error limit and greater than or equal to the rejection limit see pulse_r lt percent gt propagates to the output as an X If the rejection limit is not specified then it defaults to the error limit For example consider a path delay of 10 along with a pulse_e 80 option The error limit is 80 of 10 and the rejection limit defaults to 80 of 10 This results in the propagation of pulses greater than or equal to 8 while all other pulses are filtered Note that you can force specify path delays to operate in transport mode by using the pulse_e 0 option pulse_e_style_ondetect Se
12. s s so ee CR IT ModelSim variables 00a aa a CR A7 Simulation time units 0a aa aa CR 18 Comments in argument files 000a aaa aa a CR 18 Command shortcuts aaa a a CR A18 Command history shortcuts aa a CR 19 Numbering conventions 2 CR 20 VHDL numbering conventions CR 20 Verilog numbering conventions CR 21 GUlLexpression_format CR 22 Expression typing 2 CR 22 Expression syntax wom oe e oao ow ow CR 23 Signal and subelement naming conventions CR 27 Grouping and precedence oaos w wa FH at e CR27 Concatenation of signals or roliviemants EN CR 27 Record field and SystemC class structure union members CR 29 Searching for binary signal values in the GUI CR 29 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 10 Syntax and conventions Documentation conventions This manual uses the following conventions to define ModelSim command syntax Syntax notation Description angled brackets surrounding a syntax item indicate a user defined argument do not enter the brackets in commands square brackets generally indicate an optional item if the brackets surround several words all must be entered as a group the brackets are not entered braces indicate that the enclosed expression contains one or more spaces yet should be treated as a single argument or that the expression conta
13. specified as any valid address in the memory Optional format bin hex mti Specifies the format of the file to be loaded The lt formtype gt can be specified as bin hex or mti bin and hex are the standard Verilog hex and binary memory pattern file formats These can be used with Verilog memories and with VHDL memories composed of std_logic types mti is the MTI memory data file format GR 184 In the MTI memory data file format internal file address and data radix settings are stored within the file itself Thus there is no need to specify these settings on the mem load command line If a format specified on the command line and the format signature stored internally within the file do not agree the file cannot be loaded filltype lt filltype gt Fills in memory data patterns algorithmically The lt filltype gt can be specified as value inc dec or rand Required unless the infile argument is used in which case it is optional Default is value filldata lt patterndata gt Specifies the pattern parameters value for fixed value fill operations and seed or starting point for random increment or decrement fill operations Required if filltype is used A fill pattern covers any of the selected address range that is not populated from file values If a fill pattern is used without a file option the entire memory or specified address range is initialized with the fill pattern fillradix lt radix gt Specifie
14. tcheck_set CR 277 The tcheck_set command works in tandem with tcheck_status CR 279 to report on and enable disable individual timing checks tcheck_set modifies either a check s reporting or X generation status and reports the new setting in the Transcript pane Disabling a timing check s reporting prevents generation of associated violation messages For Verilog modules this means ModelSim disables message reporting For VHDL design units this means ModelSim sets the MsgOn parameter in a VITAL timing check procedure TCP to FALSE Disabling a timing check s X generation removes a timing check s ability to affect the outputs of the simulation For Verilog modules this means ModelSim toggles the timing check s notifier For VHDL design units this means ModelSim sets the Xon parameter in a VITAL TCP to FALSE tcheck_set does not override the effects of invoking vlog CR 360 or vsim CR 375 with the nospecify notimingchecks or no_neg_tchk argument tcheck_set can override the effects of invoking vsim CR 375 with the no_notifier no_tchk_msg g or G argument These latter arguments establish initial values for the simulation and those values can be modified by tcheck_set Keep in mind the following if you are using VHDL VITAL e VITAL does not provide the granularity to set individual period or width checks These checks are part of a single VITAL TCP and tcheck_set toggles MsgOn and Xon for all checks in the TCP See Example
15. CR 216 onbreak onbreak Syntax Arguments Examples See also The onbreak command is used within a macro placed before a run command It specifies one or more commands to be executed when running a macro that encounters a breakpoint in the source code Using the onbreak command without arguments will return the current onbreak command string Use an empty string to change the onbreak command back to its default behavior i e onbreak In that case the macro will be interrupted after a breakpoint occurs after any associated bp command CR 76 string is executed onbreak commands can contain macro calls onbreak lt command gt lt command gt lt command gt Any command can be used as an argument to onbreak If you want to use more than one command use a semicolon to separate the commands or place them on multiple lines The entire command string must be placed in curly braces You must use the onbreak command before a run CR 254 run continue or step CR 274 command It is an error to execute any commands within an onbreak command string following any of the run commands This restriction applies to any macros or Tcl procedures used in the onbreak command string Optional onbreak exa data cont Examine the value of the HDL object data when a breakpoint is encountered Then continue the run command CR 254 onbreak resume Resume execution of the macro file on encountering a breakpoint set br
16. Design object names CR 12 Wildcard characters CR 17 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 182 force force Syntax Arguments The force command allows you to apply stimulus interactively to VHDL signals and Verilog nets Since force commands like all commands can be included in a macro file it is possible to create complex sequences of stimuli You can force Virtual signals UM 233 if the number of bits corresponds to the signal value You cannot force virtual functions In VHDL and mixed models you cannot force an input port that is mapped at a higher level or that has a conversion function on the input You cannot force bits or slices of a register you can force only the entire register You cannot force VHDL or Verilog variables reg integer time real or realtime these must be changed See the change command CR 82 You cannot force a VHDL alias of a VHDL signal You cannot force any objects within SystemC modules force freeze drive deposit cancel lt time gt repeat lt time gt lt object_name gt lt value gt lt time gt lt value gt lt time gt freeze Freezes the object at the specified value until it is forced again or until it is unforced with a noforce command CR 210 Optional drive Attaches a driver to the object and drives the specified value until the object is forced again or until it is unforced with a noforce command CR 210 Optional This option is
17. Optional Default You can change the permanent default by editing the CoverEnable UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file exclude Removes the specified directive s from the current functional coverage database Excluded directives will still show up in the Functional Coverage pane but they do not count toward coverage totals nor do they show up in reports Optional include Adds the specified directive s to the current functional coverage database Optional Default This argument is useful if you have a directive that is already covered but is evaluated frequently Disabling such directives improves simulation performance log on off Specifies whether to log directive counts to the transcript Even with logging off coverage counts are incremented in the underlying database This option applies to all directives that follow it in the command line One of the following values is required ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 172 fcover configure on Enable logging Default off Disable logging You can change the permanent default by setting the CoverLog UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file recursive For use with wildcard matching Specifies that the scope of the matching is to descend recursively into subregions If omitted the search is limited to the selected region Optional weight lt integer gt Specifies a relative weighting for the specified coverage directive A directive with a weight of 2 will
18. Scalar variables constants and generics of all types except FILE Scalar subelements of composite variables constants and generics of all types except FILE One dimensional arrays of enumerated character types including slices e Access types an access type pointer can be set to null the value that an access type points to can be changed as specified above Verilog Parameters Registers and memories Integer real realtime and time variables Subelements of register integer real realtime and time multi dimensional arrays all dimensions must be specified Bit selects and part selects of the above except for objects whose basic type is real Scalar C variables of type int char double or float Individual fields of a C structure SystemC primitive channels are not supported The name can be a full hierarchical name or a relative name A relative name is relative to the current environment Wildcards cannot be used Required lt value gt Defines a value for the variable Required The specified value must be appropriate for the type of the variable Values that contain spaces must be enclosed with quotation marks or curly braces see Examples Note that the initial type of a parameter determines the type of value that it can be given For example if a parameter is initially equal to 3 14 then only real values can be set on it Also note that changing the value of a parameter or generic will not modify any design
19. You can specify different values for the leading and trailing tolerances using tolLead and tolTrail tolLead lt delay gt Specifies the default maximum time the test signal edge is allowed to lead the reference edge in an asynchronous comparison Optional The default is 0 If a unit e g ps is used with the time value the time must be in curly braces Related Tcl variables are PrefCompare defaultLeadTolerance and PrefCompare defaultLeadUnits tolTrail lt delay gt Specifies the default maximum time the test signal edge is allowed to trail the reference edge in an asynchronous comparison Optional The default is 0 If a unit is used e g ps with the time value the time must be in curly braces Related Tcl variables are PrefCompare defaultTrailTolerance and PrefCompare defaultTrailUnits ModelSim SE Command Reference compare options CR 111 Graphical representation of tolLead and tolTrail Reference Signal a Test Signal tolLead tolTrail track Specifies that the waveform comparison should track the current simulation Optional Default The differences will be updated at the end of each run command so if you want to see differences soon after they occur use many relatively short run commands Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultTrackLiveSim notrack Specifies that the waveform comparison should not track the current simulation Optional Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultTrackLiveSim
20. sc_int Causes scgenmod to generate sc_int lt N gt vector port types sc_lv Causes scgenmod to generate sc_lv lt N gt vector port types sc_rv Causes scgenmod to generate resolved vector port types sc_uint Causes scgenmod to generate sc_uint lt N gt port types ModelSim SE Command Reference scgenmod CR 261 Examples This example uses a Verilog module that is compiled into the work library The module begins as Verilog source code module vcounter clock topcount count input clock input topcount output count reg count endmodule After compiling using vlog CR 360 you invoke segenmod on the compiled module with the following command scgenmod vcounter The SystemC foreign module declaration for the above Verilog module is class vcounter public sc_foreign_module public sc_in lt sc_logic gt clock sc_in lt sc_logic gt topcount sc_out lt sc_logic gt count vcounter sc_module_name nm const char hdl_name sc_foreign_module nm hdl_name clock clock topcount topcount count count vcounter See also Chapter 6 SystemC simulation secom command CR 256 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 262 search search The search command searches the specified window for one or more objects matching the specified pattern s The search starts at the object currently selected if any otherwise it starts at the window top The default action is to search downward
21. use when Snow 1750ns stop You can also use when errorFlag 1 OR Snow 2ms stop This example adds 2ms to the simulation time at which the when statement is first evaluated then stops You can also use variables as shown in the following example set time 1000 when Snow Stime stop The quotes instruct Tcl to expand the variables before calling the command So the when command sees when Snow 1000 stop Note that now has the escaped This prevents Tcl from expanding the variable because if it did you would get when 0 1000 stop bp CR 76 disablebp CR 150 enablebp CR 160 nowhen CR 215 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 414 where where The where command displays information about the system environment This command is useful for debugging problems where ModelSim cannot find the required libraries or support files The command displays two system settings current directory This is the current directory that ModelSim was invoked from or was specified on the ModelSim command line current project file This is the mpf file ModelSim is using All library mappings are taken from here when a project is open Syntax where Arguments None ModelSim SE Command Reference wlf2log Syntax Arguments wlf2log CR 415 The wlf2log command translates a ModelSim WLF file vsim wif to a QuickSim TI logfile The command reads the vsim wlf WLF file generated b
22. wave edit CR 402 wave export CR 405 wave import CR 406 wave modify CR 407 WavedActivateNextPane CR 425 WaveRestoreCursors CR 425 WaveRestoreZoom CR 425 when CR 409 where CR 414 wlf2log CR 415 wlf2ved CR 417 wlfman CR 418 wlfrecover CR 422 write cell_report CR 423 write format CR 424 write list CR 426 write preferences CR 427 write report CR 428 write timing CR 429 write transcript CR 430 write tssi CR 431 write wave CR 433 comment character Tcl and DO files UM 478 comment characters in VSIM commands CR 10 compare add region UM 276 add signals UM 275 by signal UM 275 clocked UM 277 difference markers UM 280 displayed in List window UM 282 icons UM 282 method UM 277 options UM 279 pathnames UM 280 reference dataset UM 273 reference region UM 276 tab UM 274 test dataset UM 274 timing differences UM 280 tolerance UM 277 values UM 281 wave window display UM 280 compare add command CR 95 compare annotate command CR 99 CR 102 compare by region UM 276 compare clock command CR 100 compare close command CR 106 compare delete command CR 105 compare info command CR 107 compare list command CR 108 Compare Memory dialog GR 187 compare open command CR 120 compare options command CR 109 compare reload command CR 113 compare savediffs command CR 116 compare saverules command CR 117 compare see command CR 118 compare simulations UM 225 compare start command CR 115 compatibility of vendor
23. Adds the objects to the specified Dataflow window lt wname gt e g dataflow2 Optional Used to specify a particular window when multiple instances of that window type exist Selects an existing window does not create a new window Use the view_ command CR 334 with the new option to create a new window Dataflow window GR 134 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 48 add list add list Syntax Arguments The add list command adds the following objects and their values to the List window VHDL signals and variables Verilog nets and registers and SystemC primitive channels signals User defined buses may also be added If no port mode is specified add list will display all objects in the selected region with names matching the object name specification Limitations VHDL variables and Verilog memories can be listed using the variable s full name only no wildcards add list allowconstants depth lt level gt in inout internal label lt name gt nodelta notrigger trigger optcells out ports lt radix gt recursive width lt n gt window lt wname gt lt object_name gt lt object_name gt sigl sig2 sig3 allowconstants For use with wildcard searches Specifies that constants matching the wildcard search should be added to the List window Optional By default constants are ignored because they do not change depth lt level gt Restricts a recursive
24. CR 244 readers readers The readers command displays the names of all readers of the specified object The reader list is expressed relative to the top most design signal net connected to the specified object Syntax readers lt object_name gt Arguments lt object_name gt Specifies the name of the signal or net whose readers are to be shown Required All signal or net types are valid Multiple names and wildcards are accepted See also drivers CR 156 command ModelSim SE Command Reference record CR 245 record This command is available for UNIX only excluding Linux The record command starts recording a replayable trace of all keyboard and mouse actions Record and play operations may also be run from the macro helper menu object of the macro menu Returns nothing Syntax record lt filename gt Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the file for the saved recording If lt filename gt is not specified the recording terminates See also macro_option CR 197 play CR 220 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 246 report report The report command displays the value of all simulator control variables or the value of any simulator state variables relevant to the current simulation Syntax report simulator control simulator state Arguments simulator control Displays the current values for all simulator control variables simulator state Displays the simulator state variables relevant to the current sim
25. Lf options to specify the libraries to be searched ModelSim SE Command Reference vlog CR 367 protect Enables protect endprotect directives Optional See ModelSim compiler directives UM 155 for more information pslfile lt filename gt Identifies an external PSL assertion file to compile along with the Verilog source files See Compiling and simulating assertions UM 377 for more information quiet Disables Loading messages Optional R lt simargs gt Instructs the compiler to invoke vsim CR 375 after compiling the design The compiler automatically determines which top level modules are to be simulated The command line arguments following R are passed to the simulator not the compiler Place the R option at the end of the command line or terminate the simulator command line arguments with a single character to differentiate them from compiler command line arguments The R option is not a Verilog XL option but it is used by ModelSim to combine the compile and simulate phases together as you may be used to doing with Verilog XL It is not recommended that you regularly use this option because you will incur the unnecessary overhead of compiling your design for each simulation run Mainly it is provided to ease the transition to ModelSim refresh Regenerates a library image Optional By default the work library is updated use work lt library_name gt to update a different library See vlo
26. Links in the library libmylib a when creating the so file The L argument specifies the search path for the libraries See also Chapter 6 SystemC simulation segenmod command CR 260 vdel allsysteme command CR 329 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 260 scgenmod scgenmod Syntax Arguments Once a Verilog or VHDL module is compiled into a library you can use the scgenmod command to write its equivalent SystemC foreign module declaration to standard output Optional arguments allow you to generate sc_bit sc_bv or resolved port types sc_logic and sc_lv port types are generated by default scgenmod help lib lt library_name gt sc_logic sc_bit bool se_resolved sc_by se_lv s _ tv seLint s uint lt module_name gt help Displays the command s options and arguments Optional lib lt library_name gt Specifies the pathname of the working library If not specified the default library work is used Optional lt module_name gt Specifies the name of the Verilog VHDL module to be accessed Required Scalar type options sc_bit Causes scgenmod to generate sc_bit scalar port types bool Causes scgenmod to generate bool scalar port types sc_logic Causes scgenmod to generate sc_logic scalar port types sc_resolved Causes scgenmod to generate resolved scalar port types Vector type options sc_bv Causes scgenmod to generate sc_bv lt N gt vector port types
27. Reports a hierarchical callstack list of statistical performance and memory allocation data Optional This is the default report type Gallercallee lt Eunc gt Creates a ranked report of all callers and callees of the specified function where lt func gt indicates a function name for PLI FLI or SystemC or a lt v vhd filename gt lt line gt Optional cutoff lt percentage gt Filters out entries in the report that had less than lt percentage gt of time spent in them Optional Default is to report all entries i e 0 file lt filename gt Specifies a file name for the report Optional Default is to write the report to the Transcript pane functoinst lt func gt Creates a ranked profile report of all instances of the specified function where lt func gt indicates a function name for PLI FLI or SystemC or a lt v vhd filename gt lt line gt Optional instofdef lt inst gt inclusiveDuMatch 0 1 Creates a ranked report of all instances with the same definition as the specified instance showing profile results for each lt inst gt is the hierarchical pathname of the specified instance Optional The optional argument inclusiveDuMatch 011 determines how strict the instance definition is An inclusiveDuMatch of 1 the default includes in the report all instances that reference design units with the same primary name For example if your design has multiple architectures for a VHDL entity a value of
28. Required ModelSim SE Command Reference vcom CR 313 vcom The vcom command compiles VHDL source code into a specified working library or to the work library by default This command may be invoked from within ModelSim or from the operating system command prompt This command may also be invoked during simulation Compiled libraries are major version dependent For example you cannot use a library compiled with 5 7 in a simulation using 5 8 vsim You would have to refresh the libraries using the refresh argument to vcom This is not true for minor versions e g 5 7a libraries work in 5 7d Syntax vcom 87 93 2002 acc lt spec gt lt entity gt architecture bindAtCompile bindAtLoad check_synthesis cover lt stat gt debugVA error lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt explicit f lt filename gt force_refresh help ignoredefaultbinding ignorevitalerrors just abcep line lt number gt lint nol1164 noaccel lt package_name gt nocasestaticerror nocheck nocoverage nodebug ports noindexcheck nologo nonstddriverinit noothersstaticerror nopsl norangecheck note lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt novital novitalcheck nowarn lt number gt 00 01 04 O5 pedanticerrors performdefaultbinding pslfile lt filename gt quiet rangecheck refresh s skip abcep source suppress lt msg_numb
29. See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information notimingchecks Disables Verilog and VITAL timing checks for faster simulation Optional By default Verilog timing check system tasks setup hold in specify blocks are enabled For VITAL the timing check default is controlled by the ASIC or FPGA vendor but most default to enabled You can disable individual checks using the tcheck_set command CR 277 novopt Prevents ModelSim from running the vopt command CR 373 automatically If you have set the VoptFlow UM 536 variable to 1 in the modelsim ini file vsim will automatically run vopt if you didn t invoke it manually This argument allows you to run ModelSim in debug mode when the default mode is optimized pulse_int_e lt percent gt Controls how pulses are propagated through interconnect delays where lt percent gt is a number between 0 and 100 that specifies the error limit as a percentage of the interconnect delay Optional Used in conjunction with multisource_int_delays see above This option works for both Verilog and VITAL cells though the destination of the interconnect must be a Verilog cell The source may be VITAL or Verilog A pulse greater than or equal to the error limit propagates to the output in transport mode transport mode allows multiple pending transitions on an output A pulse less than the error limit and greater than or equal to the rejection limit see pulse_int_r lt per
30. Syntax Arguments See also The ved dumpportslimit command specifies the maximum size of the VCD file by default limited to available disk space When the size of the file exceeds the limit a comment is appended to the file and VCD dumping is disabled Related Verilog task dumpportslimit ved dumpportslimit lt dumplimit gt lt filename gt lt dumplimit gt Specifies the maximum VCD file size in bytes Required lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file Optional If omitted the command is executed on all open VCD files See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 302 vcd dumpportsoff vcd dumpportsoff The ved dumpportsoff command turns off VCD dumping and records all dumped port values as x Related Verilog task dumpportsoff Syntax vcd dumpportsoff lt filename gt Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file Optional If omitted the command is executed on all open VCD files See also See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files ModelSim SE Command Reference vcd dumpportson CR 303 vcd dumpportson The ved dumpportson command turns on VCD dumping and records the current values of all selected ports This command is typically used to resume dumping after invoking ved dumpportsoff Related Verilog task dumpportson Syntax vcd dumpportson lt filename g
31. _ For example the signal mybus might be broken down into mybus_0 mybus_1 etc tol lt delay gt Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead or trail a reference edge in an asynchronous comparison Optional The default is 0 If a unit e g ps is used with the time value the time must be placed in curly braces tolLead lt delay gt Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead a reference edge in an asynchronous comparison Optional The default is 0 If a unit e g ps is used with the time value the time must be placed in curly braces ModelSim SE Command Reference compare add CR 97 tolTrail lt delay gt Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to trail a reference edge in an asynchronous comparison Optional The default is 0 If a unit is used e g ps with the time value the time must be placed in curly braces Graphical representation of tolLead and tolTrail Reference Signal Test Signal a tolLead tolTrail verbose Prints information in the Transcript pane confirming the signals selected for comparison and any type conversions employed Optional vhdlmatches lt ref logic value gt lt test logic value gt Specifies how VHDL signal states in the reference dataset should match values in the test dataset Optional Values are specified in a colon separated list of match values For example vhdlmatches X XUD Z ZD 1 1HD
32. configuring from the GUI GR 91 enabling CR 64 CR 66 failure behavior CR 64 file and line number UM 531 flow UM 364 library and use clauses UM 369 limitations UM 364 messages alternate output file UM 383 turning off UM 540 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ multiclocked properties UM 371 pass behavior CR 66 reporting on CR 68 UM 383 selecting severity that stops simulation GR 91 setting format of messages UM 531 testing for with onbreak command CR 216 viewing in Wave window UM 384 warnings locating UM 531 Assertions pane described GR 116 hiding showing columns GR 118 assume directives disabling UM 365 SimulateAssumeDirectives ini variable UM 535 AtLeast counts functional coverage UM 389 attributes of signals using in expressions CR 24 auto find bp command UM 408 auto step mode C Debug UM 409 B bad magic number error message UM 227 balloon dialog toggling on off GR 262 balloon popup C Debug GR 105 base radix List window UM 260 Memory window GR 189 Wave window UM 255 batch_mode command CR 70 batch mode simulations UM 28 halting CR 412 bd breakpoint delete command CR 71 binary radix mapping to std_logic values CR 29 BindAtCompile ini file variable UM 529 binding VHDL default UM 79 bitwise format UM 280 blocking assignments UM 134 bookmark add wave command CR 72 bookmark delete wave command CR 73 bookmark goto wave command CR 74 bookmark list wave command CR 75 bookmarks Source window GR 210 Wav
33. debugging C code UM 401 debugging the design overview UM 26 declarations hiding implicit with explicit CR 320 default binding BindAtCompile ini file variable UM 529 disabling UM 79 default binding rules UM 79 default clock UM 370 Default editor changing UM 523 DefaultForceKind ini file variable UM 533 DefaultRadix ini file variable UM 533 DefaultRestartOptions variable UM 533 UM 541 defaults restoring UM 522 define CR 361 Define Clock dialog GR 194 definition ID of memory GR 176 delay delta delays UM 80 interconnect CR 380 modes for Verilog models UM 144 SDF files UM 441 stimulus delay specifying GR 193 delay_mode_distributed CR 361 delay_mode_path CR 361 delay_mode_unit CR 361 delay_mode_zero CR 362 delayed CR 24 DelayFileOpen ini file variable UM 534 delaying test signal Waveform Comparison GR 250 delete command CR 148 deleting library contents UM 61 delta collapsing UM 232 delta simulator state variable UM 544 deltas collapsing in the List window GR 169 collapsing in WLF files CR 384 hiding in the List window CR 125 GR 169 in List window UM 266 referencing simulator iteration as a simulator state variable UM 544 dependencies checking CR 330 dependent design units UM 73 describe command CR 149 descriptions of HDL items GR 209 design library creating UM 60 logical name assigning UM 62 mapping search rules UM 63 resource type UM 58 VHDL design units UM 73 working type UM 58 design object icons desc
34. fast see below Optional define lt macro_name gt lt macro_text gt Allows you to define a macro from the command line that is equivalent to the following compiler directive define lt macro_name gt lt macro_text gt Optional You can specify more than one macro with a single define For example vlog tdefinetone rl two r2 three r3 test v A command line macro overrides a macro of the same name defined with the define compiler directive delay_mode_distributed Disables path delays in favor of distributed delays Optional See Delay modes UM 144 for details delay_mode_path Sets distributed delays to zero in favor of using path delays Optional See Delay modes UM 144 for details delay_mode_unit Sets path delays to zero and non zero distributed delays to one time unit Optional See Delay modes UM 144 for details ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 362 vlog delay_mode_zero Sets path delays and distributed delays to zero Optional See Delay modes UM 144 for details dpiheader Generates a header file that may then be included in C source code for DPI import functions error lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Changes the severity level of the specified message s to error Optional Edit the error UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information f lt filename gt Spec
35. lt filename gt Specifies the WLF file to repair Required Eorce Disregards file locking and attempts to repair the file Optional Hides all messages unless there is an error while repairing the file Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference write cell_report CR 423 write cell_report Syntax Arguments The write cell_report command writes to the Transcript pane or to a file a list of Verilog modules which qualified for and received gate level cell optimizations Gate level cell optimizations are applied at the module level in addition to normal Verilog optimizations to improve performance of gate level simulations write cell_report filter lt number gt infile lt filename gt nonopt outfile lt filename gt filter lt number gt Excludes cells with instance counts fewer than lt number gt Optional infile lt filename gt Specifies a previously generated write report file to use as input Optional If not specified then the write report command will be run nonopt Reports only non optimized instances Optional outfile lt filename gt Writes the report to the specified output file rather than the Transcript pane Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 424 write format write format Syntax Arguments Examples Output The write format command records the names and display options of the HDL objects currently being displayed in the List or Wave window The file create
36. match the specification Optional optcells Makes Verilog optimized cell ports visible when using wildcards Optional By default Verilog optimized cell ports are not selected even if they match the specified wildcard pattern ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 194 log Examples See also out Specifies that the WLF file is to include data for ports of mode OUT whose names match the specification Optional ports Specifies that the scope of the search is to include all ports Optional recursive Specifies that the scope of the search is to descend recursively into subregions Optional If omitted the search is limited to the selected region You can use the depth argument to specify how far down the hierarchy to descend lt object_name gt Specifies the object name which you want to log Required Multiple object names may be specified Wildcard characters are allowed Note that the WildcardFilter Tcl preference variable identifies types to ignore when matching objects with wildcard patterns log r Logs all objects in the design log out Logs all output ports in the current design unit add list CR 48 add wave CR 53 nolog CR 211 Chapter 8 WLF files datasets and virtuals UM 225 and Wildcard characters CR 17 gt Note The log command is also known as the add log command ModelSim SE Command Reference Ishift Syntax Arguments Examples See also Ishift CR 195 The Is
37. object name The object name must specify a scalar type or a one dimensional array of character enumeration You may also specify a record subelement an indexed array or a sliced array as long as the type is one of the above Required lt value gt Specifies the value to which the object is to be forced The specified value must be appropriate for the type Required A VHDL one dimensional array of character enumeration can be forced as a sequence of character literals or as a based number with a radix of 2 8 10 or 16 For example the following values are equivalent for a signal of type bit_vector 0 to 3 Value Description 1111 character literal sequence 2 1111 binary radix 10 15 decimal radix 16 F hexadecimal radix P gt Note For based numbers in VHDL ModelSim translates each 1 or 0 to the appropriate value for the number s enumerated type The translation is controlled by the translation table in the pref tcl file If ModelSim cannot find a translation for 0 or 1 it uses the left bound of the signal type type left for that value lt time gt Specifies the time to which the value is to be applied The time is relative to the current time unless an absolute time is specified by preceding the value with the character If the time units are not specified then the default is the resolution units selected at simulation start up Optional A zero delay force command causes the change to occur
38. onerror Syntax Arguments Example See also The onerror command is used within a macro placed before a run command it specifies one or more commands to be executed when a running macro encounters an error Using the onerror command without arguments will return the current onerror command string Use an empty string to change the onerror command back to its default behavior i e wn onerror Use onerror with a resume command CR 251 to allow an error message to be printed without halting the execution of the macro file onerror lt command gt lt command gt lt command gt Any command can be used as an argument to onerror If you want to use more than one command use a semicolon to separate the commands or place them on multiple lines The entire command string must be placed in curly braces Optional onerror quit f Forces the simulator to quit if an error is encountered while the macro is running abort CR 44 do CR 153 onbreak CR 216 resume CR 251 status CR 273 gt Note You can also set the global OnErrorDefaultA ction Tcl variable in the pref tcl file to dictate what action ModelSim takes when an error occurs The onerror command is invoked only when an error occurs in the macro file that contains the onerror command Conversely OnErrorDefaultAction will run even if the macro does not contain a local onerror command This can be useful when you run a series of macros from one scrip
39. opens a ModelSim window and brings it to the front of the display virtual count CR 336 counts the number of currently defined virtuals that were not read in using a macro file virtual define CR 337 prints the definition of a virtual signal or function in the form of a command that can be used to re create the object virtual delete CR 338 removes the matching virtuals virtual describe CR 339 prints a complete description of the data type of one or more virtual signals virtual expand CR 340 produces a list of all the non virtual objects contained in the virtual signal s virtual function CR 341 creates a new signal that consists of logical operations on existing signals and simulation time virtual hide CR 344 causes the specified real or virtual signals to not be displayed in the Objects window virtual log CR 345 causes the sim mode dependent signals of the specified virtual signals to be logged by the simulator virtual nohide CR 347 redisplays a virtual previously hidden with virtual hide virtual nolog CR 348 stops the logging of the specified virtual signals virtual region CR 350 creates a new user defined design hierarchy region virtual save CR 351 saves the definitions of virtuals to a file virtual show CR 352 lists the full path names of all the virtuals explicitly defined virtual signal CR 353 creates a new signal
40. outonly Allows splitio to work only on out ports Optional F Specifies that the port selection occurs recursively into subregions Optional If omitted included ports are limited to the current region lt signal_name gt Specifies the VHDL port Operates only on inout ports by default out ports may be specified with the options above Separate multiple port names with spaces Required Wildcards can be used Examples The splitio command operates on inout or out ports and silently ignores any other signals specified The new signals created may be specified in any vsim CR 375 commands that operate on signals These signals appear to be out ports to the signal selection options on vsim commands For example splitio data Creates a signal data__o if data is an inout port ModelSim SE Command Reference status Syntax Arguments Examples See also status CR 273 The status command lists summary information about currently interrupted macros If invoked without arguments the command lists the filename of each interrupted macro the line number at which it was interrupted and prints the command itself It also displays any onbreak CR 216 or onerror CR 218 commands that have been defined for each interrupted macro status file line file Reports the file pathname of the current macro line Reports the line number of the current macro The transcript below contains examples of resume CR 251 and st
41. quick reference paper shipped with ModelSim PDF select Help gt Documentation also available from the Support page of our web site www model com ModelSim Tutorial PDF HTML select Help gt Documentation also available from the Support page of our web site www model com ModelSim User s Manual PDF HTML select Help gt Documentation ModelSim Command Reference PDF HTML select Help gt Documentation ModelSim GUI Reference PDF HTML select Help gt Documentation Foreign Language Interface Reference PDF HTML select Help gt Documentation Std_DevelopersKit User s Manual PDF www model com support documentation BOOK sdk_um pdf The Standard Developer s Kit is for use with Mentor Graphics QuickHDL Command Help type help command name at the prompt in the Transcript pane Error message help type verror lt msgNum gt at the Transcript or shell prompt Tcl Man Pages Tcl manual select Help gt Tcl Man Pages or find contents htm in modeltech docs tcl_help_html Technotes ModelSim SE Command Reference select Technotes dropdown on www model com support CR 5 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 6 ModelSim SE Command Reference Table of Contents CR 5 Technical support and updates CR 3 Where to find our documentation CR 4 CR 5 Syntax and conventions CR 9 Documentation conventions CR 10 Fil
42. shift CR 268 show CR 269 splitio CR 272 status CR 273 step CR 274 stop CR 275 system UM 481 tb traceback CR 276 tcheck_set CR 277 tcheck_status CR 279 toggle add CR 281 toggle disable CR 283 toggle enable CR 284 toggle report CR 285 toggle reset CR 286 transcribe CR 287 transcript CR 288 transcript file CR 289 TreeUpdate CR 425 tssi2mti CR 290 unsetenv CR 291 up CR 292 variables referenced in CR 17 ved add CR 294 ved checkpoint CR 295 ved comment CR 296 ved dumpports CR 297 ved dumpportsall CR 299 ved dumpportsflush CR 300 ved dumpportslimit CR 301 ved dumpportsoff CR 302 ved dumpportson CR 303 ved file CR 304 ved files CR 306 ved flush CR 308 ved limit CR 309 ved off CR 310 ved on CR 311 vcom CR 313 vcover convert CR 321 vcover merge CR 322 vcover report CR 324 vdel CR 329 vdir CR 330 verror CR 331 vgencomp CR 332 view CR 334 virtual count CR 336 virtual define CR 337 virtual delete CR 338 virtual describe CR 339 virtual expand CR 340 virtual function CR 341 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ virtual hide CR 344 virtual log CR 345 virtual nohide CR 347 virtual nolog CR 348 virtual region CR 350 virtual save CR 351 virtual show CR 352 virtual signal CR 353 virtual type CR 356 vlib CR 358 vlog CR 360 vmake CR 371 vmap CR 372 vopt CR 373 vsim CR 375 VSIM Tcl commands UM 482 vsimDate CR 394 vsimlId CR 394 vsimVersion CR 394 wave CR 396 wave create CR 399
43. using in PSL assertions UM 369 signal_force UM 436 signal_force UM 97 UM 427 signal_release UM 438 signal_release UM 97 UM 429 signals alternative names in the List window label CR 48 alternative names in the Wave window label CR 54 applying stimulus to GR 192 attributes of using in expressions CR 24 breakpoints CR 409 combining into a user defined bus CR 54 UM 265 Dataflow window displaying in UM 300 GR 134 drivers of displaying CR 156 driving in the hierarchy UM 421 environment of displaying CR 163 filtering in the Objects window GR 191 finding CR 178 force time specifying CR 183 hierarchy driving in UM 421 UM 431 referencing in UM 97 UM 424 UM 434 releasing anywhere in UM 429 releasing in UM 97 UM 438 log file creating CR 193 names of viewing without hierarchy GR 261 pathnames in VSIM commands CR 12 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXAYZ radix specifying for examine CR 165 specifying in List window CR 49 specifying in Wave window CR 55 readers of displaying CR 244 sampling at a clock change UM 269 states of displaying as mnemonics CR 356 stimulus CR 182 transitions searching for UM 249 types selecting which to view GR 191 unresolved multiple drivers on GR 58 GR 67 values of displaying in Objects window GR 190 examining CR 164 forcing anywhere in the hierarchy UM 97 UM 427 UM 436 replacing with text CR 356 saving as binary log file UM 226 waveforms viewing GR 217 Signals Objects window UM
44. vhdlmatches lt ref logic value gt lt test logic value gt Specifies how VHDL signal states in the reference dataset should match values in the test dataset Optional Values are specified in a colon separated list of match values For example vhdlmatches X XUD Z ZD 1 1HD Default is U UWX X UWXD 0 0LD 1 1HD Z ZD W UWXD L 0LD H 1HD UX01ZWLHD Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultVHDLMatches vlogmatches lt ref logic value gt lt test logic value gt Specifies how Verilog signal states in the reference dataset should match values in the test dataset Optional Values are specified in a colon separated list of match values For example vlogmatches 0 0 1 1 2 Z Default is 0 0 1 1 Z Z X X Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultVLOGMatches wavepane lt n gt Specifies the default pane of the Wave window in which compare differences will be viewed Optional Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultWavePane wavewin lt name gt Specifies the default name of the Wave window in which compare differences will be viewed Optional Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultWaveWindow ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 112 compare options Examples compare options Returns the current value of all options compare options maxtotal 2000 Sets the maxtotal option to 2000 differences compare options maxtotal Returns the current value of the maxtotal option compare options ignoreVl
45. vopt top acc foo o mydesign Runs optimizations on top level design unit top but preserves visibility on sub module foo Names the optimized design mydesign vopt top tacctfoo o mydesign Runs optimizations on top level design unit top but preserves visibility on sub module foo and all its children vopt top acc rn 0o mydesign Runs optimizations on top level design unit top but enables net and register access in all modules in the design Names the optimized design mydesign Optimizing Verilog designs UM 124 ModelSim SE Command Reference vsim Syntax vsim CR 375 The vsim command is used to invoke the VSIM simulator or to view the results of a previous simulation run when invoked with the view switch You can simulate a VHDL configuration or an entity architecture pair a Verilog module or configuration a SystemC module or an optimized design If you specify a VHDL configuration it is invalid to specify an architecture During elaboration vsim determines if the source has been modified since the last compile To manually interrupt design elaboration use the Break key or lt Ctrl c gt from a shell You can invoke vsim from a command prompt or in the Transcript pane of the Main window You can also invoke it from the GUI by selecting Simulate gt Start Simulation vsim assertfile lt filename gt assume c csupv2 compress_elab coverage do lt command_string gt lt macro_file_na
46. 1 If 1 the status indicator is displayed Otherwise it is not displayed Optional The default is 1 add_menucb Swname mine vars Feature One variable myglobalvar Swname one onvalue 1 offvalue 0 indicatoron 1 add_menu CR 57 add_menuitem CR 60 add_separator CR 61 add_submenu CR 62 change_menu_cmd CR 84 The add_menucb command is also used as part of the add_menu CR 57 example ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 60 add_menuitem add_ menuitem Syntax Arguments Examples See also The add_menuitem command creates a menu item within the specified menu of the specified window May be used within a submenu Returns nothing add_menuitem lt window_name gt lt menu_path gt lt Text gt lt Cmd gt lt shortcut gt lt window_name gt Tk path of the window containing the menu Required The path for the Main window must be expressed as All other window pathnames begin with a period lt menu_path gt Name of the Tk menu widget plus submenu path Required lt Text gt Text to be displayed Required lt Cmd gt The command to be executed when the menu item is selected with the left mouse button To echo the command and display the return value in the Main window prefix the command with the transcribe command CR 287 Transcribe will also echo the results to the Transcript pane Required lt shortcut gt Number of the letter in the menu name that is to be used as the shortcut Num
47. 228 profile interval profile interval The profile interval command selects the frequency with which the profiler collects samples during arun command To use this command first enable profiling with the profile on command Syntax profile interval lt sample_frequency gt Arguments lt sample_frequency gt An integer value from 1 to 999 that represents how many milliseconds to wait between each sample collected during a profiled simulation run Default is 10 ms If the sample frequency is not supplied the profile interval command returns the current sample frequency See also Chapter 12 Profiling performance and memory use UM 317 profile clear CR 227 profile off CR 229 profile on CR 230 profile option CR 231 profile reload CR 232 profile report CR 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference profile off Syntax Arguments See also profile off CR 229 The profile off command disables runtime memory allocation and statistical performance profiling profile off m p Disables memory allocation profiling only Optional p Disables statistical performance profiling only Optional Chapter 12 Profiling performance and memory use UM 317 profile clear CR 227 profile interval CR 228 profile on CR 230 profile option CR 231 profile reload CR 232 profile report CR 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 230 profile on profile on Syntax Arguments See also E
48. 279 VITAL compliance warnings UM 94 Chapter 18 Standard Delay Format SDF Timing Annotation Disabling timing checks UM 453 g G no_notifier no_tchk_msg nospecify no_neg_tchk and notimingchecks arguments to the vsim command CR 375 ModelSim SE Command Reference tcheck_status CR 279 tcheck_status Syntax Arguments Output The tcheck_status command works in tandem with tcheck_set CR 277 to report on and enable disable individual timing checks tcheck_status prints in the Transcript pane the current status of all timing checks in the instance or a specific timing check specified with the optional lt tcheck gt argument Disabling a timing check s reporting prevents generation of associated violation messages For Verilog modules this means ModelSim disables message reporting For VHDL design units this means ModelSim sets the MsgOn parameter in a VITAL timing check procedure TCP to FALSE Disabling a timing check s X generation removes a timing check s ability to affect the outputs of the simulation For Verilog modules this means ModelSim toggles the timing check s notifier For VHDL design units this means ModelSim sets the Xon parameter in a VITAL TCP to FALSE tcheck_status lines lt instance gt lt tcheck gt lines Specifies that the HDL source file and line numbers of the check s be displayed Optional Has no effect on VHDL instances Note that line information may not always be availab
49. 286 toggle report CR 285 vcd add CR 294 Commands not currently compatible with virtual signals when CR 409 See also virtual count CR 336 virtual define CR 337 virtual delete CR 338 virtual describe CR 339 virtual expand CR 340 virtual function CR 341 virtual hide CR 344 virtual log CR 345 virtual nohide CR 347 virtual nolog CR 348 virtual region CR 350 virtual save CR 351 virtual show CR 352 virtual type CR 356 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 356 virtual type virtual type The virtual type command creates a new enumerated type known only by the GUI not the kernel Virtual types are used to convert signal values to character strings The command works with signed integer values up to 64 bits Virtual types cannot be used in the when CR 409 command Syntax virtual type delete lt name gt lt list_of_strings gt lt name gt Arguments delete lt name gt Deletes a previously defined virtual type lt name gt is the name you gave the virtual type when you originally defined it Required if not defining a type lt list_of_strings gt A list of values and their associated character strings Required if delete is not used Values can be expressed in decimal or based notation and can include don t cares see examples below Three kinds of based
50. 287 SimulateAssumeDirectives ini file variable UM 535 Simulating Comparing simulations UM 225 simulating batch mode UM 27 command line mode UM 27 default run length GR 91 delays specifying time units for CR 18 design unit specifying CR 375 elaboration file UM 82 UM 138 graphic interface to GR 81 iteration limit GR 91 mixed language designs compilers UM 190 libraries UM 190 resolution limit in UM 191 mixed Verilog and SystemC designs channel and port type mapping UM 196 SystemC sc_signal data type mapping UM 197 Verilog port direction UM 198 Verilog state mapping UM 198 mixed Verilog and VHDL designs Verilog parameters UM 193 Verilog state mapping UM 194 VHDL and Verilog ports UM 193 VHDL generics UM 195 mixed VHDL and SystemC designs SystemC state mapping UM 202 VHDL port direction UM 201 VHDL port type mapping UM 200 VHDL sc_signal data type mapping UM 200 optimizing Verilog performance CR 362 saving dataflow display as a Postscript file UM 310 saving options in a project UM 48 saving simulations CR 193 CR 384 UM 225 saving waveform as a Postscript file UM 263 speeding up with the Profiler UM 317 stepping through a simulation CR 274 stimulus applying to signals and nets GR 192 stopping simulation in batch mode CR 412 SystemC UM 159 UM 173 usage flow for SystemC only UM 163 time resolution GR 82 Verilog UM 129 delay modes UM 144 hazard detection UM 135 optimizing performance UM 124 resolution limit UM 129 XL compatib
51. 306 specifying the file name CR 304 state mapping CR 304 CR 306 stimulus using as UM 460 supported TSSI states UM 469 turn off VCD dumping CR 310 turn on VCD dumping CR 311 VCD system tasks UM 463 viewing files from another tool CR 312 ved files command CR 306 ved flush command CR 308 ved limit command CR 309 ved off command CR 310 ved on command CR 311 ved2wlf command CR 312 vcom Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ enabling code coverage UM 339 vcom command CR 313 vcover command UM 356 vcover convert command CR 321 vcover merge command CR 322 vcover report command CR 324 vdel command CR 329 vdir command CR 330 vector elements initializing CR 82 vendor libraries compatibility of CR 330 Vera see Vera documentation Verilog ACC routines UM 594 capturing port driver data with dumpports CR 304 UM 469 cell libraries UM 143 compiler directives UM 153 compiling and linking PLI C applications UM 570 compiling and linking PLI C applications UM 577 compiling design units UM 114 compiling with XL uselib compiler directive UM 120 component declaration UM 204 configurations UM 122 event order in simulation UM 132 generate statements UM 123 instantiation criteria in mixed language design UM 203 instantiation criteria in SystemC design UM 209 instantiation of VHDL design units UM 207 language templates GR 207 library usage UM 117 mapping states in mixed designs UM 194 mapping states in SystemC designs UM 198 mixed design
52. 535 variable in the modelsim ini file This character must be different than the datasetSeparator Both and can be used for SystemC hierarchicalPath is a set of hierarchical instance names separated by a path separator and ending in a path separator prior to the objectName For example top proc clk objectName is the name of an object in a design elementSelection indicates some combination of the following Array indexing Single array elements are specified using either parentheses or square brackets around a single number Array slicing Slices or part selects of arrays are specified using either parentheses or square brackets around a range specification A range is two numbers separated by one of the following to downto See Escaping brackets and spaces in array ModelSim SE Command Reference Design object names CR 13 slices CR 15 for important information about using square brackets in ModelSim commands Record field selection A record field is specified using a period followed by the name of the field C class structure and union member selection A class structure or union member is specified using the record field specification syntax described just above SystemC class structure union member specification You can specify members of SystemC structures and classes using HDL record syntax The syntax for specifying members of a base class using ModelS
53. A PARTICULAR PURPOSE MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND 03 97 U S Government Restricted Rights The SOFTWARE and documentation have been developed entirely at private expense and are commercial computer software provided with restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government or a U S Government subcontractor is subject to the restrictions set forth in the license agreement provided with the software pursuant to DFARS 227 7202 3 a or as set forth in subparagraph c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Contractor manufacturer is Mentor Graphics Corporation 8005 S W Boeckman Road Wilsonville Oregon 97070 7777 This is an unpublished work of Mentor Graphics Corporation Contacting ModelSim Support Telephone 503 685 0820 Toll Free Telephone 877 744 6699 Website www model com Support www model com support Contact technical writer www mentor com supportnet documentation reply_form cfm TRADEMARKS The trademarks logos and servicemarks Marks used herein are the property of Mentor Graphics Corporation or other third parties No o
54. Arguments base Causes the root signal parent to be output in place of a subelement Optional For example vcd add virtual expand base myVirtualSignal the resulting command after substitution would be vcd add signala signalb signalc lt pathname gt Specifies the path to the signals and virtual signals to expand Required Wildcards can be used Any number of paths can be specified Examples vcd add virtual expand myVirtualSignal Adds the elements of a virtual signal to the VCD file In the Tcl language the square brackets specify that the enclosed command should be executed first virtual expand then the result substituted into the surrounding command So if my VirtualSignal is a concatenation of signala signalb rec1 and signalc 5 downto 3 the resulting command after substitution would be vcd add signala signalb recl signalc 5 downto 3 The slice of signalc is quoted in curly braces because it contains spaces See also virtual signal CR 353 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference virtual function CR 341 virtual function Syntax Arguments The virtual function command creates a new signal known only by the GUI not the kernel that consists of logical operations on existing signals and simulation time as described in lt expressionString gt It cannot handle bit selects and slices of Verilog registers Please see Syntax and conventions
55. CR 126 configure Arguments Wave window only childrowmargin lt pixels gt Specifies the distance in pixels between child signals Optional Default is 2 Related Tcl variable is PrefWave childRowMargin cursorlockcolor lt color gt Specifies the color of a locked cursor Default is red Related Tcl variable is PrefWave cursorLockColor gridcolor lt color gt Specifies the background grid color the default is grey50 Optional Related Tcl variable is PrefWave gridColor griddelta lt pixels gt Specifies the closest in pixels two grid lines can be drawn before intermediate lines will be removed Optional Default is 40 Related Tcl variable is PrefWave gridDelta gridoffset lt time gt Specifies the time in user time units of the first grid line Optional Default is 0 Related Tcl variable is PrefWave gridOffset gridperiod lt time gt Specifies the time in user time units between subsequent grid lines Optional Default is 1 Related Tcl variable is PrefWave gridPeriod namecolwidth lt width gt Specifies in pixels the width of the name column Optional Default is 150 Related Tcl variable is PrefWave nameColWidth rowmargin lt pixels gt Specifies the distance in pixels between top level signals Default is 4 Related Tcl variable is PrefWave rowMargin signalnamewidth lt value gt Controls the number of hierarchical regions displayed as part of a signal name shown in the pat
56. Default is U UWXD X UWXD 0 0LD 1 1HD Z ZD W UWXD L 0LD H 1HD D UX01ZWLHD The D character represents the don t care std_logic value vlogmatches lt ref logic value gt lt test logic value gt Specifies how Verilog signal states in the reference dataset should match values in the test dataset Optional Values are specified in a colon separated list of match values For example vlogmatches 0 0 1 1 2 Z Default is 0O 0 1 1 Z Z X X wavepane lt n gt Specifies the pane of the Wave window in which the differences will be viewed Optional wave Specifies that compare signals be added automatically to the default Wave window Optional Default when lt expression gt Specifies a conditional expression that must evaluate to true or 1 for differences to be reported Optional The expression is evaluated at the start of an observed difference See GUI_expression_format CR 22 for legal expression syntax win lt wname gt Specifies a particular window to which to add objects Optional Used to specify a particular window when multiple instances of that window type exist ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 98 compare add Examples See also lt referencePath gt Specifies either an absolute or relative path to the reference signal or region or a glob expression Required Relative paths are relative to the current context of the reference dataset If you specify a glob expression it will matc
57. LOCATED OUTSIDE OF NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA All disputes arising out of or in relation to this Agreement shall be submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of Dublin Ireland when the laws of Ireland apply or Wilsonville Oregon when the laws of Oregon apply This section shall not restrict Mentor Graphics right to bring an action against you in the jurisdiction where your place of business is located The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods does not apply to this Agreement SEVERABILITY If any provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be void invalid unenforceable or illegal such provision shall be severed from this Agreement and the remaining provisions will remain in full force and effect PAYMENT TERMS AND MISCELLANEOUS You will pay amounts invoiced in the currency specified on the applicable invoice within 30 days from the date of such invoice This Agreement contains the parties entire understanding relating to its subject matter and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements including but not limited to any purchase order terms and conditions except valid license agreements related to the subject matter of this Agreement which are physically signed by you and an authorized agent of Mentor Graphics either referenced in the purchase order or otherwise governing this subject matter This Agreement may only be modified in writing by authorized rep
58. ModelSim or Tcl command or series of commands are valid with one exception the run command CR 254 cannot be used with the when command Required if a when expression is specified The command sequence usually contains a stop command CR 275 that sets a flag to break the simulation run after the command sequence is completed Multiple line commands can be used gt Note If you want to stop the simulation using a when command you must use a stop command CR 275 within your when statement DO NOT use an exit command CR 168 or a quit command The stop command acts like a breakpoint at the time it is evaluated See Ending the simulation with the stop command CR 412 for examples The when command below instructs the simulator to display the value of object c in binary format when there is a clock event the clock is 1 and the value of b is 01100111 Finally the command tells ModelSim to stop when label whenl clk event and clk 1 and b 01100111 echo Signal c is exa bin c stop The commands below show an example of using a Tcl variable within a when command Note that the curly braces have been replaced with double quotes set clkb_path tb ps dprb_0 udprb ucar_reg uint_ram clkb when label whenl S clkb_path event and Sclkb_path 1 echo Detected Clk edge at path S clkb_path This next example uses the Tcl set command to disable arithmetic package warnings at time 0 Note that the
59. OUT Optional inout Enables checking on nodes of mode INOUT Optional internal Enables checking on internal non port objects Optional ports Enables checking on nodes of modes IN OUT or INOUT Optional lt node_name gt Enables checking for the named node s Required Bus contention checking detects bus fights on nodes that have multiple drivers A bus fight occurs when two or more drivers drive a node with the same strength and that strength is the strongest of all drivers currently driving the node The following table provides some examples for two drivers driving a std_logic signal driver 1 driver 2 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 86 check contention add driver 1 driver 2 L H Detection of a bus fight results in an error message specifying the node and its drivers current driving values If a node s drivers later change value and the node is still in contention a message is issued giving the new values of the drivers A message is also issued when the contention ends The bus contention checking commands can be used on VHDL and Verilog designs See also check contention config command CR 87 check contention off command CR 88 ModelSim SE Command Reference check contention config CR 87 check contention config Syntax Arguments See also The check contention config command allows you to write checking messages to a file messages display
60. Optional See Chapter 4 VHDL simulation for an additional discussion of SDF sdf_verbose Turns on the verbose mode during SDF annotation The Transcript pane provides detailed warnings and summaries of the current annotation Optional suppress lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Prevents the specified message s from displaying Optional You cannot suppress Fatal or Internal messages Edit the suppress UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information t lt multiplier gt lt time_unit gt Specifies the simulator time resolution Optional lt time_unit gt must be one of the following fs ps ns us ms sec The default is Ins the optional lt multiplier gt may be 1 10 or 100 Note that there is no space between the multiplier and the unit i e 10fs not 10 fs If you omit the t argument the default time resolution depends on design type in a Verilog design with timescale directives the minimum time precision is used see Simulator resolution limit UM 129 for further details in Verilog designs without any ModelSim SE Command Reference vsim CR 383 timescale directives or in a VHDL or mixed design the value specified for the Resolution UM 535 variable in the modelsim ini file is used Once you ve begun simulation you can determine the current simulator resolution by invoking the report command CR 246 wi
61. UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information f lt filename gt Specifies a file with more command line arguments Optional Allows complex argument strings to be reused without retyping Environment variable expansion for example in a pathname does not occur in f files filemap_elab lt HDLfilename gt lt NEWfilename gt Defines a file mapping during load_elab that lets you change the stimulus Optional See Simulating with an elaboration file UM 138 for more information g lt Name gt lt Value gt Assigns a value to all specified VHDL generics and Verilog parameters that have not received explicit values in generic maps instantiations or via defparams such as top level generics parameters and generics parameters that would otherwise receive their default values Optional Note there is no space between g and lt Name gt lt Value gt Name is the name of the generic parameter exactly as it appears in the VHDL source case is ignored or Verilog source Value is an appropriate value for the declared data type of a VHDL generic or any legal value for a Verilog parameter Make sure the Value you specify for a VHDL generic is appropriate for VHDL declared data types VHDL type mismatches will cause the specification to be ignored including no error messages No spaces are allowed anywhere in the specification except within
62. Using this argument negatively impacts simulator performance vcdread lt filename gt Simulates the VHDL top level design from the specified VCD file Optional This argument is included for backwards compatibility Resimulations in ModelSim versions 5 5c and newer should use the vedstim argument See Simulating with input values from a VCD file UM 460 for more details vital2 2b Selects SDF mapping for VITAL 2 2b default is VITAL 2000 Optional Arguments Verilog alt_path_delays Configures path delays to operate in inertial mode by default Optional In inertial mode a pending output transition is cancelled when a new output transition is scheduled The result is that an output may have no more than one pending transition at a time and that pulses narrower than the delay are filtered The delay is selected based on the transition from the cancelled pending value of the net to the new pending value The alt_path_delays option modifies the inertial mode such that a delay is based on a transition from the current output value rather than the cancelled pending value of the net This option has no effect in transport mode see pulse_e lt percent gt and pulse_r lt percent gt delayed_timing_checks Causes timing checks to be performed on the delayed versions of input ports used when there are negative timing check limits Optional dpiexportobj lt objfile gt Generate specified DPI export object file Required only for
63. VCD CR 312 filtering combining CR 418 limiting size CR 385 log command CR 193 optimizing waveform viewing CR 384 UM 537 overview UM 226 repairing CR 422 saving CR 145 CR 146 UM 227 saving at intervals UM 231 specifying name CR 384 wlf2log command CR 415 wlf2vced command CR 417 WLFCollapseMode ini file variable UM 537 WLFFilename UM 537 wlfman command CR 418 wlfrecover command CR 422 work library UM 58 creating UM 60 workspace GR 18 code coverage GR 122 Files tab GR 122 write cell_report command CR 423 write format command CR 424 write list command CR 426 write preferences command CR 427 WRITE procedure problems with UM 90 write report command CR 428 write timing command CR 429 write transcript command CR 430 write tssi command CR 431 write wave command CR 433 X X tracing unknowns UM 307 Xdefaults file controlling fonts GR 16 X propagation disabling for entire design CR 380 disabling X generation on specific instances CR 277 xml format coverage reports UM 352 X session controlling fonts GR 16 Y y CR 368 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ Z zero delay elements UM 80 zero delay mode UM 145 zero delay loop infinite UM 81 zero delay oscillation UM 81 zero delay race condition UM 132 zoom Dataflow window UM 305 from Wave toolbar buttons UM 249 saving range with bookmarks UM 250 with the mouse UM 249 zooming window panes GR 266
64. WLF file containing simulation data for all objects whose names match the provided specifications Ishift CR 195 takes a Tcl list as an argument and shifts it in place one place to the left eliminating the left most element lIsublist CR 196 returns a sublist of the specified Tcl list that matches the specified Tcl glob pattern macro_option CR 197 controls the speed and delay of macro DO file playback plus the level of debugging feedback mem display CR 198 displays the memory contents of a selected instance to the screen mem list CR 200 displays a flattened list of all memory instances in the current or specified context after a design has been elaborated mem load CR 201 updates the simulation memory contents of a specified instance mem save CR 204 saves the contents of a memory instance to a file in any of the supported formats Verilog binary Verilog hex and MTI memory pattern data mem search CR 206 finds and prints to the screen the first occurring match of a specified memory pattern in the specified memory instance modelsim CR 208 starts the ModelSim GUI without prompting you to load a design valid only for Windows platforms next CR 209 continues a search see the search command CR 262 noforce CR 210 removes the effect of any active force CR 182 commands on the selected object nolog CR 211 suspends writing of data to the W
65. Windows RS6000 and RS64 platforms extend_tcheck_data_limit lt percent gt extend_tcheck_ref_limit lt percent gt Causes a one time extension of qualifying data or reference limits in an attempt to provide a delay net solution prior to any limit zeroing A limit qualifies if it bounds a violation region which does not overlap a related violation region lt percent gt is the maximum percent of limit relaxation hazards Enables event order hazard checking in Verilog modules Optional You must also specify this argument when you compile your design with vlog CR 360 See Hazard detection UM 135 for more details A Important Enabling hazards implicitly enables the compat argument As a result using this argument may affect your simulation results ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 388 vsim int_delays Optimizes annotation of interconnect delays for designs that have been compiled using fast see vlog command CR 360 Optional This argument causes vsim to insert placeholder delay elements at optimized cell inputs resulting in faster backannotation of interconnect delays from an SDF file L lt library_name gt Specifies the library to search for design units instantiated from Verilog See Library usage UM 117 for more information If multiple libraries are specified each must be preceded by the L option Libraries are searched in the order in which they appear on the command line Lf lt library_na
66. a don t care element when you search for a signal value or expression in the List or Wave windows If you want the to be read as a don t care element rather than a negative sign be sure to enclose the number in double quotes For instance you would type 0110 as opposed to 7 b 0110 If you don t include the double quotes ModelSim will read the as a negative sign Examples b11111110 8 b11111110 Hffca23 21 H1fca23 23749 DOS pathnames require a backslash but ModelSim will accept either a backslash or the forward slash It does this because by default ModelSim PE uses backslashes as pathname separators Therefore it cannot recognize extended identifiers You can change this behavior so that backslashes on comment lines are used for extended identifiers but then you can only use forward slashes when you need pathname delimiters To do this uncomment the following line in the modelsim ini file and set its value to zero BackslashesArePathnameDelimiters 0 This will allow command lines that can reference signals variables and design unit names that use extended identifiers for example examine clock 2x ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 22 Syntax and conventions GUI_expression_format The GUI_expression_format is an option of several simulator commands that operate within the ModelSim GUI environment The expressions help you locate and examine objects within the List and Wav
67. a period as shown in the example below lt menu_path gt Name of the Tk menu widget path Required enable_menu File Enables the previously disabled File menu of the Main window enable_menu mywindow File Enables the previously disabled File menu of the mywindow window add_menu CR 57 disable _menu CR 151 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 162 enable_menuitem enable_menuitem The enable_menuitem command enables a previously disabled menu item The menu item will be changed from grayed out to normal and will become responsive Returns nothing Syntax enable_menuitem lt window_name gt lt menu_path gt lt label gt Arguments lt window_name gt Tk path of the window containing the menu Required Note that the path for the Main window must be expressed as All other window pathnames begin with a period as shown in the example below lt menu_path gt Name of the Tk menu widget path The path may include a submenu as shown in the example below Required lt label gt Menu item text Required Examples enable_menuitem mywindow file save Save Results As This command locates the mywindow window and enables the previously disabled Save Results As menu item in the save submenu of the file menu See also add_menuitem CR 60 disable_menuitem CR 152 ModelSim SE Command Reference environment CR 163 environment Syntax Arguments Examples The environment or env command allows you
68. a user defined limit This is an error in some technologies Detection of a float violation results in an error message identifying the node A message is also issued when the float violation ends The bus float checking commands can be used on VHDL and Verilog designs check float config command CR 90 check float off command CR 91 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 90 check float config check float config The check float config command allows you to write checking messages to a file messages display on your screen by default You may also configure the float time limit Syntax check float config file lt filename gt time lt limit gt Arguments file lt filename gt Specifies a file to which to write float messages Optional If this option is selected the messages are not displayed to the screen time lt limit gt Specifies a time limit that a node may be floating Optional An error is detected if a node is floating for as long as or longer than the limit The default limit is 0 Note that you should configure the time limit prior to invoking any check float add commands See also check float add command CR 89 check float off command CR 91 ModelSim SE Command Reference check float off CR 91 check float off Syntax Arguments See also The check float off command disables float checking for the specified nodes check float off all r in out inout internal ports lt
69. about the current design in a file named alu rep ModelSim SE Command Reference write timing CR 429 write timing The write timing command prints timing information about the specified instance Syntax write timing recursive file lt filename gt lt instance_namel gt lt instance_nameN gt Arguments recursive Generates timing information for the specified instance and all instances underneath it in the design hierarchy Optional file lt filename gt Specifies the name of the output file where the data is to be written Optional If the file argument is omitted timing information is written to the Transcript pane lt instance_namel gt lt instance_nameN gt The name s of the instance s for which timing information will be written Required Examples write timing r f timing txt top ul Writes timing about op u and all instances underneath it in the hierarchy to the file timing txt write timing top ul top u2 top u3 top u8 Writes timing information about the designated instances to the Transcript pane ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 430 write transcript write transcript The write transcript command writes the contents of the Transcript pane to the specified file The resulting file can be used to replay the transcribed commands as a DO file macro The command cannot be used in batch mode In batch mode use the standard Transcript GR 19 file or redirect stdout Syntax write transcri
70. also See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 296 vcd comment vcd comment The ved comment command inserts the specified comment in the specified VCD file Syntax vcd comment lt comment string gt lt filename gt Arguments lt comment string gt Comment to be included in the VCD file Required Must be quoted by double quotation marks or curly braces lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file Optional If omitted the command is executed on the file designated by the ved file command CR 304 or dump vcd if ved file was not invoked See also See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files ModelSim SE Command Reference vcd dumpports CR 297 vcd dumpports Syntax Arguments The ved dumpports command creates a VCD file that includes port driver data By default all port driver changes are captured in the file You can filter the output using arguments detailed below Related Verilog task dumpports vcd dumpports compress file lt filename gt in inout out unique vedstim lt object_name gt compress Produces a compressed VCD file Optional ModelSim uses the gzip compression algorithm If you specify a gz extension on the file lt filename gt argument ModelSim compresses the file even if you don t use the compress argument file lt filename gt Spec
71. and includes a hierarchical path to an object e g top ul clk There is a special case of a fully rooted name where the top level design unit name can be unspecified e g u1 clk In this case the first top level instance in the design is assumed An absolute name is an exactly specified hierarchical name containing a dataset name and a fully rooted name e g sim top uI clk The current dataset is used when accessing objects where a dataset name is not specified as part of the name The current dataset is determined by the dataset currently selected in the Structure window or by the last dataset specified in an environment command CR 163 The current context in the current or specified dataset is used when accessing objects with relative or simple names The current context is either the current process if any or the current instance if there is no current process or the current process is not in the current instance The situation of the current process not being in the current instance can occur for example by selecting a different instance in the Structure tab or by using the environment command CR 163 to set the current context to a different instance Here are some examples of object names and what they specify Syntax Description clk specifies the object clk in the current context top clk specifies the object clk in the top level design unit top block1 u2 clk specifies the object clk two levels down
72. and toggle counts and all user exclusion flags set with the coverage exclude command Optional excluded Clears only exclusion flags Default is to clear all flags set by source code pragmas and the coverage exclude command See Excluding objects from coverage UM 348 for details u user Clears only exclusions set using the coverage exclude command pragma Clears only pragma exclusions coverage clear excluded pragma Clears all exclusion flags set by source code pragmas Chapter 13 Measuring code coverage coverage exclude CR 130 coverage reload CR 132 coverage report CR 133 coverage save CR 137 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 130 coverage exclude coverage exclude The coverage exclude command loads an exclusion filter file or allows direct exclusion of specific lines in a source file or rows within a table Exclusion filter files specify files and line numbers that you wish to exclude from Code Coverage statistics See Excluding objects from coverage UM 348 for more details Syntax coverage exclude lt filename gt add remove lt source gt inst lt path gt lt ln gt all lt celn gt lt rn gt Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the file name of the exclusion filter file you wish to load Required if add or remove is not specified See Excluding objects from coverage UM 296 for filter file syntax add Adds another exclusion or exclusions Accepts multi
73. annotation UM 441 differences shown by comparison UM 280 disabling checks CR 366 UM 453 disabling checks for entire design CR 381 disabling individual checks CR 277 in optimized designs UM 128 negative check limits described UM 136 extending CR 387 status of individual checks CR 279 title Main window changing CR 383 TMPDIR environment variable UM 524 to_real VHDL function UM 98 to_time VHDL function UM 99 toggle add command CR 281 toggle coverage excluding signals CR 283 toggle disable command CR 283 toggle enable command CR 284 toggle report command CR 285 toggle reset command CR 286 toggle statistics enabling CR 281 reporting CR 285 resetting CR 286 toggling waveform popup on off UM 281 GR 262 tolerance leading edge UM 277 trailing edge UM 277 too few port connections explanation UM 556 toolbar Dataflow window GR 138 Main window GR 38 Wave window GR 226 waveform editor GR 228 tooltip toggling waveform popup GR 262 tracing events UM 306 source of unknown UM 307 transcribe command CR 287 transcript clearing CR 43 disable file creation UM 539 GR 20 file name specifed in modelsim ini UM 539 redirecting with 1 CR 379 reducing file size CR 289 saving GR 19 using as a DO file GR 20 transcript command CR 288 transcript file command CR 289 TranscriptFile ini file variable UM 536 transitions signal finding CR 191 CR 252 TreeUpdate command CR 425 triggers in the List window UM 267 triggers in the
74. argument see above Arguments SystemC sclib Specifies the design library where the SystemC shared library is created By default the SystemC shared library is created in the logical work library This option is only necessary when the shared library is compiled in a design library other than the logical work directory via sccom link work lt lib gt For more information on the sccom link and work arguments see sccom CR 256 sc_arg lt string gt Specifies a string representing a startup argument which is subsequently accessible from within SystemC via the sc_argc and sc_argv functions see Accessing command line arguments UM 183 If multiple SystemC startup arguments are specified each must have a separate sc_arg argument SystemC startup arguments returned via sc_argv are in the order in which they appear on the command line White space within the lt string gt will not be treated specially and the string white space and all will be accessible as a single string among the strings returned by sc_argv ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 392 vsim Arguments object The object arguments may be a lt library_name gt lt design_unit gt a mpf file a wif file or a text file Multiple design units may be specified for Verilog modules and mixed VHDL Verilog configurations lt library_name gt lt design_unit gt Specifies a library and associated design unit multiple library design unit specif
75. clk goes to 0 when top clk 0 if S strobe eq One Our state One condition has been met Sample the busses echo Sample paddr examine hex top paddr sdata examine hex top sdata reset our state variable until next rising edge of sstrb back to state Zero set strobe Zero Ending the simulation with the stop command Batch mode simulations are often structured as run until condition X is true rather than run for X time simulations The multi line when command below sets a done condition and executes an echo CR 158 and a stop CR 275 command when the condition is reached The simulation will not stop even if a quit f command is used unless a stop command is executed To exit the simulation and quit ModelSim use an approach like the following onbreak resume when done_condition 1 echo End condition reached if batch_mode set DoneConditionReached 1 stop run 1000 us if SDoneConditionReached 1 quit f Here s another example that stops 100ns after a signal transition when a 1 If the 100ns delay is already set then let it go if when label a_100 when label a_100 Snow 100 delete this breakpoint then stop ModelSim SE Command Reference See also when CR 413 nowhen a_100 stop Time based breakpoints You can build time based breakpoints into a when statement with the following syntax For absolute time indicated by
76. command CR 399 Required driver freeze deposit driver expectedoutput Specifies that the signal is a driver of the specified type Applies to signals of type inout or internal Optional endtime lt time gt The simulation time that the waveform should stop If omitted the waveform stops at 1000 simulation time units Optional initialvalue lt value gt The initial value for the waveform Value must be appropriate for the type of waveform you are creating Not applicable to counter patterns Optional pattern clock random repeater counter none The pattern for the created waveform See Creating waveforms from patterns GR 289 for a description of the pattern types Required starttime lt time gt The simulation time that the waveform should start If omitted the waveform starts at 0 simulation time units Optional Arguments clock patterns only period lt value gt The period of the signal Required ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 408 wave modify dutycycle lt value gt The duty cycle of the clock which is the percentage of the period that the clock is high or low Acceptable values range from 0 to 100 Required Arguments random patterns only period lt value gt The period after which the value should change Required random_type Normal Uniform The type of random pattern to generate Required Default is Uniform seed lt value gt A seed value for the random generator If omitted ModelS
77. continue This command is used to continue with comparison difference computations that were suspended using the compare stop button or Control C If the comparison was not suspended compare continue has no effect Syntax compare continue Arguments None See also compare stop CR 122 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference compare delete CR 105 compare delete Syntax Arguments See also The compare delete command deletes a comparison object from the currently open comparison compare delete recursive lt objectPath gt recursive Deletes a region recursively Optional lt objectPath gt Path to the comparison object to be deleted e g compare topAclk lt gt clk Required The comparison object must be escaped correctly so the braces and trailing space are required compare add CR 95 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 106 compare end compare end The compare end command closes the active comparison without saving any information Syntax compare end Arguments None See also compare add CR 95 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference compare info CR 107 compare info Syntax Arguments Examples See also The compare info command lists the results of the comparison in the Main window transcript To save the information to a file use the write argument compare info all count
78. converted to the same values as the corresponding capitalized values Any other values will cause an error message to be generated the first time an invalid value is detected on a signal and the value will be converted to a question mark P gt Note The TDS ASCII In Converter and ASCII Out Converter are part of the TDS software from Fluence Technology ModelSim outputs a vector file and Fluence s tools determine whether the bidirectional signals are driving or not See also tssi2mti CR 290 ModelSim SE Command Reference write wave Syntax Arguments Examples write wave CR 433 The write wave command records the contents of the most currently opened or specified Wave window in PostScript format The output file can then be printed on a PostScript printer write wave window lt wname gt width lt real_num gt height lt real_num gt margin lt real_num gt start lt time gt end lt time gt perpage lt time gt landscape portrait lt filename gt window lt wname gt Specifies an instance of the Wave window that is not the default Optional Otherwise the default Wave window is used Use the view command CR 334 to change the default window width lt real_num gt Specifies the paper width in inches Optional Default is 8 5 height lt real_num gt Specifies the paper height in inches Optional Default is 11 0 margin lt real_num gt Specifies the margin in inches Opt
79. current simulation using the radix command CR 243 You can change the default radix permanently by editing the DefaultRadix UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file wordsperline lt Nwords gt Specifies how many memory values are to be printed on each line Optional The default assumes an 80 character display width The lt Nwords gt is specified as an unsigned integer startaddress lt st gt Specifies the start address for a range of addresses to be saved The lt st gt can be specified as any valid address in the memory Optional endaddress lt end gt Specifies the end address for a range of addresses to be saved The lt end gt can be specified as any valid address in the memory Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See also mem save CR 205 noaddress Prevents addresses from being printed Optional Mutually exclusive with the compress option compress Specifies that only unique lines are printed identical lines are not printed Optional Mutually exclusive with the noaddress option outfile lt filename gt Specifies that the memory contents be stored in lt filename gt Required lt path gt The hierarchical path to the location of the memory instance Optional The default is the current context as shown in the Structure tab of the Workspace pane mem save format mti outfile memfile start 0 end 10 top m mem Saves the memory contents of the instance top m mem 0 10 to memf
80. current values use the lecho CR 190 command which pretty prints a Tcl list There are more options than are listed here See the output of a configure list or configure wave command for all options config list strobeperiod Displays the current value of the strobeperiod attribute config list strobeperiod 50 ns strobestart 0 usestrobe 1 Sets the period of the list strobe and turns it on config wave vectorcolor blue Sets the wave vector color to blue config wave signalnamewidth 1 Sets the display in the current Wave window to show only the leaf path of each signal view CR 334 Preference variables located in Tcl files UM 542 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 128 context context Syntax Arguments The context command provides several operations on a context s name The option you specify determines the operation context dataset exists isInst isNet isProc isVar join parent split tail type lt name gt context dataset lt name gt Return the dataset name from the name context exists lt name gt Returns 1 if the name is valid 0 otherwise context isInst lt name gt Returns 1 if the name is an instance pathname 0 otherwise context isNet lt name gt Returns 1 if the name is a Signal or Net pathname 0 otherwise context isProc lt name gt Returns 1 if the name is a Process pathname 0 otherwise context join lt name gt lt name gt Takes one or more names and com
81. discrepancies and that using this option may degrade performance See Event ordering in Verilog designs UM 132 for additional information ModelSim SE Command Reference vlog CR 361 compile_uselibs lt directory_name gt Locates source files specified in a uselib directive see Verilog XL uselib compiler directive UM 120 compiles those files into automatically created libraries and updates the modelsim ini file with the logical mappings to the new libraries Optional If a directory_name is not specified ModelSim uses the name specified in the MTI_USELIB_DIR environment variable If that variable is not set ModelSim creates the directory mti_uselibs in the current working directory cover lt stat gt Specifies type s of coverage statistics to collect Optional lt stat gt is one or more of the following characters b Collect branch statistics c Collect condition statistics e Collect expression statistics s Collect statement statistics t Collect toggle statistics Cannot be used if x is specified x Collect extended toggle statistics see Toggle coverage UM 344 for details Cannot be used if t is specified By default only statement coverage is enabled when you invoke vsim with the coverage option debugCelloOpt Produces Transcript pane output that identifies why certain cells within the design were not optimized Used only when compiling gate level Verilog libraries with
82. e g listfile def The values in the listfile are produced in the same order that they appear in the List window The directionality is determined from the port type if the object is a port otherwise it is assumed to be bidirectional mode INOUT Objects that can be converted to SEF are VHDL enumerations with 255 or fewer elements and Verilog nets The enumeration values U X 0 1 Z W L H and the enumeration values defined in the IEEE Standard 1164 std_ulogic enumeration are converted to SEF values according to the table below Other values are converted to a question mark and cause an error message Though the write tssi command was developed for use with std_ulogic any signal which uses only the values defined for std_ulogic including the VHDL standard type bit will be converted std_ulogic State SEF State Characters Characters m Input Output Bidirectional N X N X 0 D L 0 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 432 write tssi std_ulogic State SEF State Characters eee Input Output Bidirectional 1 U H 1 Z Z T F W N X L D L 0 H U H 1 N X Bidirectional logic values are not converted because only the resolved value is available The Fluence TSSI TDS ASCII In Converter and ASCI Out Converter can be used to resolve the directionality of the signal and to determine the proper forcing or expected value on the port Lowercase values x z w l and h are
83. edit extend extend to by time lt time gt wave edit driveType driver freeze deposit driver expectedoutput end lt time gt start lt time gt The arguments below are grouped by editing operation Many operations share similar arguments Arguments for cut copy paste invert and mirror end lt time gt The end of the section of waveform to perform the editing operation upon denoted by a simulation time Optional for paste start lt time gt The beginning of the section of waveform to perform the editing operation upon denoted by a simulation time Required lt object_name gt The pathname of the waveform to edit Required Arguments for insert_pulse duration lt time gt The length of the pulse Default is 10 time units Optional start lt time gt The time at which the new pulse should be inserted Required lt object_name gt The pathname of the waveform on which you are inserting a pulse Required Arguments for delete time lt time gt The time at which the edge to delete occurs Required lt object_name gt The pathname of the waveform for which you are deleting an edge Required Arguments for stretch and move backward lt time gt The amount to stretch or move the edge backwards in simulation time Required if forward lt time gt isn t specified forward lt time gt The amount to stretch or move the edge forwards in simulation time Required if backward lt time gt isn t
84. enter the mem display command on memory addresses 0 through 12 you see the following mem display startaddress 0 endaddress Q 4 8 I2 0000000000000000 0000000000000100 0000000000001000 0000000000000000 0000000000000001 0000000000000101 0000000000001001 12 top m mem 0000000000000010 0000000000000011 0000000000000110 0000000000000111 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 mem load infile vals mem format hex st 0 end 12 filltype value filldata 16 Hbeef top m mru_mem Loads the memory pattern from the file vals mem to the memory instance top m mru_mem filling the rest of the memory with the fixed value 16 Hbeef mem load filltype value filldata 16 hab 16 hcd top mem2 skip 3 Loads memory instance top mem2 with two words of memory data using the Verilog Hex format skipping 3 words after each fill pattern sequence mem load format h truncate infile data_files data out top m_reg_inc mem Truncates the msb bits that exceed the maximum word size specified in HDL code mem save CR 204 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 204 mem save mem save Syntax Arguments The mem save command saves the contents of a memory instance to a file in any of the supported formats Verilog binary Verilog hex and MTI memory pattern data This command works identically to the mem display command except that its output is written to a file rather than a display The order in which the dat
85. gt lt when_condition_expression gt lt command gt label lt label gt Used to identify individual when commands Optional id lt id gt Attempts to assign this id number to the when command Optional If the id number you specify is already used ModelSim will return an error gt Note Ids for when commands are assigned from the same pool as those used for the bp command CR 76 So even if you haven t used an id number for a when command it s possible it is used for a breakpoint lt when_condition_expression gt Specifies the conditions to be met for the specified lt command gt to be executed Required if a command is specified The condition is evaluated in the simulator kernel and can be an object name in which case the curly braces can be omitted The command will be executed when the object changes value The condition can be an expression with these operators Operator ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 410 when Name Operator not equal greater than less than greater than or equal less than or equal AND OR The operands may be object names signame event or constants Subexpressions in parentheses are permitted The command will be executed when the expression is evaluated as TRUE or 1 The formal BNF syntax is condition Name expression expression expression AND relation expression OR relation relation r
86. gt assertion report Name File Line tb assert__reset_state dramcon_sim tb assert__test_read_response dramcon_sim tb assert__test_write_response dramcon_sim tb assert__check_as_deasserts dramcon_sim See also Viewing assertions in the Assertions pane UM 378 Failure Pass Count Count vhd 53 0 0 vhd 59 0 0 vhd 60 0 0 vhd 64 0 0 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 70 batch_mode batch_mode The batch_mode command returns a 1 if ModelSim is operating in batch mode otherwise it returns a 0 It is typically used as a condition in an if statement Syntax batch_mode Arguments None Examples Some GUI commands do not exist in batch mode If you want to write a script that will work in or out of batch mode you can use the batch_mode command to determine which command to use For example if batch_mode log else add wave See also ModelSim modes of operation UM 27 ModelSim SE Command Reference bd Syntax Arguments Examples See also bd CR 71 The bd command deletes a breakpoint You must specify a filename and line number or a specific breakpoint id You may specify multiple filename line number pairs and id s bd lt filename gt lt line_number gt lt id gt lt filename gt Specifies the name of the source file in which the breakpoint is to be deleted Required if an id is not specified The filename must match the one used previously to set the breakpoint i
87. is cleared every time a snapshot is taken See the examples for further details report Lists current snapshot settings in the Transcript pane Optional All other options are ignored if you specify report reset Resets values back to defaults Optional The behavior is to reset to the default then apply the remainder of the arguments on the command line See examples below If specified by itself without any other arguments reset disables dataset snapshot size lt file size gt Specifies that a snapshot occurs based on WLF file size You must specify either size or time See examples below time lt simulation time gt Specifies that a snapshot occurs based on simulation time You must specify either time or size See examples below ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See also dataset snapshot CR 147 dataset snapshot size 10 Creates the file vsim_snapshot wif that is written to every time the current WLF file reaches a multiple of 10 MB e at 10 MB 20 MB 30 MB etc dataset snapshot size 10 mode sequential Similar to the previous example but in this case the current WLF file is cleared every time it reaches 10 MB dataset snapshot time 1000000 file gold wlf mode sequential filemode increment Assuming simulator time units are ps this command saves a file called gold_n wlf every 1000000 ps If you ran for 3000000 ps you d have three files gold_1 wif with data from 0 to 1000000 ps gold_2
88. is returned with a warning message and the cursor is positioned at the last match Optional The default is 1 right noglitch value FF23 2 Finds the second time to the right at which the selected vector transitions to FF23 ignoring glitches right Goes to the next transition on the selected signal The following examples illustrate search expressions that use a variety of signal attributes paths array constants and time variables Such expressions follow the GUI_expression_format CR 22 right expr clk rising amp amp mystate reading amp amp top u3 addr 32 habced1234 Searches right for an expression that evaluates to a boolean when signal clk just changed from low to high and signal mystate is the enumeration reading and signal top u3 addr is equal to the specified 32 bit hex constant otherwise is 0 right expr top u3 addr and 32 hff000000 32 hac000000 Searches right for an expression that evaluates to a boolean 1 when the upper 8 bits of the 32 bit signal top u3 addr equals hex ac right expr NOW gt 23 us amp amp NOW lt 54 us amp amp clk rising amp amp mode writing Searches right for an expression that evaluates to a boolean when logfile time is between 23 and 54 microseconds and clock just changed from low to high and signal mode is enumeration writing gt Note Wave window mouse and keyboard shortcuts UM 611 are also available for next and previ
89. is specified as being a logic object presented in gold ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 56 add wave add wave hex address a_7 a_6 a_5 a_4 a_3 a_2 a_l a_0 Displays a user defined hex formatted bus named address add wave Waves all objects in the region add wave in Waves all input ports in the region add wave hex mybus scalarl vectorl scalar2 Creates a user defined bus named mybus consisting of three signals Scalar and scalar2 are of type std_logic and vector is of type std_logic_vector 7 downto 1 The bus is displayed in hex Slices and arrays may be added to the bus using either VHDL or Verilog syntax For example add wave vector3 1 add wave vector3 1 add wave vector3 4 downto 0 add wave vector3 4 0 add wave vecl hex vec2 dec vec3 vec4 Adds the object vec to the Wave window using symbolic values adds vec2 in hexadecimal and adds vec3 and vec4 in decimal add wave divider Example Adds a divider with the name Example Note that for this to work the first hyphen of the name must be preceded by a space add wave divider add wave divider add wave divider Adds an unnamed divider See also add list CR 48 log CR 193 Extended identifiers CR 16 Concatenation directives CR 28 ModelSim SE Command Reference add_menu Syntax Arguments add_ menu CR 57 The add_menu command adds a menu to the menu bar of the specified window using t
90. lt preference file name gt lt preference file name gt Specifies the name for the preference file Optional If the file is named modelsim tcl ModelSim will read the file each time vsim is invoked To use a preference file other than modelsim tcl you must specify the alternative file name with the MODELSIM_TCL UM 523 environment variable You can modify variables by editing the preference file with the ModelSim notepad CR 213 notepad lt preference file name gt ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 428 write report write report The write report command prints a summary of the design being simulated including a list of all design units VHDL configurations entities and packages and Verilog modules with the names of their source files If you have compiled a Verilog design using fast the report will also identify cells which have been optimized Syntax write report lt filename gt 1 s tel Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the name of the output file where the data is to be written Optional If the lt filename gt is omitted the report is written to the Transcript pane 1 Generates more detailed information about the design including a list of sparse memories Default 5 Generates a short list of design information Optional tel Generates a Tcl list of design unit information Optional This argument cannot be used with a filename Examples write report alu rep Saves information
91. lt value gt The arguments below are grouped according to waveform pattern The first set applies to all waveforms regardless of pattern Arguments for all waveforms driver freeze deposit driver expectedoutput Specifies that the signal is a driver of the specified type Applies to signals of type inout or internal Optional endtime lt time gt The simulation time that the waveform should stop If omitted the waveform stops at 1000 simulation time units Optional initialvalue lt value gt The initial value for the waveform Value must be appropriate for the type of waveform you are creating Not applicable to counter patterns Optional language VHDL Verilog The language for the created wave By default ModelSim uses VHDL to create the waveform Optional pattern clock constant random repeater counter none The pattern for the created waveform See Creating waveforms from patterns GR 289 for a description of the pattern types Required portmode in out inout input output internal The port type for the created waveform ModelSim uses internal by default Useful for creating signals prior to loading a design Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 400 wave create starttime lt time gt The simulation time at which the waveform should start If omitted the waveform starts at 0 simulation time units Optional lt object_name gt The name of the created waveform Required Arguments clock patterns only
92. lt window_name gt lt menu_path gt lt name gt lt shortcut gt Arguments lt window_name gt Tk path of the window containing the menu Required The path for the Main window must be expressed as All other window pathnames begin with a period lt menu_path gt Name of the Tk menu widget plus submenu path Required lt name gt Name to be displayed on the submenu Required lt shortcut gt Number of the letter in the menu name that is to be used as the shortcut Numbering starts with 0 i e first letter 0 second letter 1 third letter 2 etc Optional Default is 1 which indicates no shortcut is to be used See also add_menu CR 57 add_menucb CR 59 add_menuitem CR 60 add_separator CR 61 change_menu_cmd CR 84 The add_submenu command is also used as part of the add_menu CR 57 example ModelSim SE Command Reference Syntax Arguments Examples alias CR 63 The alias command displays or creates user defined aliases Any arguments passed on invocation of the alias will be passed through to the specified commands Returns nothing Existing ModelSim commands e g run env etc cannot be aliased alias lt name gt lt cmds gt lt name gt Specifies the new procedure name to be used when invoking the commands lt comds gt Specifies the command or commands to be evaluated when the alias is invoked alias Lists all aliases currently defined alias lt name gt Lis
93. module gt is a module name optionally followed by to indicate all children of the module Multiple modules are allowed with each separated by a If no modules are specified then all modules are affected L lt libname gt Searches the specified resource library for precompiled modules The library search options you specify here must also be specified when you run the vsim command CR 375 Optional Lf lt libname gt Same as L but the specified library is searched before any uselib directives See Library usage UM 101 and Verilog XL compatible compiler arguments UM 103 for more information Optional work lt library_name gt Specifies a logical name or pathname of a library that is to be mapped to the logical library work Optional by default the optimized output for the design is added to the work library The specified pathname overrides the pathname specified for work in the project file lt design_unit gt One or more top level design units that you want to optimize Required 0 lt name gt Specifies a name for the optimized version of the design Required vopt top 0o mydesign vsim mydesign Runs optimizations on top level design unit top and produces an optimized design unit named mydesign The simulator vsim is then invoked on design unit mydesign vopt top acc o mydesign Runs optimizations on top level design unit top but preserves all visibility Names the optimized design mydesign
94. msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Changes the severity level of the specified message s to error Optional Edit the error UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information explicit Directs the compiler to resolve ambiguous function overloading by favoring the explicit function definition over the implicit function definition Optional Strictly speaking this behavior does not match the VHDL standard However the majority of EDA tools choose explicit operators over implicit operators Using this switch makes ModelSim compatible with common industry practice ModelSim SE Command Reference vcom CR 315 f lt filename gt Specifies a file with more command line arguments Optional Allows complex argument strings to be reused without retyping Allows gzipped input files Nesting of f options is allowed The file syntax basically follows what you type on the command line with the exception that newline characters are ignored Environment variable expansion for example in a pathname does not occur in f files force_refresh Forces the refresh of a design unit Optional When the compiler refreshes a design unit it checks each dependency to ensure its source has not been changed and recompiled If a dependency has been changed and recompiled the compiler will not refresh the dependent design unit unless you use force_refresh To avoid po
95. on your screen by default You may also configure the contention time limit check contention config file lt filename gt time lt limit gt file lt filename gt Specifies a file to which to write contention messages Optional If this option is selected the messages are not displayed to the screen time lt limit gt Specifies a time limit that a node may be in contention Optional Contention is detected if a node is in contention for as long as or longer than the limit The default limit is 0 check contention add command CR 85 check contention off command CR 88 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 88 check contention off check contention off Syntax Arguments See also The check contention off command disables contention checking for the specified nodes check contention off all r in out inout internal ports lt node_name gt all Disables contention checking for all nodes that have checking enabled Optional r Specifies that contention checking is disabled recursively into subregions Optional If omitted contention check disabling is limited to the current region in Disables checking on nodes of mode IN Optional out Disables checking on nodes of mode OUT Optional inout Disables checking on nodes of mode INOUT Optional internal Disables checking on internal non port objects Optional ports Disables checking on nodes of modes IN OUT or INOUT O
96. one of the following types VHDL signal of type INTEGER REAL or TIME VHDL signal of type std_logic or bit VHDL signal of type user defined enumeration Verilog net Verilog register Verilog integer or Verilog real SystemC primitive channels of type scalar e g bool int etc Returns the value of time at the current location in the WLF file as the WLF file is being scanned not the most recent simulation time Array variables Variable Type Name of a signal VHDL signals of type bit_vector or std_logic_vector Verilog register Verilog net array SystemC primitive channels of type vector e g sc_bv sc_int etc A subrange or index may be specified in either VHDL or Verilog syntax Examples mysignal 1 to 5 mysignal 1 5 mysignal 4 mysignal 4 Signal attributes lt name gt event lt name gt rising lt name gt falling lt name gt delayed lt name gt hasX The delayed attribute lets you assign a delay to a VHDL signal To assign a delay to a signal in Verilog use notation in a sub expression e g 10 top signalA The hasX attribute lets you search for signals nets or registers that contains an X unknown value See Examples CR 26 below for further details on delayed and hasX ModelSim SE Command Reference Operators GUI_expression_format CR 25 O
97. option is selected the messages are not displayed to the screen Optional period lt time gt Specifies the clock period which is assumed to begin at the time the check stable on command is issued Optional This option is required the first time you invoke the check stable on command It is not required if you later enable checking after it was disabled with the check stable off command CR 92 strobe lt time gt Specifies the elapsed time within each clock cycle that the stability check is performed Optional The default strobe time is the period time If the strobe time falls on a period boundary then the check is actually performed one timestep earlier Normally the strobe time is specified as less than or equal to the period but if it is greater than the period then the check will skip cycles Design stability checking detects when circuit activity has not settled within a period you define for synchronous designs You specify the clock period for the design and the strobe time within the period during which the circuit must be stable A violation is detected and an error message is issued if there are pending driver events at the strobe time The message identifies the driver that has a pending event the node that it drives and the cycle number The design stability checking commands can be used on VHDL and Verilog designs check stable on period 100 ps strobe 199 ps Performs a stability check 99 ps into each even numbere
98. or if no cursor is specified the active cursor wave seecursor Positions the wave display such that the specified or active cursor appears at the specified percent from the left edge of the display 0 is the left edge 100 is the right edge Zooming Description Commands wave zoomin Zoom in the wave display by the specified factor The default factor is 2 0 wave zoomout Zoom out the wave display by the specified factor The default factor is 2 0 wave zoomfull Zoom the wave display to show the full simulation time wave zoomlast Return to last zoom range wave zoomrange Sets left and right edge of wave display to the specified start time and end time If times are not specified reports left and right edge times Display view Description Commands wave interrupt Immediately stops wave window drawing wave refresh Cleans wave display and redraws waves wave seecursor Positions the wave display such that the specified or active cursor appears at the specified percent from the left edge of the display 0 is the left edge 100 is the right edge ModelSim SE Command Reference Syntax Arguments Display view Commands wave CR 397 Description wave seetime wave activecursor window lt win gt wave addcursor window lt win gt wave wave wave wave wave wave wave wave wave wave wave cursortime window lt
99. outwlffile gt Specifies the name of the output WLF file Required The output WLF file will contain all objects specified by f lt object_list_file gt r lt object gt and s lt symbol gt Output WLF files are always written in the latest WLF version regardless of the source WLF file version ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 420 wifman Arguments for wlfman profile rank Sorts the report by percentage Optional top lt number gt Filters the report so that only the top lt number gt signals in terms of file space percentage are displayed Optional lt wlffile gt Specifies the WLF file from which you want object information Required Arguments for wlfman merge Examples noopt Disables WLF file optimizations when writing output WLF file Optional sopt Forces WLF file optimizations when writing output WLF file Optional Default o lt outwlffile gt Specifies the name of the output WLF file Required The output WLF file will contain all objects from lt wlffile1 gt and lt wlffile2 gt Output WLF files are always written in the latest WLF version regardless of the source WLF file version lt wlffilel gt lt wlffile2 gt Specifies the WLF files whose objects you want to copy into one WLF file Optional wlfman profile rank top_vh wlf The output from this command would look something like this Repeated ID s mean those signals share the same space in the wlf file 2192 33 top_vh pdata to
100. region compare all signals matching the glob expression that match signals in the test region The compare add command supports arguments that specify how each signal state matches std_logic or Verilog values e g vhdlmatches see below Since state matching can also be set on a global basis with the compare options command or PrefCompare Tcl variables ModelSim follows state match settings in this order 1 Use local matching values specified when the compare was created using compare add or subsequently configured using compare configure 2 Ifno local values were set use global matching values set with the compare options command 3 If no compare options were set use default matching values specified by PrefCompare Tcl variables compare add clock lt name gt help label lt label gt list lt mode gt nowin rebuild recursive separator lt string gt tol lt delay gt tolLead lt delay gt tolTrail lt delay gt verbose vhdlmatches lt ref logic value gt lt test logic value gt ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 96 compare add vlogmatches lt ref logic value gt lt test logic value gt wavepane lt n gt wave when lt expression gt win lt wname gt lt referencePath gt lt testPath gt Arguments clock lt name gt Specifies the clock definition to use when sampling the specified regions Required for a clocked comparison not
101. replay Required Playback controls The following Tcl set commands control the playback type and speed by setting the play_macro global variables The commands are invoked from the ModelSim command line set play_macro speed Specify the playback speed either demo with the delay specified below or fast no delays set play_macro delay Specifies the delay time in milliseconds Controls the speed of playback in demo mode See also macro_option CR 197 record CR 245 ModelSim SE Command Reference pop Syntax Arguments Examples See also pop CR 221 This command is used with C Debug See Chapter 16 C Debug UM 401 for more information The pop command moves the specified number of call frames up the C callstack pop lt _of_levels gt lt _of_levels gt Specifies the number of call frames to move up the C callstack Optional If unspecified 1 level is assumed pop Moves up call frame pop 4 Moves up 4 call frames push CR 239 Chapter 16 C Debug UM 401 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 222 power add power add The power add command specifies the signals or nets to track for power information Data produced by these commands can be translated by a Synopsys utility to drive the Synopsys power analysis tools The power add command is intended to be used as follows 1 Add the objects of interest with the power add command 2 Run the simulation with the run command CR
102. respectively nocoverage Disables collection of statement coverage statistics which is on by default Optional nodebug ports Hides the internal data of the compiled design unit Optional The design unit s source code internal structure signals processes and variables will not display in ModelSim s windows In addition none of the hidden objects may be accessed through the Dataflow window or with commands This also means that you cannot set breakpoints or single step within this code Don t compile with this switch until you re done debugging Note that this is not a speed switch like the nodebug option on many other products The optional ports switch hides the ports for the lower levels of your design it should only be used to compile the lower levels of the design If you hide the ports of the top level you will not be able to simulate the design Design units or modules compiled with nodebug can only instantiate design units or modules that are also compiled nodebug noindexcheck Disables checking on indexing expressions to determine whether indices are within declared array bounds Optional nologo Disables display of the startup banner Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference vcom CR 317 nonstddriverinit Forces ModelSim to match pre 5 7c behavior in initializing drivers in a particular case Optional Prior to 5 7c VHDL ports of mode out or inout could have incorrectly initialized drivers i
103. resume command can also be used in an onerror CR 218 command string to allow an error message to be printed without halting the execution of the macro file Syntax resume Arguments None See also abort CR 44 do CR 153 onbreak CR 216 onerror CR 218 pause CR 219 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 252 right right The right command searches right next for signal transitions or values in the specified Wave window It executes the search on signals currently selected in the window starting at the time of the active cursor The active cursor moves to the found location Use this command to move to consecutive transitions or to find the time at which a waveform takes on a particular value or an expression of multiple signals evaluates to true See the left command CR 191 for related functionality The procedure for using right entails three steps click on the desired waveform click on the desired starting location issue the right command The seetime command CR 266 can initially position the cursor from the command line if desired Returns lt number_found gt lt new_time gt lt new_delta gt Syntax right expr lt expression gt falling noglitch rising value lt sig_value gt window lt wname gt lt n gt Arguments expr lt expression gt The waveform display will be searched until the expression evaluates to a boolean true condition Optional The expression may involve more
104. sim2 wlf Instructs ModelSim to view the results of a previous simulation run stored in the WLF file sim2 wif The simulation is displayed as a dataset named test Use the wlf option to specify the name of the WLF file to create if you plan to create many files for later viewing For example vsim wlf my_design i01 my_asic structure vsim wlf my_design i02 my_asic structure vsim sdfmin top ul myasic sdf Annotates instance top u using the minimum timing from the SDF file myasic sdf Use multiple switches to annotate multiple instances vsim sdfmin top ul sdfl sdfmin top u2 sdf2 top vsim mylib top only gatelib cache_set This example searches the libraries mylib for top only and gatelib for cache_set If the design units are not found the search continues to the work library Specification of the architecture only is optional vsim do set PrefMain forceQuit 1 run all work test_counter Invokes vsim on test_counter and instructs the simulator to run until a break event and quit when it encounters a finish task ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 394 vsim lt info gt vsim lt info gt The vsim lt info gt commands return information about the current vsim executable vsimAuth Returns the authorization level PE SE VHDL Verilog PLUS vsimDate Returns the date the executable was built such as Apr 10 2000 vsimlId Returns the identifying string such as ModelSim 5 4 vsimVersion Returns the vers
105. stand alone windows not panes in the Main window Optional view undock wave Undocks the Wave pane from the Main window and makes it a standalone window view w Displays the Watch and Wave panes view ob pr Displays the Objects and Active Process panes view title My Wave Window wave Opens a new Wave window with My Wave Window as its title view wave view new wave The first command creates a window named wave The second command creates a window named wavel Its full Tk path is wavel Wavel is now the default Wave window Any add wave command CR 53 would add objects to wavel view wave Changes the default Wave window back to wave add wave win wavel mysig Will override the default Wave window and add mysig to wavel noview CR 214 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 336 virtual count virtual count The virtual count command counts the number of currently defined virtuals that were not read in using a macro file Syntax virtual count kind lt kind gt unsaved Arguments kind lt kind gt Specifies a subset of virtuals to look at Optional lt kind gt can be any of the following signals functions designs implicits and explicits Unique abbreviations are accepted unsaved Specifies that the count include only those virtuals that have not been saved to a macro file Optional See also virtual define CR 337 virtual save CR 351 virtual show CR 352 Virtual
106. statistics derived from a system simulation into the statistics of an individual chip simulation ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 174 fcover reload See also Chapter 15 Functional coverage with PSL and ModelSim Reloading merging functional coverage data UM 398 feover save command CR 177 ModelSim SE Command Reference fcover report CR 175 fcover report Syntax Arguments The fcover report command produces an ASCII report of the current functional coverage results For each directive instance the report includes by default the full instance path the coverage count or percentage the design unit the source file name and the source line number The report is sorted by design unit For each design unit the report includes a coverage percentage computed from each coverage directive in that design unit Note that a report response of No match indicates that the report was empty For example fcover report du foo r where there is no design unit foo will result in No match fcover report above lt percent gt aggregated append below lt percent gt comment config lt coverage_directive gt details du lt name gt file lt filename gt noaggregated nocomment nodetails recursive xml zero above lt percent gt Specifies that only objects with coverage values above this percentage be included in the report Optional aggregated Includes aggregated statisti
107. testbench stuff which is a record type with three fields corresponding to the three specified signals The example assumes chipa mode is of type integer chipa alu a is of type std_logic_vector and chipa decode inst is a user defined enumeration virtual signal delay 10 ps top signalA myDelayedSignalA Creates a virtual signal that is the same as top signalA except it is delayed by 10 ps virtual signal chip instruction 23 21 address_mode Creates a three bit signal chip address_mode as an alias to the specified bits virtual signal a amp b amp c amp 3 b000 myextendedbus Concatenates signals a b and c with the literal constant 000 virtual signal num amp 000 fullbus add wave unsigned fullbus Adds three missing bits to the bus num creates a virtual signal fullbus and then adds that signal to the Wave window virtual signal num31 amp num30 amp num29 amp amp num4 amp num3 amp 000 fullbus add wave unsigned fullbus Reconstructs a bus that was fragmented by synthesis and is missing the lower three bits Note that you would have to type in the actual bit names i e num28 num27 etc represented by the in the syntax above virtual signal aold anew amp bold bnew myequalityvector Creates a two bit signal with an enumerated type based on the results of the subexpressions For example if aold equals anew then the first bit is true 1 Alternatively if bo
108. than one signal but is limited to signals that have been logged in the referenced Wave window A signal may be specified either by its full path or by the shortcut label displayed in the Wave window See GUI _expression_format CR 22 for the format of the expression The expression must be placed within curly braces falling Searches for a falling edge on the specified signal if that signal is a scalar signal If it is not a scalar signal the option will be ignored Optional noglitch Looks at signal values only on the last delta of a time step For use with the value option only Optional rising Searches for a rising edge on the specified signal if that signal is a scalar signal If it is not a scalar signal the option will be ignored Optional value lt sig_value gt Species a value of the signal to match Must be specified in the same radix that the selected waveform is displayed Case is ignored but otherwise the value must be an exact string match don t care bits are not yet implemented Only one signal may be selected but that signal may be an array Optional window lt wname gt Specifies an instance of the Wave window that is not the default Optional Otherwise the default Wave window is used Use the view command CR 334 to change the default window ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See also right CR 253 lt n gt Specifies to find the nth match If less than n are found the number found
109. that consists of concatenations of signals and subelements virtual type CR 356 ModelSim SE Command Reference creates a new enumerated type Command name Command reference table CR 41 Action vlib CR 358 creates a design library vlog CR 360 compiles Verilog design units vmake CR 371 creates a makefile that can be used to reconstruct the specified library vmap CR 372 defines a mapping between a logical library name and a directory vopt CR 373 produces an optimized version of your design vsim CR 375 loads a new design into the simulator vsim lt info gt CR 394 returns information about the current vsim executable vsource CR 395 specifies an alternative file to use for the current source file wave CR 396 commands for manipulating cursors for zooming and for adjusting the wave display view in the Wave window wave create CR 399 creates an editable waveform that can be used to create stimulus and drive simulation wave edit CR 402 edits a created waveform wave export CR 405 exports created waveforms to a stimulus file wave import CR 406 imports an EVCD file previously created with a wave export command wave modify CR 407 modifies the parameters of a created waveform when CR 409 instructs ModelSim to perform actions when the specified conditions are met where CR 414 displays i
110. the force command by setting the DefaultForceKind variable in the modelsim ini file See Force command defaults UM 541 ModelSim SE Command Reference gdb dir Syntax Argument Examples See also gdb dir CR 185 The gdb dir command sets the source directory search path for the C debugger See Setting up C Debug UM 404 for more information Invoking this command starts the C debugger if it is not already running gdb dir lt sre_directorypath_1 gt 2 lt sre_directory path _2 gt i lt 4 2 lt sre_directory_path_1 gt lt sre_directory_path_2 gt lt gt Specifies one or more directories for C source code Optional If no directory is specified the source directory search path is set to the gdb default cdir cwd gdb dir a b c foo Sets the source directory search path to a b c foo cdir cwd Chapter 16 C Debug UM 401 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 186 getactivecursortime getactivecursortime The getactivecursortime command gets the time of the active cursor in the Wave window Returns the time value Syntax getactivecursortime window lt wname gt Arguments window lt wname gt Specifies an instance of the Wave window that is not the default Otherwise the default Wave window is used Optional Use the view command CR 334 to change the default window Examples getactivecursortime Returns 980 ns See also left CR 191 right CR 252 ModelSim SE
111. the global Tcl variable bit_mask clk event amp amp top xyz 16 hffae This expression evaluates to a boolean true when signal clk changes and signal top xyz is equal to hex ffae otherwise is false clk rising amp amp mystate reading amp amp top u3 addr 32 habcd1234 Evaluates to a boolean true when signal clk just changed from low to high and signal mystate is the enumeration reading and signal top u3 addr is equal to the specified 32 bit hex constant otherwise is false top u3 addr and 32 hff000000 32 hac000000 Evaluates to a boolean true when the upper 8 bits of the 32 bit signal top u3 addr equals hex ac top signalA delayed 10ns This expression returns op signalA delayed by 10 ns top signalA delayed 10 ns amp amp top signalB This expression takes the logical AND of a delayed top signalA with top signalB virtual function 10 top signalA amp amp top signalB mySignalB_AND_DelayedSignalA This evaluates top signalA at 10 simulation time steps before the current time and takes the logical AND of the result with the current value of top signalB The notation uses positive numbers for looking into the future and negative numbers for delay This notation does not support the use of time units ModelSim SE Command Reference GUI_expression_format CR 27 NOW gt 23 us amp amp NOW lt 54 us amp amp clk rising amp amp mode writing Evaluates
112. to a boolean true when WLF file time is between 23 and 54 microseconds clk just changed from low to high and signal mode is enumeration writing searchlog expr dbus hasxX 0 ns dbus Searches for an X in dbus This is equivalent to the expression dbus 0 x Il dbus I x This makes it possible to search for X values without having to write a type specific literal Signal and subelement naming conventions ModelSim supports naming conventions for VHDL and Verilog signal pathnames VHDL array indexing Verilog bit selection VHDL subrange specification and Verilog part selection All supported naming conventions for VHDL and Verilog are valid for SystemC designs Examples in Verilog and VHDL syntax top chip vlogsig top chip vhdlsig vlogsig 3 vhdlsig 9 vlogsig 5 2 vhdlsig 5 downto 2 All of the above examples are valid for SystemC Grouping and precedence Operator precedence generally follows that of the C language but we recommend liberal use of parentheses Concatenation of signals or subelements Elements in the concatenation that are arrays are expanded so that each element in the array becomes a top level element of the concatenation But for elements in the concatenation that are records the entire record becomes one top level element in the result To specify that the records be broken down so that their subelements become top level elements in the concatenation use the concat_flatten d
113. to reload Required This file should be the output of a previous fcover save command CR 177 install lt path gt Adds lt path gt as additional hierarchy on the front end of instance and signal names in the data file Optional This argument allows you to merge coverage results from simulations that have different hierarchies merge Merges loaded coverage data with current coverage data Optional Without this argument loading coverage data overwrites existing data strip lt n gt Removes lt n gt levels of hierarchy from instance and signal names in the data file Optional This argument allows you to merge coverage results from simulations that have different hierarchies fcover reload run2 Replaces functional coverage results from the current simulation with results loaded from run2 fcover reload merge install top dut mac macl28_test_stats fcdb Merges the current coverage results with those in mac128_test_stats fcdb The signals and instances in the database are given the new path top dut mac This methodology can be useful for merging statistics derived from a block simulation into the statistics of an overall chip simulation fcover reload merge strip 2 system_test_stats fcdb Merges the current coverage results with those in system_test_stats fcdb The signals and instances in the database have the top 2 levels of hierarchy removed from their names e g systop unit1 This methodology can be useful for merging
114. to vlog CR 364 warnings changing severity of UM 548 disabling at time 0 UM 540 empty port name UM 553 exit codes UM 551 getting more information UM 548 messages long description UM 548 metavalue detected UM 554 SDF disabling CR 382 suppressing VCOM warning messages CR 317 UM 550 suppressing VLOG warning messages CR 366 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ UM 550 suppressing VSIM warning messages CR 389 UM 550 Tcl initialization error 2 UM 554 too few port connections UM 556 turning off warnings from arithmetic packages UM 540 waiting for lock UM 553 Watch window add watch command CR 52 adding items to CR 52 watching a signal value GR 214 watching signal values CR 52 wave commands CR 396 wave create command CR 399 wave edit command CR 402 wave export command CR 405 wave import command CR 406 Wave Log Format WLF file UM 225 wave log format WLF file CR 384 of binary signal values CR 193 see also WLF files wave modify command CR 407 wave viewer Dataflow window UM 304 Wave window UM 240 GR 217 adding items to CR 53 compare waveforms UM 280 docking and undocking UM 241 GR 218 in the Dataflow window UM 304 saving layout UM 262 toggling waveform popup on off UM 281 GR 262 values column UM 281 see also windows Wave window WaveActivateNextPane command CR 425 Waveform Compare created waveforms using with GR 296 Waveform Comparison CR 95 add region UM 276 adding signals UM 275 clocked comparison UM 277 c
115. until the first match then move the selection to the object found and return the index of the object found The search can be continued using the next command Returns the index of a single match or a list of matching indices Returns nothing if no matches are found Syntax search lt window_name gt window lt wname gt all field lt n gt toggle forward backward wrap nowrap exact regexp nocase count lt n gt lt pattern gt Arguments for all windows lt window_name gt Specifies the window in which to search Can be one of Signals Objects Variables Locals Source List Wave Process Structure or a unique abbreviation thereof Required window lt wname gt Specifies an instance of the window that is not the default Optional Otherwise the default window is used Use the view command CR 334 to change the default window forward Search in the forward direction Optional This is the default backward Search in the reverse direction Optional Default is forward lt pattern gt String or glob style wildcard pattern Required Must be the last argument specified Arguments for all EXCEPT the Source window all Finds all matches and returns a list of the indices of all objects that match Optional field lt n gt Selects different fields to test depending on the window type Window n 1 n 2 n 3 default structure instance entity architecture instance module
116. used for asynchronous comparisons help Lists the description and syntax for the compare add command in the Transcript pane Optional label lt label gt Specifies a name for the comparison when it is displayed in the Wave window Optional list Causes specified comparisons to be displayed in the default List window Optional lt mode gt Specifies the mode of signal types that are compared Optional The actual values the option may take are in out inout internal ports and all You can use more than one mode option in the same command nowin Specifies that compare signals shouldn t be added to any window Optional By default compare signals are added to the default Wave window See wave below rebuild Rebuilds a fragmented bus in the test design region and compares it with the corresponding bus in the reference design region Optional If a signal is found having the same name as the reference signal the rebuild option is ignored When rebuilding the test signal the name of the reference signal is used as the wildcard prefix recursive Specifies that signals should also be selected in all nested subregions and subregions of those etc Optional separator lt string gt Used with the rebuild option When a bus has been broken into bits bit blasted by a synthesis tool ModelSim expects a separator between the base bus name and the bit indication This option identifies that separator The default is
117. variable you can add a process label to the name For example make certain to use two underscore characters exa line_ 36 i examine top bus1 Returns the value of top bus1 examine rega 16 Returns the value of the subelement of rega that is specified by the index i e 16 Note that you must use curly braces when examining subelements examine foo 20 22 Returns the value of the contiguous subelements of foo specified by the slice i e 20 22 Note the curly braces examine top My extended id Note that when specifying an object that contains an extended identifier as the last part of the name there must be a space after the closing and before the closing examine time 3450 us expr top bus and Sbit_mask In this example the expr option specifies a signal path and user defined Tcl variable The expression will be evaluated at 3450us examine time t name fifo S fifo 1 to 3 fifo 1 Using the fifo syntax limits the variable to the simple name fifo instead of interpreting the parenthesis as part of the variable Quotes are needed when spaces are involved and by using quotes instead of braces the Tcl interpreter will expand variables before calling the command ModelSim SE Command Reference See also examine CR 167 examine expr clk event amp amp top xyz 16 hffae Because time is not specified this expression will be evaluated at the current simulation time Not
118. visibility UM 126 event order issues UM 128 timing checks UM 128 OptionFile entry in project files GR 61 GR 70 order of events changing in Verilog CR 360 in optimized designs UM 128 ordering files for compile UM 46 organizing projects with folders UM 50 organizing windows MDI pane GR 22 OSCI 2 1 features supported UM 183 OSCI simulator differences from ModelSim UM 182 OSCI simulator differences with vsim UM 182 others ini file variable UM 527 overriding the simulator resolution UM 174 overview simulation tasks in ModelSim UM 23 P packages standard UM 64 textio UM 64 util UM 96 VITAL 1995 UM 93 VITAL 2000 UM 93 page setup Dataflow window UM 312 Wave window UM 263 GR 236 pan Dataflow window UM 305 panes docking and undocking GR 264 parameter support SystemC instantiating Verilog UM 211 Verilog instantiating SystemC UM 214 parameters making optional UM 490 using with macros CR 153 UM 489 path delay mode UM 145 path delays matching to IOPATH statements UM 447 pathnames comparisons UM 280 hiding in Wave window UM 255 in VSIM commands CR 12 spaces in CR 11 PathSeparator ini file variable UM 535 pause command CR 219 PedanticErrors ini file variable UM 529 performance cancelling scheduled events UM 108 improving for Verilog simulations UM 124 vopt command CR 373 platforms supported See Installation Guide play command CR 220 PLI loading shared objects with global symbol visibility CR 378 UM
119. want summary statistics Required Multiple pathnames and wildcards are allowed coverage save command CR 137 fcover save command CR 177 vcover merge command CR 322 feover report command CR 175 Chapter 13 Measuring code coverage Chapter 15 Functional coverage with PSL and ModelSim ModelSim SE Command Reference vdel Syntax Arguments Examples vdel CR 329 The vdel command deletes a design unit from a specified library vdel help lib lt library_name gt verbose all lt design_unit gt lt arch_name gt allsystemc all Deletes an entire library Optional BE CAREFUL Libraries cannot be recovered once deleted and you are not prompted for confirmation allsystemc Deletes all SystemC modules in a design from the working directory Optional lt arch_name gt Specifies the name of an architecture to be deleted Optional If omitted all of the architectures for the specified entity are deleted Invalid for a configuration or a package lt design_unit gt Specifies the entity package configuration or module to be deleted Required unless all is used This option is not supported for SystemC modules help Displays the command s options and arguments Optional lib lt library_name gt Specifies the logical name or pathname of the library that holds the design unit to be deleted Optional By default the design unit is deleted from the work library verbose Displays progres
120. watch CR 52 add wave CR 53 add_menu CR 57 add_menucb CR 59 add_menuitem CR 60 add_separator CR 61 add_submenu CR 62 alias CR 63 assertion fail command CR 64 assertion pass CR 66 assertion report CR 68 batch_mode CR 70 bd breakpoint delete CR 71 bookmark add wave CR 72 bookmark delete wave CR 73 bookmark goto wave CR 74 bookmark list wave CR 75 bp breakpoint CR 76 cd change directory CR 79 cdbg CR 80 change CR 82 change_menu_cmd CR 84 check contention add CR 85 check contention config CR 87 check contention off CR 88 check float add CR 89 check float config CR 90 check float off CR 91 check stable off CR 92 check stable on CR 93 checkpoint CR 94 compare add CR 95 compare annotate CR 99 CR 102 compare clock CR 100 compare close CR 106 compare delete CR 105 compare info CR 107 compare list CR 108 compare open CR 120 compare options CR 109 compare reload CR 113 compare savediffs CR 116 compare saverules CR 117 compare see CR 118 compare start CR 115 configure CR 124 coverage clear CR 129 coverage exclude CR 130 coverage reload CR 132 coverage report CR 133 coverage save CR 137 dataset alias CR 138 dataset clear CR 139 dataset close CR 140 dataset info CR 141 dataset list CR 142 dataset open CR 143 dataset rename CR 144 CR 145 dataset snapshot CR 146 delete CR 148 describe CR 149 disable_menu CR 151 disable_menuitem CR 152 disablebp CR 150 do CR 153 down CR 154 drivers CR 156 dumplog64 CR 157
121. wif with data from 1000001 to 2000000 and gold_3 wif with data from 2000001 to 3000000 gt Note Because this example uses sequential mode if you ran the simulation for 3500000 ps the resulting vsim wif the default log file file will contain data only from 3000001 to 3500000 ps dataset snapshot reset time 10000 Enables snapshotting with time 10000 and default mode cumulative and default filemode overwrite dataset save CR 145 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 148 delete delete Syntax Arguments Examples See also The delete command removes objects from either the List or Wave window delete list wave window lt wname gt lt object_name gt list wave Specifies the target window for the delete command Required window lt wname gt Specifies the name of the List or Wave window to target for the delete command the view command CR 334 allows you to create more than one List or Wave window Optional If no window is specified the default window is used the default window is determined by the most recent invocation of the view command CR 334 lt object_name gt Specifies the name of an object Required Must match an object name used in an add list CR 48 or add wave CR 53 command Multiple object names may be specified Wildcard characters are allowed delete list window list2 vec2 Removes the object vec2 from the list2 window add list CR 48 add wave CR 53 and Wildcard cha
122. will read the as a negative sign Examples 16 FFca23 2 11111110 23749 VHDL Style 2 The second VHDL number style is base value Element Description base specifies the base binary B octal O hex X required value specifies digits in the appropriate base with optional underscore separators default is decimal required Examples B 11111110 X FFca23 ModelSim SE Command Reference Numbering conventions CR 21 Searching for VHDL arrays in the Wave and List windows Searching for signal values in the Wave or List window may not work correctly for VHDL arrays if the target value is in decimal notation You may get an error that the value is of incompatible type Since VHDL does not have a radix indicator for decimal the target value may get misinterpreted as a scalar value Prefixing the value with the Verilog notation d should eliminate the problem even if the signal is VHDL Verilog numbering conventions Verilog numbers are expressed in the style size base value Element Description indicates a negative number optional size the number of bits in the number optional base specifies the base binary b or B octal o or O decimal d or D hex h or H optional value specifies digits in the appropriate base with optional underscore separators default is decimal required A can also be used to designate
123. with wildcard matching Specifies that the scope of the matching is to descend recursively into subregions Optional If omitted the search is limited to the selected region Applies to all paths specified in the command lt path gt Specifies the assertions to be affected Required Multiple paths and wildcards are allowed The path specifies assertions or a design region containing multiple assertions ModelSim SE Command Reference assertion pass CR 67 Examples assertion pass enable log on a b c assert__0 log off a b c assert_1l Enables assertions a b c assert__0 and a b c assert__I and turns logging on for a b c assert__0O but not a b c assert__1 See also Enabling disabling failure and pass checking UM 379 Setting failure and pass limits UM 381 assertion fail command CR 64 and assertion report command CR 68 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 68 assertion report assertion report Syntax Arguments The assertion report command returns a status report for each assertion matching the path specification By default the command prints a concise report containing only assertion names and their fail and pass counts Adding the verbose argument to the command will print the following e source language PSL or other e assertion name full path e design unit where the assertion is declared e source language VHDL e filename line number e fail enable status enabled or disabled e pass enable sta
124. 08 compare list compare list Displays in the Transcript pane a list of all the compare add commands currently in effect Syntax compare list expand Arguments expand Expands groups specified by the compare add command to individual signals Optional See also compare add CR 95 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference compare options CR 109 compare options Syntax Arguments The compare options command sets defaults for various waveform comparison commands Those defaults are used when other compare commands are invoked during the current session To set defaults permanently edit the appropriate PrefCompare Tcl variable in the pref tcl file see Preference variables located in Tcl files UM 542 for details If no arguments are used compare options returns the current setting for all options If one option is given that requires a value and if that value is not given compare options returns the current value of that option compare options addwave hide noaddwave show ignoreVlogStrengths noignoreVlogStrengths maxsignal lt n gt maxtotal lt n gt listwin lt name gt lt mode gt separator lt string gt tol lt delay gt tolLead lt delay gt tolTrail lt delay gt track notrack vhdlmatches lt ref logic value gt lt test logic value gt vlogmatches lt ref logic value gt lt test logic value gt wavepane lt n gt w
125. 1 will cause matching for all instances that use the same entity An inclusiveDuMatch of 0 includes in the report only instances that reference the exact design unit e g a specific entity architecture pair ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 234 profile report See also Examples A Displays memory allocation data in the report Optional If m is not specified the profile report will include memory allocation data if the memory profiler was previously enabled and memory information was collected during a run P Displays statistical performance samples in the report Optional If p is not specified the profile report will include performance statistics if the performance profiler was previously enabled and profile samples were collected during a run ranked Reports a ranked list of statistical performance and memory allocation data Optional structural level lt positive_integer gt lt rootname gt showcalls Reports a structural list of statistical performance and memory allocation data Optional The optional argument level lt positive_integer gt determines how far to expand instance hierarchy If omitted the report includes all levels The optional argument lt rootname gt causes the report to be rooted at the specified instance If not specified the report contains all roots and any orphan samples The optional argument showcalls lists function callstacks beneath each instance If omitted functional c
126. 110 110 110 110 000 mem display format hex startaddress 5 endaddress 10 top c mru_mem Displays the memory contents of the same instance to the screen in hex format as follows 5 6666 60 mem load CR 201 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 200 mem list mem list Syntax Arguments Examples The mem list command displays a flattened list of all memory instances in the current or specified context after a design has been elaborated Each instance line is prefixed by VHDL or Verilog depending on the type of model Returns the signal variable name address range and depth and width of the memory mem list recursive lt path gt recursive Recursively descends into sub modules when listing memories Optional lt path gt The hierarchical path to the location the search should start Optional The default is the current context as shown in the Structure tab of the Workspace pane mem list r Recursively lists all memories at the top level of the design Returns Verilog top m mem 0 255 256d x 16w mem list top2 uut r Recursively lists all memories in top2 uut Returns Verilog top2 uut mem 0 255 x 16w ModelSim SE Command Reference mem load Syntax mem load CR 201 The mem load command updates the simulation memory contents of a specified instance You can upload contents either from a memory data file amemory pattern or both If both are specified the pattern is appli
127. 2 Profile Report dialog GR 99 GR 203 Profiler UM 317 parent fields UM 325 clear profile data UM 321 enabling memory profiling UM 319 enabling statistical sampling UM 321 getting started UM 319 handling large files UM 320 Hierarchical View UM 325 interpreting data UM 323 memory allocation UM 318 memory allocation profiling UM 321 profile report command UM 332 Profile Report dialog UM 333 GR 99 Ranked View UM 324 report option UM 332 reporting GR 99 results viewing UM 324 statistical sampling UM 318 Structural View UM 327 unsupported on Opteron UM 317 view_profile command UM 324 viewing profile details UM 328 Programming Language Interface UM 158 UM 562 Project Compiler Settings dialog GR 55 Project Settings dialog GR 62 project tab information in UM 45 sorting UM 45 Projects MODELSIM environment variable UM 523 projects UM 37 accessing from the command line UM 55 adding files to UM 41 benefits UM 38 close UM 44 code coverage settings UM 339 compile order UM 46 changing UM 46 compiler properties in UM 52 compiling files UM 43 creating UM 40 creating simulation configurations UM 48 delete UM 44 folders in UM 50 grouping files in UM 47 loading a design UM 44 open and existing UM 44 override mapping for work directory with vcom CR 258 CR 319 override mapping for work directory with vlog CR 368 overview UM 38 propagation preventing X propagation CR 380 Properties memory dialog GR 189 property list command CR 236
128. 230 The profile reload command will clear all performance and memory profiling data collected to that point implicit profile clear Any currently loaded design will be unloaded implicit quit sim and run time profiling will be turned off implicit profile off m p If a new design is loaded after you have read the raw profile data then all internal profile data is cleared implicit profile clear but run time profiling is not turned back on profile reload lt filename gt lt filename gt Designates the name of the external file where raw profile data will be saved Required Chapter 12 Profiling performance and memory use UM 317 profile clear CR 227 profile interval CR 228 profile off CR 229 profile on CR 230 profile option CR 231 profile report CR 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference profile report CR 233 profile report Syntax Arguments The profile report command outputs profiling data that have been gathered up to the point that you execute the command To use this command you must first enable profiling using the profile on command CR 230 or the memprof argument to the vsim command CR 375 profile report ranked calltree structural level lt positive_integer gt lt rootname gt showcalls callercallee lt func gt functoinst lt fune gt instofdef lt inst gt inclusiveDuMatch 0111 cutoff lt percentage gt file lt filename gt m p calltree
129. 254 3 Produce a report with the power report command CR 223 Syntax power add in inout internal out ports r lt signalsOrNets gt Arguments in Specifies only inputs Optional inout Specifies only inouts Optional internal Specifies only design internal signals or nets Optional p ut Specifies only outputs Optional ports Specifies only design ports Optional Searches recursively on a wildcard specified for the signal or net Optional lt signalsOrNets gt Specifies the signal or net to track Required Multiple names or wildcards may be used Must refer to VHDL signals of type bit std_logic or std_logic_vector or to Verilog nets When using wildcards the in inout internal out and ports arguments filter the qualifying signals If you specify more than one of these arguments the logical OR of the arguments is performed See also power report CR 223 power reset CR 224 See the Synopsys Power documentation for more information ModelSim SE Command Reference power report CR 223 power report Syntax Arguments Description See also The power report command reports power information for the specified signals or nets The report can be written to a file or to the Transcript pane Data produced by these commands can be translated by a Synopsys utility to drive the Synopsys power analysis tools The power report command is intended to be used as follows 1 Add the o
130. 5 check contention config CR 87 check contention off CR 88 check float add CR 89 check float config CR 90 check float off CR 91 check stable on CR 93 check stable off CR 92 drivers CR 156 force CR 182 noforce CR 210 power add CR 222 power report CR 223 power reset CR 224 toggle add CR 281 toggle reset CR 286 toggle report CR 285 ved add CR 294 when CR 409 See also virtual count CR 336 virtual define CR 337 virtual delete CR 338 virtual describe CR 339 virtual expand CR 340 virtual hide CR 344 virtual log CR 345 virtual nohide CR 347 virtual nolog CR 348 virtual region CR 350 virtual save CR 351 virtual show CR 352 virtual signal CR 353 virtual type CR 356 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 344 virtual hide virtual hide The virtual hide command causes the specified real or virtual signals to not be displayed in the Objects window This is used when you want to replace an expanded bus with a user defined bus You make the signals reappear using the virtual nohide command Syntax virtual hide kind lt kind gt region lt path gt lt pattern gt Arguments kind lt kind gt Specifies a subset of virtuals to look at Optional lt kind gt can be any of the following signals fu
131. 5 16 20 st6 0b01000000 st7 0x80 st8 default BAD_STATE myMappedType virtual function myMappedType mybus myConvertedBus add wave myConvertedBus Uses sparse mapping of bus values to alphanumeric strings for an 8 bit one hot encoding It shows the variety of syntax that can be used for values The value default has special meaning and corresponds to any value not explicitly specified virtual type delete mystateType Deletes the virtual type mystateType virtual type 0x01 add 0x02 sub default bad mydecodetype Creates a virtual type that includes don t cares the character virtual type 0x0100 Oxff add 0x0200 Oxff sub default bad mydecodetype Creates a virtual type using a mask for don t cares The middle field is the mask and the mask should have bits set to 1 for the bits that are don t care virtual function CR 341 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 358 vlib vlib Syntax Arguments Examples The vlib command creates a design library You must use vlib rather than operating system commands to create a library directory or index file If the specified library already exists as a valid ModelSim library the vlib command will exit with a warning message without touching the library vlib archive compact lt percent gt help dos short unix long unnamed_designs lt value gt lt name gt archive c
132. 5 See Hazard detection UM 135 for more details A Important Enabling hazards implicitly enables the compat argument As a result using this argument may affect your simulation results incdir lt directory gt Specifies directories to search for files included with include compiler directives Optional By default the current directory is searched first and then the directories specified by the incdir options in the order they appear on the command line You may specify multiple incdir options as well as multiple directories separated by ina single incdir option 1ACE Performs an incremental compile Optional Compiles only code that has changed For example if you change only one module in a file containing several modules only the changed module will be recompiled Note however that if the compile options change all modules are recompiled regardless if you use incr or not instantiateReadOnly Enables a fast optimized design to instantiate modules or UDPs from a work library that has read only permission The instantiations will not be in lined or further optimized Recommended usage is to always have write access to the work library isymfile Generates a complete list of all imported TFs Used with DPI to determine all imported TFs that are expected by ModelSim Valid only for Windows RS6000 and RS64 platforms only keep_delta Disables optimizations that remove delta delays Optional Delta delays resul
133. 584 specifying which apps to load UM 564 Veriuser entry UM 564 PLI VPI UM 158 UM 562 debugging UM 401 tracing UM 602 PLIOBJS environment variable UM 524 UM 564 pop command CR 221 popup toggling waveform popup on off UM 281 GR 262 Port driver data capturing UM 469 ports unnamed in mixed designs UM 206 ports VHDL and Verilog UM 193 Postscript saving a waveform in UM 263 saving the Dataflow display in UM 310 power add command CR 222 power report command CR 223 power reset command CR 224 pragmas UM 348 precedence of variables UM 543 precision simulator resolution UM 129 UM 191 pref tcl file GR 293 Preference dialog GR 110 preference variables ni files located in UM 526 editing GR 293 saving GR 293 Tcl files located in GR 293 Preferences drag and drop GR 109 preferences saving GR 293 PrefMain ShowFilePane preference variable GR 19 primitives symbols in Dataflow window UM 313 Print dialog GR 141 Print Postscript dialog GR 143 printenv command CR 225 CR 226 printing Dataflow window display UM 310 waveforms in the Wave window UM 263 Process window GR 149 see also windows Process window processes optimizations disabling merging CR 313 without wait statements GR 58 GR 67 profile clear command CR 227 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ profile interval command CR 228 profile off command CR 229 profile on command CR 230 profile option command CR 231 profile reload command CR 232 profile report command CR 233 UM 33
134. 7 preference variables GR 293 relational expression evaluation UM 480 time commands UM 483 variable in when commands CR 410 substitution UM 481 VSIM Tcl commands UM 482 Tcl_init error message UM 554 Technical support and updates UM 36 temp files VsOUT UM 525 test signal delaying GR 250 testbench accessing internal objectsfrom UM 419 testbenches PSL endpoint reactivity UM 400 text and command syntax UM 34 Text editing UM 607 TEXTIO buffer flushing UM 92 TextlO package alternative I O files UM 92 containing hexadecimal numbers UM 91 dangling pointers UM 91 ENDFILE function UM 91 ENDLINE function UM 91 file declaration UM 88 implementation issues UM 90 providing stimulus UM 92 standard input UM 89 standard output UM 89 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ WRITE procedure UM 90 WRITE_STRING procedure UM 90 TF routines UM 596 UM 598 TFMPC disabling warning CR 389 explanation UM 556 time absolute using CR 18 measuring in Wave window UM 245 resolution in SystemC UM 174 simulation time units CR 18 time resolution as a simulator state variable UM 544 time collapsing CR 384 UM 232 time literal missing space GR 58 GR 67 time resolution in mixed designs UM 191 in Verilog UM 129 in VHDL UM 78 setting with the GUI GR 82 with vsim command CR 382 time type converting to real UM 98 time time units simulation time CR 18 timescale directive warning disabling CR 389 investigating UM 130 timing setuphold recovery UM 150
135. 83 UM 139 modifying stimulus UM 83 UM 139 resimulating the same design UM 82 UM 138 simulating with PLI or FLI models UM 84 UM 140 elaboration interrupting CR 375 embedded wave viewer UM 304 empty port name warning UM 553 enable_menu command CR 161 enable_menuitem command CR 162 enablebp command CR 160 encryption protect argument CR 367 protect compiler directive UM 155 nodebug argument vcom CR 316 nodebug argument vlog CR 365 securing pre compiled libraries UM 70 end_of_construction function UM 183 end_of_simulation function UM 183 ENDFILE function UM 91 ENDLINE function UM 91 endpoint directives clocking and UM 373 restrictions on UM 373 endpoints PSL directive UM 400 endprotect compiler directive UM 155 entities default binding rules UM 79 entities specifying for simulation CR 392 entity simulator state variable UM 544 enumerated types user defined CR 356 environment command CR 163 environment variables UM 523 accessed during startup UM 615 reading into Verilog code CR 361 referencing from ModelSim command line UM 525 referencing with VHDL FILE variable UM 525 setting in Windows UM 524 specifying library locations in modelsim ini file UM 527 specifying UNIX editor CR 159 state of CR 226 TranscriptFile specifying location of UM 536 used in Solaris linking for FLI UM 570 UM 577 using in pathnames CR 15 using with location mapping UM 67 variable substitution using Tcl UM 481 environment displaying o
136. 9 function calls identifying with C Debug UM 409 Functional coverage merging databases offline CR 322 functional coverage AtLeast counts UM 389 comments in the database CR 170 compiling and simulating UM 387 configuring directives CR 171 described UM 363 merging statistics CR 173 UM 398 reloading CR 173 UM 398 reporting CR 175 UM 393 saving database CR 177 UM 397 weighting directives UM 389 Functional coverage filter dialog GR 157 Functional coverage reload dialog GR 151 Functional coverage report dialog GR 152 functions SystemC control UM 192 observe UM 192 unsupported UM 182 G g C compiler option UM 178 g alternate installations UM 168 gate level designs optimizing UM 127 gdb Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ setting source directory CR 185 gdb debugger UM 402 gdb dir command CR 185 generate statements Verilog UM 123 GenerateFormat ini file variable UM 534 generic support SystemC instantiating VHDL UM 219 generics assigning or overriding values with g and G CR 377 examining generic values CR 164 limitation on assigning composite types CR 378 VHDL UM 195 get_resolution VHDL function UM 96 getactivecursortime command CR 186 getactivemarkertime command CR 187 glitches disabling generation from command line CR 386 from GUI GR 83 global visibility PLI FLI shared objects CR 378 UM 584 GlobalSharedObjectsList ini file variable UM 534 graphic interface UM 237 UM 299 GR 12 UNIX support
137. CR 9 for more details on syntax If the virtual function references more than a single scalar signal it will display as an expandable object in the Wave and Objects windows The children correspond to the inputs of the virtual function This allows the function to be expanded in the Wave window to see the values of each of the input waveforms which could be useful when using virtual functions to compare two signal values Virtual functions can also be used to gate the List window display virtual function env lt path gt install lt path gt delay lt time gt lt expressionString gt lt name gt Arguments for virtual function are the same as those for virtual signal except for the contents of the expression string env lt path gt Specifies a hierarchical context for the signal names in lt expressionString gt so they don t all have to be full paths Optional install lt path gt Causes the newly created signal to become a child of the specified region If install is not specified the newly created signal becomes a child of the nearest common ancestor of all objects appearing in lt expressionString gt If the expression references more than one WLF file dataset the virtual signal will automatically be placed in region virtuals Functions Optional delay lt time gt Specifies a value by which the virtual function will be delayed Optional You can use negative values to look forward in time If units are s
138. Command Reference getactivemarkertime CR 187 getactivemarkertime Syntax Arguments Examples See also The getactivemarkertime command gets the time of the active marker in the List window Returns the time value If delta is specified returns time and delta getactivemarkertime window lt wname gt delta window lt wname gt Specifies an instance of the List window that is not the default Otherwise the default List window is used Optional Use the view command CR 334 to change the default window delta Returns the delta value Optional Default is to return only the time getactivemarkertime delta Returns 980 ns delta 0 down CR 154 up CR 292 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 188 help help The help command displays in the Transcript pane a brief description and syntax for the specified command Syntax help lt command gt lt topic gt Arguments lt command gt Specifies the command for which you want help The entry is case and space sensitive Optional lt topic gt Specifies a topic for which you want help The entry is case and space sensitive Optional Specify one of the following six topics Topic Description commands Lists all available commands and topics debugging Lists debugging commands execution Lists commands that control execution of your simulation Tcl Lists all available Tcl commands Tk Lists all
139. E Command Reference disables the specified menu within the specified window Command name Command reference table CR 35 Action disable_menuitem CR 152 disables the specified menu item within the specified menu path of the specified window do CR 153 executes commands contained in a macro file down CR 154 searches for signal transitions or values in the specified List window drivers CR 156 displays in the Main window the current value and scheduled future values for all the drivers of a specified VHDL signal or Verilog net dumplog64 CR 157 dumps the contents of the vsim wif file in a readable format echo CR 158 displays a specified message in the Main window edit CR 159 invokes the editor specified by the EDITOR environment variable enablebp CR 160 turns on breakpoints and when commands turned off by the disablebp command CR 150 enable_menu CR 161 enables a previously disabled menu enable_menuitem CR 162 enables a previously disabled menu item environment CR 163 displays or changes the current dataset and region environment examine CR 164 examines one or more objects and displays current values or the values at a specified previous time in the Main window exit CR 168 exits the simulator and the ModelSim application fcover clear CR 169 clears the active functional coverage database fcover comm
140. GN 00 01 04 05 Lower the optimization to a minimum with O0 capital oh zero Optional Use this to work around bugs increase your debugging visibility on a specific cell or when you want to place breakpoints on source lines that have been optimized out Enable PE level optimization with O1 Optional Enable standard SE optimizations with O4 Default Enable maximum optimization with O5 Optional O5 attempts to optimize loops and prevents variable assignments in situations where a variable is assigned but is not actually used Using the acc argument to vlog will cancel this latter optimization Use caution with the O5 argument We recommend use of this argument with large sequential blocks only other uses may significantly increase compile times t opt lt lib gt lt module gt Generates optimized code for designs that have been previously compiled un optimized without the fast option see above Optional The lt module gt specification is the name of the top level design module and lt lib gt which is optional is the library in which it resides By default the top level module is searched for in the work library If the design has multiple top level modules then provide the names in a list separated by plus signs For example vlog toptt ttestbench globals Any options that are appropriate with fast are also appropriate with opt Specifically use the acc option to enable PLI access and use the L and
141. GR 214 ModelSim SE Command Reference add wave Syntax Arguments add wave CR 53 The add wave command adds the following objects to the Wave window VHDL signals and variables Verilog nets and registers and SystemC primitive channels signals Dividers and user defined buses may also be added If no port mode is specified add wave will display all objects in the selected region with names matching the object name specification Limitations VHDL variables and Verilog memories can be added using the variable s full name only no wildcards add wave allowconstants color lt standard_color_name gt depth lt level gt expand lt signal_name gt lt format gt height lt pixels gt in inout internal label lt name gt noupdate offset lt offset gt optcells out ports lt radix gt recursive scale lt scale gt window lt wname gt divider lt divider_name gt label lt name gt lt object_name gt sigl sig2 Sigs sssi ssal allowconstants For use with wildcard searches Specifies that constants matching the wildcard search should be added to the Wave window Optional By default constants are ignored because they do not change color lt standard_color_name gt Specifies the color used to display a waveform Optional These are the standard X Window color names or rgb value e g 357f77 enclose 2 word names light blue in quotes dep
142. LF file for the specified signals notepad CR 213 opens a simple text editor noview CR 214 closes a window in the ModelSim GUI nowhen CR 215 deactivates selected when CR 409 commands onbreak CR 216 specifies command s to be executed when running a macro that encounters a breakpoint in the source code onElabError CR 217 specifies one or more commands to be executed when an error is encountered during elaboration onerror CR 218 ModelSim SE Command Reference specifies one or more commands to be executed when a running macro encounters an error Command name Command reference table CR 37 Action pause CR 219 interrupts the execution of a macro play CR 220 plays a sequence of keyboard and mouse actions that were previously saved to a file with the record command CR 245 pop CR 221 moves one level up the C callstack power add CR 222 specifies the signals or nets to track for power information power report CR 223 writes out the power information for the specified signals or nets power reset CR 224 resets power information to zero for the signals or nets specified with the power add command CR 222 precision CR 225 determines how real numbers display in the GUI printenv CR 226 echoes to the Main window the current names and values of all environment variables profile clear CR 227 clears any st
143. List window setting UM 266 GR 169 troubleshooting SystemC UM 184 unexplained behaviors SystemC UM 184 TSCALE disabling warning CR 389 TSSI CR 431 in VCD files UM 469 tssi2mti command CR 290 type converting real to time UM 99 converting time to real UM 98 Type field Project tab UM 45 types fixed point in SystemC UM 182 U u CR 367 unbound component GR 58 GR 67 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ UnbufferedOutput ini file variable UM 536 undeclared nets reporting an error CR 364 undefined symbol error UM 184 unexplained behavior during simulation UM 184 unexplained simulation behavior UM 184 ungrouping objects Monitor window GR 215 unit delay mode UM 145 unknowns tracing UM 307 unnamed ports in mixed designs UM 206 unresolved signals multiple drivers on GR 58 GR 67 unsetenv command CR 291 unsupported functions in SystemC UM 182 up command CR 292 UpCase ini file variable UM 528 use 1076 1993 language standard GR 56 GR 65 use clause specifying a library UM 64 use explicit declarations only GR 57 GR 66 use flow Code Coverage UM 336 SystemC only designs UM 163 UseCsupV2 ini file variable UM 536 user hook Tcl variable GR 113 user defined bus CR 54 UM 233 UM 265 UserTimeUnit ini file variable UM 536 UseScv ini file variable sccom UM 530 util package UM 96 V v CR 368 v2k_int_delays CR 391 values describe HDL items CR 149 examine HDL item values CR 164 of HDL items GR 209 replacing signal va
144. MISAPPROPRIATION BY ANY SOFTWARE LICENSED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT 10 TERM This Agreement remains effective until expiration or termination This Agreement will immediately terminate upon notice if you exceed the scope of license granted or otherwise fail to comply with the provisions of Sections 1 2 or 4 For any other material breach under this Agreement Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement upon 30 days written notice if you are in material breach and fail to cure such breach within the 30 day notice period If Software was provided for limited term use this Agreement will automatically expire at the end of the authorized term Upon any termination or expiration you agree to cease all use of Software and return it to Mentor Graphics or certify deletion and destruction of Software including all copies to Mentor Graphics reasonable satisfaction 11 EXPORT Software is subject to regulation by local laws and United States government agencies which prohibit export or diversion of certain products information about the products and direct products of the products to certain countries and certain persons You agree that you will not export any Software or direct product of Software in any manner without first obtaining all necessary approval from appropriate local and United States government agencies 12 RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE Software was developed entirely at private expense and is commercial computer software provided with RES
145. NOMMAP environment variable UM 524 non blocking assignments UM 134 NoOthersStaticError ini file variable UM 529 NoRangeCheck ini file variable UM 529 Note ini file variable UM 538 notepad command CR 213 Notepad windows text editing UM 607 notrigger argument UM 269 noview command CR 214 NoVital ini file variable UM 529 NoVitalCheck ini file variable UM 529 Now simulator state variable UM 544 now simulator state variable UM 544 nowarn lt CODE gt CR 366 nowhen command CR 215 numeric_bit package UM 65 numeric_std package UM 65 disabling warning messages UM 540 NumericStdNoWarnings ini file variable UM 535 O object defined UM 34 object_list_file WLF files CR 418 Objects window GR 190 see also windows Objects window observe function SystemC UM 192 observe_foreign_signal function UM 183 onbreak command CR 216 onElabError command CR 217 onerror command CR 218 Open File dialog GR 44 opening files GR 44 operating systems supported See Installation Guide Optimization Configuration dialog GR 50 Optimization Configurations UM 49 optimizations disabling for Verilog designs CR 366 disabling for VHDL designs CR 318 disabling process merging CR 313 gate level designs UM 127 Verilog designs UM 124 VHDL subprogram inlining UM 74 via the gui GR 75 vopt command CR 373 optimize for std_logic_1164 GR 58 GR 67 Optimize_1164 ini file variable UM 529 optimizing Verilog designs Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ design object
146. Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference virtual define CR 337 virtual define Syntax Arguments Examples See also The virtual define command prints to the Transcript pane the definition of the virtual signal or function in the form of a command that can be used to re create the object virtual define kind lt kind gt lt pathname gt kind lt kind gt Specifies a subset of virtuals to look at Optional lt kind gt can be any of the following signals functions designs implicits and explicits Unique abbreviations are accepted lt pathname gt Specifies the path to the virtual s for which you want definitions Required Wildcards can be used virtual define kind explicits Shows the definitions of all the virtuals you have explicitly created virtual describe CR 339 virtual show CR 352 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 338 virtual delete virtual delete The virtual delete command removes the matching virtuals Syntax virtual delete kind lt kind gt lt pathname gt Arguments kind lt kind gt Specifies a subset of virtuals to look at Optional lt kind gt can be any of the following signals functions designs implicits and explicits Unique abbreviations are accepted lt pathname gt Specifies the path to the virtual s you want to delete Required Wildcards can be used Examples
147. Optional output lt pathname gt Specifies the name of the file that will contain the report Optional The report will print to stdout if you do not specify an output file select bees tix Specifies which code coverage statistics to include in the report Not a valid option when reporting on a functional coverage database Optional By default the report includes statistics for all categories you enabled at compile time The characters are as follows b Include branch statistics c Include condition statistics e Include expression statistics s Include statement statistics t Include toggle statistics x Include extended toggle statistics Note that t and x are mutually exclusive toggles Creates a report of untoggled signals If you also specify all all signals both toggled and untoggled are listed in the report Not a valid option when reporting on a functional coverage database Optional totals Writes out a top level summary of the number of files statements branches conditions expressions and signal toggles for both file based and instance based views of the current analysis Useful for tracking changes Not a valid option when reporting on a functional coverage database Optional xml Outputs report in XML format Optional See Reporting coverage data UM 351 for more information ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 326 vcover report Examples See also lt file gt Specifies the previ
148. Optional If omitted the search is limited to the selected region only Can be used with a wildcard to specify that only virtual signals as opposed to all signals found by the wildcard should be unlogged Optional in Specifies that the kernel exclude data for ports of mode IN whose names match the specification Optional out Specifies that the kernel exclude data for ports of mode OUT whose names match the specification Optional inout Specifies that the kernel exclude data for ports of mode INOUT whose names match the specification Optional internal Specifies that the kernel exclude data for internal non port objects whose names match the specification Optional ports Specifies that the kernel exclude data for all ports Optional lt pattern gt Indicates which signal names or wildcard pattern should be used in finding the signals to unlog Required Any number of names or wildcard patterns may be used ModelSim SE Command Reference virtual nolog CR 349 See also virtual log CR 345 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 350 virtual region virtual region The virtual region command creates a new user defined design hierarchy region Syntax virtual region lt parentPath gt lt regionName gt Arguments lt parentPath gt The full path to the region that will become the parent of the new region Required lt regionName gt The name you wan
149. Optional The design unit s source code internal structure registers nets etc will not display in ModelSim s windows In addition none of the hidden objects may be accessed through the Dataflow window or with commands This also means that you cannot set breakpoints or single step within this code Don t compile with this switch until you re done debugging Note that this is not a speed switch like the nodebug option on many other products Use the vopt command CR 373 to increase simulation speed The optional ports switch hides the ports for the lower levels of your design it should be used only to compile the lower levels of the design If you hide the ports of the top level you will not be able to simulate the design The optional pli switch prevents the use of pli functions to interrogate individual modules for information this switch may be used at any level of the design Combine both switches with ports pli or pli ports nodebug encrypts entire files The protect compiler directive allows you to encrypt regions within a file See ModelSim compiler directives UM 155 for details noincr Disables incremental compile previously turned on with incr Optional tnolibcell By default all modules compiled from a source library are treated as though they contain a celldefine compiler directive This option disables this default The celldefine directive only affects the PLI access routines acc_next_cell an
150. R 175 GUI changes UM 283 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ modifying display GR 189 see also windows Memory window window Memory window see also Memory window memory window add memory command CR 51 adding items to CR 51 memory displaying contents CR 198 memory listing CR 200 memory loading contents CR 201 memory saving contents CR 204 memory searching for patterns CR 206 menu options grayed out UM 274 menus Dataflow window GR 135 List window GR 160 Main window GR 24 Profiler windows GR 201 Source window GR 212 Wave window GR 222 merging coverage data UM 356 UM 398 merging coverage reports CR 322 messages UM 547 bad magic number UM 227 echoing CR 158 empty port name warning UM 553 exit codes UM 551 getting more information CR 331 UM 548 loading disbling with quiet CR 318 CR 367 lock message UM 553 long description UM 548 message system variables UM 538 metavalue detected UM 554 ModelSim message system UM 548 redirecting UM 536 sensitivity list warning UM 554 suppressing warnings from arithmetic packages UM 540 Tcl_init error UM 554 too few port connections UM 556 turning off assertion messages UM 540 VSIM license lost UM 557 warning suppressing UM 550 metavalue detected warning UM 554 MGC_LOCATION_MAP env variable UM 67 MGC_LOCATION_MAP variable UM 523 mindelays CR 364 MinGW gcc UM 571 UM 578 missed coverage branches GR 126 Missed Coverage pane GR 126 mixed language simulation UM 188 access limitatio
151. R 288 transcript transcript Syntax Arguments Examples See also The transcript command controls echoing of commands executed in a macro file If no option is specified the current setting is reported transcript om off q quietly on Specifies that commands in a macro file will be echoed to the Transcript pane as they are executed Optional off Specifies that commands in a macro file will not be echoed to the Transcript pane as they are executed Optional The transcribe command CR 287 can be used to force a command to be echoed q Returns 0 if transcripting is turned off or 1 if transcripting is turned on Useful in a Tcl conditional expression Optional quietly Turns off the transcript echo for all commands To turn off echoing for individual commands see the quietly command CR 241 Optional transcript on Commands within a macro file will be echoed to the Transcript pane as they are executed transcript If issued immediately after the previous example the message Macro transcripting is turned ON appears in the Transcript pane echo CR 158 transcribe CR 287 ModelSim SE Command Reference transcript file CR 289 transcript file Syntax Arguments Examples See also The transcript file command sets or queries the pathname for the transcript file You can use this command to clear a transcript in batch mode or to limit the size of a transcript file It offers an alternat
152. Required See also Chapter 15 Functional coverage with PSL and ModelSim Saving functional coverage data UM 397 feover reload command CR 173 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 178 find find The find command locates objects in the design whose names match the name specification you provide You must specify the type of object you want to find When searching for nets and signals the find command returns the full pathname of all nets signals registers variables and named events that match the name specification When searching for nets and signals the order in which arguments are specified is unimportant When searching for virtuals however all optional arguments must be specified before any object names The following rules are used by the find command to locate an object e If the name does not include a dataset name then the current dataset is used e If the name does not start with a path separator then the current context is used e If the name is a path separator followed by a name that is not the name of a top level design unit then the first top level design unit in the design is used e For arelative name containing a hierarchical path if the first object name cannot be found in the current context then an upward search is done up to the top of the design hierarchy to look for a matching object name e If no objects of the specified name can be found in the specified context then an upward search is done t
153. Sim Advanced Verification and Debugging SE Command Reference Version 6 0c Published 21 Jan 05 Y A gt pte ret link CR 2 Copyright Mentor Graphics Corporation 2005 All rights reserved This document contains information that is proprietary to Mentor Graphics Corporation The original recipient of this document may duplicate this document in whole or in part for internal business purposes only provided that this entire notice appears in all copies In duplicating any part of this document the recipient agrees to make every reasonable effort to prevent the unauthorized use and distribution of the proprietary information This document is for information and instruction purposes Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice and the reader should in all cases consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been made The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in written agreements between Mentor Graphics and its customers No representation or other affirmation of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor Graphics whatsoever MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
154. TRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government or a U S Government subcontractor is subject to the restrictions set forth in the license agreement under which Software was obtained pursuant to DFARS 227 7202 3 a or as set forth in subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Contractor manufacturer is Mentor Graphics Corporation 8005 SW Boeckman Road Wilsonville Oregon 97070 7777 USA 13 THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY For any Software under this Agreement licensed by Mentor Graphics from Microsoft or other licensors Microsoft or the applicable licensor is a third party beneficiary of this Agreement with the right to enforce the obligations set forth herein 14 AUDIT RIGHTS With reasonable prior notice Mentor Graphics shall have the right to audit during your normal business hours all records and accounts as may contain information regarding your compliance with the terms of this Agreement Mentor Graphics shall keep in confidence all information gained as a result of any audit Mentor ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 439 Graphics shall only use or disclose such information as necessary to enforce its rights under this Agreement CONTROLLING LAW AND JURISDICTION THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE GOVERNED BY AND CONSTRUED UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF OREGON USA IF YOU ARE LOCATED IN NORTH OR SOUTH AMERICA AND THE LAWS OF IRELAND IF YOU ARE
155. The statistics measure the simulation kernal process vsimk for a single invocation of vsim If you invoke vsim a second time or restart the simulation the current statistics are discarded and new values are collected If executed without arguments the command returns a list of pairs like the following elab memory 0 elab working set 7245824 elab time 0 942645 elab cpu time 0 190274 elab context 0 elab page faults 1549 memory 0 working set 0 time 0 cpu time 0 context 0 page faults 0 The elaboration statistics are measured one time at the end of elaboration The simulation memory statistics are measured at the time you invoke simstats The simulation time statistics are updated at the end of each run command See the arguments below for descriptions of each statistic Units for time values are in seconds Units for memory values vary by platform e For SunOS and Linux the memory size is reported in Kbytes e For HP UX the memory size is reported in the number of pages e For Windows the memory size is reported in bytes Some of the values may not be available on all platforms and other values may be approximates Different operating systems report these numbers differently simstats memory working time cpu context faults memory Returns the amount of virtual memory that the OS has allocated for vsimk Optional working Returns the portion of allocated virtual memory that is curr
156. UM 29 grayed out menu options UM 274 grouping files for compile UM 47 grouping objects Monitor window GR 215 GUI preferences saving GR 293 GUI_expression_format CR 22 GUI expression builder UM 253 syntax CR 23 H hardware model interface UM 630 hasX CR 24 Hazard ini file variable VLOG UM 527 hazards hazards argument to vlog CR 363 hazards argument to vsim CR 387 limitations on detection UM 135 help command CR 188 hierarchical reference support SystemC UM 183 hierarchical references SystemC HDL designs UM 192 hierarchical references mixed language UM 190 hierarchy driving signals in UM 421 UM 431 forcing signals in UM 97 UM 427 UM 436 referencing signals in UM 97 UM 424 UM 434 releasing signals in UM 97 UM 429 UM 438 viewing signal names without GR 261 highlighting in Source window GR 211 history of commands shortcuts for reuse CR 19 UM 605 history command CR 189 hm_entity UM 631 HOME environment variable UM 523 HP aCC restrictions on compiling with UM 169 T O splitio command CR 272 TextIO package UM 88 VCD files UM 457 icons shapes and meanings GR 15 ieee ini file variable UM 527 TEEE libraries UM 65 IEEE Std 1076 UM 30 differences between versions UM 75 TEEE Std 1364 UM 30 UM 113 IgnoreError ini file variable UM 534 IgnoreFailure ini file variable UM 534 IgnoreNote ini file variable UM 534 IgnoreVitalErrors ini file variable UM 529 IgnoreWarning ini file variable UM 534 implicit op
157. VENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICE GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM IN THE CASE WHERE NO AMOUNT WAS PAID MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER LIFE ENDANGERING ACTIVITIES NEITHER MENTOR GRAPHICS NOR ITS LICENSORS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OF SOFTWARE IN ANY APPLICATION WHERE THE FAILURE OR INACCURACY OF THE SOFTWARE MIGHT RESULT IN DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY INDEMNIFICATION YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS FROM ANY CLAIMS LOSS COST DAMAGE EXPENSE OR LIABILITY INCLUDING ATTORNEYS FEES ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF SOFTWARE AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 7 INFRINGEMENT 9 1 Mentor Graphics will defend or settle at its option and expense any action brought against you alleging that Software infringes a patent or copyright or misappropriates a trade secret in the United States Canada Japan or member state of the European Patent Office Mentor Graphics will pay any costs and damages finally awarded against you that are attributable to the infringement action You understand and agree that as conditions to Mentor Graphics obligations under this section you must a notify Mentor Graphics promptly in writing of the action b provide Mentor Graphics all reasonable information and assis
158. VSIM to create uncompressed checkpoint files Optional This option may also be specified with the CheckpointCompressMode UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file no_notifier Disables the toggling of the notifier register argument of all timing check system tasks Optional By default the notifier is toggled when there is a timing check violation and the notifier usually causes a UDP to propagate an X This argument suppresses X propagation in both Verilog and VITAL for the entire design You can suppress X propagation on individual instances using the tcheck_set command CR 277 nopsl Instructs ModelSim to ignore any PSL assertions that were compiled with the design By default vsim automatically invokes the PSL assertion engine at runtime if any assertions were compiled with the design no_tchk_msg Disables error messages generated when timing checks are violated Optional For Verilog it disables messages issued by timing check system tasks For VITAL it overrides the MsgOn arguments and generics ModelSim SE Command Reference vsim CR 381 Notifier registers are still toggled and may result in the propagation of Xs for timing check violations You can disable individual messages using the tcheck_set command CR 277 note lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Changes the severity level of the specified message s to note Optional Edit the note UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default
159. _cfg v libmap_verbose Displays library map pattern matching information during compilation Optional Use to troubleshoot problems with matching filename patterns in a library file librescan Scans libraries in command line order for all unresolved modules Optional line lt number gt Starts the compiler on the specified line in the Verilog source file Optional By default the compiler starts at the beginning of the file lint Instructs ModelSim to perform the following lint style checks 1 warn when Module ports are NULL 2 warn when assigning to an input port 3 warn when referencing undeclared variables nets in an instantiation 4 warn when an index for a Verilog unpacked variable array reference is out of bounds The warnings are reported as WARNING 8 Can also be enabled using the Show_Lint UM 168 variable in the modelsim ini file maxdelays Selects maximum delays from the min typ max expressions Optional If preferred you can defer delay selection until simulation time by specifying the same option to the simulator mindelays Selects minimum delays from the min typ max expressions Optional If preferred you can defer delay selection until simulation time by specifying the same option to the simulator nocheckALL Enables all nocheck arguments described below Optional Argument has an effect only when compiling gate level cell libraries with fast see above The nocheck switches increase the opti
160. a is placed into the saved file depends on the format specified by the format argument If you choose bin or hex format the file is populated from low to high to be compatible with readmem commands This is in contrast to the default mti format which populates the file according to the memory declaration from left index to right index You can use the mem save command to generate relocatable memory data files The noaddress option omits the address information from the memory data file You can later load the generated memory data file using the memory load command mem save format bin hex mti addressradix lt radix gt dataradix lt radix gt wordsperline lt Nwords gt startaddress lt st gt endaddress lt end gt noaddress compress lt path gt outfile lt filename gt format bin hex mti Specifies the output format The lt format_spec gt can be specified as bin hex or mti Optional The default format is mti The MTI memory pattern data format is described in mem load CR 201 addressradix lt radix gt Specifies the address radix for the default mti formatted files Optional The lt radix gt can be specified as dec or hex The default is the decimal representation dataradix lt radix gt Specifies the data radix for the default mti formatted files Optional The lt radix gt can be specified as symbolic binary octal decimal unsigned or hex You can change the default radix for the
161. able UM 536 STDOUT environment variable UM 524 step command CR 274 steps for simulation overview UM 24 stimulus applying to signals and nets GR 192 modifying for elaboration file UM 83 UM 139 stop command CR 275 struct of sc_signal lt T gt UM 180 subprogram inlining UM 74 subprogram write is ambiguous error fixing UM 90 Support UM 36 Suppress ini file variable UM 538 symbol mapping Dataflow window UM 313 symbolic constants displaying CR 356 symbolic link to design libraries UNIX UM 63 symbolic names assigning to signal values CR 356 Synopsis hardware modeler UM 630 synopsys ini file variable UM 527 Synopsys libraries UM 65 syntax highlighting GR 211 synthesis rule compliance checking CR 314 UM 529 GR 57 GR 66 system calls VCD UM 463 Verilog UM 146 system commands UM 481 system tasks Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ VCD UM 463 Verilog UM 146 Verilog XL compatible UM 150 system tasks and functions ModelSim Verilog UM 152 SystemC aggregates of signals ports UM 180 class and structure member naming syntax CR 13 compiling for source level debug UM 167 compiling optimized code UM 167 component declaration for instantiation UM 224 control function UM 192 converting sc_main UM 164 exporting sc_main example UM 165 exporting top level module UM 165 foreign module declaration UM 209 generic support instantiating VHDL UM 219 hierarchical reference support UM 183 hierarchical references in mixed designs UM 192 inst
162. age configurations will not be maintained after the simulation is restarted Optional The default is for assertion and functional coverage settings to be maintained after the simulation is restarted nobreakpoint Specifies that all breakpoints will be removed when the simulation is restarted Optional The default is for all breakpoints to be reinstalled after the simulation is restarted nolist Specifies that the current List window environment will not be maintained after the simulation is restarted Optional The default is for all currently listed HDL objects and their formats to be maintained nolog Specifies that the current logging environment will not be maintained after the simulation is restarted Optional The default is for all currently logged objects to continue to be logged ModelSim SE Command Reference restart CR 249 nowave Specifies that the current Wave window environment will not be maintained after the simulation is restarted Optional The default is for all objects displayed in the Wave window to remain in the window with the same format See also checkpoint CR 94 restore CR 250 vsim CR 375 Checkpointing and restoring simulations UM 86 The difference between checkpoint restore and restart UM 87 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 250 restore restore The restore command restores the state of a simulation that was saved with a checkpoint command CR 94 during the current invocatio
163. age exclude command CR 130 coverage reload command CR 132 coverage report command CR 133 coverage save command CR 137 Current Exclusions pane GR 127 data types supported UM 337 Details pane GR 129 display filter toolbar GR 133 enabling with vcom or vlog UM 339 enabling with vsim UM 340 excluding lines files UM 348 exclusion filter files UM 349 expression coverage UM 336 UM 358 important notes UM 338 Instance Coverage pane GR 128 Main window coverage data UM 341 merge utility UM 356 merging report files CR 132 merging reports CR 322 missed branches GR 126 missed coverage GR 126 pragma exclusions UM 348 reports UM 351 Source window data UM 342 source window details GR 130 statistics in Main window UM 341 toggle coverage UM 336 excluding signals CR 283 toggle details GR 129 vcover report command CR 324 Workspace pane GR 122 Code profiling UM 317 collapsing ports and coverage reporting UM 346 collapsing time and delta steps UM 232 colorization in Source window GR 211 columns hide showing in GUI GR 268 moving GR 268 sorting by GR 268 Combine Selected Signals dialog GR 167 combining signals busses CR 54 UM 265 command history GR 32 command line args accessing vsim sc_arg command CR 391 CommandiHistory ini file variable UM 533 command line arguments accessing UM 183 command line mode UM 27 commands main clear CR 43 abort CR 44 add button CR 45 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ add list CR 48 add memory CR 51 add
164. ailing tolerance of 5 ns compare add rebuild gold counterl count test counter2 cnt Causes signals test counter2 cnt_dd to be rebuilt into bus test counter2 cnt and compared against gold counter1 count compare annotate CR 99 compare clock CR 100 compare configure CR 102 compare continue CR 104 compare delete CR 105 compare end CR 106 compare info CR 107 compare list CR 108 compare options CR 109 compare reload CR 113 compare reset CR 114 compare run CR 115 compare savediffs CR 116 compare saverules CR 117 compare see CR 118 compare start CR 120 compare stop CR 122 compare update CR 123 and Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference compare annotate CR 99 compare annotate Syntax Arguments Examples See also The compare annotate command either flags a comparison difference as ignore or adds a text string annotation to the difference The text string appears when the difference is viewed in info popups or in the output of a compare info command CR 107 compare annotate ignore noignore text lt message gt lt idNuml gt lt idNum2 gt ignore Flags the specified difference as ignore Optional noignore Undoes a previous ignore command Optional text lt message gt Adds a text string annotation to the difference that is shown wherever the difference is viewed Optional lt idNum1 gt Identifies the difference numb
165. al nohide command CR 347 virtual nolog command CR 348 virtual objects UM 233 virtual functions UM 234 virtual regions UM 235 virtual signals UM 233 virtual types UM 235 virtual region command CR 350 UM 235 virtual regions reconstruct the RTL hierarchy in gate level design UM 235 virtual save command CR 351 UM 234 virtual show command CR 352 virtual signal command CR 353 UM 233 virtual signals reconstruct RTL level design busses UM 234 reconstruct the original RTL hierarchy UM 234 virtual hide command UM 234 virtual type command CR 356 visibility column in structure tab UM 228 VITAL compiling and simulating with accelerated VITAL packages UM 95 compliance warnings UM 94 disabling optimizations for debugging UM 95 specification and source code UM 93 VITAL packages UM 93 vital95 ini file variable UM 527 vlib command CR 358 vlog enabling code coverage UM 339 vlog command CR 360 vlog opt file GR 61 GR 70 vlog95compat ini file variable UM 528 vmake command CR 371 vmap command CR 372 vopt gui access GR 75 vopt command CR 373 UM 124 VoptFlow ini file variable UM 536 VPI registering applications UM 565 VPI PLI UM 158 UM 562 compiling and linking C applications UM 570 compiling and linking C applications UM 577 vsim build date and version CR 394 vsim command CR 375 VSIM license lost UM 557 vsim differences with OSCI simulator UM 182 VSOUT temp file UM 525 W Warning ini file variable UM 538 WARNING 8 lint argument
166. all languages CR 376 e Arguments VHDL CR 386 e Arguments Verilog CR 387 e Arguments SystemC CR 391 e Arguments object CR 392 Arguments all languages assertfile lt filename gt Designates an alternative file for recording assertion messages Optional By default assertion messages are output to the file specified by the TranscriptFile variable in the modelsim ini file see Creating a transcript file UM 539 assume Simulates PSL assume directives as though they were assert directives Optional Default This option may also be specified with the SimulateAssumeDirectives UM 535 variable in the modelsim ini file See Processing assume directives in simulation UM 365 for more information C Specifies that the simulator is to be run in command line mode Optional Also see ModelSim modes of operation UM 27 for more information csupv2 Instructs vsim to use usr lib libCsup_v2 sl for shared object loading Optional Use this argument only on HP UX 11 00 when you have compiled FLI PLI VPI C code with aCC s AA option This option may also be specified with the UseCsupV2 UM 536 variable in the modelsim ini file compress_elab Compresses an elaboration file when it is created Optional See Simulating with an elaboration file UM 138 for more information coverage Enables Code Coverage statistics collection during simulation Optional See Chapter 13 Measuring code coverage for more information
167. alls UM 409 registers values of displaying in Objects window GR 190 saving as binary log file UM 226 waveforms viewing GR 217 report simulator control UM 522 simulator state UM 522 report command CR 246 reporting code coverage UM 351 variable settings CR 17 RequireConfigForAl DefaultBinding variable UM 529 resolution in SystemC simulation UM 174 mixed designs UM 191 overriding in SystemC UM 174 returning as a real UM 96 specifying with t argument CR 382 verilog simulation UM 129 VHDL simulation UM 78 Resolution ini file variable UM 535 resolution simulator state variable UM 544 resource libraries UM 64 restart command CR 248 defaults UM 541 in GUI GR 30 toolbar button GR 39 GR 133 GR 228 Restart dialog GR 93 restore command CR 250 restoring defaults UM 522 results saving simulations UM 225 resume command CR 251 right command CR 252 RTL level design busses reconstructing UM 234 run command CR 254 RunLength ini file variable UM 535 Runtime Options dialog GR 90 S Save Memory dialog GR 183 saving simulation options in a project UM 48 waveforms UM 225 saving simulations UM 86 UM 142 sc_argc function UM 183 sc_argv function UM 183 sc_clock functions moving UM 164 sc_cycle function UM 182 sc_fifo UM 181 sc_foreign_module UM 217 and parameters UM 211 sc_initialize removing calls UM 182 sc_main function UM 182 sc_main function converting UM 164 SC_MODULE_EXPORT macro UM 165 sc_set_time_resolutio
168. allstacks are not shown in the report Chapter 12 Profiling performance and memory use UM 317 profile clear CR 227 profile interval CR 228 profile off CR 229 profile on CR 230 profile option CR 231 profile reload CR 232 profile on run 1000 ns profile report file perf rpt This set of commands enables the statistical sampling profiler runs the simulation for 1000 nanoseconds and outputs the calltree profiling data to a file named perf rpt profile report ranked cutoff 2 Outputs ranked profile data for instances accounting for greater than 2 of the simulation time profile report file perf rpt instofdef top c s0 Outputs to file perf rpt ranked profile data for all instances that use the same entity as does instance top c s0 ModelSim SE Command Reference project Syntax Arguments Examples project CR 235 The project commands are used to perform common operations on projects Some of the project commands must be used outside of a simulation session project addfile lt filename gt close compileall delete lt project gt env history new lt home_dir gt lt proj_name gt lt defaultlibrary gt lt use_current gt open lt project gt removefile lt filename gt addfile lt filename gt Adds the specified file to the current open project Optional close Closes the current project Optional Must be used outside of a simulation session compileall Com
169. ally an object_list_file and writes out another WLF file containing filtered information from those sources You determine the filtered information with the arguments you specify e wlfman profile generates a report of the estimated percentage of file space that each signal is taking in the specified WLF file This command can identify signals that account for a large percentage of the WLF file size e g a logged memory that uses a zero delay integer loop to initialize the memory You may be able to drastically reduce WLF file size by not logging those signals wifman merge combines two WLF files with different signals into one WLF file It does not combine wlf files containing the same signals at different runtime ranges i e mixedhdl_Ons_100ns wlf amp mixedhdl_100ns_200ns wlf The different modes are intended to be used together For example you might run wlfman profile and identify a signal that accounts for 50 of the WLF file size If you don t actually need that signal you can then run wlfman filter to remove it from the WLF file wlfman info lt wlffile gt wlfman items n lt wltfiile gt wlfman filter begin lt time gt end lt time gt f lt object_list_file gt r lt object gt s lt symbol gt t lt resolution gt lt sourcewlffile gt lt outwlffile gt wlfman profile rank top lt number gt lt wlffile gt wlfman merge noopt opt o lt outwlffile gt lt wlffilel gt lt wl
170. als found Optional in Turns off logging only for ports of mode IN whose names match the specification Optional inout Turns off logging only for ports of mode INOUT whose names match the specification Optional internal Turns off logging only for internal non port objects whose names match the specification Optional 0ut Turns off logging only for ports of mode OUT whose names match the specification Optional ports Specifies that the scope of the search is to include all ports Optional recursive Specifies that the scope of the search is to descend recursively into subregions Optional If omitted the search is limited to the selected region You can use the depth argument to specify how far down the hierarchy to descend ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 212 nolog reset Turns logging back on for all unlogged signals Optional lt object_name gt Specifies the object name which you want to unlog Optional Multiple object names may be specified Wildcard characters are allowed Examples nolog r Unlogs all objects in the design nolog reset Turns logging back on for all unlogged signals See also add list CR 48 add wave CR 53 log CR 193 ModelSim SE Command Reference notepad CR 213 notepad The notepad command opens a simple text editor It may be used to view and edit ASCII files or create new files This mode can be changed from the Notepad Edit menu Returns nothing Synta
171. aluator to cause it to be treated as SIGNED use casting as described below Numeric operations supported on arrays are performed by the expression evaluator via ModelSim s built in numeric_standard and similar package routines The expression evaluator selects the appropriate numeric routine based on SIGNED or UNSIGNED properties of the array arguments and the result The enumeration types supported are any VHDL enumerated type Enumeration literals may be used in the expression as long as some variable of that enumeration type is referenced in the expression This is useful for sub expressions of the form memory state reading The supported SystemC aggregate types are the C C array types union class structure and array Also supported are the SystemC array types sc_bv lt w gt sc_lv lt w gt sc_int lt w gt etc ModelSim SE Command Reference GUI_expression_format CR 23 Expression syntax GUI expressions generally follow C language syntax with both VHDL specific and Verilog specific conventions supported These expressions are not parsed by the Tcl parser and so do not support general Tcl parentheses should be used rather than curly braces Procedure calls are not supported A GUI expression can include the following elements Tcl macros constants array constants variables array variables signal attributes operators and casting Tcl macros Macros are useful for pre defined constants or for entire express
172. alues to look forward in time If units are specified the lt time gt option must be enclosed in curly braces See the examples below for more details lt expressionString gt A text string expression in the MTI GUI expression format that defines the signal and subelement concatenation Can also be a literal constant or computed subexpression Required For details on syntax please see Syntax and conventions CR 9 lt name gt The name you define for the virtual signal Required Case is ignored unless installed in a Verilog region Use alpha numeric and underscore characters only unless you are using VHDL extended identifier notation If using VHDL extended identifier notation lt name gt needs to be quoted with double quotes or with curly braces ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 354 virtual signal Examples virtual signal env sim chip alu concat_range 4 downto 0 a_04 amp a_03 amp a_02 amp a_Ol amp a_00 J a Reconstructs a bus sim chip alu a 4 downto 0 using VHDL notation assuming that a_ii are all scalars of the same type virtual signal env sim chip alu concat_range 4 0 amp a_04 a_03 a_02 a_01 a_00 a Reconstructs a bus sim chip alu a 4 0 using Verilog notation Note that the concatenation notation starts with amp rather than virtual signal install sim testbench chipa alu a 19 downto 13 amp chipa decode inst amp chipa mode stuff Creates a signal sim
173. and Reference vsim CR 391 sv_lib lt shared_obj gt Specifies the name of the DPI shared object with no extension Required for use with DPI import libraries sv_liblist lt filename gt Specifies the name of a bootstrap file containing names of DPI shared objects to load Optional sv_root lt dirname gt Specifies the directory name to be used as the prefix for DPI shared object lookups Optional transport_path_delays Selects transport mode for path delays Optional By default path delays operate in inertial mode pulses smaller than the delay are filtered In transport mode narrow pulses are propagated through path delays Note that this option affects path delays only and not primitives Primitives always operate in inertial delay mode typdelays Selects the typical value in min typ max expressions Default Has no effect if you specified the min typ max selection at compile time v2k_int_delays Causes interconnect delays to be visible at the load module port per the IEEE 1364 2001 spec Optional By default ModelSim annotates INTERCONNECT delays in a manner compatible with Verilog XL If you have sdf_annotate calls in your design that are not getting executed add the Verilog task sdf_done after your last sdf_annotate to remove any zero delay MIPDs that may have been created see ModelSim Verilog system tasks and functions UM 152 for more information May be used in tandem with the multisource_int_delays
174. and acts like a breakpoint at the time it is evaluated Syntax quit force sim Arguments f force Quits without asking for confirmation Optional If omitted ModelSim asks you for confirmation before exiting The f and force arguments are equivalent sim Unloads the current design in the simulator without exiting ModelSim All files opened by the simulation will be closed including the WLF file vsim wif ModelSim SE Command Reference radix Syntax Arguments radix CR 243 The radix command specifies the default radix to be used for the current simulation The command can be used at any time The specified radix is used for all commands force CR 182 examine CR 164 change CR 82 etc as well as for displayed values in the Objects Locals Dataflow List and Wave windows You can change the default radix permanently by editing the DefaultRadix UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file radix symbolic binary octal decimal hexadecimal unsigned ascii Entries may be truncated to any length For example symbolic could be expressed as s or sy etc Optional Also signed may be used as an alias for decimal The unsigned radix will display as unsigned decimal The ascii radix will display a Verilog object as a string equivalent using 8 bit character encoding If no arguments are used the command returns the current default radix ModelSim SE Command Reference
175. and secondary are optional excluded Writes out the files and lines that are currently being excluded by the user from the coverage analysis Shows both pragma and user based exclusions unless pragma or user are specified Optional This is the same information that is shown in the Current Exclusions pane GR 127 pragma When used with the excluded argument writes out only lines currently being excluded by pragmas Optional user When used with the excluded argument writes out files and lines currently being excluded by the coverage exclude command Optional do When used with the excluded argument writes out files and lines currently excluded and specified by the pragma and user options but writes the exclusions in Tcl format using coverage exclude add commands rather than exclusion file format Optional file lt filename gt Specifies a file name for the report Optional Default is to write the report to the Transcript pane Environment variables may be used in the pathname instance lt pathname gt Writes out the source file summary coverage data for the selected instance Optional library lt libname gt Only needs to be used when you have packages of the same name in different libraries Optional lines Writes out the source file summary data and after each file it writes out the details for each executable line in the file Optional dump Writes coverage data even when objects are 100 covered O
176. andard 1 Source directory C modelsim_examples memory vlog_memory r Prints architecture information for each entity in the output a Ll Lists the contents of all libraries listed in the Library section of the active modelsim ini file Optional See Library library path variables UM 527 for more information lib lt library_name gt Specifies the logical name or the pathname of the library to be listed Optional By default the contents of the work library are listed lt design_unit gt Indicates the design unit to search for within the specified library If the design unit is a VHDL entity its architectures are listed Optional By default all entities configurations modules packages and optimized design units in the specified library are listed Examples vdir lib design my_asic Lists the architectures associated with the entity named my_asic that reside in the HDL design library called design ModelSim SE Command Reference verror Syntax Arguments Example verror CR 331 The verror command prints a detailed description about a message number It may also point to additional documentation related to the error verror all kind lt tool gt fmt ranges lt msgNum gt all kind lt tool gt Prints all error messages Optional If you specify kind lt tool gt it prints just those error messages associated with the specified tool fmt Prints the format string that is used in the actual
177. antiation criteria in Verilog design UM 214 instantiation criteria in VHDL design UM 223 Link dialog GR 73 linking the compiled source UM 172 maintaining design portability UM 168 mapping states in mixed designs UM 202 VHDL UM 202 master slave library including CR 258 mixed designs with Verilog UM 188 mixed designs with VHDL UM 188 observe function UM 192 parameter support Verilog instances UM 211 prim channel aggregates UM 180 replacing sc_start UM 164 sc_clock moving to SC_CTOR UM 164 sc_fifo UM 181 simulating UM 173 source code modifying for ModelSim UM 164 specifying shared library path command CR 391 stack space for threads UM 184 state based code initializing and cleanup UM 175 troubleshooting UM 184 unsupported functions UM 182 verification library including CR 257 viewable debug gable objects UM 176 viewing FIFOs UM 181 virtual functions UM 175 SystemC modules exporting for use in Verilog UM 214 exporting for use in VHDL UM 224 SystemVerilog enabling with sv argument CR 367 suppported implementation details UM 30 SystemVerilog DPI registering DPlapplications UM 567 specifying the DPI file to load UM 583 T tab groups GR 22 tab stops Source window GR 211 tb command CR 276 tcheck_set command CR 277 tcheck_status command CR 279 Tcl UM 474 UM 484 command separator UM 480 command substitution UM 479 command syntax UM 476 evaluation order UM 480 history shortcuts CR 19 UM 605 Man Pages in Help menu GR 3
178. aracter you wish to be recorded in the VCD file For example to map L and H to z ved file map L z H z Note that the quotes in the example above are a Tcl convention for command strings that include spaces nomap Affects only VHDL signals of type std_logic Optional It specifies that the values recorded in the VCD file shall use the std_logic enumeration characters of UX01ZWLH This option results in a non standard VCD file because VCD values are limited to the four state character set of x01z By default the std_logic characters are mapped as follows ModelSim SE Command Reference vcd file CR 305 See also See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files Verilog tasks are documented in the IEEE 1364 standard ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 306 vcd files vcd files The ved files command specifies a filename and state mapping for a VCD file created by a ved add command CR 294 The ved files command is optional If used it must be issued before any ved add commands Related Verilog task fdumpfile Syntax ved files compress lt filename gt map lt mapping pairs gt nomap Arguments compress Produces a compressed VCD file Optional ModelSim uses the gzip compression algorithm If you specify a gz extension on the file lt filename gt argument ModelSim compresses the file even if you don t use the compress argument
179. associated with each cover directive e g count from the output Details are included by default Optional recursive For use with wildcard matching and reporting aggregated statistics by design unit Specifies that the scope of the matching is to descend recursively into subregions If omitted the search is limited to the selected region xml Formats the report data in XML Optional Zero Specifies that only objects with coverage counts of exactly zero be included in the report Takes precedence over the above and below values This is a useful option for locating coverage holes i e coverage events that never happened during simulation Optional Examples fcover report r Reports all cover directives to the Transcript pane fcover report r du memory file report txt xml Saves an XML report to file report txt for design unit memory only fcover report aggregated r top modulel Reports on directives in and beneath top module including aggregated statistics See also Chapter 15 Functional coverage with PSL and ModelSim Reporting functional coverage statistics UM 393 vcover report command CR 324 ModelSim SE Command Reference fcover save CR 177 fcover save The fcover save command saves the current functional coverage database to a re loadable file Syntax fcover save lt filename gt Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the file to be created If the file already exists it is replaced
180. ataset open last wlf test Opens the dataset file last wlf and assigns it the logical name fest dataset alias CR 138 dataset list CR 142 dataset save CR 145 vsim CR 375 view option ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 144 dataset rename dataset rename Syntax Arguments Examples See also The dataset rename command changes the logical name of a dataset to the new name you specify dataset rename lt logicalname gt lt newlogicalname gt lt logicalname gt Specifies the existing logical name of the dataset Required lt newlogicalname gt Specifies the new logical name for the dataset Required dataset rename test test2 Renames the dataset file test to test2 dataset alias CR 138 dataset list CR 142 dataset open CR 143 ModelSim SE Command Reference dataset save CR 145 dataset save The dataset save command writes data from the current simulation to the specified file This lets you save simulation data while the simulation is still in progress Syntax dataset save lt datasetname gt lt filename gt Arguments lt datasetname gt Specifies the name of the dataset you want to save Required lt filename gt Specifies the name of the file to save Required Examples dataset save sim gold wlf Saves all current log data in the sim dataset to the file gold wlf See also dataset snapshot CR 146 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 146 dataset snapshot dataset snapshot The
181. atching in simulator commands CR 17 Windows Main window text editing UM 607 Source window text editing UM 607 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ windows Active Processes pane GR 114 buttons adding to GR 112 code coverage statistics UM 341 Dataflow window UM 300 GR 134 toolbar GR 138 zooming UM 305 Functional coverage browser GR 149 List window UM 243 GR 159 display properties of UM 260 formatting HDL items UM 260 output file CR 426 saving data to a file UM 264 saving the format of CR 424 setting triggers UM 266 UM 267 GR 169 Locals window GR 172 Main window GR 17 adding user defined buttons CR 45 status bar GR 23 time and delta display GR 23 toolbar GR 38 Memory window GR 175 monitor GR 214 Objects window GR 190 opening from command line CR 334 with the GUI GR 27 Process window GR 149 specifying next process to be executed GR 149 viewing processing in the region GR 149 Signals window VHDL and Verilog items viewed in GR 190 Source window GR 205 viewing HDL source code GR 205 Variables window VHDL and Verilog items viewed in GR 172 Wave window UM 240 GR 217 adding HDL items to UM 244 cursor measurements UM 245 display properties UM 255 display range zoom changing UM 249 format file saving UM 262 path elements changing CR 126 UM 536 time cursors UM 245 zooming UM 249 WLF file collapsing deltas CR 384 collapsing time steps CR 384 WLF files collapsing events UM 232 converting to VCD CR 417 creating from
182. ated when the objects change value Optional Default width lt n gt Specifies the column width in characters Optional window lt wname gt Adds objects to the specified List window lt wname gt e g list2 Optional Used to specify a particular window when multiple instances of that window type exist Selects an existing window does not create a new window Use the view command CR 334 with the new option to create a new window lt object_name gt Specifies the name of the object to be listed Optional Wildcard characters are allowed Note that the WildcardFilter Tcl preference variable identifies types to ignore when matching objects with wildcard patterns Variables may be added if preceded by the process name For example add list myproc int1 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 50 add list Examples See also lt object_name gt sigl sig2 sig3 Creates a user defined bus with the specified object name The sigi entries are signals to be concatenated within the user defined bus Optional Specified objects may be either scalars or various sized arrays as long as they have the same element enumeration type add list r Lists all objects in the design add list Lists all objects in the region add list in Lists all input ports in the region a add list a label sig top lower sig array_sig 9 to 23 Displays a List window containing three columns headed a sig and array_sig 9 t
183. aths are relative to the directory in which compiles originally occurred This argument makes it possible to copy and evaluate generated makefiles within directories that are different from where compiles originally occurred help Displays the command s options and arguments Optional lt library_name gt Specifies the library name if none is specified then work is assumed Optional gt lt makefile gt Specifies the makefile name Optional To produce a makefile for the work library vmake gt makefile You can also run vmake on libraries other than work vmake mylib gt mylib mak To rebuild mylib specify its makefile when you run MAKE make f mylib mak ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 372 vmap vmap The vmap command defines a mapping between a logical library name and a directory by modifying the modelsim ini file With no arguments vmap reads the appropriate modelsim ini file s and prints the current logical library to physical directory mappings Returns nothing Syntax vmap help c del lt logical_name gt lt path gt Arguments help Displays the command s options and arguments Optional p Copies the default modelsim ini file from the ModelSim installation directory to the current directory Optional This argument is intended only for making a copy of the default modelsim ini file to the current directory Do not use it while making your library mappings or the mappings may end
184. ating stimulus with Waveform Editor ModelSim SE Command Reference when Syntax Arguments when CR 409 The when command instructs ModelSim to perform actions when the specified conditions are met For example you can use the when command to break on a signal value or at a specific simulator time see Time based breakpoints CR 413 Use the nowhen command CR 215 to deactivate when commands The when command uses a when_condition_expression to determine whether or not to perform the action Conditions can include the following HDL objects VHDL signals and Verilog nets and registers The when_condition_expression uses a simple restricted language that is not related to Tcl which permits only four operators and operands that may be either HDL object names signame event or constants ModelSim evaluates the condition every time any object in the condition changes hence the restrictions Here are some additional points to keep in mind about the when command e The when command creates the equivalent of a VHDL process or a Verilog always block It does not work like a looping construct you might find in other languages such as C e Virtual signals functions regions types etc cannot be used in the when command Neither can simulator state variables other than now e With no arguments when will list the currently active when statements and their labels explicit or implicit when label lt label gt id lt id
185. atistical performance or memory allocation data that has been gathered during previous run commands profile interval CR 228 selects the frequency with which the profiler collects samples during a run command profile off CR 229 disables runtime statistical performance and memory allocation profiling profile on CR 230 enables runtime profiling of where your simulation is spending its time and where memory is allocated profile option CR 231 allows various profiling options to be changed profile reload CR 232 reads in raw profile data from an external file created during memory allocation profiling profile report CR 233 produces a textual output of the profiling statistics that have been gathered up to this point project CR 235 performs common operations on new projects property list CR 236 changes one or more properties of the specified signal net or register in the List window GR 159 property wave CR 237 changes one or more properties of the specified signal net or register in the Wave window GR 217 push CR 239 moves one level down the C callstack pwd CR 240 displays the current directory path in the Main window quietly CR 241 turns off transcript echoing for the specified command quit CR 242 exits the simulator radix CR 243 specifies the default radix to be used ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 38 C
186. atus commands VSIM paused gt status Macro resume_test do at line 3 Current macro command executing pause is Interrupted ONBREAK commands resume Macro startup do at line 34 command executing run 1000 processing BREAKPOINT is Interrupted ONBREAK commands resume VSIM paused gt resume Resuming execution of macro resume_test do at line 4 abort CR 44 do CR 153 pause CR 219 resume CR 251 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 274 step step Syntax Arguments See also The step command steps to the next HDL or C statement Current values of local HDL variables may be observed at this time using the Locals window VHDL procedures and functions Verilog tasks and functions and C functions can optionally be skipped over When a wait statement or end of process is encountered time advances to the next scheduled activity The Process and Source windows will then be updated to reflect the next activity step over lt n gt over Specifies that VHDL procedures and functions Verilog tasks and functions and C functions should be executed but treated as simple statements instead of entered and traced line by line Optional lt n gt Any integer Optional Will execute n steps before returning run CR 254 ModelSim SE Command Reference stop Syntax Arguments See also stop CR 275 The stop command is used with the when command CR 409 to stop simu
187. available Tk commands incrTCL ModelSim SE Command Reference Lists all available incrTCL commands history CR 189 history The history command lists the commands you have executed during the current session History is a Tcl command For more information consult the Tcl Man Pages Syntax history clear keep lt value gt Arguments clear Clears the history buffer Optional keep lt value gt Specifies the number of executed commands to keep in the history buffer Optional The default is 50 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 190 lecho lecho The lecho command takes one or more Tcl lists as arguments and pretty prints them to the Transcript pane Returns nothing Syntax lecho lt S6gS gt sgi Arguments lt args gt Any Tcl list created by a command or user procedure Examples lecho configure wave Prints the Wave window configuration list to the Transcript pane ModelSim SE Command Reference left Syntax Arguments left CR 191 The left command searches left previous for signal transitions or values in the specified Wave window It executes the search on signals currently selected in the window starting at the time of the active cursor The active cursor moves to the found location Use this command to move to consecutive transitions or to find the time at which a waveform takes on a particular value or an expression of multiple signals evaluates to true See the right command CR 252 fo
188. avewin lt name gt addwave Specifies that new comparison objects are added automatically to the Wave window Optional Default You can specify that objects aren t added automatically using the noaddwave argument Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultAddToWave hide Hides all comparisons except those that have at least one difference Optional Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultHideIfNoDiffs noaddwave Specifies that new comparison objects are not added automatically to the Wave window Optional The default is to add comparison objects automatically Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultAddToWave show Shows all comparisons even if they don t have any differences Optional Default Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultHideIfNoDiffs ignoreVlogStrengths Specifies that Verilog net strengths should be ignored when comparing two Verilog nets Optional Default Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultIgnoreVerilogStrengths noignoreVlogStrengths Specifies that Verilog net strengths should not be ignored when comparing two Verilog nets Optional Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultIgnore VerilogStrengths listwin lt name gt Causes specified comparisons to be displayed in the specified List window Optional Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultListWindow ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 110 compare options maxsignal lt n gt Specifies an upper limit for the total
189. back off To use this command first enable profiling with the profile on command CR 230 profile option collapse_sections on off status collapse_sections Groups profiling data by section A section consists of regions of code such as VHDL processes functions or Verilog always blocks By default all profiling data are reported on a per line basis on off status Specifies whether to enable disable or report the status of the profile options Optional If omitted the profile option command acts as a toggle Chapter 12 Profiling performance and memory use UM 317 profile clear CR 227 profile interval CR 228 profile off CR 229 profile on CR 230 profile reload CR 232 profile report CR 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 232 profile reload profile reload Syntax Arguments See also The profile reload command reads in raw profile data from an external file created during memory allocation profiling The profile report command CR 233 and the Profile and Profile Details panes of the user interface can be used to view the data The intent of the raw profile files is to allow analysis of memory profile data in cases where the memory required for the design plus the memory required for internal profiling data exceeds the memory capacity of the machine To use this command you must first use the m file lt filename gt or the m fileonly lt filename gt arguments with the profile on command CR
190. bering starts with 0 i e first letter 0 second letter 1 third letter 2 etc Optional Default is 21 which indicates no shortcut is to be used add_menuitem Swname user Save Results As Smy_save_cmd add_menu CR 57 add_menucb CR 59 add_separator CR 61 add_submenu CR 62 change_menu_cmd CR 84 The add_menuitem command is also used as part of the add_menu CR 57 example ModelSim SE Command Reference add_separator CR 61 add_separator Syntax Arguments Examples See also The add_separator command adds a separator as the next item in the specified menu path in the specified window Returns nothing add_separator lt window_name gt lt menu_path gt lt window_name gt Tk path of the window containing the menu Required The path for the Main window must be expressed as All other window pathnames begin with a period lt menu_path gt Name of the Tk menu widget plus submenu path Required add_separator Swname user add_menu CR 57 add_menucb CR 59 add_menuitem CR 60 add_submenu CR 62 change_menu_cmd CR 84 The add_separator command is also used as part of the add_menu CR 57 example ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 62 add submenu add_ submenu The add_submenu command creates a cascading submenu within the specified menu path of the specified window May be used within a submenu Returns the full Tk path to the new submenu widget Syntax add_submenu
191. bines them using the correct path separator context parent lt name gt Returns the parent path of the name by removing the tail see context tail context path lt name gt Returns the pathname portion of the name removing the dataset name context split lt name gt Returns a list whose elements are the path components in the name The first element of the list will be the dataset name if one is present in the name including the dataset separator For example context split foo bar baz returns foo bar baz context tail lt name gt Returns all of the characters in the name after the last path separator If the name contains no separators then returns the name Any trailing path separator is discarded context type lt name gt Returns a string giving the acc type of the name lt name gt Name of a context object or region Required Does not have to be a valid object name unless the specified option requires this i e exists or isInst ModelSim SE Command Reference coverage clear CR 129 coverage clear Syntax Arguments Example See also The coverage clear command clears all code coverage statement and branch counts obtained during previous run commands and unloads the current exclusion filter file coverage clear lt filename gt all excluded user pragma lt filename gt Specifies the name of the file you wish to clear Optional all Clears all statement branch condition expression
192. bjects of interest with the power add command CR 222 2 Run the simulation with the run command CR 254 3 Produce the report with the power report command power report all noheader file lt filename gt all Writes information on all objects logged Optional noheader Suppresses the header to aid in post processing Optional file lt filename gt Specifies a filename for the power report Optional Default is to write the report to the Transcript pane The report format for each line is signal path toggle count hazard count time at a 1 time at a 0 time at an X e toggle count is the number of 0 gt 1 and 1 gt 0 transitions e hazard count is the number of 0 1 gt X and X gt 0 1 transitions Note that if a signal is initialized at X and later transitions to 0 or 1 it is not counted as a hazard e times are the times spent at each of the three respective states You will also need to know the total simulation time power add CR 222 power reset CR 224 See the Synopsys Power documentation for more information ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 224 power reset power reset The power reset command selectively resets power information to zero for the signals or nets specified with the power add command CR 222 Returns nothing Syntax power reset all in ineout out internal ports r lt signalsOrNets gt Arguments ll Resets all signals nets Optional in Rese
193. bp UM 408 Equivalent to selecting Tools gt C Debug gt Auto find bp debug_on Enables the C Debugger Equivalent to selecting Tools gt C Debug gt Start C Debug enable_auto_step onloff Enables disables auto step mode See Identifying all registered function calls UM 409 Equivalent to selecting Tools gt C Debug gt Enable auto step init_mode_complete Continues loading the design without stopping at functions calls See Debugging functions during elaboration UM 412 Equivalent to selecting Tools gt C Debug gt Complete load init_mode_setup Enables initialization mode See Debugging functions during elaboration UM 412 Equivalent to selecting Tools gt C Debug gt Init mode interrupt Reactivates the C debugger when stopped in HDL code Equivalent to selecting Tools gt C Debug gt C Interrupt or clicking the C Interrupt toolbar button keep_user_init_bps onloff Specifies whether breakpoints set during initialization mode are retained after the design finishes loading See Debugging functions during elaboration UM 412 Equivalent to toggling the Keep user init bps button in the C Debug setup dialog quit Quits the C Debugger Equivalent to selecting Tools gt C Debug gt Quit C Debug refresh_source_window Re opens a C source file if you close the Source window inadvertently while stopped in the C debugger Equivalent to selecting Tools gt C Debug gt Refresh ModelSim SE Command Refer
194. can change the permanent default by setting the AssertionPassEnable UM 532 variable in the modelsim ini file enable Turns on pass tracking for the specified assertions Optional Assertion pass tracking is disabled by default You can change the permanent default by setting the AssertionPassEnable UM 532 variable in the modelsim ini file limit lt count gt none Sets a limit on the number of times ModelSim responds to an assertion pass Optional By default the limit is set to 1 One of the following values is required lt count gt Specify a whole number none No limit pass tracking remains enabled for the duration of the simulation This limit is global it is applied to each assertion in the simulation Once the limit is reached for a particular assertion ModelSim disables pass tracking on that assertion ModelSim continues to respond to others if their limit has not been reached You can change the permanent default by setting the AssertionPassLimit UM 532 variable in the modelsim ini file log on off Specify whether to write a transcript message when an assertion passes This option may be specified multiple times it applies to all paths that follow it in the command line One of the following values is required on Enable transcript logging Default off Disable transcript logging You can change the permanent default by setting the AssertionPassLog UM 532 variable in the modelsim ini file recursive For use
195. cell or when you want to place breakpoints on source lines that have been optimized out Enable PE level optimization with O1 Optional Note that changing from the default O4 to O1 may cause event order differences in your simulation Enable standard SE optimizations with O4 Default The main differences between 04 and O1 are that ModelSim attempts to improve memory management for vectors and accelerate VITAL Level 1 modules with O4 Enable maximum optimization with O5 Optional We recommend use of this switch with large sequential blocks only other uses may significantly increase compile times O5 attempts to optimize loops and prevents variable assignments in situations where a variable is assigned but is not actually used Using the ace argument to vecom will cancel this latter optimization pedanticerrors Forces ModelSim to error rather than warn on a variety of conditions These conditions include 1 when a choice in a case statement is not a locally static expression 2 when an array aggregate with multiple choices doesn t have a locally static others choice 3 when a generate statement without a BEGIN keyword exists between the declarative objects and the concurrent statements 4 an actual that is an expression is associated with a formal port whose mode is not IN Optional This argument overrides nocasestaticerror and noothersstaticerror see above performdefaultbinding Enables default binding when it
196. cense fee is paid or as authorized by Mentor Graphics A site is restricted to a one half mile 800 meter radius Mentor Graphics standard policies and programs which vary depending on Software license fees paid or service plan purchased apply to the following and are subject to change a relocation of Software b use of Software which may be limited for example to execution of a single session by a single user on the authorized hardware or for a restricted period of time such limitations may be communicated and technically implemented through the use of authorization codes or similar devices c support services provided including eligibility to receive telephone support updates modifications and revisions Current standard policies and programs are available upon request ESD SOFTWARE If you purchased a license to use embedded software development ESD Software Mentor Graphics grants to you a nontransferable nonexclusive license to reproduce and distribute executable files created using ESD compilers including the ESD run time libraries distributed with ESD C and C compiler Software that are linked into a composite program as an integral part of your compiled computer program provided that you distribute these files only in conjunction with your compiled computer program Mentor Graphics does NOT grant you any right to duplicate or incorporate copies of Mentor Graphics real time operating systems or other ESD Softwar
197. cent gt below propagates to the output as an X If the rejection limit is not specified then it defaults to the error limit For example consider an interconnect delay of 10 along with a pulse_int_e 80 option The error limit is 80 of 10 and the rejection limit defaults to 80 of 10 This results in the propagation of pulses greater than or equal to 8 while all other pulses are filtered pulse_int_r lt percent gt Controls how pulses are propagated through interconnect delays where lt percent gt is a number between 0 and 100 that specifies the rejection limit as a percentage of the interconnect delay Optional This option works for both Verilog and VITAL cells though the destination of the interconnect must be a Verilog cell The source may be VITAL or Verilog A pulse less than the rejection limit is filtered If the error limit is not specified by pulse_int_e then it defaults to the rejection limit quiet Disable Loading messages during batch mode simulation Optional restore lt filename gt Specifies that vsim is to restore a simulation saved with the checkpoint command CR 94 Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 382 vsim You must restore vsim under the same environment in which you did the checkpoint This means not only the same type of machine and OS and at least the same memory size but also the same vsim environment such as GUI vs command line mode sdf_iopath_to_prim_ok Prevents vsim from issui
198. cover report command CR 175 fcover save command CR 177 features new UM 272 field descriptions coverage reports UM 353 FIFOs viewing SystemC UM 181 File Breakpoint dialog GR 104 File compression VCD tasks UM 464 file compression SDF files UM 441 VCD files CR 297 CR 306 file format MTI memory data GR 184 file I O splitio command CR 272 TextIO package UM 88 VCD files UM 457 file line breakpoints GR 209 files opening in GUI GR 44 files grouping for compile UM 47 filter processes GR 114 Filter instance list dialog GR 98 filtering signals in Objects window GR 191 filters for Code Coverage UM 349 find command CR 178 Find in Assertions dialog GR 119 Find in dataflow dialog GR 145 Find in FCovers dialog GR 154 Find in List dialog GR 162 Find in Locals dialog GR 174 Find in memory dialog GR 188 Find in Process dialog GR 115 Find in Transcript dialog dialogs Find in Transcript GR 53 fixed point types UM 182 FLI UM 100 debugging UM 401 folders in projects UM 50 font scaling for dual monitors GR 32 fonts controlling in X sessions GR 16 scaling GR 16 force command CR 182 defaults UM 541 Force Selected Signal dialog GR 192 foreign language interface UM 100 foreign model loading SmartModels UM 620 foreign module declaration Verilog example CR 261 UM 210 VHDL example UM 219 foreign module declaration SystemC UM 209 format file UM 262 List window CR 424 Wave window CR 424 UM 262 FPGA libraries importing UM 6
199. cs in the output Optional Default append Appends this report to the named report file Optional below lt percent gt Specifies that only objects with coverage values below this percentage be included in the report Optional comment Specifies that comments should be included with the report Comments are excluded by default Optional config Specifies that the current configuration of each directive be included in the report Has no effect unless you also specify the details argument Optional lt coverage_directive gt Identifies the functional coverage directive s to include in the report Multiple directives may be specified Wildcards are allowed Required if du lt name gt isn t specified details Includes details associated with each cover directive e g count in the output Optional Default du lt name gt Specifies that only objects belonging to the given design unit be included in the report Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 176 fcover report file lt filename gt Specifies a file name for the report The default is to write the report to the Transcript GUI mode or stdout batch mode Environment variables may be used in the pathname Optional noaggregated Excludes aggregated statistics from the output The statistics are included by default Optional nocomment Specifies that comments should be excluded from the report Optional Default nodetails Excludes details
200. ct lt project file gt do lt macrofile gt Specifies the DO file to execute when modelsim is invoked Optional gt Note In addition to the macro called by this argument if a DO file is specified by the STARTUP variable in modelsim ini it will be called when the vsim command CR 375 is invoked project lt project file gt Specifies the mpf file to load for this session Optional vsim CR 375 do CR 153 and Using a startup file UM 540 ModelSim SE Command Reference next CR 209 next The next command continues a search after you have invoked the search command See the search command CR 262 for more information Syntax next lt window_name gt window lt wname gt Arguments lt window_name gt Specifies the window in which to continue searching Can be one of Signals Objects Variables Locals Source List Wave Process Structure or a unique abbreviation thereof Required window lt wname gt Specifies an instance of the window that is not the default Optional Otherwise the default window is used Use the view command CR 334 to change the default window ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 210 noforce noforce Syntax Arguments See also The noforce command removes the effect of any active force CR 182 commands on the selected HDL objects The noforce command also causes the object s value to be re evaluated noforce lt object_name gt lt object_name gt Specifies t
201. d Arguments for virtuals kind lt kind gt Specifies the kind of virtual object for which you want to search Optional lt kind gt can be one of designs explicits functions implicits or signals unsaved Specifies that ModelSim find only virtuals that have not been saved to a format file lt object_name gt Specifies the virtual object for which you want to search Required Multiple virtuals and wildcard characters are allowed ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 180 find Arguments for classes lt class_name gt Specifies the incrTcl class for which you want to search Optional Wildcard characters are allowed The options for class_name include nets objects signals and virtuals If you do not specify a class name the command returns all classes in the current namespace context See incrTcl commands in the Tcl Man Pages for more information Arguments for objects Examples class lt class_name gt Restricts the search to objects whose most specific class is class_name Optional isa lt class_name gt Restricts the search to those objects that have class_name anywhere in their heritage Optional lt object_name gt Specifies the incrTcl object for which you want to search Optional Wildcard characters are allowed If you do not specify an object name the command returns all objects in the current namespace context See incrTcl commands in the Tcl Man Pages for more information find signa
202. d Optional b Causes vgencomp to generate bit port types Optional gt S Used for the explicit declaration of default std_logic port types Optional y Causes vgencomp to generate vl_logic port types Optional lt module_name gt Specifies the name of the Verilog module to be accessed Required Examples This example uses a Verilog module that is compiled into the work library The module begins as Verilog source code module top il ol o2 iol parameter width 8 4 parameter delay 5 parameter filename file in input il output 7 0 ol output 4 7 02 inout width 1 0 iol endmodule After compiling vgencomp is invoked on the compiled module vgencomp top and writes the following to stdout component top generic ModelSim SE Command Reference width delay filename i port ad ol o2 iol i end component vgencomp CR 333 integer 8 real 4 500000 string file in in std_logic out std_logic_vector 7 downto 0 out std_logic_vector 4 to 7 inout std_logic_vector ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 334 view view Syntax Arguments The view command displays a stand alone window or Main window pane and shifts focus to that window or pane If multiple instances of a stand alone window exist view will change the default window of that type to the specified window Using the new option view will create an additional instance of the specified stan
203. d by changes in the objects matching the specified pattern Optional width lt number gt Valid numbers are 1 through 256 Specifies the desired column width for the objects matching the specified pattern Optional lt pattern gt Specifies a name or wildcard pattern to match the full pathnames of the signals nets or registers for which you are defining the property change Required ModelSim SE Command Reference property wave CR 237 property wave Syntax Arguments The property wave command changes one or more properties of the specified signal net or register in the Wave window The properties correspond to those you can set by selecting View gt Signal Properties Wave window At least one argument must be used property wave window lt wname gt color lt color gt format lt format gt height lt number gt offset lt number gt radix lt radix gt scale lt float gt lt pattern gt window lt wname gt Specifies a particular Wave window when multiple instances of the window exist e g wave2 Optional If no window is specified the default window is used the default window is determined by the most recent invocation of the view command CR 334 color lt color gt Specifies the color to be used for the waveform Optional format lt format gt The waveform lt format gt can be expressed as analog Displays a waveform whose height and position is determined by the scale and offse
204. d acc_next_cell_load Optional nologo Disables the startup banner Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 366 vlog nopsl Instructs the compiler to ignore embedded PSL assertions By default vlog parses any PSL assertion statements it finds in the specified files See Compiling and simulating assertions UM 377 for more information nospecify Disables specify path delays and timing checks Optional note lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Changes the severity level of the specified message s to note Optional Edit the note UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information notimingchecks Removes all timing check entries from the design as it is parsed Optional To disable checks on individual instances use the tcheck_set command CR 277 novopt Forces vlog to produce code if you have set the VoptFlow UM 536 variable in the modelsim ini to 1 You can use this argument in tandem with vsim novopt to run ModelSim in debug mode when the default behavior is optimized nowarn lt CODE gt Disables warning messages in the category specified by lt CODE gt Optional Warnings that can be disabled include the lt CODE gt name in square brackets in the warning message For example Warning test v 15 RDGN Redundant digits in numeric literal This warning message can be disabled by specifying nowarnRD
205. d alone window type and set it to be the default window for that type Names for windows are generated as follows e The first window name automatically created without using new has the same name as the window type e Additional window names created by new append an integer to the window type starting with 1 To remove a window use the noview command CR 214 The view command returns the name s of the viewed window s view height lt n gt icon new title New Window Title undock dock width lt n gt x lt n gt y lt n gt lt window_type gt Specifies that all windows be opened Optional height lt n gt Specifies the window height in pixels Valid only for stand alone windows not panes in the Main window Optional icon Toggles the view between window and icon Valid only for stand alone windows not panes in the Main window Optional new Creates a new instance of the window type specified with the lt window_type gt argument Valid only for stand alone windows not panes in the Main window Optional New window names are created by appending an integer to the window type starting with 1 then incrementing the integer title New Window Title Specifies the window title of the designated window Curly braces are only needed for titles that include spaces Double quotes can be used in place of braces for example New Window Title If the new window title does not inc
206. d called by either resolution functions or functions that appear in a port map are ignored See also add button CR 45 bd CR 71 disablebp CR 150 enablebp CR 160 onbreak CR 216 when CR 409 Chapter 6 SystemC simulation Chapter 16 C Debug ModelSim SE Command Reference cd CR 79 cd The cd command changes the ModelSim local directory to the specified directory This command cannot be executed while a simulation is in progress Also executing a cd command will close the current project Syntax cd lt dir gt Arguments lt dir gt The directory to which to change Optional If no directory is specified ModelSim changes to your home directory ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 80 cdbg cdbg The cdbg command provides command line equivalents of the menu options that are available for C Debug UM 401 For some of the commands there is a required argument on off The value can be either on or off For example cdbg enable_auto_step on cdbg stop_on_quit off Syntax cdbg auto_find_bp debug_on enable_auto_step on off init_mode_complete init_mode_setup interrupt keep_user_init_bps onloff quit refresh_source_window set_debugger lt path gt show_source_balloon on off stop_on_quit onloff trace_entry_point on off lt function_name gt Arguments auto_find_bp Sets breakpoints on all currently known function entry points See Finding function entry points with Auto find
207. d clock cycle cycle numbers start at 1 check stable off command CR 92 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 94 checkpoint checkpoint Syntax Arguments See also The checkpoint command saves the state of your simulation The checkpoint command saves the simulation kernel state the vsim wif file the list of the design objects shown in the List and Wave windows the file pointer positions for files opened under VHDL and the Verilog fopen system task the states of foreign architectures and VCD output Changes you made interactively while running vsim are not saved for example macros virtual objects command line interface additions like user defined commands and states of graphical user interface windows are not saved Also toggle statistics see the toggle report command CR 285 are not saved Once saved a checkpoint file may be used with the restore command CR 250 during the same simulation to restore the simulation to a previous state A VSIM session may also be started with a checkpoint file by using the vsim restore command CR 375 Compression of the checkpoint file is controlled by the CheckpointCompressMode variable in the modelsim ini file If a checkpoint occurs while ModelSim is writing a VCD file the entire VCD file is copied into the checkpoint file Since VCD files can be very large it is possible that disk space problems could occur Consequently ModelSim issues a warning in this situation Check
208. d is primarily a list of add list CR 48 add wave CR 53 and configure CR 124 commands though a few other commands are included see Output below This file may be invoked with the do command CR 153 to recreate the List or Wave window format on a subsequent simulation run When you load a wave or list format file ModelSim verifies the existence of the datasets required by the format file ModelSim displays an error message if the requisite datasets do not all exist To force the execution of the wave or list format file even if all datasets are not present use the force switch with your do command For example VSIM gt do wave do force Note that this will result in error messages for signals referencing nonexistent datasets Also force is recognized by the format file not the do command write format list wave window lt window_name gt lt filename gt list wave Specifies that the contents of either the List or the Wave window are to be recorded Required window lt window_name gt Specifies the window for which you want contents recorded Optional Use when you have more than one instance of the List or Wave window lt filename gt Specifies the name of the output file where the data is to be written Required write format list alu_list do Saves the current data in the List window in a file named alu_list do write format wave alu_wave do Saves the current data in the Wave window in a file named alu_wa
209. d memory command CR 51 add PSL files UM 53 GR 58 GR 61 add watch command CR 52 add wave command CR 53 add_menu command CR 57 add_menucb command CR 59 add_menuitem simulator command CR 60 add_separator command CR 61 add_submenu command CR 62 aggregates SystemC UM 180 alias command CR 63 analog signal formatting CR 54 GR 245 supported signal types GR 245 annotating interconnect delays v2k_int_delays CR 391 architecture simulator state variable UM 544 archives described UM 59 archives library CR 358 argc simulator state variable UM 544 arguments passing to a DO file UM 489 arguments accessing command line UM 183 arithmetic package warnings disabling UM 540 array of sc_signal lt T gt UM 180 arrays indexes CR 12 slices CR 12 CR 15 AssertFile ini file variable UM 531 assertion fail command CR 64 assertion pass command CR 66 assertion report command CR 68 AssertionFailEnable ini variable UM 531 AssertionFailLimit ini variable UM 531 AssertionFailLog ini variable UM 531 AssertionFormat ini file variable UM 531 AssertionFormatBreak ini file variable UM 531 AssertionFormatError ini file variable UM 53 1 AssertionFormatFail ini file variable UM 532 AssertionFormatFatal ini file variable UM 532 AssertionFormatNote ini file variable UM 532 AssertionFormatWarning ini file variable UM 532 AssertionPassEnable ini variable UM 532 AssertionPassLimit ini variable UM 532 AssertionPassLog ini variable UM 532 assertions
210. d to the selected region only Can be used with a wildcard to specify that only virtual signals as opposed to all signals found by the wildcard should be logged Optional in Specifies that the kernel log data for ports of mode IN whose names match the specification Optional out Specifies that the kernel log data for ports of mode OUT whose names match the specification Optional inout Specifies that the kernel log data for ports of mode INOUT whose names match the specification Optional internal Specifies that the kernel log data for internal non port objects whose names match the specification Optional ports Specifies that the kernel log data for all ports Optional lt pattern gt Indicates which signal names or wildcard patterns should be used in finding the signals to log Required Any number of names or wildcard patterns may be used ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 346 virtual log See also virtual nolog CR 348 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference virtual nohide CR 347 virtual nohide Syntax Arguments See also The virtual nohide command reverses the effect of a virtual hide command causing the specified real or virtual signals to reappear the Objects window virtual nohide kind lt kind gt region lt path gt lt pattern gt kind lt kind gt Specifies a subset of virtuals to look at Optional lt kind gt can be a
211. d version of sccom Certain restrictions apply when compiling SystemC modules with HP aCC See Restrictions on compiling with HP aCC UM 169 for details During the linking of the design with sccom link the order in which you specify archives a and object files is very important Any dependent a or o must be specified before the a or o on which it depends sccom lt CPP compiler options gt error lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt f lt filename gt help log lt logfile gt nologo note lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt scv scms suppress lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt vv verbose version version warning lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt lt filename gt sccom link lt CPP linker options gt f lt filename gt help lib lt compiled library gt log lt logfile gt nologo scv vv verbose version work lt library_name gt lt CPP compiler options gt Any normal C compiler option can be used with the exception of the o and c options By default secom compiles without debugging information Specify the g argument to compile for debugging You can specify arguments for all sccom compiles by editing the CppOptions variable in the modelsim ini file lt CPP linker options gt Any normal C compiler option can be used with the exception of the o option You can specify arguments for all sccom compiles by editing th
212. dataset snapshot command saves data from the current WLF file vsim wifby default at a specified interval This lets you take sequential or cumulative snapshots of your simulation data Syntax dataset snapshot dir lt directory gt disable enable file lt filename gt filemode overwrite increment mode cumulative sequential report reset size lt file size gt time lt simulation time gt Arguments dir lt directory gt Specifies a directory into which the files should be saved Optional Default is to save into the directory where ModelSim is writing the current WLF file disable Turns snapshotting off Optional All other options are ignored if you specify disable enable Turns snapshotting on Optional Default file lt filename gt Specifies the name of the file to save Optional Default is vsim_snapshot wlf will be appended to the file and possibly an incrementing suffix if filemode is set to increment filemode overwrite increment Specifies whether to overwrite the snapshot file each time a snapshot occurs Optional Default is overwrite If you specify increment a new file is created for each snapshot An incrementing suffix 1 to n is added to each new file e g vsim_snapshot_1 wlf mode cumulative sequential Specifies whether to keep all data from the time signals are first logged Optional Default is cumulative If you specify sequential the current WLF file
213. de src delta delta vhd 693 696 711 806 src delta micro v 110 124 src delta pre v 216 217 src delta testdel vhd 1178 1274 src delta tx vhd 148 149 coverage report excluded d Writes both pragma and user based exclusions to the transcript window in TCL format as follows coverage coverage coverage coverage coverage Se E FE OSE OSE SE coverage report exclude do exclude exclude exclude exclude exclude add add add add add src delta delta vhd 693 696 711 806 src delta micro v 110 124 src delta pre v 216 217 src delta testdel vhd 1178 1274 src delta tx vhd 148 149 coverage report below 90 file myreport txt Writes a summary of coverage by source file for coverage less than or equal to 90 coverage report zeros byinstance file myzerocov txt Writes a list of statements with zero coverage to myzerocov txt See also Chapter 13 Measuring code coverage coverage clear CR 129 coverage exclude CR 130 coverage reload CR 132 coverage save CR 137 vsim CR 375 coverage option vcover report CR 324 ModelSim SE Command Reference coverage save CR 137 coverage save Syntax Arguments See also The coverage save command saves current coverage Statistics to a file that can be reloaded later preserving instance specific information coverage save instance lt path gt norecursive xml lt filename gt instance lt path gt Saves coverage data for only the specif
214. differences encountered on any one signal When that limit is reached ModelSim stops computing differences on that signal Optional The default is 100 Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultMaxSignalErrors maxtotal lt n gt Specifies an upper limit for the total differences encountered When that limit is reached ModelSim stops computing differences Optional The default is 1000 Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultMaxTotalErrors lt mode gt Specifies the default mode of signal types that are compared with the compare add command CR 95 Optional The actual values the option may take are in out inout internal ports and all More than one mode option may be used in the same compare options command separator lt string gt Used with the rebuild option of the compare add command CR 95 When a bus has been broken into bits bit blasted by a synthesis tool ModelSim expects a separator between the base bus name and the bit indication This option identifies that separator The default is _ For example the signal mybus might be broken down into mybus_0 mybus_1 etc Optional Related Tcl variable is PrefCompare defaultRebuildSeparator tol lt delay gt Specifies the default maximum time the test signal edge is allowed to trail or lead the reference edge in an asynchronous comparison Optional The default is 0 If a unit is used e g ps with the time value the time must be in curly braces
215. e 1 23456 or 6543 21 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 226 printenv printenv The printenv command prints to the Transcript pane the current names and values of all environment variables If variable names are given as arguments prints only the names and values of the specified variables Syntax printenv lt vars Arguments lt var gt Specifies the name s of the environment variable s to print Optional Examples printenv Prints all environment variable names and their current values For example CC gcc DISPLAY srl 0 0 printenv USER HOME Prints the specified environment variables USER vince HOME scratch srl vince ModelSim SE Command Reference profile clear CR 227 profile clear The profile clear command clears any performance data that has been gathered during previous run commands After this command is executed all profiling data will be reset This command has no effect on the current profiling session The last profile on or profile off command will still be in effect Syntax profile clear Arguments None See also Chapter 12 Profiling performance and memory use UM 317 profile interval CR 228 profile off CR 229 profile on CR 230 profile option CR 231 profile reload CR 232 profile report CR 233 gt Note Profiling must be active when this command is invoked Use the profile on command CR 230 to begin profiling ModelSim SE Command Reference CR
216. e CR 102 compare configure compare configure The compare configure command modifies options for compare signals and regions The modified options are applied to all objects in the specified compare path Syntax compare configure clock lt name gt recursive tol lt delay gt tolLead lt delay gt tolTrail lt delay gt vhdlmatches lt ref logic value gt lt test logic value gt vlogmatches lt ref logic value gt lt test logic value gt when lt expression gt lt comparePath gt Arguments clock lt name gt Changes the strobe signal for the comparison Optional If the comparison is currently asynchronous it will be changed to clocked This switch may not be used with the tol tolLead and tolTrail options recursive Specifies that signals should also be selected in all nested subregions and subregions of those etc Optional tol lt delay gt Specifies the default maximum time the test signal edge is allowed to trail or lead the reference edge in an asynchronous comparison Optional The default is 0 If a unit is used e g ps with the time value the time must be in curly braces tolLead lt delay gt Specifies the maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to lead a reference edge in an asynchronous comparison Optional The default is 0 If a unit e g ps is used with the time value the time must be placed in curly braces tolTrail lt delay gt Specifies the
217. e By default the specified filename will open in ModelSim Source editor Syntax edit lt filename gt Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the name of the file to edit Optional If the lt filename gt is omitted the editor opens the current source file If you specify a non existent filename it will open a new file See also notepad CR 213 EDITOR UM 523 environment variable ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 160 enablebp enablebp Syntax Arguments See also The enablebp command turns on breakpoints and when commands that were previously disabled enablebp lt id gt lt id gt Specifies a breakpoint or when statement id to enable Optional If you don t specify an id all breakpoints are enabled Note that C breakpoint id s see C Debug UM 401 are prefixed with c bd CR 71 bp CR 76 disablebp command CR 150 onbreak CR 216 resume CR 251 when CR 409 Chapter 16 C Debug UM 401 ModelSim SE Command Reference enable_menu CR 161 enable_menu Syntax Arguments Examples See also The enable_menu command enables a previously disabled menu The menu will be changed from grayed out to normal and will become responsive Returns nothing enable_menu lt window_name gt lt menu_path gt lt window_name gt Tk path of the window containing the menu Required nn Note that the path for the Main window must be expressed as All other window pathnames begin with
218. e except those explicitly granted in this section into your products without first signing a separate agreement with Mentor Graphics for such purpose BETA CODE Portions or all of certain Software may contain code for experimental testing and evaluation Beta Code which may not be used without Mentor Graphics explicit authorization Upon Mentor Graphics authorization Mentor Graphics grants to you a temporary nontransferable nonexclusive license for experimental use to test and evaluate the Beta Code without charge for a limited period of time specified by Mentor Graphics This grant and your use of the Beta Code shall not be construed as marketing or ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 436 License Agreement offering to sell a license to the Beta Code which Mentor Graphics may choose not to release commercially in any form If Mentor Graphics authorizes you to use the Beta Code you agree to evaluate and test the Beta Code under normal conditions as directed by Mentor Graphics You will contact Mentor Graphics periodically during your use of the Beta Code to discuss any malfunctions or suggested improvements Upon completion of your evaluation and testing you will send to Mentor Graphics a written evaluation of the Beta Code including its strengths weaknesses and recommended improvements You agree that any written evaluations and all inventions product improvements modifications or developments that Mentor Graphics conceived o
219. e CppOptions variable in the modelsim ini file error lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Changes the severity level of the specified message s to error Optional Edit the error UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information ModelSim SE Command Reference sccom CR 257 f lt filename gt Specifies a file with more command line arguments Optional Allows complex argument strings to be reused without retyping Nesting of f options is allowed The file syntax basically follows what you type on the command line with the exception that newline characters are ignored Environment variable expansion for example in a pathname does not occur in f files help Displays the command s options and arguments Optional lib lt compiled library gt Only used for sccom link invocations Specifies the default working library where the SystemC linker can find the object files for compiled SystemC modules link sccom s link argument performs the final link of all previously compiled SystemC source code Required before running simulation Any dependent a or o must be specified before the a or o on which it depends Two types of dependencies are possible and where you place the link argument is different based on which type of dependency the files have If your archive or object is dependent on the o files created by sccom i e y
220. e also windows Main window manuals UM 35 mapping data types UM 193 libraries from the command line UM 62 hierarchically UM 539 symbols Dataflow window UM 313 SystemC in mixed designs UM 202 SystemC to Verilog UM 199 SystemC to VHDL UM 202 Verilog states in mixed designs UM 194 Verilog states in SystemC designs UM 198 Verilog to SytemC port and data types UM 198 Verilog to VHDL data types UM 193 VHDL to SystemC UM 196 VHDL to Verilog data types UM 195 mapping libraries library mapping UM 62 mapping signals waveform editor GR 295 master slave library SystemC including CR 258 math_complex package UM 65 math_real package UM 65 maxdelays CR 364 mc_scan_plusargs using with an elaboration file UM 84 UM 140 mc_scan_plusargs PLI routine CR 390 MDI frame UM 274 GR 20 MDI pane tab groups GR 22 mem display command CR 198 mem list command CR 200 mem load command CR 201 mem save command CR 204 mem search command CR 206 memories displaying the contents of GR 175 initializing GR 181 loading memory patterns GR 181 MTI memory data file GR 184 MTT s definition of GR 176 navigating to memory locations GR 188 saving memory data to a file GR 183 selecting memory instances GR 177 sparse memory modeling UM 156 viewing contents GR 177 viewing multiple instances GR 177 memory modeling in VHDL UM 101 memory allocation profiler UM 318 Memory Declaration View menu UM 286 memory leak cancelling scheduled events UM 108 Memory window G
221. e and directory pathnames CR 11 Design object names CR 12 Wildcard characters CR 17 ModelSim variables CR 17 Simulation time units CR 18 Comments in argument files CR 18 Command shortcuts CR 18 Command history shortcuts CR 19 Numbering conventions CR 20 GUI_expression_format CR 22 Commands CR 31 Command reference table CR 32 main clear CR 43 abort CR 44 add button CR 45 add dataflow CR 47 add list CR 48 add memory CR 51 add watch CR 52 add wave CR 53 add_menu CR 57 add_menucb CR 59 add_menuitem CR 60 add_separator CR 61 add_submenu CR 62 alias CR 63 assertion fail CR 64 assertion pass CR 66 assertion report CR 68 batch_mode CR 70 bd CR 71 bookmark add wave CR 72 bookmark delete wave CR 73 bookmark goto wave CR 74 bookmark list wave CR 75 bp CR 76 cd CR 79 cdbg CR 80 change CR 82 change_menu_cmd CR 84 check contention add CR 85 check contention config CR 87 check contention off CR 88 check float add CR 89 check float config CR 90 check float off CR 91 check stable off CR 92 check stable on CR 93 checkpoint CR 94 compare add CR 95 compare annotate CR 99 compare clock CR 100 compare configure CR 102 compare continue CR 104 compare delete CR 105 compare end CR 106 compare info CR 107 compare list CR 108 compare options CR 109 compare reload CR 113 compare reset CR 114 compare run CR 115 compare savediffs CR 116 compare saverules CR 117 compare see CR 118 compare start CR 120 ModelSim SE Com
222. e any of the following signals functions designs implicits and explicits Unique abbreviations are accepted See also virtual define CR 337 virtual describe CR 339 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference virtual signal CR 353 virtual signal Syntax Arguments The virtual signal command creates a new signal known only by the GUI not the kernel that consists of concatenations of signals and subelements as specified in lt expressionString gt It cannot handle bit selects and slices of Verilog registers Please see Concatenation of signals or subelements CR 27 for more details on syntax virtual signal env lt path gt install lt path gt delay lt time gt lt expressionString gt lt name gt env lt path gt Specifies a hierarchical context for the signal names in lt expressionString gt so they don t all have to be full paths Optional install lt path gt Causes the newly created signal to become a child of the specified region If install is not specified the newly created signal becomes a child of the nearest common ancestor of all objects appearing in lt expressionString gt If the expression references more than one WLF file dataset the virtual signal will automatically be placed in region virtuals Signals Optional delay lt time gt Specifies a value by which the virtual signal will be delayed Optional You can use negative v
223. e connected to the same signal in order to improve performance and those collapsed signals will not appear in the report The nocollapse argument degrades simulator performance so it should be used only when itis absolutely necessary to see all signals in a toggle report toggle report all file lt filename gt lt signal gt summary a Lists all nodes checked along with their individual transition to 0 and 1 counts Optional file lt filename gt Specifies a file to which to write the report By default the report is displayed in the Transcript pane Optional lt signal gt Specifies the name of a signal whose toggle statistics are to be displayed Multiple signal names separated by spaces may be specified Wildcards may be used summary Selects only the summary portion of the report Optional Toggle coverage UM 344 toggle add CR 281 toggle reset CR 286 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 286 toggle reset toggle reset The toggle reset command resets the toggle counts to zero for the specified nodes Syntax toggle reset all in out inout internal ports r lt node_name gt Arguments all Resets toggle statistics collection for all nodes that have toggle checking enabled Optional Must be used alone without other arguments in Resets toggle statistics collection on nodes of mode IN Optional out Resets toggle statistics collection on nodes of mode OUT Optional in
224. e current simulation using the radix command CR 243 You can change the default radix permanently by editing the DefaultRadix UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file Changing the default radix does not change the radix of the currently displayed memory Use the add memory command to re add the memory with the desired radix or change the display radix from the Memory window Properties dialog GR 237 wordsperline lt num gt Determines how many words are displayed on each line in the memory window Optional Default is to wrap display based on the width of the window lt object_name gt Specifies the hierarchical path of the memory to be displayed Wildcard characters are allowed Note that the WildcardFilter Tcl preference variable identifies types to ignore when matching objects with wildcard patterns Memory windows GR 175 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 52 add watch add watch The add watch command adds signals and variables to the Watch pane in the Main window SystemC objects and user defined buses may also be added Syntax add watch lt object_name gt Arguments lt object_name gt Specifies the name of the object to be added Wildcard characters are allowed Note that the WildcardFilter Tcl preference variable identifies types to ignore when matching objects with wildcard patterns Variables must be preceded by the process name For example add watch myproc intl See also Watch pane
225. e examined e VHDL signals shared variables process variables constants and generics e Verilog nets registers and variables eC variables e SystemC signals FIFOs ports and member variables of modules When stopped in C code examine with no arguments displays the values of the local variables and arguments of the current C function For specific information related to viewing SystemC objects see SystemC object and type display in ModelSim UM 180 To display a previous value specify the desired time using the time option To compute an expression use the expr option The expr and the time options may be used together Virtual signals and functions may also be examined within the GUI actual signals are examined in the kernel The following rules are used by the examine command to locate an HDL object e If the name does not include a dataset name then the current dataset is used e If the name does not start with a path separator then the current context is used e If the name is a path separator followed by a name that is not the name of a top level design unit then the first top level design unit in the design is used e For arelative name containing a hierarchical path if the first object name cannot be found in the current context then an upward search is done up to the top of the design hierarchy to look for a matching object name e If no objects of the specified name can be found in the specified cont
226. e or redone Optional See also wave create command CR 399 Chapter 10 Generating stimulus with Waveform Editor ModelSim SE Command Reference wave export CR 405 wave export Syntax Arguments See also The wave export command creates a stimulus file from waveforms created with the wave create command wave export designunit lt name gt end lt time gt file lt name gt format force vcd vhdl verilog start lt time gt designunit lt name gt The name of the design unit for which you want to export created waves If omitted the command exports waves from the active design unit Optional end lt time gt The simulation time at which you want to stop exporting Required file lt name gt The filename for the saved stimulus file Required format force vcd vhdl verilog The format of the saved stimulus file Required The format options include force A Tcl script that recreates the waveforms The file should be sourced when reloading the simulation ved An extended VCD file Load using the vedstim argument to vsim vhdl A VHDL testbench Compile and load the file as your top level design unit verilog A Verilog testbench Compile and load the file as your top level design unit start lt time gt The simulation time at which you want to start exporting Required wave create command CR 399 wave import command CR 406 Chapter 10 Generating stimulus with Waveform Editor Mode
227. e same directory ModelSim SE Command Reference vlib CR 359 vlib archive compact 3 uut Creates the design library uut and specifies that any design units compiled into the library are created as archives Also specifies that each archive be compacted when 30 of its space is wasted ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 360 vlog vlog Syntax Arguments The vlog command compiles Verilog source code into a specified working library or to the work library by default vlog may be invoked from within ModelSim or from the operating system command prompt It may also be invoked during simulation Compiled libraries are major version dependent For example you cannot use a library compiled with 5 7 in a simulation using 5 8 vsim You would have to refresh the libraries using the refresh argument to vlog This is not true for minor versions e g 5 7a libraries work in 5 7d vlog 93 help compat compile_uselibs lt directory_name gt cover lt stat gt debugCellOpt define lt macro_name gt lt macro_text gt delay_mode_distributed delay_mode_path delay_mode_unit delay_mode_zero dpiheader error lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt f lt filename gt fast lt secondary_name gt tacc lt spec gt lt module gt forcecode hazards incdirt lt directory gt incr instantiateReadOnly isymfile keep_delta L lt libname gt Lf lt libname gt libex
228. e set no signals are added and some signals are found to be already in the toggle set some signals are added the number of bits added Arguments Enables extended mode toggle coverage which tracks the following six transitions 1 lorH gt 0orL 2 OorL gt 1lorH 3 Z gt lorH 4 Z gt 0orL 5 lorH gt Z 6 OorL gt Z Optional By default only the first two transitions transitions to and from 0 and to and from1 are counted If you do a toggle add command on a group of signals and then try to convert to extended toggle coverage mode all six transitions by doing toggle add full on the same signals nothing will change The only way to change the internal toggle triggers from default to extended toggle coverage is to restart vsim and start with the correct command in Enables toggle statistics collection on nodes of mode IN Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 282 toggle add inout Enables toggle statistics collection on nodes of mode INOUT Optional internal Enables toggle statistics collection on internal non port objects Optional 0 t Enables toggle statistics collection on nodes of mode OUT Optional ports Enables toggle statistics collection on nodes of modes IN OUT or INOUT Optional Specifies that toggle statistics collection is enabled recursively into subregions Optional If omitted toggle statistic collection is limited to the current region lt node_name gt Enables to
229. e the signal attribute and array constant specified in the expression Commands like find CR 178 and examine return their results as a Tcl list Gust a blank separated list of strings You can do things like foreach sig find ABC echo Signal sig is exa Ssig if examine bin signal_12 11101111XxXxZ2 examine hex find The Tcl variable array examine can also be used to return values For example examine clk You can also examine an object in the Source window GR 205 by selecting it with the right mouse button examine x Prints the value of C variable x examine p Prints the value p de references p examine ip gt inl Prints the structure member in pointed to by ip Design object names CR 12 Wildcard characters CR 17 GUI_expression_format CR 22 Chapter 16 C Debug UM 401 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 168 exit exit The exit command exits the simulator and the ModelSim application If you want to stop the simulation using a when command CR 409 you must use a stop command CR 275 within your when statement DO NOT use an exit command or a quit command CR 242 The stop command acts like a breakpoint at the time it is evaluated Syntax exit terce Argument Eorce Quits without asking for confirmation Optional if this argument is omitted ModelSim asks you for confirmation before exiting ModelSim SE Command Reference fcover clear CR 169
230. e wave CR 73 bookmark goto wave CR 74 write format CR 424 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 76 bp Syntax Arguments The bp or breakpoint command either sets a file line breakpoint or returns a list of currently set breakpoints A set breakpoint affects every instance in the design unless the inst lt region gt argument is used bp lt filename gt lt line_number gt c lt function_name gt lt file_name gt lt line gt lt line gt Ox lt hex_address gt id lt id gt inst lt region gt disable cond lt condition_expression gt lt command gt query lt filename gt lt line_number gt lt line_number gt lt filename gt Specifies the name of the source file in which to set the breakpoint Required if you are setting HDL breakpoints lt line_number gt Specifies the line number at which the breakpoint is to be set Required if you are setting HDL breakpoints c lt function_name gt lt file_name gt lt line gt lt line gt 0Ox lt hex_address gt Sets a C breakpoint in SystemC designs or when you are using C Debug UM 401 The c argument is required when setting C breakpoints to distinguish them from HDL breakpoints See examples below id lt id gt Attempts to assign this id number to the breakpoint Optional If the id number you specify is already used ModelSim will return an error gt Note Ids for breakpoints are assigned from the same poo
231. e window UM 250 bp breakpoint command CR 76 brackets escaping CR 15 break on assertion GR 91 on signal value CR 409 stop simulation run GR 39 BreakOnAssertion ini file variable UM 532 breakpoints C code UM 405 conditional CR 409 continuing simulation after CR 254 deleting CR 71 GR 209 GR 270 listing CR 76 setting CR 76 GR 209 setting automatically in C code UM 409 signal breakpoints when statements CR 409 Source window viewing in GR 205 time based in when statements CR 413 bsm file UM 313 buffered unbuffered output UM 536 bus contention checking CR 85 configuring CR 87 disabling CR 88 bus float checking configuring CR 90 disabling CR 91 enabling CR 89 busses escape characters in CR 15 RTL level reconstructing UM 234 user defined CR 54 UM 265 buswise format UM 280 button adding to windows GR 112 buttons adding to the Main window toolbar CR 45 C C applications compiling and linking UM 570 debugging UM 401 C callstack moving down CR 239 moving up CR 221 C Debug UM 401 auto find bp UM 408 auto step mode UM 409 debugging functions during elaboration UM 412 debugging functions when exiting UM 416 function entry points finding UM 408 initialization mode UM 412 menu reference GR 35 registered function calls identifying UM 409 running from a DO file UM 404 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ Stop on quit mode UM 416 C Debug setup dialog GR 105 C debugging CR 80 C applications compiling and linki
232. e windows expressions may also be used through the Edit gt Search menu in both windows The commands that use the expression format are compare add CR 95 compare clock CR 100 compare configure CR 102 configure CR 124 down CR 154 examine CR 164 left CR 191 right CR 252 searchlog CR 264 up CR 292 virtual function CR 341 and virtual signal CR 353 Expression typing GUI expressions are typed The supported types consist of the following scalar and array types Scalar types The scalar types are as follows boolean integer real time 64 bit integer enumeration and signal state Signal states are represented by the nine VHDL std_logic states U X 0 at i FA W a D H and En Verilog states 0 1 x and z are mapped into these states and the Verilog strengths are ignored Conversion is done automatically when referencing Verilog nets or registers SystemC scalar types supported are all the C C types except class structure union and array as well as SystemC types sc_logic and sc_bit Array types The supported array types are signed and unsigned arrays of signal states This would correspond to the VHDL std_logic_array type Verilog registers are automatically converted to these array types The array type can be treated as either UNSIGNED or SIGNED as in the IEEE std_logic_arith package Normally referencing a signal array causes it to be treated as UNSIGNED by the expression ev
233. echo CR 158 edit CR 159 enable_menu CR 161 enable_menuitem CR 162 enablebp CR 160 environment CR 163 event watching in DO file UM 489 examine CR 164 exit CR 168 fcover clear functional coverage clearing database CR 169 fcover comment CR 170 fcover configure CR 171 fcover reload CR 173 fcover report CR 175 fcover save CR 177 find CR 178 force CR 182 gdb dir CR 185 getactivecursortime CR 186 getactivemarkertime CR 187 help CR 188 history CR 189 lecho CR 190 left CR 191 log CR 193 Ishift CR 195 Isublist CR 196 macro_option CR 197 mem display CR 198 mem list CR 200 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ mem load CR 201 mem save CR 204 mem search CR 206 modelsim CR 208 next CR 209 noforce CR 210 nolog CR 211 notation conventions CR 10 notepad CR 213 noview CR 214 nowhen CR 215 onbreak CR 216 onElabError CR 217 onerror CR 218 pause CR 219 play CR 220 pop CR 221 power add CR 222 power report CR 223 power reset CR 224 printenv CR 225 CR 226 profile clear CR 227 profile interval CR 228 profile off CR 229 profile on CR 230 profile option CR 231 profile reload CR 232 profile report CR 233 property list CR 236 property wave CR 237 push CR 239 pwd CR 240 quietly CR 241 quit CR 242 radix CR 243 readers CR 244 record CR 245 report CR 246 restart CR 248 restore CR 250 resume CR 251 right CR 252 run CR 254 sccom CR 256 scgenmod CR 260 search CR 262 searchlog CR 264 seetime CR 266 setenv CR 267
234. ectory cdbg CR 80 provides command line equivalents of the menu options that are available for C Debug UM 401 change CR 82 modifies the value of a VHDL variable or Verilog register variable change_menu_cmd CR 84 changes the command to be executed for a specified menu item label in the specified menu in the specified window check contention add CR 85 enables contention checking for the specified nodes check contention config CR 87 writes checking messages to a file check contention off CR 88 disables contention checking for the specified nodes check float add CR 89 enables float checking for the specified nodes check float config CR 90 writes checking messages to a file check float off CR 91 disables float checking for the specified nodes check stable off CR 92 disables stability checking check stable on CR 93 enables stability checking on the entire design checkpoint CR 94 saves the state of your simulation compare add CR 95 compares signals in a reference design against signals in a test design compare annotate CR 99 marks a compare difference as ignore or tags it with a text message compare clock CR 100 defines a clock to be used with clocked mode comparisons compare configure CR 102 modifies options for compare signals or regions compare continue CR 104 continues difference compu
235. ed for an enumerated type the default representation is used You can change the default radix for the current simulation using the radix command CR 243 You can change the default radix permanently by editing the DefaultRadix UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file If you specify a radix for an array of a VHDL enumerated type ModelSim converts each signal value to 1 0 Z or X recursive For use with wildcard searches Specifies that the scope of the search is to descend recursively into subregions Optional If omitted the search is limited to the selected region You can use the depth argument to specify how far down the hierarchy to descend scale lt scale gt Scales analog waveforms Optional The scale value is part of the wave positioning equation shown below The position and size of the waveform is given by signal_value lt offset gt lt scale gt If signal_value lt offset gt 0 the waveform will be aligned with its name The lt scale gt value determines the height of the waveform 0 being a flat line window lt wname gt Adds objects to the specified window lt wname gt e g wave2 Optional Used to specify a particular window when multiple instances of that window type exist Selects an existing window does not create a new window Use the view command CR 334 with the new option to create a new window Examples add wave logic color gold out2 Displays an object named out2 The object
236. ed only to memory locations not contained in the file A relocatable memory file is one that has been saved without address information You can load a relocatable memory file into the instance of a memory core by specifying an address range on the mem load command line If no address range starting and ending address is specified the memory is loaded starting at the first location The order in which the data is placed into the memory depends on the format specified by the format option If you choose bin or hex format the memory is filled low to high to be compatible with readmem commands This is in contrast to the default mti format which fills the memory according to the memory declaration from left index to right index For Verilog objects and VHDL integers and std_logic types if the word width in a file is wider than the word width of the memory the leftmost bits msb s in the data words are ignored To allow wide words use the truncate option which will ignore the msb bits that exceed the memory word size If the word width in the file is less than the width of the memory and the left most digit of the file data is not X then the left most bits are zero filled Otherwise they are X filled The type of data required for the filldata argument is dependent on the filltype specified a fixed value or one that governs an incrementing decrementing or random sequence e For fixed pattern values the fill pattern is repea
237. eed to choose a unique name for the WDB when loading the logfile for example fred 2 Enter the following at the command prompt from within QuickSim Sconvert_wdb fred 0 The first argument which is fred is the name of the new WDB to be created The second argument which is 0 specifies the type of conversion At this time only one type of conversion is supported The value 0 specifies to convert std_logic or std_ulogic into qsim_12state 3 Do aconnect_wdb either through the pulldown menus the Connect WDB palette icon under Stimulus or a function invocation You specify the name of the WDB that you originally loaded the logfile into in this case fred At this point you can issue the run command and the stimulus in the converted logfile will be applied Before exiting the simulation you should save the new WDB fred as a WDB or logfile so that it can be loaded again in the future The new WDB or logfile will contain the correct qsim_12state values eliminating the need to re use convert_wdb ModelSim SE Command Reference wlf2vcd Syntax Arguments wlf2vcd CR 417 The wlf2ved command translates a ModelSim WLF file to a standard VCD file Complex data types that are unsupported in the VCD standard records memories etc are not converted A Important This command should be invoked only after you have stopped the simulation using quit sim or dataset close sim wlf2vcd help o lt outfile gt
238. ef_vector_file gt lt signal_definition_file gt Specifies the name of the Fluence Technology signal definition file describing the format and content of the vectors Required lt sef_vector_file gt Specifies the name of the file containing vectors to be converted If none is specified standard input is used Optional tssi2mti trigger def trigger sef gt trigger do The command will produce a do file named trigger do from the signal definition file trigger def and the vector file trigger sef tssi2mti trigger def lt trigger sef gt trigger do This example is the same as the previous one but uses the standard input instead force CR 182 run CR 254 write tssi CR 431 ModelSim SE Command Reference unsetenv CR 291 unsetenv The unsetenv command deletes an environment variable The deletion is not permanent it is valid only for the current ModelSim session Syntax unsetenv lt varname gt Arguments lt varname gt The name of the environment variable you wish to delete Required See also setenv CR 267 printenv CR 226 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 292 up up Syntax Arguments The up command searches for object transitions or values in the specified List window It executes the search on objects currently selected in the window starting at the time of the active cursor The active cursor moves to the found location Use this command to move to consecutive transitions or to find the time at whic
239. eference CR 426 write list write list Syntax Arguments Examples See also The write list command records the contents of the most recently opened or specified List window in a list output file This file contains simulation data for all HDL objects displayed in the List window VHDL signals and variables and Verilog nets and registers write list events window lt wname gt lt filename gt events Specifies to write print on change format Optional Default is tabular format window lt wname gt Specifies an instance of the List window that is not the default Optional Otherwise the default List window is used Use the view command CR 334 to change the default window lt filename gt Specifies the name of the output file where the data is to be written Required write list alu lst Saves the current data in the default List window in a file named alu lst write list win listl groupl list Saves the current data in window list in a file named group _list write tssi CR 431 ModelSim SE Command Reference write preferences CR 427 write preferences Syntax Arguments See also The write preferences command saves the current GUI preference settings to a Tcl preference file Settings saved include current window locations and sizes Wave Objects and Locals window column widths Wave Objects and Locals window value justification and Wave window signal name width write preferences
240. eform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 122 compare stop compare stop This command is used internally by the compare stop button to suspend comparison computations in progress If a compare run execution has returned to the VSIM prompt compare stop has no effect Under Unix entering a Control C character in the window that invoked ModelSim has the same effect as compare stop Syntax compare stop Arguments None See also compare run CR 115 compare start CR 120 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference compare update CR 123 compare update Syntax Arguments See also This command is primarily used internally to update the comparison differences when comparing a live simulation against a wlf file The compare update command is called automatically at the completion of each simulation run if the track compare option is in effect The user can also call compare update periodically during a long simulation run to cause difference computations to catch up with the simulation This command does nothing if the track compare option was not in effect when the compare run command CR 115 was executed compare update None compare run CR 115 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 124 configure configure Syntax Description Arguments The configure command invokes the List or Wave widget configure command for the current default List
241. elation Name Literal Name Literal Name EVENT expression Literal lt char gt lt bitstring gt lt bitstring gt The operator can occur only between a Name and a Literal This means that you cannot compare the value of two signals i e Name Name is not possible Tcl variables can be used in the condition expression but you must replace the curly braces with double quotes This works like a macro substitution where the Tcl variables are evaluated once and the result is then evaluated as the when condition Condition expressions are evaluated in the vsim kernel which knows nothing about Tcl variables That s why the condition expression must be evaluated in the GUI before it is sent to the vsim kernel See below for an example of using a Tcl variable The gt lt gt and lt operators are the standard ones for vector types not the overloaded operators in the std_logic_1164 package This may cause unexpected results when comparing objects that contain values other than and 0 ModelSim does a lexical comparison position number for values other than and 0 For example 0000 lt 1111 This evaluates to true HOOO lt 1111 This evaluates to false 001X gt 0010 This also evaluates to false ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples when CR 411 lt command gt The command s for this argument are evaluated by the Tcl interpreter within the ModelSim GUI Any
242. elements that depended on the parameter or generic during elaboration for example sizes of arrays ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See also change CR 83 change count 16 FFFF Changes the value of the variable count to the hexadecimal value FFFF change rega 16 0 Changes the value of the element of rega that is specified by the index i e 16 change foo 20 22 011 Changes the value of the set of elements of foo that is specified by the slice i e 20 22 change x 1 5 Sets the value of x type double to 1 5 change al cl 0 Sets the value of structure member a1 c1 type int to 0 change val_b my_string Sets val_b type char to point to the string my_string change val_b my string Sets val_b type char to point to the string my string Since there is a space in the value it must be enclosed by quotation marks or curly braces change file_name test2 txt Sets the Verilog register file_name to test2 txt Note that the quote marks are escaped with change mytimegeneric 500 ps Sets the time value of the mytimegeneric variable to 500 ps The time value is enclosed by curly braces or quotation marks because of the space between the value and the units force CR 182 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 84 change_menu_cmd change_menu_cmd The change_menu_cmd command changes the command to be executed for a specified menu item label in the specified menu in the specified wind
243. ence cdbg CR 81 set_debugger lt path gt Sets the path to your gdb installation Equivalent to selecting Tools gt C Debug gt C Debug Setup and entering a custom path The argument path is required and is the complete pathname to the gdb executable For example cdbg set_debugger_path usr bin gdb show_source_balloon on off Enables disables the source balloon popup See C Debug setup dialog GR 105 Equivalent to toggling the Show balloon button on the C Debug setup dialog stop_on_quit on off Enables disables debugging capability when the simulator is exiting See Debugging functions when quitting simulation UM 416 Equivalent to toggling the Stop on quit button on the C Debug setup dialog trace_entry_point on off lt function_name gt Helps debug an FLI PLI application when a design is loaded with vsim trace_foreign ModelSim stops at a C breakpoint each time a named FLI or PLI function is called from your application Once at the breakpoint use the tb command CR 276 and pop command CR 221 to investigate the C code at the place the function was called ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 82 change change The change command modifies the value of a VHDL constant generic or variable Verilog register or variable or C variable if running C Debug UM 401 Syntax change lt variable gt lt value gt Arguments lt variable gt Specifies the name of one of the following types of objects VHDL
244. ent CR 170 adds comment meta data to the active functional coverage database fcover configure CR 171 enables disables and sets coverage targets for PSL coverage directives fcover reload CR 173 reloads a previously saved functional coverage database fcover report CR 175 reports results of a functional coverage analysis fcover save CR 177 saves the active functional coverage database to a file find CR 178 displays the full pathnames of all objects in the design whose names match the name specification you provide force CR 182 applies stimulus to VHDL signals and Verilog nets gdb dir CR 185 sets the source directory for FLI PLI VPI C source code when using C Debug getactivecursortime CR 186 gets the time of the active cursor in the Wave window getactivemarkertime CR 187 gets the time of the active marker in the List window help CR 188 displays in the Main window a brief description and syntax for the specified command history CR 189 lists the commands executed during the current session ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 36 Command reference table Command name Action lecho CR 190 takes one or more Tcl lists as arguments and pretty prints them to the Main window left CR 191 searches left previous for signal transitions or values in the specified Wave window log CR 193 creates a wave log format
245. ent analysis Optional Useful for tracking changes xml Outputs report in XML format Optional See Reporting coverage data UM 351 for more information Zeros Writes out a file based summary of lines that have not been executed zero hits annotates the source code and supports the source and instance options Optional Cannot be used in tandem with the recursive argument For a detailed report that includes line numbers use coverage report zeros lines Examples coverage report totals file myreport txt Writes a top level summary of the number of files statements branches hits and signal toggles to myreport txt coverage report lines noannotate select bcs Writes detailed branch condition and statement statistics without associated source code to the transcript pane coverage report byinstance Writes a summary of code coverage for all instances to the Transcript pane ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 136 coverage report coverage report lines byinstance file myreport txt Writes code coverage details of all instances in the design to myreport txt The lines option reports coverage statistics for each statement branch condition and expression coverage report lines instance top p Writes code coverage details of one specific instance to the Transcript pane coverage report excluded Writes both pragma and user based exclusions to the transcript window as follows coverage report exclu
246. ently being used by vsimk Optional If this number exceeds the actual memory size you will encounter performance degradation time Returns the cumulative wall clock time of all run commands Optional cpu Returns the cumulative processor time of all run commands Optional Processor time differs from wall clock time in that processor time is only counted when the cpu is actually running vsimk If vsimk is swapped out for another process cpu time does not increase context Returns the number of context swaps vsimk being swapped out for another process that occurred during all run commands Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference simstats CR 271 faults Returns the number of page faults that occurred during all run commands Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 272 splitio splitio The splitio command operates on a VHDL inout or out port to create a new signal having the same name as the port suffixed with __o The new signal mirrors the output driving contribution of the port gt Note In ModelSim versions prior to 5 5c splitio was used to split the VHDL inout or output ports so you could re simulate your design from a vcd file using vsim vcdread In later versions addition of the vcd dumpports command CR 297 eliminated the need for splitio Syntax splitio outalso outonly r lt signal_name gt Arguments outalso Allows splitio to work on out ports as well as inout ports Optional
247. ents Examples See also show CR 269 The show command lists HDL objects and subregions visible from the current environment The objects listed include VHDL signals processes constants variables and instances e Verilog nets registers tasks functions instances variables and memories If using C Debug UM 401 show displays the names and types of the local variables and arguments of the current C function The show command returns formatted results to stdout To eliminate formatting to use the output in a Tcl script use the Show command instead show all lt pathname gt all Displays all names at and below the specified path recursively Optional lt pathname gt Specifies the pathname of the environment for which you want the objects and subregions to be listed Optional if omitted the current environment is assumed show Lists the names of all the objects and subregion environments visible in the current environment show uut Lists the names of all the objects and subregions visible in the environment named uut show sub_region Lists the names of all the objects and subregions visible in the environment named sub_region which is directly visible in the current environment environment CR 163 find CR 178 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 270 simstats simstats Syntax Arguments The simstats command returns performance related statistics about elaboration and simulation
248. ents The coverage report command produces textual output of coverage statistics or exclusions You can choose from a number of report output options using the arguments listed below To view this data more interactively right click in the Files tab of the Workspace pane and select Code Coverage gt Coverage Reports from the popup context menu Toggle coverage statistics are relevant only when reporting on instances or design units and are not produced on a per file basis Toggle data is summed for all instances and is reported by port or local name in the design unit rather than by the connected signal If you want toggle coverage statistics you must specify either the byinstance bydu instance or du arguments If you do not use those arguments or you use the source argument toggle coverage statistics are excluded even if you specify select t or select x If you would like to produce a subset of reports in an offline manner i e without a simulation loaded use the vcover report command CR 324 coverage report above lt percent gt below lt percent gt all append bydu byfile byinstance du lt du_name gt excluded pragma user do totals lines dump zeros file lt filename gt instance lt pathname gt library lt libname gt package lt pkgname gt noannotate recursive select bces t x setdefault byfile byinstance bydu Sets the coverage report default
249. equired window lt wname gt Specifies the name of the List or Wave window to target for the configure command The view command CR 334 allows you to create more than one List or Wave window Optional If no window is specified the default window is used the default window is determined by the most recent invocation of the view command CR 334 lt option gt lt value gt bg lt color gt Specifies the window background color Optional fg lt color gt Specifies the window foreground color Optional selectbackground lt color gt Specifies the window background color when selected Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference configure CR 125 selectforeground lt color gt Specifies the window foreground color when selected Optional font lt font gt Specifies the font used in the widget Optional height lt pixels gt Specifies the height in pixels of each row Optional Arguments List window only delta all collapse none The all option displays a new line for each time step on which objects change collapse displays the final value for each time step and none turns off the display of the delta column To use delta usesignaltriggers must be set to 1 on Optional gateduration lt duration_open gt The duration for gating to remain open beyond when gateexpr below becomes false expressed in x number of timescale units Extends gating beyond the back edge the last list row in which the ex
250. er To search for values of objects in the List window use the down command CR 154 and up command CR 292 Likewise in the Wave window the search is done on object names and values in the values column To search for object values in the waveform pane of the Wave window use the right command CR 252 and the left command CR 191 You can also select Edit gt Search in both windows find CR 178 next CR 209 view CR 334 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 264 searchlog searchlog The searchlog command searches one or more of the currently open logfiles for a specified condition It can be used to search for rising or falling edges for signals equal to a specified value or for when a generalized expression becomes true Syntax searchlog count lt n gt deltas env lt path gt expr lt expr gt reverse rising falling anyedge startDelta lt num gt value lt string gt lt startTime gt lt pattern gt If at least one match is found it returns the time and optionally delta at which the last match occurred and the number of matches found in a Tcl list lt time gt lt matchCount gt where lt time gt is in the format lt number gt lt unit gt If the deltas option is specified the delta of the last match is also returned lt time gt lt delta gt lt matchCount gt If no matches are found a TCL_ERROR is returned If one or more matches are found but less than the number requested i
251. er gt lt msg_number gt time version warning lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt work lt library_name gt lt filename gt Arguments 87 Disables support for VHDL 1993 and 2002 Optional Default is 2002 See additional discussion in the examples You can modify the VHDL93 variable in the modelsim ini file to set this permanently see Preference variables located in INI files UM 526 93 Disables support for VHDL 1987 and 2002 Optional Default is 2002 See additional discussion in the examples You can modify the VHDL93 variable in the modelsim ini file to set this permanently see Preference variables located in INI files UM 526 2002 Specifies that the compiler is to support VHDL 2002 Optional This is the default acc lt spec gt lt entity gt architecture Enables access to design objects that would otherwise become unavailable due to optimizations Optional Note that using this option may reduce optimizations lt spec gt currently has only one choice v Enable access to variables constants and aliases in processes that would otherwise be merged due to optimizations ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 314 vcom lt entity gt and lt architecture gt specify the design unit s in which to allow the access If lt architecture gt is not specified then all architectures of a given lt entity gt are enabled for access bindAtCompile Forces ModelSim t
252. er to annotate Required You can obtain a difference s number using the compare start command CR 120 or a popup dialog Difference numbers are ordered by time of the difference start but there may be more than one difference starting at a given time lt idNum2 gt Identifies a second third etc difference number to be annotated in the same way as idNum1 Optional These are individual references ranges of numbers cannot be specified compare annotate ignore 1 2 10 Flags difference numbers 1 2 and 10 as ignore compare annotate text THIS IS A CRITICAL PROBLEM 12 Annotates difference number 12 with the message THIS IS A CRITICAL PROBLEM compare add CR 95 compare info CR 107 and Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 100 compare clock compare clock The compare clock command defines a clock that can then be used for clocked mode comparisons In clocked mode comparisons signals are sampled and compared only at or just after an edge on some signal Syntax compare clock delete offset lt delay gt rising falling both when lt expression gt lt clock_name gt lt signal_path gt Arguments delete Deletes an existing compare clock Optional offset lt delay gt Specifies a time value for delaying the sample time beyond the specified signal edge Optional The default is 0 If a unit e g ps is used with the time value the time must be placed in curly brac
253. erage save or vcover merge command This allows you to gather statistics from multiple simulation runs Syntax coverage reload 57 incremental install lt path gt strip lt n gt lt filename gt Arguments 57 Specifies that the file being reloaded was produced in ModelSim version 5 7x Optional The coverage file format changed in version 5 8 so you must flag files that are from the earlier version incremental Merges loaded coverage data with current coverage data Optional Without this argument loading coverage data overwrites existing data install lt path gt Adds lt path gt as additional hierarchy on the front end of instance and signal names in the data file Optional This argument allows you to merge coverage results from simulations that have different hierarchies 5trip lt n gt Removes lt n gt levels of hierarchy from instance and signal names in the data file Optional This argument allows you to merge coverage results from simulations that have different hierarchies lt filename gt Specifies the file s containing data to reload Required This file should be the output of a previous coverage save command or the output of a veover merge command See also Chapter 13 Measuring code coverage coverage clear CR 129 coverage exclude CR 130 coverage report CR 133 coverage save CR 137 vcover merge CR 322 ModelSim SE Command Reference coverage report CR 133 coverage report Syntax Argum
254. erator hiding with vcom explicit CR 320 importing EVCD files waveform editor GR 295 importing FPGA libraries UM 69 incdir CR 363 incremental compilation automatic UM 116 manual UM 116 with Verilog UM 115 index checking UM 74 indexed arrays escaping square brackets CR 15 init_signal_driver UM 431 init_signal_driver UM 421 init_signal_spy UM 434 init_signal_spy UM 97 UM 424 init_usertfs function UM 414 UM 563 Initial dialog box turning on off UM 522 initialization of SystemC state based code UM 175 initialization sequence UM 617 inlining Verilog modules UM 125 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ VHDL subprograms UM 74 instance code coverage UM 336 instantiation in mixed language design Verilog from VHDL UM 203 VHDL from Verilog UM 207 instantiation in SystemC Verilog design SystemC from Verilog UM 214 Verilog from SystemC UM 209 instantiation in SystemC VHDL design VHDL from SystemC UM 217 instantiation in VHDL SystemC design SystemC from VHDL UM 223 interconnect delays CR 380 UM 453 annotating per Verilog 2001 CR 391 internal signals adding to a VCD file CR 294 IOPATH matching to specify path delays UM 447 iteration_limit infinite zero delay loops UM 81 IterationLimit ini file variable UM 534 K keyboard shortcuts List window UM 610 Main window UM 607 Source window UM 607 Wave window UM 611 keywords disabling 2001 keywords CR 368 enabling SystemVerilog keywords CR 367 L L work UM 118 language te
255. erences from 5 3 nanoseconds to 57 milliseconds compare add CR 95 compare end CR 106 compare start CR 120 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 116 compare savediffs compare savediffs The compare savediffs command saves the comparison results to a file that can be reloaded later To be able to reload the file later you must also save the comparison setup using the compare saverules command Syntax compare savediffs lt diffsFilename gt Arguments lt diffsFilename gt Specifies the name of the file to create Required To load the file at a later time use the compare reload command CR 113 See also compare add CR 95 compare reload CR 113 compare saverules CR 117 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference compare saverules CR 117 compare saverules Syntax Arguments See also The compare saverules command saves the comparison setup information or rules to a file that can be re executed later The command saves compare options clock definitions and region and signal selections compare saverules expand lt rulesFilename gt expand Expands groups specified by the compare add CR 95 command to individual signals Optional If you added a region with the compare add command and then deleted signals from that region you must use the expand argument or the rules will not reflect the signal deletions lt rulesFilename gt Specifies the name o
256. eroperable It is illegal to mix code coverage and functional coverage files in the same invocation of vcover merge Syntax vcover merge and append inputs lt pathname gt install lt path gt log lt filename gt strip lt n gt verbose lt outfile gt lt filel gt lt file2 gt lt filen gt Arguments and Excludes statements in the output file only if they are excluded in all input files Optional By default a statement is excluded in the output merge file if the statement is excluded in any of the input files Not a valid option when merging functional coverage databases append Specifies that progress messages are to be appended to the current log file Optional By default a new log file is created each time you invoke the command Not a valid option when merging functional coverage databases inputs lt pathname gt Specifies a text file containing input filenames that you want to merge Optional install lt path gt Adds lt path gt as additional hierarchy on the front end of instance and object names in the data files Optional This argument allows you to merge coverage results from simulations that have different hierarchies log lt filename gt Specifies the file for outputting progress messages Optional By default these messages are output to vcover log 5trip lt n gt Removes lt n gt levels of hierarchy from instance and object names in the data files Optional This argument allows y
257. error message Optional ranges Prints the numeric ranges of error message numbers by tool Optional lt msgNum gt Specifies the message number of a ModelSim message Required unless you specify the all argument The message number can be obtained from messages that have the format lt Level gt lt Tool gt lt Group gt lt MsgNum gt lt FormattedMsg gt Say you see the following message in the transcript Error vsim 3061 foo v 22 Too many Verilog port connections You would type verror 3061 and receive the following output Message 3061 Too many Verilog ports were specified in a mixed VHDL Verilog instantiation Verify that the correct VHDL Verilog connection is being made and that the number of ports matches DOC ModelSim User s Manual Mixed VHDL and Verilog Designs Chapter ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 332 vgencomp vgencomp Once a Verilog module is compiled into a library you can use the vgencomp command to write its equivalent VHDL component declaration to standard output Optional switches allow you to generate bit or vl_logic port types std_logic port types are generated by default Syntax vgencomp help lib lt library_name gt b s v lt module_name gt Arguments help Displays the command s options and arguments Optional lib lt library_name gt Specifies the pathname of the working library If not specified the default library work is use
258. erskit Library MODEL TECH st gt ASS SSG SSS H i tibrary pwd C modeltech examples memory verilog ModelSim gt E lt No Design Loaded gt Ss add button date transcribe exec date Disable fg blue bg yellow activebackground red Creates a button labeled date that echoes the system date to the Transcript pane The button is disabled during a run its colors are blue foreground yellow background and red active background add button doit run 1000 ns echo did it Disable underline 1 Creates a doit button and underlines the second character of the label the o of doit dockbar tbf0 standard tb button_13 config command run 10000 bg red Changes the button command to run 10000 and changes the button background color to red See also transcribe CR 287 Customize Toolbar dialog GR 112 ModelSim SE Command Reference add dataflow CR 47 add dataflow Syntax See also The add dataflow command adds the specified process signal net or register to the Dataflow window Wildcards are allowed add dataflow lt object gt window lt wname gt lt object gt Specifies a process signal net or register that you want to add to the Dataflow window Required Multiple objects separated by spaces may be specified Wildcards are allowed Note that the WildcardFilter Tcl preference variable identifies types to ignore when matching objects with wildcard patterns window lt wname gt
259. es rising Specifies that the rising edge of the specified signal should be used Optional This is the default falling Specifies that the falling edge of the specified signal should be used Optional The default is rising both Specifies that both the rising and the falling edge of the specified signal should be used Optional The default is rising when lt expression gt Specifies a conditional expression that must evaluate to true or 1 for that clock edge to be used as a strobe Optional The expression is evaluated at the time of the clock edge rather than after the delay has been applied See GUI_expression_format CR 22 for legal expression syntax lt clock_name gt A name for this clock definition Required This name will be used with the compare add command when doing a clocked mode comparison lt signal_path gt A full path to the signal whose edges are to be used as the strobe trigger Required ModelSim SE Command Reference compare clock CR 101 Examples compare clock rising strobe gold top clock Defines a clocked compare strobe named strobe that samples signals on the rising edge of signal gold top clock compare clock rising delay 12 ns clock12 gold mydesign clka Defines a clocked compare strobe named clock 12 that samples signals 12 ns after the rising edge of signal gold mydesign clka See also compare add CR 95 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Referenc
260. essing files VCD tasks UM 464 compressing files VCD files CR 297 CR 306 concatenation directives CR 28 of signals CR 27 CR 353 ConcurrentFileLimit ini file variable UM 533 conditional breakpoints CR 409 configuration simulator state variable UM 544 configurations instantiation in mixed designs UM 203 Verilog UM 122 configurations simulating CR 375 configure command CR 124 Configure cover directives dialog GR 155 connectivity exploring UM 303 constants in case statements CR 316 values of displaying CR 149 CR 164 contention checking CR 85 context menu List window GR 161 context menus Library tab UM 61 context sensitivity UM 274 control function SystemC UM 192 control_foreign_signal function UM 183 conversion radix CR 243 convert real to time UM 99 convert time to real UM 98 coverage merging data UM 356 saving raw data UM 356 see also Code Coverage see also functional coverage coverage clear command CR 129 coverage exclude command CR 130 coverage reload command CR 132 coverage report command CR 133 Coverage Report dialog GR 95 coverage reports UM 351 reporting all signals UM 346 sample reports UM 353 xml format UM 352 coverage save command CR 137 coverage_save system function UM 152 CoverAtLeast ini file variable UM 533 CoverEnable ini file variable UM 533 CoverLimit ini file variable UM 533 CoverLog ini file variable UM 533 CoverWeight ini file variable UM 533 covreport xs UM 352 CppOptions ini
261. estart GR 93 Runtime Options GR 90 Save Memory GR 183 Signal Breakpoints GR 103 Simulation Configuration GR 51 Start Simulation GR 81 SystemC Link dialog GR 73 directories mapping libraries CR 372 moving libraries UM 63 directory changing disabled GR 25 disable_menu command CR 151 disable_menuitem command CR 152 disablebp command CR 150 distributed delay mode UM 145 dividers adding from command line CR 53 Wave window UM 257 DLL files loading UM 570 UM 577 do command CR 153 DO files macros CR 153 error handling UM 492 executing at startup UM 523 UM 536 parameters passing to UM 489 Tcl source command UM 493 docking window panes GR 264 documentation UM 35 DOPATH environment variable UM 523 down command CR 154 DPI export TFs UM 553 DPI export TFs UM 553 DPI use flow UM 568 drag amp drop preferences GR 109 drivers Dataflow Window UM 303 show in Dataflow window UM 270 Wave window UM 270 drivers command CR 156 drivers multiple on unresolved signal GR 58 GR 67 dump files viewing in ModelSim CR 312 dumplog64 command CR 157 dumpports tasks VCD files UM 463 E echo command CR 158 edges finding CR 191 CR 252 edit command CR 159 Editing in notepad windows UM 607 in the Main window UM 607 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ in the Source window UM 607 EDITOR environment variable UM 523 editor default changing UM 523 elab_defer_fli argument UM 84 UM 140 elaboration file creating UM 83 UM 139 loading UM
262. ex constant otherwise is 0 left expr top u3 addr and 32 hff000000 32 hac000000 Searches left for an expression that evaluates to a boolean when the upper 8 bits of the 32 bit signal top u3 addr equals hex ac left expr NOW gt 23 us amp amp NOW lt 54 us amp amp clk rising amp amp mode writing Searches left for an expression that evaluates to a boolean when logfile time is between 23 and 54 microseconds clock just changed from low to high and signal mode is enumeration writing gt Note Wave window mouse and keyboard shortcuts UM 611 are also available for next and previous edge searches Tab searches right next and shift tab searches left previous GUI_expression_format CR 22 right CR 252 seetime CR 266 view CR 334 ModelSim SE Command Reference log Syntax Arguments log CR 193 The log command creates a wave log format WLF file containing simulation data for all HDL objects whose names match the provided specifications Objects that are displayed using the add list CR 48 and add wave CR 53 commands are automatically recorded in the WLF file The log is stored in a WLF file in the working directory By default the file is named vsim wi f You can change the default name using the wlf option of the vsim CR 375 command If no port mode is specified the WLF file contains data for all objects in the selected region whose names match the object name s
263. ext then an upward search is done to look for a matching object in any visible enclosing scope up to an instance boundary If at least one match is found within a given context no more upward searching is done therefore some objects that may be visible from a given context will not be found when wildcards are used if they are within a higher enclosing scope e The wildcards and can be used at any level of a name except in the dataset name and inside of a slice specification e A wildcard character will never match a path separator For example dut will match dut siga and dut clk However dut won t match either of those See Design object names CR 12 for more information on specifying names ModelSim SE Command Reference examine CR 165 Syntax examine delta lt delta gt env lt path gt in out inout internal ports expr lt expression gt name lt radix gt time lt time gt value lt name gt Arguments delta lt delta gt Specifies a simulation cycle at the specified time from which to fetch the value Optional The default is to use the last delta of the time step The objects to be examined must be logged via the add list add wave or log command in order for the examine command to be able to return a value for a requested delta This option can be used only with objects that have been logged via the add list add wave or log command env lt path gt Specifies a
264. f the file to which you want to save the rules Required To load the file at a later time use the compare reload command CR 113 compare add CR 95 compare reload CR 113 compare savediffs CR 116 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 118 compare see compare see The compare see command displays the specified comparison difference in the Wave window using whatever horizontal and vertical scrolling are necessary The signal containing the specified difference will be highlighted and the active cursor will be positioned at the starting time of the difference Syntax compare see first last next nextanno previous prevanno wavepane lt n gt wavewin lt name gt Arguments first Shows the first difference ordered by time Optional Performs the same action as the Find First Difference button in the Wave window Last Shows the last difference ordered by time Optional Performs the same action as the Find Last Difference button in the Wave window next Shows the next difference in time after the currently selected difference Optional Performs the same action as the Find Next Difference button in the Wave window nextanno Shows the next annotated difference in time after the currently selected difference Optional Performs the same action as the Next Annotated Difference button in the Wave window previous Shows the previous difference in time before the curren
265. f the port did not have an explicit initialization value and the actual signal connected to the port had explicit initial values Depending on a number of factors ModelSim could incorrectly use the actual signal s initial value when initializing lower level drivers Note that the argument does not cause all lower level drivers to use the actual signal s initial value It does this only in the specific cases where older versions used the actual signal s initial value noothersstaticerror Disables warnings that result from array aggregates with multiple choices having others clauses that are not locally static Optional If the pedanticerrors switch is specified this switch is ignored nopsl Instructs the compiler to ignore embedded PSL assertions By default vcom parses any PSL assertion statements it finds in the specified files See Compiling and simulating assertions UM 377 for more information norangecheck Disables run time range checking In some designs this results in a 2X speed increase Range checking is enabled by default or once disabled can be enabled using rangecheck See Range and index checking UM 74 for additional information note lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Changes the severity level of the specified message s to note Optional Edit the note UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information no
266. ffile2 gt ModelSim SE Command Reference wifman CR 419 Arguments for wlfman info lt wlffile gt Specifies the WLF file from which you want information Required Arguments for wlfman items r Lists regions only no signals Optional V Produces verbose output that lists the object type next to each object Optional lt wlffile gt Specifies the WLF file for which you want a profile report Required Arguments for wlfman filter begin lt time gt Specifies the simulation time at which you want to begin reading information from the source WLF file Optional By default the output includes the entire time that is recorded in the source WLF file end lt time gt Specifies the simulation time at which you want to end reading information from the source WLF file Optional f lt object_list_file gt Specifies an object_list_file created by wlfman items to include in the output WLF file Optional r lt object gt Specifies an object region to recursively include in the output If lt object gt is a signal the output would be the same as using s Optional s lt symbol gt Specifies an object to include in the output Optional By default all objects are output t lt resolution gt Specifies the time resolution of the new WLF file Optional By default the resolution is the same as the source WLF file lt sourcewlffile gt Specifies the source WLF file from which you want objects Required lt
267. file variable sccom UM 530 CppPath ini file variable sccom UM 530 Create a New Library dialog GR 43 Create Project dialog GR 42 Create Project File dialog GR 48 current exclusions pragmas UM 348 Current Exclusions pane GR 127 cursors adding deleting locking naming UM 245 link to Dataflow window UM 302 measuring time with UM 245 trace events with UM 306 Wave window UM 245 Customize Toolbar dialog GR 112 customizing adding buttons CR 45 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ via preference variables GR 293 D deltas explained UM 80 data types Code Coverage UM 337 database functional coverage saving UM 397 Dataflow Options dialog GR 146 Dataflow Page Setup dialog GR 144 Dataflow window UM 300 GR 134 automatic cell hiding GR 146 GR 147 menu bar GR 135 options GR 146 GR 147 pan UM 305 zoom UM 305 see also windows Dataflow window dataflow bsm file UM 313 dataset alias command CR 138 Dataset Browser UM 229 GR 54 dialog GR 54 dataset clear command CR 139 dataset close command CR 140 dataset info command CR 141 dataset list command CR 142 dataset open command CR 143 dataset rename command CR 144 CR 145 Dataset Snapshot UM 231 dataset snapshot command CR 146 datasets UM 225 environment command specifying with CR 163 managing UM 229 openingdialogs Open File GR 44 reference UM 273 restrict dataset prefix display UM 230 test UM 274 DatasetSeparator ini file variable UM 533 debuggable SystemC objects UM 176
268. from the top level design unit block1 u2 clk specifies the object clk two levels down from the current context array_sig 4 specifies an index of an array object array_sig I to 10 specifies a slice of an array object in VHDL or SystemC see Escaping brackets and spaces in array slices CR 15 for more information mysignal 31 0 specifies a slice of an array object in Verilog or SystemC see Escaping brackets and spaces in array slices CR 15 for more information record_sig field specifies a field of a record a C class or structure member or a C base class ModelSim SE Command Reference Design object names CR 15 Escaping brackets and spaces in array slices Because ModelSim is a Tcl based tool you must use curly braces to escape square brackets and spaces when specifying array slices For example toggle add data 3 0 or toggle add data 3 to 0 For complete details on Tcl syntax see Tcl command syntax UM 476 Further details As a Tcl based tool ModelSim commands follow Tcl syntax One problem people encounter with ModelSim commands is the use of square brackets or spaces when specifying array slices As shown on the previous page square brackets are used to specify slices of arrays e g data 3 0 However in Tcl square brackets signify command substitution Consider the following example set aluinputs find in alu ModelSim evaluates the find com
269. g you to select the options and enter a filename vcom example vhd Compiles the VHDL source code contained in the file example vhd ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 320 vcom vcom 87 o_unitsl vhd o_units2 vhd veom 93 n_unit91l vhd n_unit92 vhd ModelSim supports designs that use elements conforming to the 1987 1993 and 2002 standards Compile the design units separately using the appropriate switches vcom nodebug example vhd Hides the internal data of example vhd Models compiled with nodebug cannot use any of the ModelSim debugging features any subsequent user will not be able to see into the model vcom nodebug ports level3 vhd level2 vhd vcom nodebug top vhd The first line compiles and hides the internal data plus the ports of the lower level design units level3 vhd and level2 vhd The second line compiles the top level unit top vhd without hiding the ports It is important to compile the top level without ports because top level ports must be visible for simulation vcom noaccel numeric_std example wvhd When compiling source that uses the numeric_std package this command turns off acceleration of the numeric_std package located in the ieee library vcom explicit example vhd Although it is not obvious the operator is overloaded in the std_logic_1164 package All enumeration data types in VHDL get an implicit definition for the operator So while there is no explicit operator there is an impl
270. g examples for more information source Displays the associated line of source code before each error message that is generated during compilation Optional by default only the error message is displayed SV Enables SystemVerilog keywords Optional By default ModelSim follows the rules of IEEE Std 1364 2001 and ignores SystemVerilog keywords If a source file has a sv extension ModelSim will automatically parse SystemVerilog keywords suppress lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Prevents the specified message s from displaying Optional You cannot suppress Fatal or Internal messages Edit the suppress UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information time Reports the wall clock time vlog takes to compile the design Optional Note that if many processes are running on the same system wall clock time may differ greatly from the actual cpu time spent on vlog typdelays Selects typical delays from the min typ max expressions Default If preferred you can defer delay selection until simulation time by specifying the same option to the simulator u Converts regular Verilog identifiers to uppercase Allows case insensitivity for module names Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 368 vlog v lt library_file gt Specifies a source library file containing module and UDP definitions Optional See Verilog XL compa
271. g the optimized flow the default UM 125 The primary purpose of this argument is to pass acc arguments Optional warning lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Changes the severity level of the specified message s to warning Optional Edit the warning UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information wlf lt filename gt Specifies the name of the wave log format WLF file to create The default is vsim wif Optional Corresponding ini file entry is WLFFilename wlfcollapsedelta Instructs ModelSim to record values in the WLF file only at the end of each simulator delta step Any sub delta values are ignored May dramatically reduce WLF file size This option may also be specified with the WLFCollapseMode UM 537 variable in the modelsim ini file Default wlfcollapsetime Instructs ModelSim to record values in the WLF file only at the end of each simulator time step Any delta or sub delta values are ignored May dramatically reduce WLF file size This option may also be specified with the WLFCollapseMode UM 537 variable in the modelsim ini file Optional wlfcompress Creates compressed WLF files Default Use wlfnocompress to turn off compression wlfopt Optimizes the display of waveforms in the Wave window Default Optional WLF files created prior to ModelSim version 5 8 cannot take advantage of the optimizatio
272. gON MsgOFF violation reporting is enabled disabled and unchangeable MsgOn MsgOff violation reporting is enabled disabled and modifiable lt XStat gt violation X generation status indicator XON XOFF X generation is enabled disabled and unchangeable XOn XOff X generation is enabled disabled and modifiable Examples tcheck_status top yl u2 Creates the following output 0 WIDTH negedge CLK MsgOn XOn 1 WIDTH posedge CLK MsgOn XOn 2 SETUP negedge D posedge CLK MsgOFF XOFF 3 HOLD posedge CLK negedge D MsgOn XOff tcheck_status lines top yl u2 1 Creates the following output 1 WIDTH posedge CLK cell v 224 MsgOn XOn See also tcheck_set CR 277 Chapter 18 Standard Delay Format SDF Timing Annotation ModelSim SE Command Reference toggle add CR 281 toggle add The toggle add command enables collection of toggle statistics for the specified nodes The allowed nodes are Verilog nets and registers and VHDL signals of type bit bit_vector std_logic and std_logic_vector other types are silently ignored You can also collect and view toggle statistics in the ModelSim GUI See Chapter 13 Measuring code coverage for details Syntax toggle add full in inout internal out ports r lt node_name gt unique Returns Command result Return value no signals are added and no signals are Nothing added found to be already in the toggl
273. gal Agreement concerning the use of Software between you the end user either individually or as an authorized representative of the company acquiring the license and Mentor Graphics Corporation and Mentor Graphics Ireland Limited acting directly or through their subsidiaries or authorized distributors collectively Mentor Graphics USE OF SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR COMPLETE AND UNCONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT If you do not agree to these terms and conditions promptly return or if received electronically certify destruction of Software and all accompanying items within five days after receipt of Software and receive a full refund of any license fee paid END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT GRANT OF LICENSE The software programs you are installing downloading or have acquired with this Agreement including any updates modifications revisions copies documentation and design data Software are copyrighted trade secret and confidential information of Mentor Graphics or its licensors who maintain exclusive title to all Software and retain all rights not expressly granted by this Agreement Mentor Graphics grants to you subject to payment of appropriate license fees a nontransferable nonexclusive license to use Software solely a in machine readable object code form b for your internal business purposes and c on the computer hardware or at the site for which an applicable li
274. ges UM 282 setting triggers UM 267 waveform comparison UM 282 see also windows List window LM_LICENSE_FILE environment variable UM 523 Load Coverage Data dialog GR 94 loading the design overview UM 26 Locals window GR 172 see also windows Locals window location maps referencing source files UM 67 locations maps ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ specifying source files with UM 67 lock message UM 553 locking cursors UM 245 log command CR 193 log file log command CR 193 nolog command CR 211 overview UM 225 QuickSim II format CR 415 redirecting with 1 CR 379 virtual log command CR 345 virtual nolog command CR 348 see also WLF files Logic Modeling SmartModel command channel UM 624 SmartModel Windows Imcwin commands UM 625 memory arrays UM 626 long simulations saving at intervals UM 231 Ishift command CR 195 Isublist command CR 196 M Macro dialog GR 108 macro_option command CR 197 MacroNestingLevel simulator state variable UM 544 macros DO files UM 489 breakpoints executing at CR 77 creating from a saved transcript GR 20 depth of nesting simulator state variable UM 544 error handling UM 492 executing CR 153 forcing signals nets or registers CR 182 parameters as a simulator state variable n UM 544 passing CR 153 UM 489 total number passed UM 544 relative directories CR 153 shifting parameter values CR 268 Startup macros UM 540 main clear command CR 43 Main window GR 17 code coverage UM 341 GUI changes UM 273 se
275. ges to the new time before plotting the new Y Analog interpolated draws a diagonal line Analog backstep plots the new Y before moving to the new time See Formatting the Wave window UM 255 for more information height lt pixels gt Specifies the height in pixels of the waveform Optional in For use with wildcard searches Specifies that the scope of the search is to include ports of mode IN if they match the object_name specification Optional inout For use with wildcard searches Specifies that the scope of the search is to include ports of mode INOUT if they match the object_name specification Optional internal For use with wildcard searches Specifies that the scope of the search is to include internal objects non port objects if they match the object_name specification Optional label lt name gt Specifies an alternative name for the signal being added to the Wave window Optional For example add wave label c clock adds the clock signal labeled as c to the Wave window This alternative name is not valid in a force CR 182 or examine CR 164 command however it can be used in a search command CR 262 with the wave option noupdate Prevents the Wave window from updating when a series of add wave commands are executed in series Optional lt object_name gt Specifies the names of objects to be included in the Wave window display Optional Wildcard characters are allowed Note tha
276. ggle statistics collection for the named node s Required Multiple names and wildcards are accepted unique Reports an attempt to add a signal that is an alias to a signal already added The alias will not be added Optional Examples toggle add dut data a Enables toggle statistics collection for signal dut data a toggle add dut data_in 5 Enables toggle statistics collection for bit 6 of bus dut data_in The curly braces must be added in order to escape the square brackets See also Toggle coverage UM 344 toggle report CR 285 toggle reset CR 286 ModelSim SE Command Reference toggle disable CR 283 toggle disable Syntax Arguments See also The toggle disable command disables toggle statistics collection on the specified nodes The command provides a method of implementing coverage exclusions for toggle coverage The command is intended to be used as follows 1 Enable toggle statistics collection for all signals using the cover t x argument to vcom CR 313 or vlog CR 360 2 Exclude certain signals by disabling them with the toggle disable command toggle disable all in out inout internal ports r lt node_name gt all Disables toggle statistics collection for all nodes that have toggle checking enabled Optional Must be used alone without other arguments in Disables toggle statistics collection on nodes of mode IN Optional out Disables toggle statis
277. gion in Includes only port driver changes from ports of mode IN Optional out Includes only port driver changes from ports of mode OUT Optional inout Includes only port driver changes from ports of mode INOUT Optional internal Includes only internal variable or signal changes Excludes port driver changes Optional ports Includes only port driver changes Excludes internal variable or signal changes Optional file lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file This option should be used only when you have created multiple VCD files using the vcd files command CR 306 lt object_name gt Specifies the Verilog or VHDL object to add to the VCD file Required Multiple objects may be specified by separating names with spaces Wildcards are accepted See also See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files Verilog tasks are documented in the IEEE 1364 standard ModelSim SE Command Reference vcd checkpoint CR 295 ved checkpoint The ved checkpoint command dumps the current values of all VCD variables to the specified VCD file While simulating only value changes are dumped Related Verilog tasks dumpall fdumpall Syntax ved checkpoint lt filename gt Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file Optional If omitted the command is executed on the file designated by the ved file command CR 304 or dump vcd if ved file was not invoked See
278. h an object takes on a particular value or an expression of multiple objects evaluates to true See the down command CR 154 for related functionality The procedure for using up includes three steps click on the desired object click on the desired starting location issue the up command The seetime command CR 266 can initially position the cursor from the command line if desired Returns lt number_found gt lt new_time gt lt new_delta gt up expr lt expression gt falling noglitch rising value lt sig_value gt window lt wname gt lt n gt expr lt expression gt The List window will be searched until the expression evaluates to a boolean true condition Optional The expression may involve more than one object but is limited to objects that have been logged in the referenced List window An object may be specified either by its full path or by the shortcut label displayed in the List window See GUI _expression_format CR 22 for the format of the expression The expression must be placed within curly braces falling Searches for a falling edge on the specified object if that object is a scalar If itis not a scalar the option will be ignored Optional noglitch Specifies that delta width glitches are to be ignored Optional rising Searches for a rising edge on the specified object if that object is a scalar If it is not a scalar the option will be ignored Optional value lt s
279. h signals only in the containing context lt testPath gt Specifies an absolute or relative path to the test signal or region Cannot be a glob expression Optional If omitted the test path defaults to the same path as lt referencePath gt except for the dataset name compare add Selects signals in the reference and test dataset top region according to the default mode Uses asynchronous comparison with the default tolerances Assumes that the top regions of the reference and test datasets have the same name and contain the same signals with the same names compare add port clock myclock10 gold test_ringbuf ring_inst Selects port signals of instance test_ringbuf ring_inst in both datasets to be compared and sampled on strobe myclock10 compare add r gold top cpu test testbench cpu Selects all signals in the cpu region to be compared asynchronously using the default tolerances Requires that the reference and test relative hierarchies and signal names within the cpu region be identical but they need not be the same above the cpu region compare add clock clock12 gold top s1l Specifies that signal gold top s1 should be sampled at clock12 and compared with test top s1 also sampled at clock12 compare add tollLead 3 ns tolTrail 5 ns gold asynch abc sl sim flat sigabc Specifies that signal gold asynch abc s1 should be compared asynchronously with signal sim flat sigabc using a leading tolerance of 3 ns and a tr
280. hange the default using the compare options command CR 109 or by editing the PrefCompare defaultHideIfNoDiffs variable in the pref tcl file show Shows all comparisons even if they don t have any differences Optional Default You can change the default using the compare options command CR 109 or by editing the PrefCompare defaultHideIfNoDiffs variable in the pref tcl file maxsignal lt n gt Specifies an upper limit for the total differences encountered on any one signal When that limit is reached ModelSim stops computing differences on that signal Optional The default limit is 100 You can change the default using the compare options command CR 109 or by editing the PrefCompare defaultMaxSignalErrors variable in the pref tcl file maxtotal lt n gt Specifies an upper limit for the total differences encountered When that limit is reached ModelSim stops computing differences Optional The default limit is 1000 You can change the default using the compare options command CR 109 or by editing the PrefCompare defaultMaxTotalErrors variable in the pref tcl file refDelay lt delay gt Delays the reference dataset relative to the test dataset Optional If lt delay gt contains a unit it must be enclosed in curly braces Delays are applied to signals specified with the compare add command CR 95 For each signal compared a delayed virtual signal is created with _d appended to the signal name and these are the signal
281. has been disabled via the RequireConfigForAllDefaultBinding option in the modelsim ini file Optional pslfile lt filename gt Identifies an external PSL assertion file to compile along with the VHDL source files See Compiling and simulating assertions UM 377 for more information quiet Disables Loading messages Optional rangecheck Enables run time range checking Default Range checking can be disabled using the norangecheck argument See Range and index checking UM 74 for additional information refresh Regenerates a library image Optional By default the work library is updated use work lt library gt to update a different library See vecom Examples CR 319 for more information 5 Instructs the compiler not to load the standard package Optional This argument should only be used if you are compiling the standard package itself ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples vcom CR 319 skip abcep Directs the compiler to skip all a architectures b bodies c configurations e entities p packages Any combination in any order can be used but one choice is required if you use this optional switch source Displays the associated line of source code before each error message that is generated during compilation Optional By default only the error message is displayed suppress lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Prevents the specified message s from displaying Optio
282. have twice the impact on the aggregated coverage numbers as will a directive with a weight of 1 The weight must be a natural integer gt 0 If its weight is set to 0 but a directive is otherwise enabled its coverage will not count toward the aggregated coverage statistics The default value is 1 Optional Examples fcover configure Reports the current configuration settings for the functional coverage directives in the current scope fcover configure enable at_least 20 top reset_trigger Enables coverage counting for top reset_trigger with an AtLeast count of 20 fcover configure r disable top Disables all functional coverage directives in the region top and all regions below top See also Chapter 15 Functional coverage with PSL and ModelSim Configuring functional coverage directives UM 388 ModelSim SE Command Reference fcover reload CR 173 fcover reload Syntax Arguments Examples The fcover reload command seeds functional coverage statistics with results from a previous coverage analysis This allows you to gather statistics from multiple simulation runs and aggregate them into a single set of statistics Note that this command must be run on an elaborated simulation database To merge coverage databases in offline mode use the vcover merge command CR 322 fcover reload lt filename gt install lt path gt merge strip lt n gt lt filename gt Specifies the functional coverage database
283. he specified menu name Use the add_menuitem CR 60 add_separator CR 61 add_menucb CR 59 and add_submenu CR 62 commands to complete the menu Returns the full Tk pathname of the new menu Color and other Tk properties of the menu may be changed after creating the menu using the Tk menu widget configure command add_menu lt window_name gt lt menu_name gt lt shortcut gt hide_menubutton lt window_name gt Tk path of the window to contain the menu Required nn Note that the path for the Main window must be expressed as All other window pathnames begin with a period You can also use a variable and the view lt window name gt command to obtain the window path see example below lt menu_name gt Name to be given to the Tk menu widget Required lt shortcut gt Number of the letter in the menu name that is to be used as the shortcut Numbering starts with 0 i e first letter 0 second letter 1 third letter 2 etc Optional unless you specify hide_menubutton in which case lt shortcut gt is required Default is 1 which indicates no shortcut is to be used hide_menubutton Causes the new menu not to be displayed Optional You can add the menu later by calling tk_popup on the menu path widget Note that you must specify lt shortcut gt if you specify hide_menubutton ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 58 add_menu Examples The following Tcl code is an example of creating user cu
284. he ending value of the counter This option applies to Range counter patterns only All other counter patterns start from 0 and go to the max value for that particular signal e g for a 3 bit signal the start value will be 000 and end value will be 111 period lt value gt The period after which the value should change Required repeat forever never lt _of_times gt The number of times to repeat Required startvalue lt value gt The starting value of the counter This option applies to Range counter patterns only All other counter patterns start from 0 and go to the max value for that particular signal e g for a 3 bit signal the start value will be 000 and end value will be 111 step lt value gt The step by which the counter is incremented decremented Required wave create pattern counter clk Creates a clock signal with the following default values period 100 dutycycle 50 starttime 0 endtime 1000 initialvalue 0 wave create driver freeze pattern constant value 1111 starttime Ons endtime 1000ns sim andm v_cont2 Creates a constant signal from 0 to 1000 ns with a value of 1111 and a drive type of freeze wave edit command CR 402 wave modify command CR 407 Chapter 10 Generating stimulus with Waveform Editor ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 402 wave edit wave edit The wave edit command modifies waveforms created with the wave create command See the ModelSim Command Reference for syntax T
285. he following table summarizes the available editing options Command Description wave edit cut Cut part of a waveform to the clipboard wave edit copy Copy part of a waveform to the clipboard wave edit paste Paste the waveform from the clipboard wave edit invert Vertically flip part of a waveform wave edit mirror Mirror part of a waveform wave edit insert_pulse Insert a new edge on a waveform doesn t affect waveform duration wave edit delete Delete an edge from a waveform doesn t affect waveform duration wave edit stretch Move an edge by stretching the waveform wave edit move Move an edge without moving other edges wave edit change_value Change the value of part of a waveform wave edit extend Extend all waves wave edit driveType Change the driver type wave edit undo Undo an edit wave edit redo Redo a previously undone edit Syntax wave edit cut copy paste invert mirror end lt time gt start lt time gt lt object_name gt wave edit insert_pulse duration lt time gt start lt time gt lt object_name gt wave edit delete time lt time gt lt object_name gt wave edit stretch move backward lt time gt forward lt time gt time lt time gt lt object_name gt wave edit change_value end lt time gt start lt time gt lt value gt lt object_name gt wave edit extend extend to by time lt time gt ModelSim SE Command Reference wave edit CR 403 wave
286. he module source or compile options have changed as module 1 v is parsed If no change is found the code generation phase is skipped Differences in compile options are determined by comparing the compiler options stored in the _info file with the compiler options given They must match exactly ModelSim SE Command Reference vmake Syntax Arguments Examples vmake CR 371 The vmake utility allows you to use a UNIX or Windows MAKE program to maintain libraries You run vmake on a compiled design library and the utility outputs a makefile You can then run the makefile with a version of MAKE not supplied with ModelSim to reconstruct the library A MAKE program is included with Microsoft Visual C C as well as many other program development environments After running the vmake utility MAKE recompiles only the design units and their dependencies that have changed You run vmake only once then you can simply run MAKE to rebuild your design If you add new design units or delete old ones you should re run vmake to generate a new makefile The vmake utility ignores library objects compiled with nodebug Also the vmake utility is not supported for use with SystemC This command must be invoked from either the UNIX or the Windows DOS prompt vmake fullsrcpath help lt library_name gt gt lt makefile gt fullsrcpath Produces complete source file paths within generated makefiles Optional By default source file p
287. he name of an object Required Must match an object name used in a previous force command CR 182 Multiple object names may be specified Wildcard characters are allowed force CR 182 and Wildcard characters CR 17 ModelSim SE Command Reference nolog Syntax Arguments nolog CR 211 The nolog command suspends writing of data to the wave log format WLF file for the specified signals A flag is written into the WLF file for each signal turned off and the GUI displays No Data for the signal s until logging for the signal s is turned back on Logging can be turned back on by issuing another log command CR 193 or by doing a nolog reset Because use of the nolog command adds new information to the WLF file WLF files created when using the nolog command cannot be read by older versions of the simulator If you are using dumplog64 c you will need to get an updated version nolog all depth lt level gt howmany in inout internal out ports recursive reset lt object_name gt all Turns off logging for all signals currently logged Optional depth lt level gt Restricts a recursive search specified with the recursive argument to a certain level of hierarchy lt level gt is an integer greater than or equal to zero For example if you specify depth 1 the command descends only one level in the hierarchy Optional howmany Returns an integer indicating the number of sign
288. he rtl version of the design Because there is no common design region for the inputs to the expression siga_diff is installed in region virtuals Functions The virtual function siga_diff can be added to the Wave window and when expanded will show the two original signals that are being compared virtual function delay 10 ns top signalA AND top signalB myDelayAandB Creates a virtual signal consisting of the logical AND function of top signalA with top signalB and delays it by 10 ns virtual function gate chip outbus XOR rtl chip outbus outbus_diff Creates a one bit signal outbus_diff which is non zero during times when any bit of chip outbus in the gate level version doesn t match the corresponding bit in the rtl version This expression uses the OR reduction operator which takes the logical OR of all the bits of the vector argument ModelSim SE Command Reference Commands fully compatible with virtual functions virtual function CR 343 add list CR 48 add log log CR 193 add wave CR 53 checkpoint CR 94 and restore CR 250 delete CR 148 describe CR 149 virtual describe is a little faster down CR 154 up CR 292 examine CR 164 find CR 178 restart CR 248 left CR 191 right CR 252 search CR 262 searchlog CR 264 show CR 269 Commands not currently compatible with virtual functions check contention add CR 8
289. hermore modA and modB both instantiate modules named cellA but the definition of cellA compiled into libA is different from that compiled into libB In this case you can t just specify L libA L libB because instantiations of cellA from modB resolve to the libA version of cellA See Library usage UM 117 for further information vlog top v v undl After compiling top v vlog will scan the file und for modules or primitives referenced but undefined in top v Only referenced definitions will be compiled vlog top v t tlibext v u y vlog_lib After compiling top v vlog will scan the vlog_lib library for files with modules with the same name as primitives referenced but undefined in top v The use of libext v u implies filenames with a v or u suffix any combination of suffixes may be used Only referenced definitions will be compiled vlog work mylib refresh The work option specifies mylib as the library to regenerate refresh rebuilds the library image without using source code allowing models delivered as compiled libraries without source code to be rebuilt for a specific release of ModelSim If your library contains VHDL design units be sure to regenerate the library with the vcom command CR 313 using the refresh option as well See Regenerating your design libraries UM 66 for more information ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 370 vlog vlog modulel v u 00 incr The incr option determines whether or not t
290. hift command takes a Tcl list as an argument and shifts it in place one place to the left eliminating the left most element The number of shift places may also be specified Returns nothing lshift lt list gt lt amount gt lt list gt Specifies the Tcl list to target with Ishift Required lt amount gt Specifies the number of places to shift Optional Default is 1 proc myfunc args throws away the first two arguments lshift args 2 See the Tcl man pages Help gt Tcl Man Pages for details ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 196 Isublist Isublist Syntax Arguments Examples See also The Isublist command returns a sublist of the specified Tcl list that matches the specified Tcl glob pattern lsublist lt list gt lt pattern gt lt list gt Specifies the Tcl list to target with Isublist Required lt pattern gt Specifies the pattern to match within the lt list gt using Tcl glob style matching Required In the example below variable t returns structure signals source set window_names structure signals variables process source wave list dataflow set t lsublist Swindow_names s The set command is a Tcl command See the Tcl man pages Help gt Tcl Man Pages for details ModelSim SE Command Reference macro_option CR 197 macro_option Syntax Arguments See also This command is available for UNIX only excluding Linux The macro_option command control
291. his section you can use the Tcl commands described in the Tcl man pages use the Main window menu selection Help gt Tcl Man Pages Command syntax See Syntax and conventions CR 9 for complete command syntax information gt Note ModelSim commands are case sensitive Type them as they are shown in this reference ModelSim SE Command Reference Command reference table Command reference table The following table provides a brief description of each ModelSim command Command details arguments and examples can be found at the page numbers given in the Command name column Command name Action main clear CR 43 clears the Main window transcript abort CR 44 halts the execution of a macro file interrupted by a breakpoint or error add button CR 45 adds a user defined button to the Main window button bar add dataflow CR 47 adds the specified object to the Dataflow window add list CR 48 lists VHDL signals and variables and Verilog nets and registers and their values in the List window add log also known as the log command see log CR 193 add memory CR 51 opens the specified memory in the MDI frame of the Main window add watch CR 52 adds signals or variables to the Monitor window add wave CR 53 adds VHDL signals and variables and Verilog nets and registers to the Wave window add_menu CR 57 adds a menu to the menu bar of the s
292. hname pane Optional Default of 0 displays the full path 1 displays only the leaf path element 2 displays the last two path elements and so on Related Tcl variable is PrefWave SignalNameWidth Can also be set with the WaveSignalName Width variable in the modelsim ini file timecolor lt color gt Specifies the time axis color Default is green Optional Related Tcl variable is PrefWave timeColor timeline lt value gt Specifies whether the horizontal axis displays simulation time default or grid period count Default is zero When set to 1 the grid period count is displayed Related Tcl variable is PrefWave timeline valuecolwidth lt width gt Specifies in pixels the width of the value column Default is 100 Related Tcl variable is PrefWave valueColWidth vectorcolor lt color gt Specifies the vector waveform color Default is b3ffb3 Optional Related Tcl variable is PrefWave vectorColor ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See also configure CR 127 waveselectcolor lt color gt Specifies the background highlight color of a selected waveform Default is grey30 Related Tcl variable is PrefWave waveSelectColor waveselectenable lt value gt Specifies whether the waveform background highlights when an object is selected 1 enables highlighting 0 disables highlighting Default is 0 Related Tcl variable is PrefWave waveSelectEnabled To get a more readable listing of all attributes and
293. ications can be made Optional If no library is specified the work library is used Environment variables can be used lt design_unit gt may be one of the following lt configuration gt Specifies the VHDL configuration to simulate lt module gt Specifies the name of one or more top level Verilog modules to be simulated Optional lt entity gt lt architecture gt Specifies the name of the top level VHDL entity to be simulated Optional The entity may have an architecture optionally specified if omitted the last architecture compiled for the specified entity is simulated An entity is not valid if a configuration is specified lt optimized_design_name gt Specifies the name of an optimized design See the vopt command CR 373 Optional a Most UNIX shells require arguments containing to be single quoted to prevent special parsing by the shell See the examples below lt MPF_file_ name gt Opens the specified project Optional lt WLF_file_name gt Opens the specified dataset Optional lt text_file_name gt Opens the specified text file in a Source window Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference vsim CR 393 Examples vsim gedge low high gVCC 4 75 cpu Invokes vsim on the entity cpu and assigns values to the generic parameters edge and VCC If working within the ModelSim GUI you would enter the command as follows vsim gedge low high gVCC 4 75 cpu vsim view test
294. icit one This implicit declaration can be hidden by an explicit declaration of in the same package LRM Section 10 3 However if another version of the operator is declared in a different package than that containing the enumeration declaration and both operators become visible through use clauses neither can be used without explicit naming ARITHMETIC left right To eliminate that inconvenience the VCOM command has the explicit option that allows the explicit operator to hide the implicit one Allowing the explicit declaration to hide the implicit declaration is what most VHDL users expect vcom work mylib refresh The work option specifies mylib as the library to regenerate refresh rebuilds the library image without using source code allowing models delivered as compiled libraries without source code to be rebuilt for a specific release of ModelSim 4 6 and later only ModelSim SE Command Reference vcover convert CR 321 vcover convert Syntax Arguments See also The vcover convert command converts a code coverage file created in ModelSim 5 7 to the current ModelSim format You can also use the command with the strip or install arguments to create a new data file with different levels of hierarchy The command can be invoked within the ModelSim GUI or at the command line vcover convert 57 install lt path gt strip lt n gt log lt filename gt lt outfile gt lt file gt 57 Conve
295. ied instance and any of its children recursively Use the norecursive argument to exclude data from the instance s children lt path gt is a path to the instance Optional norecursive When saving coverage by instance excludes data from children of the specified instance Optional xml Saves data in XML format Optional See Reporting coverage data UM 351 for more information Currently XML formatted coverage files cannot be reloaded or merged lt filename gt Specifies a file name for the report Required Chapter 13 Measuring code coverage coverage clear CR 129 coverage exclude CR 130 coverage reload CR 132 coverage report CR 133 coverage_save lt filename gt lt instancepath gt lt xml_output gt UM 152 Verilog system task ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 138 dataset alias dataset alias The dataset alias command assigns an additional name alias to a dataset The dataset can then be referenced by that alias A dataset can have any number of aliases but all dataset names and aliases must be unique Syntax dataset alias lt dataset_name gt lt alias_name gt Arguments lt dataset_name gt Specifies the name of the dataset to which to assign the alias Required lt alias_name gt Specifies the alias name to assign to the dataset Optional If you don t specify an alias_name ModelSim lists current aliases for the specified dataset_name See also dataset list CR 142 data
296. ies that implement VHDL foreign architectures only are reloaded at each restart when the architecture is elaborated unless the keeploaded option to the vsim command CR 375 is used e Shared libraries loaded from the command line foreign and pli options and from the Veriuser entry in the modelsim ini file are reloaded unless you specify the keeploaded argument to vsim e Shared libraries that implement VHDL foreign subprograms remain loaded they are not reloaded even if they also contain code for a foreign architecture You can configure defaults for the restart command by setting the DefaultRestartOptions variable in the modelsim ini file See Restart command defaults UM 541 To handle restarts with Verilog PLI applications you need to define a Verilog user defined task or function and register a misctf class of callback To handle restarts with Verilog VPI applications you need to register reset callbacks To handle restarts with VHDL FLI applications you need to register restart callbacks See Appendix D Verilog PLI VPI DPI for more information on the Verilog PLI VPI DPI and the ModelSim FLI Reference for more information on the FLI Syntax restart force noassertions nobreakpoint nolist nolog nowave Arguments force Specifies that the simulation will be restarted without requiring confirmation in a popup window Optional noassertions Specifies that current assertion and functional cover
297. ies the maximum VCD file size in bytes Required lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file Optional If omitted the command is executed on the file designated by the ved file command CR 304 or dump vcd if ved file was not invoked See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files Verilog tasks are documented in the IEEE 1364 standard ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 310 vcd off vcd off Syntax Arguments See also The ved off command turns off VCD dumping to the specified file and records all VCD variable values as x Related Verilog tasks dumpoff fdumpoff ved off lt filename gt lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file Optional If omitted the command is executed on the file designated by the ved file command CR 304 or dump vcd if ved file was not invoked See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files Verilog tasks are documented in the IEEE 1364 standard ModelSim SE Command Reference vcd on Syntax Arguments See also vcd on CR 311 The ved on command turns on VCD dumping to the specified file and records the current values of all VCD variables By default ved on is automatically performed at the end of the simulation time that the ved add CR 294 commands are performed Related Verilog tasks dumpon fdumpon ved on lt filename gt lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file Op
298. ifies a file with more command line arguments Optional Allows complex arguments to be reused without retyping Allows gzipped input files Nesting of f options is allowed The file syntax basically follows what you type on the command line with the exception that newline characters are ignored Environment variable expansion for example in a pathname does not occur in f files fast lt secondary_name gt t tacc lt spec gt lt module gt Increases simulation speed on gate level designs by allowing parameter propagation and global optimizations If you are simulating RTL use the vopt command CR 373 instead of fast Please see Optimizing Verilog designs UM 124 The following options are available lt secondary_name gt Allows you to specify a different secondary name for the optimized code The compiler automatically assigns a secondary name to distinguish optimized code from un optimized code that may exist in the same library The default secondary name for optimized code is fast the default secondary name for un optimized code is verilog acc lt spec gt lt module gt Allows you to maintain design object visibility Note that using this option may reduce simulation speed lt spec gt is one or more of the following characters b Enable access to bits of vector nets This is necessary for PLI applications that require handles to individual bits of vector nets Also some user interface co
299. ifies a logical name or pathname of a library where the final linked object file so is to be stored Optional by default the linked object files are added to the work library lt filename gt Specifies the name of a file containing the SystemC C source to be compiled Required Multiple filenames separated by spaces can be entered or wildcards can be used e g cpp sccom g example cpp Compiles example cpp with debugging information sccom link Links example o sccom work libl a cpp sccom work lib2 b cpp sccom link lib libl lib lib2 work 1ib3 vsim scwork 1lib3 lib libl lib 1ib2 These three commands compile a cpp into a first library lib and b cpp into a second library called ib2 The compiled object files created in those two libraries are then linked ModelSim SE Command Reference sccom CR 259 and compiled into a third shared library ib3 When vsim is invoked the scwork argument is required in order to point to the location of the shared library The lib arguments are required to specify the locations of the SystemC design units sccom I home systemc include DSC_INCLUDE_FX g a cpp b cpp Compiles the SystemC code with an include directory and the compile time macro SC_INCLUDE_FX to compile the source with support for fixed point types For more information see Fixed point types UM 182 sccom 02 a cpp Compiles with the g 02 optimization argument sccom L home libs 1 mylib link
300. ifies the path and name of a VCD file to create Optional Defaults to the current working directory and the filename dumpports vcd Multiple filenames can be opened during a single simulation in Includes ports of mode IN Optional inout Includes ports of mode INOUT Optional out Includes ports of mode OUT Optional unique Generates unique VCD variable names for ports even if those ports are connected to the same collapsed net Optional vcdstim Ensures that port name order in the VCD file matches the declaration order in the instance s module or entity declaration Optional See Port order issues UM 462 for further information lt object_name gt Specifies the Verilog or VHDL object to add to the VCD file Required Multiple objects may be specified by separating names with spaces Wildcards are accepted ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 298 vcd dumpports Examples ved dumpports in file counter vcd test_counter dut Creates a VCD file named counter vcd of all IN ports in the region test_counter dut vcd dumpports file addern vcd testbench uut vsim vcdstim addern vcd addern gn 8 do add wave run 1000 These two commands resimulate a design from a VCD file See Simulating with input values from a VCD file UM 460 for further details vcd dumpports vcdstim file proc vcd top p ved dumpports vcdstim file cache vcd top c run 1000 vsim top vcdstim top p proc vcd vcdsti
301. ig_value gt Specifies a value of the object to match Optional Must be specified in the same radix in which the selected object is displayed Case is ignored but otherwise must be an exact string match don t care bits are not yet implemented window lt wname gt Specifies an instance of the List window that is not the default Optional Otherwise the default List window is used Use the view command CR 334 to change the default window ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See also up CR 293 lt n gt Specifies to find the nth match Optional If less than n are found the number found is returned with a warning message and the marker is positioned at the last match up noglitch value FF23 Finds the last time at which the selected vector transitions to FF23 ignoring glitches up Goes to the previous transition on the selected object The following examples illustrate search expressions that use a variety of signal attributes paths array constants and time variables Such expressions follow the GUI_expression_format CR 22 up expr clk rising amp amp mystate reading amp amp top u3 addr 32 habcd1234 Searches up for an expression that evaluates to a boolean 1 when signal clk just changed from low to high and signal mystate is the enumeration reading and signal top u3 addr is equal to the specified 32 bit hex constant up expr top u3 addr and 32 hff000000 32 hac000000 Sea
302. ile written in the mti radix The contents of memfile are as follows memory data file do not edit the following line required for mem load use format mti addressradix d dataradix s version 1 0 0 0000000000000000 0000000000000001 0000000000000010 0000000000000011 4 0000000000000100 0000000000000101 0000000000000110 0000000000000111 8 0000000000001000 0000000000001001 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX mem display CR 198 mem load CR 201 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 206 mem search mem search Syntax Arguments The mem search command finds and prints to the screen the first occurring match of a specified memory pattern in the specified memory instance Shorthand instance names are accepted Optionally you can instruct the command to print all occurrences The search pattern can be one word or a sequence of words mem search addressradix lt radix gt dataradix lt radix gt all replace lt word gt lt word gt startaddress lt address gt endaddress lt address gt lt path gt pattern lt word gt lt word gt addressradix lt radix gt Specifies the radix for the address being displayed The lt radix gt can be specified as decimal or hexadecimal Default is decimal Optional dataradix lt radix gt Specifies the radix for the memory data being displayed The lt radix gt can be specified as symbolic binary octal decimal unsigned or hex Optional By default the radix displa
303. illegal for unresolved signals deposit Sets the object to the specified value The value remains until there is a subsequent driver transaction or until the object is forced again or until it is unforced with a noforce command CR 210 Optional If one of the freeze drive or deposit options is not used then freeze is the default for unresolved objects and drive is the default for resolved objects If you prefer freeze as the default for resolved and unresolved VHDL signals change the default force kind in the DefaultForceKind UM 533 preference variable cancel lt time gt Cancels the force command at the specified lt time gt The time is relative to the current time unless an absolute time is specified by preceding the value with the character Cancellation occurs at the last simulation delta cycle of a time unit A value of zero cancels the force at the end of the current time period Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference force CR 183 repeat lt time gt Repeats the force command where lt time gt is the time at which to start repeating the cycle The time is relative to the current time A repeating force command will force a value before other non repeating force commands that occur in the same time step Optional lt object_name gt Specifies the name of the HDL object to be forced Required A wildcard is permitted only if it matches one object See Design object names CR 12 for the full syntax of an
304. im SE Command Reference Examples See also coverage exclude CR 131 lt celn gt Specifies the line number of the condition or expression Required if c or e is specified lt rn gt Specifies the row number in the truth table to be excluded You can also use rnX rnY eg 4 9 to specify a range of rows to be excluded Multiple row numbers or ranges separated by spaces are allowed Required if c or e is specified coverage exclude excludefile Load the exclusion filter file named excludefile coverage exclude add projectl 102 110 200 250 Add lines 102 through 110 and lines 200 through 250 to the lines to be excluded from code coverage in the source file project coverage exclude remove projectl all Removes all code coverage exclusions from the source file project coverage exclude add projectl c 115 2 4 Add rows 2 through 4 from the condition truth table on line 115 to the code coverage exclusions for source file projectl coverage exclude add projectl e 220 all Add all rows from the expression truth table on line 220 to the code coverage exclusions for source file project Chapter 13 Measuring code coverage Excluding objects from coverage UM 348 coverage clear CR 129 coverage reload CR 132 coverage report CR 133 coverage save CR 137 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 132 coverage reload coverage reload The coverage reload command seeds the coverage statistics with the output of a previous cov
305. im is different than C In C it is not necessary to specify the base class lt instance gt lt base_member gt Whereas in ModelSim you must include the name of the base class lt instance gt lt base gt lt base_member gt Example Let s say you have a base class and a descendant class class dog private int value class beagle public dog private int value dog d You have an sc_signal lt gt of type beagle somewhere in your code sc_signal lt beagle gt spot Legal names for viewing this signal are spot spot spot value spot dog spot dog spot dog value Now to examine the member value of the base class dog you would type exa spot dog value To examine the member value of member d you would type exa spot d value To examine the member value you would type exa spot value ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 14 Syntax and conventions Specifying names We distinguish between four types of object names simple relative fully rooted and absolute A simple name does not contain any hierarchy It is simply the name of an object e g clk or data 3 0 in the current context A relative name does not start with a path separator and may or may not include a dataset name or a hierarchical path e g uJ data or view clk A relative name is relative to the current context in the current or specified dataset A fully rooted name starts with a path separator
306. im uses the value 5 Optional Arguments repeater patterns only period lt value gt The period after which the value should change Required repeat forever never lt _of_times gt The number of times to repeat Required sequence vall val2 val3 The set of values that you want repeated Required Arguments counter patterns only direction down up The direction which the counter should increment or decrement Optional The default is up type Binary Range Johnson OneHot ZeroHot Gray The type of counter to create Default is Range Optional endvalue lt value gt The ending value of the counter This option applies to Range counter patterns only All other counter patterns start from 0 and go to the max value for that particular signal e g for a 3 bit signal the start value will be 000 and end value will be 111 period lt value gt The period after which the value should change Required repeat forever never lt _of_times gt The number of times to repeat Required startvalue lt value gt The starting value of the counter This option applies to Range counter patterns only All other counter patterns start from 0 and go to the max value for that particular signal e g for a 3 bit signal the start value will be 000 and end value will be 111 step lt value gt The step by which the counter is incremented decremented Required See also wave create command CR 399 Chapter 10 Gener
307. in the current rather than the next simulation delta cycle ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 184 force Examples See also force inputl 0 Forces input to 0 at the current simulator time force busl 01XZ 100 ns Forces bus to 01XZ at 100 nanoseconds after the current simulator time force busl 16 f 200 Forces bus to 16 F at the absolute time 200 measured in the resolution units selected at simulation start up force inputl 1 10 0 20 r 100 Forces input to 1 at 10 time units after the current simulation time and to 0 at 20 time units after the current simulation time This cycle repeats starting at 100 time units after the current simulation time so the next transition is to at 100 time units after the current simulation time force inputl 1 10 ns 0 20 ns r 100ns Similar to the previous example but also specifies the time units Time unit expressions preceding the r must be placed in curly braces force s 1 0 0 100 repeat 200 cancel 1000 Forces signal s to alternate between values 1 and 0 every 100 time units until time 1000 Cancellation occurs at the last simulation delta cycle of a time unit So force s 1 0 cancel 0 will force signal s to 1 for the duration of the current time period when mydut siga 10 1 force deposit mydut siga 10 85 Forces siga to decimal value 85 whenever the value on the signal is 1 noforce CR 210 change CR 82 gt Note You can configure defaults for
308. ins square brackets for an index for either situation the braces are entered an ellipsis indicates items that may appear more than once the ellipsis itself does not appear in commands the vertical bar indicates a choice between items on either side of it do not include the bar in the command monospaced type monospaced type is used in command examples comments included with commands are preceded by the number sign useful for adding comments to DO files macros a One exception to this rule is when you are using Verilog syntax to designate an array slice For example add wave vector1 4 0 The square brackets in this case denote an index The braces prevent the Tcl interpreter from treating the text within the square brackets as a Tcl command gt Note Neither the prompt at the beginning of a line nor the lt Enter gt key that ends a line is shown in the command examples ModelSim SE Command Reference File and directory pathhames CR 11 File and directory pathnames Several ModelSim commands have arguments that point to files or directories For example the y argument to vlog specifies the Verilog source library directory to search for undefined modules Spaces in file pathnames must be escaped or the entire path must be enclosed in quotes For example vlog top v y C Documents and Settings projects dut or vlog top v y C Documents and Settings projects dut ModelSim SE Co
309. installation MENTOR GRAPHICS ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE AT MENTOR GRAPHICS OPTION EITHER A REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID UPON RETURN OF SOFTWARE TO MENTOR GRAPHICS OR B MODIFICATION OR REPLACEMENT OF SOFTWARE THAT DOES NOT MEET THIS LIMITED WARRANTY PROVIDED YOU HAVE OTHERWISE COMPLIED WITH THIS AGREEMENT MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 437 WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO A SERVICES B SOFTWARE WHICH IS LICENSED TO YOU FOR A LIMITED TERM OR LICENSED AT NO COST OR C EXPERIMENTAL BETA CODE ALL OF WHICH ARE PROVIDED AS IS 5 2 THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION 5 ARE EXCLUSIVE NEITHER MENTOR GRAPHICS NOR ITS LICENSORS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WITH RESPECT TO SOFTWARE OR OTHER MATERIAL PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY LIMITATION OF LIABILITY EXCEPT WHERE THIS EXCLUSION OR RESTRICTION OF LIABILITY WOULD BE VOID OR INEFFECTIVE UNDER APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO E
310. intenv CR 226 profile clear CR 227 profile interval CR 228 profile off CR 229 profile on CR 230 profile option CR 231 profile reload CR 232 profile report CR 233 project CR 235 property list CR 236 property wave CR 237 push CR 239 pwd CR 240 quietly CR 241 quit CR 242 radix CR 243 readers CR 244 record CR 245 report CR 246 restart CR 248 restore CR 250 resume CR 251 right CR 252 run CR 254 sccom CR 256 scgenmod CR 260 search CR 262 searchlog CR 264 seetime CR 266 setenv CR 267 shift CR 268 show CR 269 simstats CR 270 splitio CR 272 status CR 273 step CR 274 stop CR 275 tb CR 276 CR 7 tcheck_set CR 277 tcheck_status CR 279 toggle add CR 281 toggle disable CR 283 toggle enable CR 284 toggle report CR 285 toggle reset CR 286 transcribe CR 287 transcript CR 288 transcript file CR 289 tssi2mti CR 290 unsetenv CR 291 up CR 292 ved add CR 294 ved checkpoint CR 295 ved comment CR 296 ved dumpports CR 297 ved dumpportsall CR 299 ved dumpportsflush CR 300 ved dumpportslimit CR 301 ved dumpportsoff CR 302 ved dumpportson CR 303 ved file CR 304 ved files CR 306 ved flush CR 308 ved limit CR 309 ved off CR 310 ved on CR 311 ved2wlf CR 312 vcom CR 313 vcover convert CR 321 vcover merge CR 322 vcover report CR 324 vcover stats CR 327 vdel CR 329 vdir CR 330 verror CR 331 vgencomp CR 332 ModelSim SE Command Reference Table of Contents view CR 334 virtual count CR 336 v
311. ion as used by the licensing tools such as 1999 04 vsimVersionString Returns the full vsim version string This same information can be obtained using the version argument of the vsim command CR 375 ModelSim SE Command Reference vsource CR 395 vsource The vsource command specifies an alternative file to use for the current source file This command is used when the current source file has been moved The alternative source mapping exists for the current simulation only Syntax vsource lt filename gt Arguments lt filename gt Specifies a relative or full pathname Optional If filename is omitted the source file for the current design context is displayed Examples vsource design vhd vsource old design vhd ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 396 wave wave A number of wave commands can be use to manipulate the Wave window The following tables summarize the available options for manipulating cursors for zooming and for adjusting the wave display view in the Wave window Cursor Commands Description wave activecursor Sets the active cursor to the specified cursor or if no cursor is specified reports the active cursor wave addcursor Adds a new cursor at specified time and returns the number of the newly added cursor wave cursortime Moves or reports the time of the specified cursor or if no cursor is specified the time of the active cursor wave deletecursor Deletes the specified cursor
312. ional Default is 0 5 start lt time gt Specifies the start time on the waveform timescale to be written Optional end lt time gt Specifies the end time on the waveform timescale to be written Optional perpage lt time gt Specifies the time width per page of output Optional landscape Use landscape horizontal orientation Optional This is the default orientation portrait Use portrait vertical orientation Optional The default is landscape horizontal lt filename gt Specifies the name of the PostScript output file Required write wave alu ps Saves the current data in the Wave window in a file named alu ps write wave win wave2 group2 ps Saves the current data in window wave in a file named group2 ps ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 434 write wave write wave start 600ns end 800ns perpage 100ns top ps Writes two separate pages to top ps The first page contains data from 600ns to 700ns and the second page contains data from 701ns to 800ns To make the job of creating a PostScript waveform output file easier use the File gt Print Postscript menu selection in the Wave window See Saving a eps file and printing under UNIX UM 263 for more information ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 435 End User License Agreement IMPORTANT USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE RESTRICTIONS CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE This license is a le
313. ions that have been previously saved The substitution is done only once when the expression is first parsed Macro syntax is S lt name gt Substitutes the string value of the Tcl global variable lt name gt Constants Type Values boolean value true false TRUE FALSE integer 0 9 real number lt int gt I lt int gt lt int gt exp where the optional exp is elE I 0 9 time integer or real optionally followed by time unit enumeration VHDL user defined enumeration literal single bit constants expressed as any of the following OIXxXZZUHLW U X 0 PZP W DPL E V b0 bl Array constants expressed in any of the following formats Type Values VHDL notation lt int gt lt alphanum gt Example 16 abc123 VHDL bitstring UIXIONIZIWILIHI Example 11010X11 Verilog notation lt int gt bIBlolOldIDIhIH lt alphanum gt where lt alphanum gt includes 0 9 a f A F and Example 12 hc91 This is the preferred notation because it removes the ambiguity about the number of bits Based notation Ox OX Oo OO Ob OB ModelSim automatically zero fills unspecified upper bits ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 24 Syntax and conventions Variables Variable Type Name of a signal The name may be a simple name a VHDL or Verilog style extended identifier or a VHDL or Verilog style path The signal must be
314. irective Currently we do not support leaving full arrays as elements in the result Please let us know if you need that option If the elements being concatenated are of incompatible base types a VHDL style record will be created The record object can be expanded in the Objects and Wave windows just like an array of compatible type elements Concatenation syntax for VHDL lt signalOrSliceNamel gt amp lt signalOrSliceName2 gt amp Concatenation syntax for Verilog amp lt signalOrSliceNamel gt lt signalOrSliceName2 gt amp lt count gt lt signalOrSliceNamel gt lt signalOrSliceName2 gt Note that the concatenation syntax begins with amp rather than just Repetition multipliers are supported as illustrated in the second line The repetition element itself may be an arbitrary concatenation subexpression ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 28 Syntax and conventions Concatenation directives A concatenation directive as illustrated below can be used to constrain the resulting array range of a concatenation or influence how compound objects are treated By default the concatenation will be created with a descending index range from n 1 downto 0 where n is the number of elements in the array concat_range 31 0 lt concatenationExpr gt Verilog syntax concat_range 31 0 lt concatenationExpr gt Also Verilog syntax concat_range 31 downto 0 lt concatenationExpr gt VHDL syntax
315. irtual define CR 337 virtual delete CR 338 virtual describe CR 339 virtual expand CR 340 virtual function CR 341 virtual hide CR 344 virtual log CR 345 virtual nohide CR 347 virtual nolog CR 348 virtual region CR 350 virtual save CR 351 virtual show CR 352 virtual signal CR 353 virtual type CR 356 vlib CR 358 vlog CR 360 vmake CR 371 vmap CR 372 vopt CR 373 vsim CR 375 vsim lt info gt CR 394 vsource CR 395 ModelSim SE Command Reference wave CR 396 wave create CR 399 wave edit CR 402 wave export CR 405 wave import CR 406 wave modify CR 407 when CR 409 where CR 414 wlf2log CR 415 wlf2vced CR 417 wlfman CR 418 wlfrecover CR 422 write cell_report CR 423 write format CR 424 write list CR 426 write preferences CR 427 write report CR 428 write timing CR 429 write transcript CR 430 write tssi CR 431 write wave CR 433 CR 9 Syntax and conventions Chapter contents Documentation conventions CR 10 File and directory pathnames a a CRAI Design object names ee ee CR 12 Object name syntax sooo CRER SystemC E E E penter specification 2 CR 13 Specifying names toe s a a CR 14 Escaping brackets and spaces in array diks os s w gt a CR 15 Environment variables and pathnames CR I5 Name case sensitivity CR 15 Extended identifiers 1 CR 16 Wildcard characters so
316. is set to start at 0 and end at specified time at lt percent gt Positions the display such that the time or cursor is the specified lt percent gt from the left edge of the wave display 0 is the left edge 100 is the right edge Optional Default is 50 Examples wave zoomrange 20ns 100ns wave zoomrange 20 100 Either of these commands creates a zoom range with a start time of 20 ns and an end time of 100 ns ModelSim SE Command Reference wave create CR 399 wave create The wave create command generates a waveform known only to the GUI You can then modify the waveform interactively and use the results to drive simulation See Chapter 10 Generating stimulus with Waveform Editor for more information Syntax wave create driver freeze deposit driver expectedoutput endtime lt time gt initialvalue lt value gt language VHDL Verilog pattern clock constant random repeater counter none portmode in out inout input output internal starttime lt time gt lt object_name gt period lt value gt dutycycle lt value gt value lt value gt period lt value gt random_type lt value gt seed lt value gt sequence vall val2 val3 period lt value gt repeat forever never lt _of_times gt direction lt value gt type Binary Range Johnson OneHot ZeroHot Gray endvalue lt value gt period lt value gt repeat forever never lt _of_times gt startvalue lt value gt step
317. istent files to be treated as empty rather than ModelSim issuing fatal error messages Optional foreign lt attribute gt Specifies the foreign module to load Optional lt attribute gt is a string consisting of the name of a C function and a path to a shared library Quotes or braces are necessary if the path contains spaces For example vsim foreign c_init for sl1 You can load up to ten foreign modules Syntax for the attribute is further described in the Introduction chapter of the ModelSim FLI Reference nocollapse Disables the optimization of internal port map connections Optional nofileshare Turns off file descriptor sharing Optional By default ModelSim shares a file descriptor for all VHDL files opened for write or append that have identical names noglitch Disables VITAL glitch generation Optional See Chapter 4 VHDL simulation for additional discussion of VITAL no_glitch_msg Disable VITAL glitch error messages Optional std_input lt filename gt Specifies the file to use for the VHDL TextIO STD_INPUT file Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference vsim CR 387 std_output lt filename gt Specifies the file to use for the VHDL TextIO STD_OUTPUT file Optional strictvital Specifies to exactly match the VITAL package ordering for messages and delta cycles Optional Useful for eliminating delta cycle differences caused by optimizations not addressed in the VITAL LRM
318. ists only the output ports Optional This may be combined with the input inout or internal switches ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 416 wlf2log quiet Disables error message reporting Optional lt wlffile gt Specifies the ModelSim WLF file that you are converting Required Additional information for QuickSim Il users In some cases your original QuickHDL ModelSim simulation results in your vsim wif file may contain signal values that do not directly correspond to qsim_12state values The resulting QuickSim II logfile generated by wlf2log may contain state values that are surrounded by single quotes e g 0 and 1 To make this logfile compatible with QuickSim models that expect qsim_12state you need to use a QuickSim II function named convert_wdb This function was created to convert logfiles resulting from VHDL simulation that used std_logic and std_ulogic since these data types do not correlate to QuickSim s 12 simulation states Other VHDL data types such as qsim_state or bit 2 state do not require conversion as they are directly compatible with qsim_12state QuickSim II Waveform Databases WDB The following procedure can be used to convert a wlf2log generated logfile into a compatible QuickSim WDB The procedure below shows how to convert the logfile while loaded into memory in QuickSim II 1 Load the logfile the output from wlf2log into a WDB other than forces Forces is the default WDB so you n
319. ive to setting the PrefMain file Tcl preference variable transcript file lt filename gt lt filename gt Specifies the full path and filename for the transcript file Optional If you specify a new file the existing transcript file is closed and a new transcript file opened If you specify an empty string the existing file is closed and no new file is opened If you don t specify this argument the current setting is returned transcript file Closes the current transcript file and stops writing data to the file This is a method for reducing the size of your transcript transcript file run 1 ms transcript file transcript run 1 ms This series of commands results in the transcript containing only data from the second millisecond of the simulation The first transcript file command closes the transcript so no data is being written to it The second transcript file command opens a new transcript and records data from ms to 2 ms Transcript GR 19 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 290 issi2mti tssi2mti Syntax Arguments Examples See also The tssi2mti command is used to convert a vector file in Fluence Technology formerly TSSI Standard Events Format into a sequence of force CR 182 and run CR 254 commands The stimulus is written to the standard output The source code for tssi2mti is provided in the file tssi2mti c in the examples directory tssi2mti lt signal_definition_file gt lt s
320. k s in the current default Wave window are deleted bookmark delete wave foo Deletes the bookmark named foo from the current default Wave window bookmark delete wave all window wavel Deletes all bookmarks from the Wave window named wavel bookmark add wave CR 72 bookmark goto wave CR 74 bookmark list wave CR 75 write format CR 424 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 74 bookmark goto wave bookmark goto wave The bookmark goto wave command zooms and scrolls a Wave window using the specified bookmark Syntax bookmark goto wave lt label gt window lt window_name gt Arguments lt label gt Specifies the bookmark to go to Required window lt window_name gt Specifies the Wave window to which the bookmark applies Optional Bookmarks can be used only in the windows in which they were originally created See also bookmark add wave CR 72 bookmark delete wave CR 73 bookmark list wave CR 75 write format CR 424 ModelSim SE Command Reference bookmark list wave CR 75 bookmark list wave The bookmark list wave command displays a list of available bookmarks in the Transcript pane Syntax bookmark list wave window lt window_name gt Arguments window lt window_name gt Specifies the Wave window for which you want a list of bookmarks Optional If this argument is omitted ModelSim lists the bookmarks for the current default Wave window See also bookmark add wave CR 72 bookmark delet
321. l and var2 are examined This breakpoint is initially disabled it can be enabled with the enablebp command CR 160 bp test vhd 14 if Snow 100 then cont Sets a breakpoint in every instantiation of the file test vhd at line 14 When that breakpoint is executed the command is run This command causes the simulator to continue if the current simulation time is not 100 bp query testadd vhd Lists the line number and enabled disabled status 1 enabled 0 disabled of all breakpoints in testadd vhd bp query testadd vhd 48 Lists details about the breakpoint on line 48 The output comprises six pieces of information the first item 0 or 1 designates whether a breakpoint exists on the line 1 exists 0 doesn t exist the second item is always 1 the third item is the file name in the compiled source the fourth item is the breakpoint line number the fifth item is the breakpoint id and the sixth item 0 or 1 designates whether the breakpoint is enabled 1 or disabled 0 bp query testadd vhd 2 59 Lists all executable lines in testadd vhd between lines 2 and 59 bp c and_gate_init Sets a C breakpoint at the entry to C function and_gate_init bp c and_gate c 46 Sets a C breakpoint at line 46 in the file and_gate c bp c 44 Sets a C breakpoint at line 44 in the current C or SystemC file bp c 0xff130504 Sets a C breakpoint at hexadecimal address Oxff130504 gt Note Any breakpoints set in VHDL code an
322. l as those used for the when command CR 409 So even if you haven t used an id number for a breakpoint it s possible it is used for a when command inst lt region gt Sets the breakpoint so it applies only to the specified region Optional disable Sets the breakpoint to a disabled state Optional You can enable the breakpoint later using the enablebp command CR 160 By default breakpoints are enabled when they are set cond lt condition_expression gt Specifies condition s that determine whether the breakpoint is hit Optional If the condition is true the simulation stops at the breakpoint If false the simulation bypasses the breakpoint A condition cannot refer to a VHDL variable only a signal ModelSim SE Command Reference bp CR 77 The condition can be an expression with these operators Name Operator equals not equal AND OR The operands may be object names signame event or constants Subexpressions in parentheses are permitted The command will be executed when the expression is evaluated as TRUE or 1 The formal BNF syntax is condition Name expression expression expression AND relation expression OR relation relation relation Name Literal Name Literal Name EVENT expression Literal lt char gt lt bitstring gt lt bitstring gt The operator can occur only between a Name and a Literal This means tha
323. lSim SE Command Reference CR 406 wave import wave import The wave import command imports an extended VCD file that was created with the wave export command It cannot read extended VCD file created by software other than ModelSim Use this command to apply a VCD file as stimulus to the current simulation Syntax wave import lt VCD_file gt Arguments lt VCD_file gt The name of the extended VCD file to import Required See also wave create command CR 399 wave export command CR 405 Chapter 10 Generating stimulus with Waveform Editor ModelSim SE Command Reference wave modify CR 407 wave modify The wave modify command modifies waveform parameters set by a previous wave create command Syntax wave modify lt wave_name gt driver freeze deposit driver expectedoutput endtime lt time gt initialvalue lt value gt pattern clock random repeater counter none starttime lt time gt period lt value gt dutycycle lt value gt period lt value gt random_type Normal Uniform seed lt value gt period lt value gt repeat forever never lt _of_times gt sequence vall val2 val3 direction down up type Binary Range Johnson OneHot ZeroHot Gray endvalue lt value gt period lt value gt repeat forever never lt _of_times gt startvalue lt value gt step lt value gt Arguments for all waveforms lt wave_name gt The name of an existing waveform created with the wave create
324. lation in batch files The stop command has the same effect as hitting a breakpoint The stop command may be placed anywhere within the body of the when command stop None Use the run command CR 254 with the continue option to continue the simulation run or the resume command CR 251 to continue macro execution If you want macro execution to resume automatically put the resume command at the top of your macro file onbreak resume p gt Note If you want to stop the simulation using a when command CR 409 you must use a stop command within your when statement DO NOT use an exit command CR 168 or a quit command CR 242 The stop command acts like a breakpoint at the time it is evaluated bp CR 76 resume CR 251 run CR 254 when CR 409 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 276 tb tb The tb traceback command displays a stack trace for the current process in the Transcript pane This lists the sequence of HDL function calls that have been entered to arrive at the current state for the active process If you are using C Debug UM 401 tb displays a stack trace of the C call stack Syntax tb lt _of_levels gt Arguments lt _of_levels gt Specifies the number of call frames in the C stack to display Optional If you don t specify a level the entire C stack is displayed This argument is available only for C Debug UM 401 ModelSim SE Command Reference tcheck_set Syntax Arguments
325. ld does not equal bnew the second bit is false 0 Each subexpression is evaluated independently virtual signal concat_reverse busl amp bus2 7 4 newbus Creates signal newbus that is a concatenation of bus1 bit reversed and bus2 7 4 bit reversed Assuming bus has indices running 7 downto 0 the result will be newbus 1 1 0 with the upper 8 bits being bus1 0 7 and the lower 4 bits being bus2 4 7 See Concatenation directives CR 28 for further details ModelSim SE Command Reference Commands fully compatible with virtual signals virtual signal CR 355 add list CR 48 add log log CR 193 add wave CR 53 checkpoint CR 94 and restore CR 250 delete CR 148 describe CR 149 virtual describe is a little faster down CR 154 up CR 292 examine CR 164 find CR 178 force CR 182 noforce CR 210 restart CR 248 left CR 191 right CR 252 search CR 262 searchlog CR 264 show CR 269 Commands compatible with virtual signals using virtual expand lt signal gt check contention add CR 85 check contention config CR 87 check contention off CR 88 check float add CR 89 check float config CR 90 check float off CR 91 check stable on CR 93 check stable off CR 92 drivers CR 156 power add CR 222 power report CR 223 power reset CR 224 toggle add CR 281 toggle reset CR
326. le lt instance gt Specifies the instance for which you want timing check status reported Required lt tcheck gt Specifies a specific timing check within the instance on which to report status Optional By default ModelSim reports all timing checks within the specified instance You can specify either the integer that is assigned to each timing check and reported via tcheck_status or the actual timing check name enclosed in double quotes see Examples below Note that the integer number may change between library compiles The output of the tcheck_status command looks as follows lt Number gt lt SDF_Description gt lt src_line gt lt MsgStat gt lt XStat gt Field Description lt Number gt an integer that can be used as shorthand to specify the check in the tcheck_status or tcheck_set commands as the lt tcheck gt argument this number can change with compiler optimizations and you can t assume it will stay the same between library compiles lt SDF_Description gt an SDF specification of the timing check including enclosing parentheses ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 280 tcheck_status Field Description lt src_line gt the source file and line number for the timing check specification output if you specify the lines argument the format of the object is lt source_file_name gt lt line_number gt lt MsgStat gt violation message reporting status indicator Ms
327. le simulator options UM 136 VHDL UM 78 viewing results in List window UM 243 GR 159 VITAL packages UM 95 simulating the design overview UM 26 simulation basic steps for UM 24 Simulation Configuration creating UM 48 dialog GR 51 simulations event order in UM 132 saving results CR 145 CR 146 UM 225 saving results at intervals UM 231 saving with checkpoint UM 86 UM 142 simulator resolution mixed designs UM 191 returning as a real UM 96 SystemC UM 174 Verilog UM 129 VHDL UM 78 vsim t argument CR 382 simulator state variables UM 544 simulator version CR 383 CR 394 simulator ModelSim and OSCI differences UM 182 simultaneous events in Verilog changing order CR 360 sizetf callback function UM 590 sm_entity UM 621 SmartModels creating foreign architectures with sm_entity UM 621 invoking SmartModel specific commands UM 624 linking to UM 620 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ Imcwin commands UM 625 memory arrays UM 626 Verilog interface UM 627 VHDL interface UM 620 so shared object file loading PLI VPI C applications UM 570 loading PLI VPI C applications UM 577 software version GR 37 source balloon C Debug GR 105 source code pragmas UM 348 source code security UM 70 UM 155 source directory setting from source window GR 25 GR 212 source files referencing with location maps UM 67 source files specifying with location maps UM 67 source highlighting customizing GR 211 source libraries arguments supporting UM 119 s
328. lects the on detect style of propagating pulse errors see pulse_e Optional A pulse error propagates to the output as an X and the on detect style is to schedule the X immediately as soon as it has been detected that a pulse error has occurred on event style is the default for propagating pulse errors see pulse_e_style_onevent pulse_e_style_onevent Selects the on event style of propagating pulse errors see pulse_e Default A pulse error propagates to the output as an X and the on event style is to schedule the X to occur at the same time and for the same duration that the pulse would have occurred if it had propagated through normally pulse_r lt percent gt Controls how pulses are propagated through specify path delays where lt percent gt is a number between 0 and 100 that specifies the rejection limit as a percentage of the path delay Optional A pulse less than the rejection limit is suppressed from propagating to the output If the error limit is not specified by pulse_e then it defaults to the rejection limit sdf_nocheck_celltype Disables the error check a for mismatch between the CELLTYPE name in the SDF file and the module or primitive name for the CELL instance It is an error if the names do not match Optional show_cancelled_e Drives a pulse error state X for the duration of a negative pulse on a specify path delay Optional By default ModelSim filters negative pulses ModelSim SE Comm
329. libraries CR 330 compile gensrc errors during UM 185 projects add PSL files UM 53 GR 58 GR 61 compile order auto generate UM 46 changing UM 46 Compile Order dialog GR 74 Compile Source Files dialog dialogs Compile Source Files GR 64 compiler directives UM 153 IEEE Std 1364 2000 UM 153 XL compatible compiler directives UM 154 Compiler Options dialog GR 65 compiling changing order in the GUI UM 46 graphic interface to GR 64 grouping files UM 47 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ order changing in projects UM 46 properties in projects UM 52 range checking in VHDL CR 318 UM 74 SystemC CR 256 CR 260 UM 164 converting sc_main UM 164 exporting top level module UM 165 for source level debug UM 167 invoking sccom UM 167 linking the compiled source UM 172 modifying source code UM 164 replacing sc_start UM 164 using sccom vs raw C compiler UM 170 Verilog CR 360 UM 114 incremental compilation UM 115 optimizing performance CR 362 XL uselib compiler directive UM 120 XL compatible options UM 119 VHDL CR 313 UM 73 at a specified line number CR 315 selected design units just eapbc CR 315 standard package s CR 318 VITAL packages UM 95 compiling C code gec UM 571 compiling the design overview UM 25 component declaration generating SystemC from Verilog or VHDL UM 224 generating VHDL from Verilog UM 204 vgencomp for SystemC UM 224 vgencomp for VHDL UM 204 component default binding rules UM 79 Compr
330. library work Optional by default the compiled design units are added to the work library The specified pathname overrides the pathname specified for work in the project file y lt library_directory gt Specifies a source library directory containing module and UDP definitions Optional See Verilog XL compatible compiler arguments UM 119 for more information After all explicit filenames on the vlog command line have been processed the compiler uses the y option to find and compile any modules that were referenced but not yet defined Files within this directory are compiled only if the file names match the names of previously unresolved references Multiple y options are allowed You will need to specify a file suffix by using y in conjunction with the libext lt suffix gt option if your filenames differ from your module names See additional discussion in the examples A Important Any y arguments that follow a refresh argument on a vlog command line are ignored Any y arguments that come before the refresh argument on a vlog command line are processed lt filename gt Specifies the name of the Verilog source code file to compile One filename is required Multiple filenames can be entered separated by spaces Wildcards can be used ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples vlog CR 369 vlog example vlg Compiles the Verilog source code contained in the file example vig vlog nodebug example v Hides the internal da
331. ls r Finds all signals in the entire design find nets in top xy Finds all input signals in region top that begin with the letters xy find signals r ul u2 cl Finds all signals in the design hierarchy at or below the region lt current_context gt ul u2 whose names begin with cl find signals s 1 Finds a signal named s Note that you must enclose the object in curly braces because of the square bracket wildcard characters find signals s 123 Finds signals s1 s2 or s3 find signals s 1l Finds the element of signal s that is indexed by the value 1 Note that the find command uses parentheses not square brackets to specify a subelement index find signals top data 3 downto 0 Finds a 4 bit array named data Note that you must use curly braces due to the spaces in the array slice specification find signals top My extended id Note that when specifying an object that contains an extended identifier as the last part of the name there must be a space after the closing and before the closing ModelSim SE Command Reference find CR 181 if find signals dut core pclk echo pclk does exist If dut core pclk exists prints the message pclk does exist in the transcript This would typically be run in a Tcl script Additional search options To search for HDL objects within a specific display window use the search command CR 262 or select Edit gt Find See also
332. lude spaces no braces or quotes are needed For example title new_wave wave assigns the title new_wave to the Wave window undock Opens the specified pane as a standalone window undocked from the Main window Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See also view CR 335 dock Docks the specified standalone window into the Main window width lt n gt Specifies the window width in pixels Valid only for stand alone windows not panes in the Main window Optional lt window_type gt Specifies the window pane type to view Required You do not need to type the full type see examples below implicit wildcards are accepted multiple window types may be used Available window pane types are assertions dataflow fcovers list locals mdiwave memory objects process profile profile_details signals source structure variables watch wave and workspace Also creates a new instance of the specified stand alone window type when used with the new option You may also specify the window s to view when multiple instances of that window type exist e g wave2 This works only with ModelSim generated window names not with window titles specified with the title argument 4 lt n gt Specifies the window upper left hand x coordinate in pixels Valid only for stand alone windows not panes in the Main window Optional y lt n gt Specifies the window upper left hand y coordinate in pixels Valid only for
333. lues with strings CR 356 variable settings report CR 17 variables describing CR 149 environment variables UM 523 LM_LICENSE_FILE UM 523 personal preferences UM 522 precedence between ini and tcl UM 543 reading from the ini file UM 538 referencing in commands CR 17 setting environment variables UM 523 simulator state variables current settings report UM 522 iteration number UM 544 name of entity or module as a variable UM 544 resolution UM 544 simulation time UM 544 value of changing from command line CR 82 changing with the GUI GR 173 examining CR 164 values of displaying in Objects window GR 190 saving as binary log file UM 226 Variables Locals window UM 291 variables Tcl user hook GR 113 ved add command CR 294 ved checkpoint command CR 295 ved comment command CR 296 ved dumpports command CR 297 ved dumpportsall command CR 299 ved dumpportsflush command CR 300 ved dumpportslimit command CR 301 ved dumpportsoff command CR 302 ved dumpportson command CR 303 vcd file command CR 304 VCD files UM 457 adding items to the file CR 294 capturing port driver data CR 297 UM 469 case sensitivity UM 458 converting to WLF files CR 312 creating CR 294 UM 458 dumping variable values CR 295 dumpports tasks UM 463 flushing the buffer contents CR 308 from VHDL source to VCD output UM 465 generating from WLF files CR 417 inserting comments CR 296 internal signals adding CR 294 specifying maximum file size CR 309 specifying name of CR
334. m top c cache vcd This series of commands creates VCD files for the instances proc and cache and then re simulates the design using the VCD files in place of the instance source files See Replacing instances with output values from a VCD file UM 461 for more information ModelSim SE Command Reference vcd dumpportsall CR 299 vcd dumpportsall The ved dumpportsall command creates a checkpoint in the VCD file which shows the value of all selected ports at that time in the simulation regardless of whether the port values have changed since the last timestep Related Verilog task dumpportsall Syntax vcd dumpportsall lt filename gt Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file Optional If omitted the command is executed on all open VCD files See also See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 300 vcd dumpportsflush vcd dumpportsflush The ved dumpportsflush command flushes the contents of the VCD file buffer to the specified VCD file Related Verilog task dumpportsflush Syntax vcd dumpportsflush lt filename gt Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file Optional If omitted the command is executed on all open VCD files See also See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files ModelSim SE Command Reference vcd dumpportslimit CR 301 vcd dumpportslimit
335. m GUI you would enter the command as follows gstrgen This is a string G lt Name gt lt Value gt Same as g see above except that it will also override generics parameters that received explicit values in generic maps instantiations or via defparams Optional Note there is no space between G and lt Name gt lt Value gt gblso lt filename gt On UNIX platforms loads PLI FLI shared objects with global symbol visibility Essentially all data and functions are exported from the specified shared object and are available to be referenced and used by other shared objects This option may also be specified with the GlobalSharedObjectsList UM 534 variable in the modelsim ini file Optional gui Starts the ModelSim GUI without loading a design Optional help Displays the command s options and arguments Optional L Specifies that the simulator is to be run in interactive mode Optional installcolormap For UNIX only Causes vsim to use its own colormap so as not to hog all the colors on the display This is similar to the install switch on Netscape Optional keeploaded Prevents the simulator from unloading reloading any FLI PLI VPI shared libraries when it restarts or loads a new design Optional The shared libraries will remain loaded at their current positions User application code in the shared libraries must reset its internal state during a restart in order for this to work effectively keeploaded
336. m PLUS VHDL and Verilog license immediately after invocation lic_vhdl checks out ModelSim VHDL license immediately after invocation lic_vlog checks out ModelSim VLOG license immediately after invocation The options may also be specified with the License UM 534 variable in the modelsim ini file Note that settings made from the command line are additive to options set in the License variable load_elab lt filename gt Loads an elaboration file that was created with elab Optional See Simulating with an elaboration file UM 138 for more information memprof Causes memory allocation data to be collected during elaboration and simulation Optional memprof call Unwinds the call stack and collects the call tree information Optional At the VSIM prompt call stack collection can also be turned on with profile option collect_calltrees on and off with profile option collect_calltrees off ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 380 vsim memprof file lt filename gt Saves memory profile data to the named file and makes the data available for viewing and reporting during the current simulation The file can be used for archival or comparison purposes Optional memprof fileonly lt filename gt Saves memory profile data to the named file only The file can be read in later with the profile reload command CR 232 for analysis This mode is useful for large designs when the design plus internal profiling data wo
337. mand Reference Table of Contents compare stop CR 122 compare update CR 123 configure CR 124 context CR 128 coverage clear CR 129 coverage exclude CR 130 coverage reload CR 132 coverage report CR 133 coverage save CR 137 dataset alias CR 138 dataset clear CR 139 dataset close CR 140 dataset info CR 141 dataset list CR 142 dataset open CR 143 dataset rename CR 144 dataset save CR 145 dataset snapshot CR 146 delete CR 148 describe CR 149 disablebp CR 150 disable_menu CR 151 disable_menuitem CR 152 do CR 153 down CR 154 drivers CR 156 dumplog64 CR 157 echo CR 158 edit CR 159 enablebp CR 160 enable_menu CR 161 enable_menuitem CR 162 environment CR 163 examine CR 164 exit CR 168 fcover clear CR 169 fcover comment CR 170 fcover configure CR 171 ModelSim SE Command Reference fcover reload CR 173 fcover report CR 175 fcover save CR 177 find CR 178 force CR 182 gdb dir CR 185 getactivecursortime CR 186 getactivemarkertime CR 187 help CR 188 history CR 189 lecho CR 190 left CR 191 log CR 193 Ishift CR 195 Isublist CR 196 macro_option CR 197 mem display CR 198 mem list CR 200 mem load CR 201 mem save CR 204 mem search CR 206 modelsim CR 208 next CR 209 noforce CR 210 nolog CR 211 notepad CR 213 noview CR 214 nowhen CR 215 onbreak CR 216 onElabError CR 217 onerror CR 218 pause CR 219 play CR 220 pop CR 221 power add CR 222 power report CR 223 power reset CR 224 precision CR 225 pr
338. mand first and then sets variable aluinputs to the result of the find command Obviously you don t want this type of behavior when specifying an array slice so you would use curly brace escape characters add wave s abc data_in 10 1 You must also use the escape characters if using VHDL syntax with spaces add wave s abc data_in 10 downto 1 Environment variables and pathnames You can substitute environment variables for pathnames in any argument that requires a pathname For example vlog v lib_path undl Assuming you have defined lib_path on your system vlog will locate the source library file und and search it for undefined modules See Environment variables UM 523 for more information gt Note Environment variable expansion does not occur in files that are referenced via the f argument to vcom vlog or vsim Name case sensitivity Name case sensitivity is different for VHDL and Verilog VHDL names are not case sensitive except for extended identifiers in VHDL 1076 1993 or later In contrast all Verilog names are case sensitive Names in ModelSim commands are case sensitive when matched against case sensitive identifiers otherwise they are not case sensitive SystemC names are case sensitive ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 16 Syntax and conventions Extended identifiers The following are supported formats for extended identifiers for any command that takes an identifier ext ident N
339. maximum time a test signal edge is allowed to trail a reference edge in an asynchronous comparison Optional The default is 0 If a unit is used e g ps with the time value the time must be placed in curly braces vhdlmatches lt ref logic value gt lt test logic value gt Specifies how VHDL signal states in the reference dataset should match values in the test dataset Optional Values are specified in a colon separated list of match values For example vhdlimatches X XUD Z ZD 1 1HD Default is U UWXD X UWXD 0 0LD 1 1HD Z ZD W UWXD L 0LD H 1HD UX01ZWLHD ModelSim SE Command Reference compare configure CR 103 vlogmatches lt ref logic value gt lt test logic value gt Specifies how Verilog signal states in the reference dataset should match values in the test dataset Optional Values are specified in a colon separated list of match values For example vlogmatches 0 0 1 1 2 Z Default is 0 0 1 1 Z Z X X when lt expression gt Specifies a conditional expression that must evaluate to true or 1 for differences to be reported Optional The expression is evaluated at the start of an observed difference See GUI _expression_format CR 22 for legal expression syntax lt comparePath gt Identifies the path of a compare signal region or glob expression Required See also compare add CR 95 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 104 compare continue compare
340. may not sublicense assign or otherwise transfer Software this Agreement or the rights under it whether by operation of law or otherwise attempted transfer without Mentor Graphics prior written consent and payment of Mentor Graphics then current applicable transfer charges Any attempted transfer without Mentor Graphics prior written consent shall be a material breach of this Agreement and may at Mentor Graphics option result in the immediate termination of the Agreement and licenses granted under this Agreement The terms of this Agreement including without limitation the licensing and assignment provisions shall be binding upon your heirs successors in interest and assigns The provisions of this section 4 shall survive the termination or expiration of this Agreement LIMITED WARRANTY 5 1 Mentor Graphics warrants that during the warranty period Software when properly installed will substantially conform to the functional specifications set forth in the applicable user manual Mentor Graphics does not warrant that Software will meet your requirements or that operation of Software will be uninterrupted or error free The warranty period is 90 days starting on the 15th day after delivery or upon installation whichever first occurs You must notify Mentor Graphics in writing of any nonconformity within the warranty period This warranty shall not be valid if Software has been subject to misuse unauthorized modification or
341. me gt Same as L but libraries are searched before uselib directives See Library usage UM 117 for more information Optional maxdelays Selects the maximum value in min typ max expressions Optional The default is the typical value Has no effect if you specified the min typ max selection at compile time mindelays Selects the minimum value in min typ max expressions Optional The default is the typical value Has no effect if you specified the min typ max selection at compile time no_cancelled_e_msg Disables negative pulse warning messages Optional By default vsim issues a warning and then filters negative pulses on specify path delays You can drive an X for a negative pulse using show_cancelled_e no_neg_tchk Disables negative timing check limits by setting them to zero Optional By default negative timing check limits are enabled This is just the opposite of Verilog XL where negative timing check limits are disabled by default and they are enabled with the neg_tchk option no_notifier Disables the toggling of the notifier register argument of all timing check system tasks Optional By default the notifier is toggled when there is a timing check violation and the notifier usually causes a UDP to propagate an X This argument suppresses X propagation on timing violations for the entire design You can suppress X propagation on individual instances using the tcheck_set command CR 277 no_path_edge Cause
342. me gt dumpports direction dumpports unique elab lt filename gt elab_cont lt filename gt elab_defer_fli error lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt f lt filename gt filemap_elab lt HDLfilename gt lt NEWfilename gt g lt Name gt lt Value gt G lt Name gt lt Value gt gblso lt filename gt gui help i installcolormap keeploaded keeploadedrestart keepstdout 1 lt filename gt lib lt libname gt lt license_option gt load_elab lt filename gt memprof memproft call memprof file lt filename gt memprof fileonly lt filename gt multisource_delay min max latest multisource_int_delays noassume nocompress no_notifier nopsl no_tchk_msg note lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt t notimingchecks novopt pulse_int_e lt percent gt pulse_int_r lt percent gt quiet restore lt filename gt sdf_iopath_to_prim_ok sdfmin sdftyp sdfmax lt delayScale gt lt instance gt lt sdf_filename gt sdfmaxerrors lt n gt sdfnoerror sdfnowarn sdf_verbose suppress lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt t lt multiplier gt lt time_unit gt tag lt string gt title lt title gt trace_foreign lt int gt transport_int_delays vcedstim lt instance gt lt filename gt version view lt dataset_name gt lt WLF_filename gt vopt voptargs lt args gt wa
343. mizations of fast nocheckCLUP Allows connectivity loops in a cell to be optimized Optional Argument has an effect only when compiling gate level cell libraries with fast see above ModelSim SE Command Reference vlog CR 365 nocheckDELAY When used in conjunction with delay_mode_path see above allows inlined Verilog modules with distributed delays and no path delays to be optimized Optional Argument has an effect only when compiling gate level cell libraries with fast see above nocheckDNET Allows both the port and the delayed port created for negative setup hold to be used in the functional section of the cell Optional Argument has an effect only when compiling gate level cell libraries with fast see above nocheckOPRD Allows an output port to be read internally by the cell Optional Argument has an effect only when compiling gate level cell libraries with fast see above Note that if the value read is the only value contributed to the output by the cell and if there s a driver on the net outside the cell the value read will not reflect the resolved value nocheckSUDP Allows a sequential UDP to drive another sequential UDP Optional Argument has an effect only when compiling gate level cell libraries with fast see above nocoverage Disables collection of statement coverage statistics which are on by default Optional nodebug ports pli Hides the internal data of the compiled design unit
344. mmand Reference CR 12 Syntax and conventions Design object names Design objects are organized hierarchically Each of the following objects creates a new level in the hierarchy e VHDL component instantiation statement block statement and package e Verilog module instantiation named fork named begin task and function e SystemC module instantiation Object name syntax The syntax for specifying object names in ModelSim is as follows lt datasetName gt lt datasetSeparator gt lt pathSeparator gt lt hierarchicalPath gt lt obje ctName gt lt elementSelection gt where datasetName is the logical name of the WLF file in which the object exists The currently active simulation is the sim dataset Any loaded WLF file is referred to by the logical name specified when the WLF file was loaded See Chapter 8 WLF files datasets and virtuals for more information datasetSeparator is the character used to terminate the dataset name The default is though a different character other than may be specified as the dataset separator via the DatasetSeparator UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file The default is This character must be different than the pathSeparator character pathSeparator is the character used to separate hierarchical object names Normally is used for VHDL and is used for Verilog although other characters except may be specified via the PathSeparator UM
345. mmands require this access if you need to operate on net bits c Enable access to library cells By default any Verilog module containing a non empty specify block may be optimized and debug and PLI access may be limited This option keeps module cell visibility Enable access to line number directives and process names n Enable access to nets p Enable access to ports This disables the module inlining optimization and is necessary only if you have PLI applications that require access to port handles t Enable access to registers including memories integer time and real types s Enable access to system tasks t Enable access to tasks and functions ModelSim SE Command Reference vlog CR 363 If lt spec gt is omitted access is enabled for all objects wou lt module gt is a module name optionally followed by to indicate all children of the module Multiple modules are allowed with each separated by a If no modules are specified then all modules are affected forcecode Forces code generation for optimized inlined modules when using the fast switch Should be used only when compiling vendor supplied cell libraries that will be placed in a read only location Optional hazards Detects event order hazards involving simultaneous reading and writing of the same register in concurrently executing processes Optional You must also specify this argument when you simulate the design with vsim CR 37
346. mode for the current invocation of ModelSim Report modes are by file default by instance and by design unit Optional source lt filename gt xml above lt percent gt Specifies that only objects with coverage values above this percentage be included in the output Optional all Forces toggle coverage reporting of all signals including those that have toggled Optional below lt percent gt Specifies that only objects with coverage values below this percentage be included in the output Optional append Appends the current coverage statistics to the named output file file lt filename gt Optional Can be used with the excluded instance lines total and zeros arguments to append specific reports to the output file bydu Writes out a coverage summary for each entity architecture or module with statistics summed by design unit Can be made the default with the setdefault bydu argument Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 134 coverage report byfile Writes out a coverage summary for all source files in the design Can be made the default with the setdefault byfile argument Optional byinstance Writes out a coverage summary for all instances and packages Can be made the default with the setdefault byinstance argument Optional du lt du_name gt Writes out a coverage summary for the specified design unit Optional du_name may take the form of library primary secondary where library
347. mplates GR 207 language versions VHDL UM 75 lecho command CR 190 left command CR 191 libraries 64 bit and 32 bit in same library UM 66 archives CR 358 creating UM 60 dependencies checking CR 330 design libraries creating CR 358 UM 60 design library types UM 58 design units UM 58 group use setting up UM 63 IEEE UM 65 importing FPGA libraries UM 69 including precompiled modules GR 76 GR 85 listing contents CR 330 mapping from the command line UM 62 from the GUI UM 62 hierarchically UM 539 search rules UM 63 modelsim_lib UM 96 moving UM 63 multiple libraries with common modules UM 118 naming UM 62 predefined UM 64 refreshing library images CR 318 CR 367 UM 66 resource libraries UM 58 std library UM 64 Synopsys UM 65 vendor supplied compatibility of CR 330 Verilog CR 388 UM 117 UM 194 VHDL library clause UM 64 working libraries UM 58 working vs resource UM 24 working with contents of UM 61 library map file Verilog configurations UM 122 library mapping overview UM 25 library maps Verilog 2001 UM 122 library simulator state variable UM 544 library definition in ModelSim UM 24 libsm UM 620 libswift UM 620 entry not found error UM 557 License ini file variable UM 534 licensing License variable in ini file UM 534 linking SystemC source UM 172 lint style checks CR 364 List Signal Properties dialog GR 165 List Signal Search dialog GR 163 List window UM 243 GR 159 adding items to CR 48 context menu GR 161 GUI chan
348. n function UM 182 sc_start function UM 182 sc_start function replacing in SystemC UM 182 sc_start replacing for ModelSim UM 164 ScalarOpts ini file variable UM 528 UM 529 scaling fonts GR 16 sccom using sccom vs raw C compiler UM 170 sccom command CR 256 sccom link command UM 172 UM 224 sccomLogfile ini file variable sccom UM 530 sccomVerbose ini file variable sccom UM 530 scgenmod command CR 260 scgenmod using UM 209 UM 217 sclib command CR 391 scope setting region environment CR 163 SCV library including CR 257 SDF controlling missing instance messages CR 382 disabling individual checks CR 277 disabling timing checks UM 453 errors and warnings UM 443 errors on loading disabling CR 382 instance specification UM 442 interconnect delays UM 453 mixed VHDL and Verilog designs UM 452 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ specification with the GUI UM 443 troubleshooting UM 454 Verilog sdf_annotate system task UM 446 optional conditions UM 451 optional edge specifications UM 450 rounded timing values UM 451 SDF to Verilog construct matching UM 447 VHDL resolving errors UM 445 SDF to VHDL generic matching UM 444 warning messages disabling CR 382 sdf_done UM 152 search command CR 262 search libraries CR 388 GR 76 GR 85 searching binary signal values in the GUI CR 29 Expression Builder UM 253 in the source window GR 210 List window signal values transitions and names CR 22 CR 154 CR 292 next and
349. n This option may also be specified with the WLFOptimize UM 537 variable in the modelsim ini file wlfnocollapse Instructs ModelSim to preserve all events and event order May result in relatively larger WLF files This option may also be specified with the WLFCollapseMode UM 537 variable in the modelsim ini file Optional wlfnocompress Causes vsim to create uncompressed WLF files Optional Beginning with version 5 5 WLF files are compressed by default in order to reduce file size This may slow simulation speed by one to two percent You may want to disable compression to speed up simulation or if you are experiencing problems with faulty data in the resulting WLF file This option may also be specified with the WLFCompress UM 537 variable in the modelsim ini file wlfnoopt Disables optimization of waveform display in the Wave window Optional Corresponding ini file entry is WLFOptimize ModelSim SE Command Reference vsim CR 385 wlfslim lt size gt Specifies a size restriction in megabytes for the event portion of the WLF file Optional The default is infinite size 0 The lt size gt must be an integer Note that a WLF file contains event header and symbol portions The size restriction is placed on the event portion only When ModelSim exits the entire header and symbol portion of the WLF file is written Consequently the resulting file will be larger than the size specified with wlfslim If used in c
350. n of VSIM called a warm restore The items restored are simulation kernel state vsim wlf file HDL objects listed in the List and Wave windows file pointer positions for files opened under VHDL and under Verilog fopen and the saved state of foreign architectures If you want to restore while running VSIM use this command If you want to start up VSIM and restore a previously saved checkpoint use the restore switch with the vsim command CR 375 called a cold restore Checkpoint restore allows a cold restore followed by simulation activity followed by a warm restore back to the original cold restore checkpoint file Warm restores to checkpoint files that were not created in the current run are not allowed except for this special case of an original cold restore file Checkpoint files are platform dependent you cannot checkpoint on one platform and restore on another Syntax restore lt filename gt Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the name of the checkpoint file Required See also checkpoint CR 94 vsim CR 375 The difference between checkpoint restore and restart UM 87 ModelSim SE Command Reference resume CR 251 resume The resume command is used to resume execution of a macro file after a pause command CR 219 or a breakpoint It may be input manually or placed in an onbreak CR 216 command string Placing a resume command in a bp CR 76 command string does not have this effect The
351. nal If omitted the search is limited to the selected region Applies to all paths specified in the command lt path gt Specifies the assertions to be affected Required Multiple paths and wildcards are allowed The path specifies assertions or a design region containing multiple assertions assertion fail disable a b c assert__0 Disables assertion a b c assert__0 assertion fail log off a b c assert__0 a b c assert__1l Disables logging for assertions a b c assert__O and a b c assert__ The log argument applies to all paths that follow it on the command line assertion fail log off a b c assert__0 log on a b c assert__1l Disables logging for assertion a b c assert__O but enables it for a b c assert__l assertion fail limit 4 Sets the failure response limit to 4 Each assertion failure will be responded to a maximum of 4 times during the current simulation Enabling disabling failure and pass checking UM 379 Setting failure and pass limits UM 381 Setting failure action UM 382 assertion pass command CR 66 and assertion report command CR 68 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 66 assertion pass assertion pass The assertion pass command configures simulator behavior in response to an assertion pass Syntax assertion pass disable enable limit lt count gt none log on off recursive spaties Arguments disable Turns off pass tracking for the specified assertions Optional Default You
352. nal You cannot suppress Fatal or Internal messages Edit the suppress UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information time Reports the wall clock time vecom takes to compile the design Optional Note that if many processes are running on the same system wall clock time may differ greatly from the actual cpu time spent on vcom version Returns the version of the compiler as used by the licensing tools such as Model Technology ModelSim SE vcom 5 5 Compiler 2000 01 Jan 29 2000 warning lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Changes the severity level of the specified message s to warning Optional Edit the warning UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information work lt library_name gt Specifies a logical name or pathname of a library that is to be mapped to the logical library work Optional by default the compiled design units are added to the work library The specified pathname overrides the pathname specified for work in the project file lt filename gt Specifies the name of a file containing the VHDL source to be compiled One filename is required multiple filenames can be entered separated by spaces or wildcards may be used e g vhd If you don t specify a filename and you are using the GUI a dialog box pops up allowin
353. name and state mapping for the VCD file created by a ved add command CR 294 vcd files CR 306 specifies the filename and state mapping for the VCD file created by a ved add command CR 294 supports multiple VCD files vcd flush CR 308 flushes the contents of the VCD file buffer to the VCD file vcd limit CR 309 specifies the maximum size of the VCD file vcd off CR 310 turns off VCD dumping and records all VCD variable values as x vcd on CR 311 turns on VCD dumping and records the current values of all VCD variables vcd2wlf CR 312 translates VCD files into WLF files ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 40 Command reference table Command name Action vcom CR 313 compiles VHDL design units vcover convert CR 321 converts a 5 7 coverage file to a 5 8 format vcover merge CR 322 merges multiple code or functional coverage data files offline vcover report CR 324 reports on multiple code or functional coverage data files offline vcover stats CR 327 produces summary statistics from multiple coverage data files vdel CR 329 deletes a design unit from a specified library vdir CR 330 lists the contents of a design library verror CR 331 prints a detailed description of a message number vgencomp CR 332 writes a Verilog module s equivalent VHDL component declaration to standard output view CR 334
354. ncluding whether a full pathname or a relative name was used lt line_number gt Specifies the line number of the breakpoint to be deleted Required if an id is not specified lt id gt Specifies the id number of the breakpoint to be deleted Required if a filename and line wan number are not specified If you are deleting a C breakpoint the id will have a c prefix bd alu vhd 127 Deletes the breakpoint at line 127 in the source file named alu vhd bd 5 Deletes the breakpoint with id 5 bd 6 alu vhd 234 Deletes the breakpoint with id 6 and the breakpoint at line 234 in the source file named alu vhd bd c 4 Deletes the C breakpoint with id c 4 bp CR 76 onbreak CR 216 Chapter 16 C Debug ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 72 bookmark add wave bookmark add wave Syntax Arguments Examples See also The bookmark add wave command creates a named reference to a specific zoom range and scroll position in the specified Wave window Bookmarks are saved in the wave format file and are restored when the format file is read see write format command CR 424 bookmark add wave lt label gt lt zoomrange gt lt topindex gt window lt window_name gt lt label gt Specifies the name for the bookmark Required lt zoomrange gt Specifies a list of two times with optional units Optional These two times must be enclosed in braces or quotation marks One number can be specified
355. nctions designs implicits and explicits Unique abbreviations are accepted region lt path gt Used in place of kind to specify a region of design space in which to look for the signal names Optional lt pattern gt Indicates which signal names or wildcard patterns should be used in finding the signals to hide Required Any number of names or wildcard patterns may be used See also virtual nohide CR 347 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference virtual log Syntax Arguments virtual log CR 345 The virtual log command causes the simulation mode dependent signals of the specified virtual signals to be logged by the kernel If wildcard patterns are used it will also log any normal signals found unless the only option is used You unlog the signals using the virtual nolog command virtual log kind lt kind gt region lt path gt recursive only in out inout internal ports lt pattern gt kind lt kind gt Specifies a subset of virtuals to look at Optional lt kind gt can be any of the following signals functions designs implicits and explicits Unique abbreviations are accepted region lt path gt Used in place of kind to specify a region of design space in which to look for signals to log Optional recursive Specifies that the scope of the search is to descend recursively into subregions Optional If omitted the search is limite
356. nd with ab up and down arrows scrolls through the command history with the keyboard arrows click on prompt left click once on a previous ModelSim or VSIM prompt in the transcript to copy the command typed at that prompt to the active cursor his or history shows the last few commands up to 50 are kept ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 20 Syntax and conventions Numbering conventions Numbers in ModelSim can be expressed in either VHDL or Verilog style You can use two styles for VHDL numbers and one for Verilog VHDL numbering conventions VHDL Style 1 The first of two VHDL number styles is radix value Element Description indicates a negative number optional can be any base in the range 2 through 16 2 8 10 or 16 by default numbers are assumed to be decimal optional specifies the numeric value expressed in the specified radix required is a delimiter between the radix and the value the first sign is required if a radix is used the second is always optional can also be used to designate a don t care element when you search for a signal value or expression in the List or Wave window If you want the to be read as a don t care element rather than a negative sign be sure to enclose the number in double quotes For instance you would type 0110 as opposed to 0110 If you don t include the double quotes ModelSim
357. ne is permitted to use these Marks without the prior written consent of Mentor Graphics or the respective third party owner The use herein of a third party Mark is not an attempt to indicate Mentor Graphics as a source of a product but is intended to indicate a product from or associated with a particular third party A current list of Mentor Graphics trademarks may be viewed at www mentor com terms_conditions trademarks cfm ModelSim SE Command Reference Technical support and updates CR 3 Technical support and updates Support Model Technology online and email technical support options maintenance renewal and links to international support contacts www model com support default asp Mentor Graphics support Wwww mentor com supportnet Updates Access to the most current version of ModelSim www model com downloads default asp Latest version email Place your name on our list for email notification of news and updates www model com products informant asp ModelSim SE Command Reference Where to find our documentation ModelSim documentation is available from our website at www model com support or in the following formats and locations Document Format How to get it ModelSim Installation amp Licensing Guide paper shipped with ModelSim PDF select Help gt Documentation also available from the Support page of our web site www model com ModelSim Quick Guide command and feature
358. nformation about the system environment wlf2log CR 415 translates a ModelSim WLF file to a QuickSim II logfile wlf2vcd CR 417 translates a ModelSim WLF file to a VCD file wlfman CR 418 outputs information about or anew WLF file from an existing WLF file wlfrecover CR 422 attempts to repair an incomplete WLF file write cell_report CR 423 creates a report of cell instances in the design that are optimized write format CR 424 records the names and display options in a file of the objects currently being displayed in the List or Wave window write list CR 426 records the contents of the most recently opened or specified List window in a list output file write preferences CR 427 saves the current GUI preference settings to a Tcl preference file write report CR 428 prints a summary of the design being simulated write transcript CR 430 writes the contents of the Main window transcript to the specified file ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 42 Command reference table Command name Action write tssi CR 431 records the contents of the default or specified List window in a TSSI format file write wave CR 433 records the contents of the most currently opened or specified Wave window in PostScript format ModelSim SE Command Reference main clear Syntax Arguments See also main clear CR 43 The main clear command clear
359. ng UM 577 cancelling scheduled events performance UM 108 case choice must be locally static CR 316 case sensitivity named port associations UM 207 VHDL vs Verilog CR 15 causality tracing in Dataflow window UM 306 cd change directory command CR 79 cdbg command CR 80 cdbg_wait_for_starting command UM 404 cell libraries UM 143 cells hiding in Dataflow window GR 146 GR 147 change command CR 82 change directory disabled GR 25 Change Memory dialog GR 185 Change Selected Variable dialog GR 173 change_menu_cmd command CR 84 chasing X UM 307 check contention add command CR 85 check contention config command CR 87 check contention off command CR 88 check float add command CR 89 check float config command CR 90 check float off command CR 91 check stable off command CR 92 check stable on command CR 93 check_synthesis argument CR 314 warning message UM 554 CheckPlusargs ini file variable VLOG UM 532 checkpoint command CR 94 checkpoint restore UM 86 UM 142 CheckpointCompressMode ini file variable UM 533 CheckSynthesis ini file variable UM 529 class member selection syntax CR 13 class of sc_signal lt T gt UM 180 cleanup SystemC state based code UM 175 clean up of SystemC state based code UM 175 clock change sampling signals at UM 269 clocked comparison UM 277 Code Coverage coverage_save system function UM 152 by instance UM 336 columns in workspace GR 122 condition coverage UM 336 UM 357 coverage clear command CR 129 cover
360. ng an error when it cannot locate specify path delays to annotate If you specify this argument IOPATH statements are annotated to the primitive driving the destination port if a corresponding specify path is not found Optional See SDF to Verilog construct matching UM 447 for additional information sdfmin sdftyp sdfmax lt delayScale gt lt instance gt lt sdf_filename gt Annotates VITAL or Verilog cells in the specified SDF file a Standard Delay Format file with minimum typical or maximum timing Optional The optional argument lt delayScale gt scales all values by the specified value For example if you specify sdfmax 1 5 all maximum values in the SDF file will be scaled to 150 of their original value The use of lt instance gt with lt sdf_filename gt is also optional it is used when the backannotation is not being done at the top level See Specifying SDF files for simulation UM 442 sdfmaxerrors lt n gt Controls the number of Verilog SDF missing instance messages that will be emitted before terminating vsim Optional lt n gt is the maximum number of missing instance error messages to be emitted The default number is 5 sdfnoerror Errors issued by the SDF annotator while loading the design prevent the simulation from continuing whereas warnings do not Changes SDF errors to warnings so that the simulation can continue Optional sdfnowarn Disables warnings from the SDF reader
361. no radix is specified for an enumerated type the default representation is used You can change the default radix for the current simulation using the radix command ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 166 examine Examples CR 243 You can change the default radix permanently by editing the DefaultRadix UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file time lt time gt Specifies the time value between 0 and now for which to examine the objects Optional If an expression is specified it will be evaluated at that time The objects to be examined must be logged via the add list add wave or log command in order for the examine command to be able to return a value for a requested time This option can be used only with objects that have been logged via the add list add wave or log command If the lt time gt field uses a unit the value and unit must be placed in curly braces For example the following are equivalent for ps resolution exa time 3 6 ns signal_a exa time 3600 signal_a value Returns value s as a curly braces separated Tcl list Default Use to toggle off a previous use of name lt name gt Specifies the name of any HDL or SystemC object Required except when the expr option is used All object types are allowed except those of the type file Multiple names and wildcards are accepted Spaces square brackets and extended identifiers require curly braces see examples below for more details To examine a VHDL
362. node_name gt all Disables float checking for all nodes that have checking enabled Optional F Specifies that float checking is disabled recursively into subregions Optional If omitted float check disabling is limited to the current region in Disables checking on nodes of mode IN Optional out Disables checking on nodes of mode OUT Optional inout Disables checking on nodes of mode INOUT Optional internal Disables checking on internal non port objects Optional ports Disables checking on nodes of modes IN OUT or INOUT Optional lt node_name gt Disables checking for the named node s Required check float add command CR 89 check float config command CR 90 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 92 check stable off check stable off The check stable off command disables stability checking You may later enable it with check stable on CR 93 and meanwhile the clock cycle numbers and boundaries are still tracked Syntax check stable off Arguments None See also check stable on command CR 93 ModelSim SE Command Reference check stable on CR 93 check stable on Syntax Arguments Description Examples See also The check stable on command enables stability checking on the entire design check stable on file lt filename gt period lt time gt strobe lt time gt file lt filename gt Specifies a file to which to write the error messages If this
363. nored Optional noglitch Specifies that delta width glitches are to be ignored Optional rising Searches for a rising edge on the specified object if that object is a scalar object If it is not a scalar object the option will be ignored Optional value lt sig_value gt Specifies a value of the object to match Optional Must be specified in the same radix that the selected object is displayed Case is ignored but otherwise the value must be an exact string match don t care bits are not yet implemented window lt wname gt Specifies an instance of the List window that is not the default Optional Otherwise the default List window is used Use the view command CR 334 to change the default window ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See also down CR 155 lt n gt Specifies to find the nth match Optional If less than n are found the number found is returned with a warning message and the marker is positioned at the last match down noglitch value FF23 Finds the next time at which the selected vector transitions to FF23 ignoring glitches down Goes to the next transition on the selected object The following examples illustrate search expressions that use a variety of object attributes paths array constants and time variables Such expressions follow the GUI_expression_format CR 22 down expr clk rising amp amp mystate reading amp amp top u3 addr 32 habcd1234 Searche
364. notation are supported Verilog VHDL and C language styles The values are interpreted without regard to the size of the bus to be mapped Bus widths up to 64 bits are supported There is currently no restriction on the contents of each string but if strings contain spaces they would need to be quoted and if they contain characters treated specially by Tcl square brackets curly braces backslashes they would need to be quoted with curly braces See the examples below for further syntax lt name gt The user defined name of the virtual type Required if delete is not used Case is not ignored Use alpha numeric and underscore characters only unless you are using VHDL extended identifier notation If using VHDL extended identifier notation lt name gt needs to be quoted with double quotes or with curly braces Examples virtual type state0O statel state2 state3 mystateType virtual function mystateType mysignal myConvertedSignal add wave myConvertedSignal Using positional notation associates each string with an enumeration index starting at zero and increasing by one in the positive direction When myConvertedSignal is displayed in the Wave List or Objects window the string stateO will appear when mysignal 0 statel when mysignal 1 state2 when mysignal 2 etc ModelSim SE Command Reference See also virtual type CR 357 virtual type 0 NULL_STATE 1 stl 2 st2 0x04 st3 16 h0O8 st4 h10 st
365. nout vcd ved files output vcd ved add in inout file in_inout vcd ved add out file output vcd ved off output vcd run lus ved on output vcd run all See also See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files Verilog tasks are documented in the IEEE 1364 standard ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 308 vcd flush vcd flush Syntax Arguments See also The ved flush command flushes the contents of the VCD file buffer to the specified VCD file This command is useful if you want to create a complete VCD file without ending your current simulation Related Verilog tasks dumpflush fdumpflush ved flush lt filename gt lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file Optional If omitted the command is executed on the file designated by the ved file command CR 304 or dump vcd if ved file was not invoked See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files Verilog tasks are documented in the IEEE 1364 standard ModelSim SE Command Reference vcd limit Syntax Arguments See also vcd limit CR 309 The ved limit command specifies the maximum size of a VCD file by default limited to available disk space When the size of the file exceeds the limit a comment is appended to the file and VCD dumping is disabled Related Verilog tasks dumplimit fdumplimit ved limit lt filesize gt lt filename gt lt filesize gt Specif
366. ns UM 190 mnemonics assigning to signal values CR 356 MODEL_TECH environment variable UM 523 MODEL_TECH_TCL environment variable UM 523 modeling memory in VHDL UM 101 ModelSim commands CR 3 1 CR 434 modes of operation UM 27 simulation task overview UM 23 tool structure UM 22 verification flow UM 22 modelsim command CR 208 MODELSIM environment variable UM 523 modelsim ini found by ModelSim UM 617 default to VHDL93 UM 541 delay file opening with UM 541 environment variables in UM 539 force command default setting UM 541 hierarchical library mapping UM 539 opening VHDL files UM 541 restart command defaults setting UM 541 startup file specifying with UM 540 transcript file created from UM 539 turning off arithmetic package warnings UM 540 turning off assertion messages UM 540 modelsim tcl file GR 293 modelsim_lib UM 96 path to UM 527 MODELSIM_TCL environment variable UM 523 modes of operation ModelSim UM 27 Modified field Project tab UM 45 Modify Breakpoints dialog GR 101 Modify Display Properties dialog GR 168 modules handling multiple common names UM 118 with unnamed ports UM 206 Monitor window grouping ungrouping objects GR 215 monitor window GR 214 monitors dual font scaling GR 32 mouse shortcuts Main window UM 607 Source window UM 607 Wave window UM 611 mpf file UM 38 loading from the command line UM 55 order of access during startup UM 614 MTI memory data file GR 184 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ mti_co
367. ny of the following signals functions designs implicits and explicits Unique abbreviations are accepted region lt path gt Used in place of kind to specify a region of design space in which to look for the signal names Optional lt pattern gt Indicates which signal names or wildcard patterns should be used in finding the signals to expose Required Any number of names or wildcard patterns may be used virtual hide CR 344 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 348 virtual nolog virtual nolog Syntax Arguments The virtual nolog command reverses the effect of a virtual log command It causes the simulation dependent signals of the specified virtual signals to be excluded unlogged by the kernel If wildcard patterns are used it will also unlog any normal signals found unless the only option is used virtual nolog kind lt kind gt region lt path gt recursive only in out inout internal ports lt pattern gt kind lt kind gt Specifies a subset of virtuals to look at Optional lt kind gt can be any of the following signals functions designs implicits and explicits Unique abbreviations are accepted region lt path gt Used in place of kind to specify a region of design space in which to look for signals to unlog Optional recursive Specifies that the scope of the search is to descend recursively into subregions
368. o 23 add list clk notrigger abcd Lists clk a b c and d only when clk changes config list strobeperiod 100 ns strobestart 0 ns usestrobe 1 add list notrigger clk abcd Lists clk a b c and d every 100 ns add list hex mybus msb opcode 8 downto 1 data Creates a user defined bus named mybus consisting of three signals the bus is displayed in hex add list vecl hex vec2 dec vec3 vec4 Lists the object vec using symbolic values lists vec2 in hexadecimal and lists vec3 and vec4 in decimal add wave CR 53 log CR 193 Extended identifiers CR 16 ModelSim SE Command Reference add memory CR 51 add memory Syntax Arguments See also The add memory command displays the contents of the specified memory in the MDI frame of the Main window add monitor addressradix lt radix gt dataradix lt radix gt wordsperline lt num gt lt object_name gt addressradix lt radix gt Specifies the address radix for the memory display lt radix gt can be specified as d decimal or h hex Default is decimal Optional dataradix lt radix gt Specifies the data radix for the memory display Optional If unspecified the global default radix is used Valid entries or any unique abbreviations are binary decimal unsigned octal hex symbolic and default If no radix is specified for an enumerated type the symbolic representation is used You can change the default radix for th
369. o look for a matching object in any visible enclosing scope up to an instance boundary If at least one match is found within a given context no more upward searching is done therefore some objects that may be visible from a given context will not be found when wildcards are used if they are within a higher enclosing scope e The wildcards and can be used at any level of a name except in the dataset name and inside of a slice specification Square bracket wildcards can also be used e A wildcard character will never match a path separator For example dut will match dut siga and dut clk However dut won t match either of those e Because square brackets are wildcards in the find command only parentheses can be used to index or slice arrays e The WildcardFilter Tcl preference variable is used by the find command to exclude the specified types of objects when performing the search See Design object names CR 12 for more information on specifying names Syntax find nets signals in inout internal lt object_name gt nofilter out ports recursive find instances recursive lt object_name gt find virtuals kind lt kind gt unsaved lt object_name gt find classes lt class_name gt ModelSim SE Command Reference find CR 179 find objects class lt class_name gt isa lt class_name gt lt object_name gt Arguments for nets and signals
370. o maintain design object visibility Note that using this option may reduce simulation speed Optional lt spec gt is one or more of the following characters a Preserve PSL assertion and functional coverage browser data Note that if a PSL construct is being driven by a port signal vopt may replace that signal name with its Wow higher level driver So in this case if you prefer the local port name the acc p option should also be specified i e acc ap b Enable access to bits of vector nets This is necessary for PLI applications that require handles to individual bits of vector nets Also some user interface commands require this access if you need to operate on net bits c Enable access to library cells By default any Verilog module containing a non empty specify block may be optimized and debug and PLI access may be limited This option keeps module cell visibility l Enable access to line number directives and process names n Enable access to nets p Enable access to ports This disables the module inlining optimization and is necessary only if you have PLI applications that require access to port handles r Enable access to registers including memories integer time and real types s Enable access to system tasks t Enable access to tasks and functions If lt spec gt is omitted access is enabled for all objects ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 374 vopt Examples See also wou lt
371. o perform default binding at compile time rather than at load time Optional See Default binding UM 79 for more information You can change the permanent default by editing the BindAtCompile UM 529 variable in the modelsim ini bindAtLoad Forces ModelSim to perform default binding at load time rather than at compile time Optional Default See Default binding UM 79 for more information check_synthesis Turns on limited synthesis rule compliance checking Specifically it checks to see that signals read by a process are in the sensitivity list Optional The checks understand only combinational logic not clocked logic Edit the CheckSynthesis UM 529 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default cover lt stat gt Enables various coverage statistics collection Optional lt stat gt is one or more of the following characters b Collect branch statistics c Collect condition statistics e Collect expression statistics s Collect statement statistics Default t Collect toggle statistics Cannot be used if x is specified x Collect extended toggle statistics see Toggle coverage UM 344 for details Cannot be used if t is specified By default only statement coverage is enabled when you invoke vsim with the coverage option debugVA Prints a confirmation if a VITAL cell was optimized or an explanation of why it was not during VITAL level 1 acceleration Optional error lt
372. og and VITAL cells though the destination of the interconnect must be a Verilog cell The source may be VITAL or Verilog This option works independently from multisource_int_delays vcdstim lt instance gt lt filename gt Specifies a VCD file from which to re simulate the design Optional The VCD file must have been created in a previous ModelSim simulation using the ved dumpports command CR 297 See Using extended VCD as stimulus UM 460 for more information version Returns the version of the simulator as used by the licensing tools such as Model Technology ModelSim SE vsim 5 5 Simulator 2000 01 Jan 28 2000 view lt dataset_name gt lt WLF_filename gt Specifies a wave log format WLF file for vsim to read Allows you to use vsim to view the results from an earlier simulation The Structure Objects Wave and List windows can be opened to look at the results stored in the WLF file other ModelSim windows will not show any information when you are viewing a dataset See additional discussion in Examples CR 393 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 384 vsim vopt Instructs vsim to run the vopt command CR 373 automatically if vopt wasn t manually invoked Optional You can make this the default behavior See Making the optimized flow the default UM 125 for more information voptargs lt args gt Specifies arguments that vsim should pass to vopt CR 373 when running vopt automatically see Makin
373. ogStrengths Sets the option to ignore Verilog net strengths compare options vlogxmatches 0 0 1 1 2Z Z X XZ0 Verilog X will now match X Z or 0 compare options vhdlmatches X UXWD VHDL std_logic X will now match U X W or D compare options tolLead 300 ps Sets the leading tolerance for asynchronous comparisons to 300 picoseconds compare options tolTrail 250 ps Sets the trailing tolerance for asynchronous comparisons to 250 picoseconds See also compare add CR 95 compare clock CR 100 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference compare reload CR 113 compare reload Syntax Arguments See also The compare reload command reloads comparison differences to allow their viewing without recomputation Prior to invoking compare reload you must open the relevant datasets with the same names that were used during the original comparison compare reload lt rulesFilename gt lt diffsFilename gt lt rulesFilename gt Specifies the name of the file that was previously saved using the compare saverules command Required Must be the first argument lt diffsFilename gt Specifies the name of the file that was previously saved using the compare savediffs command Required compare add CR 95 compare savediffs CR 116 compare saverules CR 117 compare run CR 115 compare start CR 120 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 114 compare reset compare rese
374. oken 0 onbreak set broken 1 resume run all if broken puts failure else puts success This set of commands test for assertions Assertions are treated as breakpoints if the severity level is greater than or equal to the current BreakOnAssertion variable setting see vsim simulator control variables UM 531 By default a severity level of failure or above causes a breakpoint a severity level of error or below does not abort CR 44 bd CR 71 bp CR 76 do CR 153 onerror CR 218 resume CR 251 status CR 273 ModelSim SE Command Reference onElabError CR 217 onElabError Syntax Arguments See also The onElabError command specifies one or more commands to be executed when an error is encountered during elaboration The command is used by placing it within the modelsim tcl file or a macro During initial design load onElabError may be invoked from within the modelsim tcl file during a simulation restart onElabError may be invoked from a macro Use the onElabError command without arguments to return to a prompt onElabError lt command gt lt command gt lt command gt Any command can be used as an argument to onElabError If you want to use more than one command use a semicolon to separate the commands or place them on multiple lines The entire command string must be placed in curly braces Optional do CR 153 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 218 onerror
375. ommand reference table Command name Action readers CR 244 displays the names of all readers of the specified object record CR 245 starts recording a replayable trace of all keyboard and mouse actions report CR 246 displays the value of all simulator control variables or the value of any simulator state variables relevant to the current simulation restart CR 248 reloads the design elements and resets the simulation time to zero restore CR 250 restores the state of a simulation that was saved with a checkpoint command CR 94 during the current invocation of vsim resume CR 251 resumes execution of a macro file after a pause command CR 219 or a breakpoint right CR 252 searches right next for signal transitions or values in the specified Wave window run CR 254 advances the simulation by the specified number of timesteps sccom CR 256 compiles SystemC design units scgenmod CR 260 creates a VHDL entity s or Verilog module s equivalent SystemC foreign module declaration writing it to standard output search CR 262 searches the specified window for one or more objects matching the specified pattern s searchlog CR 264 searches one or more of the currently open logfiles for a specified condition seetime CR 266 scrolls the List or Wave window to make the specified time visible setenv CR 267 sets an environmen
376. ompact lt percent gt Causes design units that are compiled into the created library to be stored in archives rather than in subdirectories Optional See Archives UM 59 for more details You may optionally specify a decimal number between 0 and 1 that denotes the allowed percentage of wasted space before archives are compacted By default archives are compacted when 50 5 of their space is wasted See an example below help Displays the command s options and arguments Optional dos Specifies that subdirectories in a library have names that are compatible with DOS Not recommended if you use the vmake CR 371 utility Optional short Interchangeable with the dos argument Optional unix Specifies that subdirectories in a library may have long file names that are NOT compatible with DOS Optional Default for ModelSim SE long Interchangeable with the unix argument Optional unnamed_designs lt value gt Specifies how many unnamed optimized versions of a design the vopt command CR 373 will save within the library Once lt value gt is reached vopt deletes the oldest unnamed optimized version Optional lt name gt Specifies the pathname or archive name of the library to be created Required vlib design Creates the design library design You can define a logical name for the library using the vmap command CR 372 or by adding a line to the library section of the modelsim ini file that is located in th
377. ompare by region UM 276 compare by signal UM 275 compare options UM 279 compare tab UM 274 comparison method UM 277 comparison method tab UM 277 delaying the test signal GR 250 difference markers UM 280 flattened designs UM 284 hierarchical designs UM 284 icons UM 282 introduction UM 271 leading edge tolerance UM 277 List window display UM 282 pathnames UM 280 reference dataset UM 273 reference region UM 276 test dataset UM 274 timing differences UM 280 trailing edge tolerance UM 277 values column UM 281 Wave window display UM 280 Waveform Editor Waveform Compare using with GR 296 waveform editor creating waveforms GR 289 creating waves CR 399 editing commands CR 402 editing waveforms GR 290 importing vcd stimulus file CR 406 mapping signals GR 295 modifying existing waves CR 407 saving stimulus files GR 294 saving waves CR 405 simulating GR 293 toolbar buttons GR 228 waveform logfile log command CR 193 overview UM 225 see also WLF files waveform popup UM 281 GR 262 waveforms UM 225 optimize viewing of UM 537 optimizing viewing of CR 384 saving and viewing CR 193 UM 226 viewing GR 217 WaveRestoreCursors command CR 425 WaveRestoreZoom command CR 425 WaveSignalNameWidth ini file variable UM 536 weighting coverage directives UM 389 Welcome dialog turning on off UM 522 when command CR 409 when statement time based breakpoints CR 413 where command CR 414 wildcard characters for pattern m
378. on again use the enablebp command Syntax disablebp lt id gt Arguments lt id gt Specifies a breakpoint or when command id to disable Optional If you don t specify an id all breakpoints are disabled Note that C breakpoint id s see C Debug UM 401 are prefixed with c See also bd CR 71 bp CR 76 enablebp command CR 160 onbreak CR 216 resume CR 251 when CR 409 ModelSim SE Command Reference disable_menu CR 151 disable menu Syntax Arguments Examples See also The disable_menu command disables the specified menu within the specified window The disabled menu will become grayed out and nonresponsive Returns nothing disable_menu lt window_name gt lt menu_path gt lt window_name gt Tk path of the window containing the menu Required The path for the Main window must be expressed as All other window pathnames begin with a period as shown in the example below lt menu_path gt Name of the Tk menu widget path Required disable_menu File Disables the file menu of the Main window disable_menu mywindow File Disables the file menu of the mywindow window add_menu CR 57 enable_menu CR 161 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 152 disable menuitem disable _menuitem The disable_menuitem command disables a specified menu item within the specified menu path of the specified window The menu item will become grayed out and nonresponsive Returns nothing S
379. oncat_ascending amp mybusbasename Specifies an ascending range of 0 to n 1 with the signals gathered by name in descending order concat_ascending concat_sort_wild_ascending amp mybusbasename Specifies an ascending range of 0 to n 1 with the signals gathered by name in ascending order concat_reverse busl amp bus2 Specifies that the bits of bus and bus2 be reversed in the output virtual signal ModelSim SE Command Reference GUI_expression_format CR 29 Record field and SystemC class structure union members Arbitrarily nested arrays and records are supported but operators will only operate on one field at a time That is the expression a b where a and b are records with multiple fields is not supported This would have to be expressed as facthas Dfi Be lanka S2 Os io 4 Examples vhdlsig fieldl vhdlsig fieldl subfieldl vhdlsig 5 field3 vhdlsig field4 3 downto 0 Searching for binary signal values in the GUI When you use the GUI to search for signal values displayed in 4 state binary radix you should be aware of how ModelSim maps between binary radix and std_logic The issue arises because there is no un initialized value in binary while there is in std_logic So ModelSim relies on mapping tables to determine whether a match occurs between the displayed binary signal value and the underlying std_logic value This matching algorithm applies only to searching via the GUI I
380. onjunction with wlftlim the more restrictive of the limits takes precedence This option may also be specified with the WLFSizeLimit UM 537 variable in the modelsim ini file ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 386 vsim wlftlim lt duration gt Specifies the duration of simulation time for WLF file recording Optional The default is infinite time 0 The lt duration gt is an integer of simulation time at the current resolution you can optionally specify the resolution if you place curly braces around the specification For example 5000 ns sets the duration at 5000 nanoseconds regardless of the current simulator resolution The time range begins at the current simulation time and moves back in simulation time for the specified duration For example vsim wlftlim 5000 writes at least the last 5000ns of the current simulation to the WLF file the current simulation resolution in this case is ns If used in conjunction with wlfslim the more restrictive of the limits will take effect This option may also be specified with the WLFTimeLimit UM 537 variable in the modelsim ini file The wlfslim and wlftlim switches were designed to help users limit WLF file sizes for long or heavily logged simulations When small values are used for these switches the values may be overridden by the internal granularity limits of the WLF file format Arguments VHDL absentisempty Causes VHDL files opened for read that target non ex
381. or Wave window To change the default window use the view_ command CR 334 configure list wave window lt wname gt lt option gt lt value gt delta all collapse none gateduration lt duration_open gt gateexpr lt expression gt usegating lt value gt strobeperiod lt period gt strobestart lt start_time gt usesignaltriggers lt value gt usestrobe lt value gt childrowmargin lt pixels gt cursorlockcolor lt color gt gridcolor lt color gt griddelta lt pixels gt gridoffset lt time gt gridperiod lt time gt namecolwidth lt width gt rowmargin lt pixels gt signalnamewidth lt value gt timecoclor lt coler gt timeline lt value gt valuecolwidth lt width gt vectorcolor lt color gt waveselectcolor lt color gt waveselectenable lt value gt The command works in three modes e without options or values it returns a list of all attributes and their current values e with just an option argument without a value it returns the current value of that attribute e with one or more option value pairs it changes the values of the specified attributes to the new values The returned information has five fields for each attribute the command line switch the Tk widget resource name the Tk class name the default value and the current value list wave Specifies either the List or Wave widget to configure R
382. or timing check violations You can disable individual messages using the tcheck_set command CR 277 nosdierror Errors issued by the SDF annotator while loading the design prevent the simulation from continuing whereas warnings do not Changes SDF errors to warnings so that the simulation can continue Optional nosdfwarn Disables warnings from the SDF annotator Optional nospecify Disables specify path delays and timing checks Optional nowarn lt CODE gt Disables warning messages in the category specified by lt CODE gt Optional Warnings that can be disabled include the lt CODE gt name in square brackets in the warning message For example Warning vsim 3017 test v 2 TFMPC Too few port connections Expected lt m gt found lt n gt This warning message can be disabled with nowarnTFMPC ntc_warn Enables warning messages from the negative timing constraint algorithm Optional By default these warnings are disabled This algorithm attempts to find a set of delays for the timing check delayed net arguments such that all negative limits can be converted to non negative limits with respect to the delayed nets If there is no solution for this set of limits then the algorithm sets one of the negative limits to zero and recalculates the delays This process is repeated until a solution is found A warning message is issued for each negative limit set to zero ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 390 vsim
383. ote that trailing space before closing brace is required ext ident All non alpha characters escaped ModelSim SE Command Reference Wildcard characters CR 17 Wildcard characters Wildcard characters can be used in HDL object names in some simulator commands Conventions for wildcards are as follows Description matches any sequence of characters matches any single character matches any one of the enclosed characters a hyphen can be used to specify a range for example a z A Z 0 9 can be used only with the find command CR 178 You can use the WildcardFilter Tcl preference variable to filter matching objects for the add wave add log add list and find commands gt Note A wildcard character will never match a path separator For example dut will match dut siga and dut clk However dut won t match either of those ModelSim variables ModelSim variables can be referenced in simulator commands by preceding the name of the variable with the dollar sign character ModelSim uses global Tcl variables for simulator state variables simulator control variables simulator preference variables and user defined variables see Preference variables located in Tcl files UM 542 for more information See Appendix B ModelSim variables in the User s Manual for more information on variables The report command CR 246 returns a list of current settings for either the simulator state o
384. ou to merge coverage results from simulations that have different hierarchies verbose Enables summary code coverage statistics to be computed and directed to the log file each time a file is merged into the base The statistics are instance based Optional Not a valid option when merging functional coverage databases lt outfile gt Specifies the name of the file that will contain the merged output Required ModelSim SE Command Reference Example See also vcover merge CR 323 lt filel gt lt file2 gt lt filen gt Specifies the file s you want to merge Required Multiple pathnames are allowed Wildcards are allowed only at a Unix shell prompt vcover merge myresult myfilel myfile2 Merges coverage statistics for myfile and myfile2 and writes them to myresult vcover merge myresult2 dut cov Uses wildcards to merge all files with a cov extension in a particular directory You must enter this command at a UNIX shell prompt This example does not work currently on Windows platforms eval vcover merge summary glob cov Allows the above vcover merge example using wildcards to work at a VSIM gt prompt on all platforms glob returns a list of the fields whose names end in cov vcover convert command CR 321 vcover stats command CR 327 fcover save command CR 177 Chapter 13 Measuring code coverage Chapter 15 Functional coverage with PSL and ModelSim ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 324 vcover repor
385. our code references symbols in the generated SystemC o files then you must specify the link argument after the list of files as shown below sccom a o b o libtemp a link Under the covers the C linker s command and argument order looks like this ld a o b o libtemp a lt internal list of SC o files gt libsystemc a However if the o files created by sccom are dependent on the object or archive you provided then the link argument must be placed before the object files or archive sccom link a o b o libtemp a In this case the undercover command and argument order look like this ld lt internal list of SC o files gt libsystemc a a o b o libtemp a log lt logfile gt Specifies the logfile in which to collect output Optional Related modelsim ini variable is SccomLogfile nologo Disables the startup banner Optional note lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Changes the severity level of the specified message s to note Optional Edit the note UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information SCV Includes the SystemC verification library Optional If you specify this argument when compiling your C code with secom you must also specify it when linking the object files with sccom link Related modelsim ini variable is UseScv ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 258 sccom Examples scms Includes the Sys
386. ource lines with errors showing GR 57 GR 66 Source window GR 205 code coverage data UM 342 colorization GR 211 tab stops in GR 211 see also windows Source window source level debug SystemC enabling UM 178 spaces in pathnames CR 1 1 sparse memories listing with write report CR 428 sparse memory modeling UM 156 SparseMemThreshhold ini file variable UM 528 specify path delays CR 390 matching to IOPATH statements UM 447 speeding up the simulation UM 317 splitio command CR 272 square brackets escaping CR 15 stability checking disabling CR 92 enabling CR 93 Standard Developer s Kit User Manual UM 35 standards supported UM 30 Start Simulation dialog GR 81 start_of_simulation function UM 183 Startup macros UM 540 startup alternate to startup do vsim do CR 376 environment variables access during UM 615 files accessed during UM 614 macro in the modelsim ini file UM 536 startup macro in command line mode UM 27 using a startup file UM 540 Startup ini file variable UM 536 state variables UM 544 statistical sampling profiler UM 318 status bar Main window GR 23 status command CR 273 Status field Project tab UM 45 std ini file variable UM 527 std_arith package disabling warning messages UM 540 std_developerskit ini file variable UM 527 Std_logic mapping to binary radix CR 29 std_logic_arith package UM 65 std_logic_signed package UM 65 std_logic_textio UM 65 std_logic_unsigned package UM 65 StdArithNoWarnings ini file vari
387. ous edge searches Tab searches right next and shift tab searches left previous GUI_expression_format CR 22 left CR 191 seetime CR 266 view CR 334 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 254 run run The run command advances the simulation by the specified number of timesteps Syntax run lt timesteps gt lt time_units gt all continue finish next step over Arguments lt timesteps gt lt time_units gt Specifies the number of timesteps for the simulation to run The number may be fractional or may be specified absolute by preceding the value with the character Optional In addition optional lt time_units gt may be specified as fs ps ns us ms or sec The default lt timesteps gt and lt time_units gt specifications can be changed during a ModelSim session by selecting Simulate gt Simulation Options Main window Time steps and time units may also be set with the RunLength UM 535 and UserTimeUnit UM 536 variables in the modelsim ini file all Causes the simulator to run the current simulation forever or until it hits a breakpoint or specified break event Optional continue Continues the last simulation run after a step CR 274 command step over command or a breakpoint A run continue command may be input manually or used as the last command in a bp CR 76 command string Optional finish In C Debug UM 401 only continues the simulation run and return
388. ously saved code or functional coverage file on which you want to report Required vcover report totals output myreport cov Writes a top level summary of the number of instances statements branches hits and signal toggles to myreport cov vcover report lines select bcs save cov Writes detailed branch condition and statement statistics from save cov without associated source code to stdout vcover report save Ccov Writes a summary of code coverage for all instances in save cov to stdout vcover report lines out save cov Writes code coverage details of all instances in the design to save cov The lines option reports coverage statistics for each statement and branch Branch coverage statistics will following statement statistics and will be presented in four columns line column true branch count false branch count vcover report lines instance top p save cov Writes code coverage details of one specific instance to save cov vcover report lines below 90 file myreport cov Writes a summary of coverage by source file for coverage less than or equal to 90 vcover report zeros output myzerocov txt Writes a list of statements with zero coverage to myzerocov txt Chapter 13 Measuring code coverage coverage save CR 137 fcover save CR 177 coverage report command CR 133 fcover report command CR 175 ModelSim SE Command Reference vcover stats CR 327 vcover stats Syntax Arguments The veover s
389. out Resets toggle statistics collection on nodes of mode INOUT Optional internal Resets toggle statistics collection on internal non port objects Optional p0rts Resets toggle statistics collection on nodes of modes IN OUT or INOUT Optional E Specifies that toggle statistics collection is reset recursively into subregions Optional If omitted the reset is limited to the current region lt node_name gt Resets toggle statistics collection for the named node s Required Multiple names and wildcards are accepted See also Toggle coverage UM 344 toggle add CR 281 toggle report CR 285 ModelSim SE Command Reference transcribe Syntax Arguments Examples See also transcribe CR 287 The transcribe command displays a command in the Transcript pane and then executes the command The transcribe command is normally used to direct commands to the Transcript pane from an external event such as a menu pick or button selection The add button CR 45 and add_menuitem CR 60 commands can utilize transcribe Returns nothing transcribe lt command gt lt command gt Specifies the command to execute Required add button pwd transcribe pwd NoDisable Creates a button labeled pwd that invokes transcribe with the pwd Tcl command and echoes the command and its results to the Transcript pane The button remains active during a run add button CR 45 add_menuitem CR 60 ModelSim SE Command Reference C
390. ow The menu path and label must already exist for this command to function Returns nothing Syntax change_menu_cmd lt window_name gt lt menu_path gt lt label gt lt Cmd gt Arguments lt window_name gt Tk path of the window containing the menu Required The path for the Main window must be expressed as All other window pathnames begin with a period lt menu_path gt Name of an existing Tk menu widget plus any submenu path Required lt label gt Current label on the menu item Required lt Cmd gt New Tcl command to be executed when selected Required See also add_menu CR 57 add_menucb CR 59 add_menuitem CR 60 add_separator CR 61 add_submenu CR 62 ModelSim SE Command Reference check contention add CR 85 check contention add Syntax Arguments Description The check contention add command enables contention checking for the specified nodes The allowed nodes are Verilog nets and VHDL signals of types std_logic and std_logic_vector Any other node types and nodes that don t have multiple drivers are silently ignored by the command check contention add r in out inout internal ports lt node_name gt F Specifies that contention checking is enabled recursively into subregions Optional If omitted contention check enabling is limited to the current region in Enables checking on nodes of mode IN Optional out Enables checking on nodes of mode
391. p_vh processor data top_vh cache pdata top_vh cache gen__0 s data top_vh cache gen__1 s data top_vh cache gen__2 s data top_vh cache gen__3 s data h ptrans _vh sdata top_vh cache sdata top_vh memory data h strans h cache gen__3 s data_out h paddr 1224 18 1216 18 a o SSS Ch O O EE lt lt 675 10 423 135 3 oe ae a O Ho lt D oe eo a O E lt DOB WWWNHRPRPPRP PPE oe N a O kej lt q wlfman profile top 3 top_vh wlf The output from this command would look something like this ModelSim SE Command Reference See also top_vh pro top_vh cac top_vh cac top_vh cac top_vh cac top_vh cac 1224 18 _vh ptr 1216 18 ae o SN ct oct O O ao ee lt lt top_vh cac wwwrnrerrrrr rre Chapter 8 WLF files datasets and virtuals UM 225 wlfman CR 421 2192 33 top_vh pdata cessor data he pdata he gen__0 s data he gen__1 s data he gen__2 s data he gen__3 s data ans h sdata he sdata top_vh memory data ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 422 wifrecover wlifrecover The wlfrecover tool attempts to repair WLF files that are incomplete due to a crash or the file being copied prior to completion of the simulation The tool works only on WLF files created by ModelSim versions 5 6 or later You can run the tool from the VSIM gt or ModelSim gt prompt or from a shell Syntax wlfrecover lt Ellename gt Eorce q Arguments
392. path in which to look for an object name Optional expr lt expression gt Specifies an expression to be evaluated Optional The objects to be examined must be logged via the add list add wave or log command in order for the examine command to be able to evaluate the specified expression If the time argument is present the expression will be evaluated at the specified time otherwise it will be evaluated at the current simulation time See GUI_expression_format CR 22 for the format of the expression The expression must be placed within curly braces in Specifies that lt name gt include ports of mode IN Optional out Specifies that lt name gt include ports of mode OUT Optional inout Specifies that lt name gt include ports of mode INOUT Optional internal Specifies that lt name gt include internal non port signals Optional ports Specifies that lt name gt include all ports Optional Has the same effect as specifying in inout and out together name Displays object name s along with the value s Optional Default is value behavior see below The lecho command CR 190 will return the output of an examine command in pretty print format For example lecho examine name clk prw pstrb lt radix gt Specifies the radix for the objects that follow in the command Valid entries or any unique abbreviations are binary ascii unsigned decimal octal hex symbolic and default If
393. pecification The WLF file is the source of data for the List and Wave windows An object that has been logged and is subsequently added to the List or Wave window will have its complete history back to the start of logging available for listing and waving Limitations Verilog memories and VHDL variables can be logged using the variable s full name only log depth lt level gt flush howmany in inout internal optcells out ports recursive lt object_name gt depth lt level gt Restricts a recursive search specified with the recursive argument to a certain level of hierarchy lt level gt is an integer greater than or equal to zero For example if you specify depth 1 the command descends only one level in the hierarchy Optional flush Adds region data to the WLF file after each individual log command Optional Default is to add region data to the log file only when a command that advances simulation time is executed e g run step etc or when you quit the simulation howmany Returns an integer indicating the number of signals found Optional in Specifies that the WLF file is to include data for ports of mode IN whose names match the specification Optional inout Specifies that the WLF file is to include data for ports of mode INOUT whose names match the specification Optional internal Specifies that the WLF file is to include data for internal non port objects whose names
394. pecified the lt time gt option must be enclosed in curly braces See the examples below for more details lt expressionString gt A text string expression in the MTI GUI expression format Required See GUI_expression_format CR 22 for more information lt name gt The name you define for the virtual signal Required Case is ignored unless installed in a Verilog region Use alpha numeric and underscore characters only unless you are using VHDL extended identifier notation If using VHDL extended identifier notation lt name gt needs to be quoted with double quotes or with curly braces ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 342 virtual function Examples virtual function not chip sectionl clk clk_n Creates a signal chip section I clk_n that is the inverse of chip section1 clk virtual function install chip std_logic_vector chip vlog rega rega_slv Creates a std_logic_vector equivalent of a Verilog register rega and installs it as chip rega_slv virtual function chip addr 11 0 Oxfab addr_eq_fab Creates a boolean signal chip addr_eq_fab that is true when chip addr 11 0 is equal to hex fab and false otherwise It is acceptable to mix VHDL signal path notation with Verilog part select notation virtual function gate chip siga XOR rtl chip siga siga_diff Creates a signal that is high only during times when signal chip siga of the gate level version of the design does not match chip siga of t
395. pecified window using the specified menu name add_menucb CR 59 creates a checkbox within the specified menu of the specified window add_menuitem CR 60 creates a menu item within the specified menu of the specified window add_separator CR 61 adds a separator as the next item in the specified menu path in the specified window add_submenu CR 62 creates a cascading submenu within the specified menu path of the specified window alias CR 63 creates a new Tcl procedure that evaluates the specified commands assertion fail CR 64 configures fail tracking for PSL assertions assertion pass CR 66 configures pass tracking for PSL assertions assertion report CR 68 produces a textual summary of PSL assertion results batch_mode CR 70 returns a if ModelSim is operating in batch mode otherwise returns a 0 bd CR 71 deletes a breakpoint bookmark add wave CR 72 adds a bookmark to the specified Wave window bookmark delete wave CR 73 ModelSim SE Command Reference deletes bookmarks from the specified Wave window Command name Command reference table CR 33 Action bookmark goto wave CR 74 zooms and scrolls a Wave window using the specified bookmark bookmark list wave CR 75 displays a list of available bookmarks bp CR 76 sets a breakpoint cd CR 79 changes the ModelSim local directory to the specified dir
396. perator Description Operator Description amp amp boolean and sl SLL shift left logical II boolean or sla SLA shift left arithmetic boolean not srl SRL shift right logical equal sra SRA shift right arithmetic l not equal ror ROR rotate right exact equal rol ROL rotate left exact not equal arithmetic add lt less than arithmetic subtract lt less than or equal arithmetic multiply gt greater than arithmetic divide gt greater than or equal mod MOD arithmetic modulus not NOT unary bitwise rem REM arithmetic inversion remainder and AND amp bitwise and l lt vector_expr gt OR reduction nand NAND bitwise nand A lt vector_expr gt XOR reduction or OR bitwise or nor NOR bitwise nor xor XOR bitwise xor xnor XNOR bitwise xnor p gt Note Arithmetic operators use the std_logic_arith package ModelSim SE Command Reference Syntax and conventions Casting Casting Description bool convert to boolean boolean convert to boolean int convert to integer integer convert to integer real convert to real time convert to 64 bit integer std_logic convert to 9 state signal value signed convert to signed vector unsigned convert to unsigned vector std_logic_vector convert to unsigned vector Examples top bus amp Sbit_mask This expression takes the bitwise AND function of signal op bus and the array constant contained in
397. piles all files in the current project Optional delete lt project gt Deletes a specified project file Optional env Returns the current project file Optional history Lists a history of manipulated projects Optional Must be used outside of a simulation session new lt home_dir gt lt proj_name gt lt defaultlibrary gt lt use_current gt Creates a new project under a specified home directory with a specified name and optionally a default library Optional If use_current is set to 1 then ModelSim uses the current modelsim ini file when creating the project rather than the default You must specify a default library if you want to specify use_current A new project cannot be created while a project is currently open or a simulation is in progress open lt project gt Opens a specified project file making it the current project Changes the current working directory to the project s directory Optional Must be used outside of a simulation session removefile lt filename gt Removes the specified file from the current project Optional project open user george design test3 test3 mpf Makes user george design test3 test3 mpf the current project and changes the current working directory to user george design test3 project compileall Executes current project library build scripts ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 236 property list property list Syntax Arguments The property list command changes one o
398. ple line number and range fields Required if lt filename gt or remove is not specified remove Removes an existing exclusion or part of one Required if lt filename gt or add is not specified lt source gt Designates the name of the design source file not an exclusion file from which exclusions will be made Required if add or remove is not specified but is not required if you specify inst lt path gt all inst lt path gt Designates the hierarchical path of an instance in the design Optional lt ln gt Specifies the line number to be excluded from code coverage in the design source file lt source gt You can also use InX InY eg 415 460 to specify a range of lines to be excluded Multiple lines or ranges separated by spaces are allowed Required if all is not specified all When used with lt source gt specifies that all lines in the source file should be excluded When used with inst lt path gt specifies that all lines in the instance and all instances contained within the specified instance should be excluded Required if a line number or range is not specified or if a row number or range is not specified with c or e E Implies a condition truth table from which lines or rows will be excluded Required for excluding rows from a condition truth table 6 Implies an expression truth table from which lines or rows will be excluded Required for excluding rows from an expression truth table ModelS
399. point files are platform dependent you cannot checkpoint on one platform and restore on another checkpoint lt filename gt lt filename gt Specifies the name of the checkpoint file Required restore CR 250 restart CR 248 vsim CR 375 The difference between checkpoint restore and restart UM 87 ModelSim SE Command Reference compare add CR 95 compare add Syntax The compare add command creates an object that is a comparison between signals in a reference design against signals in a test design You can specify whether to compare two signals all signals in the region or just ports or a subset of ports Constant signals such as parameters and generics are ignored See Waveform Compare UM 271 for a general overview of waveform comparisons The names of the added comparison objects take the form lt path gt refSignalName lt gt testSignalName If you compare two signals from different regions the signal names include the uncommon part of the path The table below shows how comparisons work between specified reference objects and test objects Reference Test object Result object signal signal compare the two signals signal region compare a signal with a name matching the reference signal in the specified test region region region compare all matching signals in both regions glob expression signal legal only if the glob expression selects only one signal glob expression
400. pression evaluates to true Optional The default value for normal synchronous gating is zero If gateduration is set to a non zero value a simulation value will be displayed after the gate expression becomes false if you don t want the values displayed set gateduration to zero gateexpr lt expression gt Specifies the expression for trigger gating Optional Use the usegating argument to enable trigger gating The expression is evaluated when the List window would normally have displayed a row of data See the GUI_expression_format CR 22 for information on expression syntax usegating lt value gt Enables triggers to be gated on a value of 1 or off a value of 0 by an overriding expression Default is off Optional Use the gatexpr argument to specify the expression See Using gating expressions to control triggering UM 267 for additional information on using gating with triggers strobeperiod lt period gt Specifies the period of the list strobe When using a time unit the time value and unit must be placed in curly braces Optional strobestart lt start_time gt Specifies the start time of the list strobe When using a time unit the time value and unit must be placed in curly braces Optional usesignaltriggers lt value gt If 1 uses signals as triggers if 0 not Optional usestrobe lt value gt If 1 uses the strobe to trigger if 0 not Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference
401. previous edge in Wave window CR 191 CR 252 Verilog libraries UM 117 UM 207 Wave window signal values edges and names CR 191 CR 252 GR 239 searchlog command CR 264 seetime command CR 266 sensitivity list warning UM 554 setenv command CR 267 setuphold UM 150 severity changing level for errors UM 548 shared library building in SystemC UM 172 GR 29 shared objects loading FLI applications see ModelSim FLI Reference manual loading PLI VPI C applications UM 570 loading PLI VPI C applications UM 577 loading with global symbol visibility CR 378 UM 584 shift command CR 268 Shortcuts text editing UM 607 shortcuts command history CR 19 UM 605 command line caveat CR 18 UM 605 List window UM 610 Main window UM 607 Source window UM 607 Wave window UM 611 show command CR 269 show drivers Dataflow window UM 303 Wave window UM 270 show source lines with errors GR 57 GR 66 Show_BadOptionWarning ini file variable UM 528 Show_Lint ini file variable VLOG UM 528 UM 529 Show_source ini file variable VCOM UM 530 Show_source ini file variable VLOG UM 528 Show_VitalChecks Warning ini file variable UM 530 Show_Warning1 ini file variable UM 530 Show_Warning 2 ini file variable UM 530 Show_Warning3 ini file variable UM 530 Show_Warning 4 ini file variable UM 530 Show_Warning5 ini file variable UM 530 Signal Breakpoints dialog GR 103 signal interaction Verilog and SystemC UM 196 Signal Spy UM 97 UM 424 overview UM 420
402. primaryonly signals secondaryonly lt startNum gt lt endNum gt summary write lt filename gt all Lists all differences even those marked as ignore in the output Optional By default ignored differences are not listed in the output of a compare info command count Returns the total number of primary differences found primaryonly Lists only differences on individual bits ignoring aggregate values such as a bus Optional signals Returns a Tcl list of compare signal names that have at least one difference secondaryonly Lists only aggregate value differences such as a bus ignoring the individual bits lt startNum gt lt endNum gt Specifies the difference numbers to start and end the list with Optional If omitted ModelSim starts the listing with the first difference and ends it with the last If just endNum is omitted ModelSim ends the listing with the last difference summary Lists only summary information Optional write lt filename gt Saves the summary information to lt filename gt rather than the Main window transcript Optional compare info Lists all errors in the Main window transcript compare info summary Lists only an error summary in the Main window transcript compare info write myerrorfile 20 50 Writes errors 20 through 50 to the file myerrorfile compare add CR 95 compare annotate CR 99 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 1
403. property wave command CR 237 Protect ini file variable VLOG UM 528 protect compiler directive UM 155 protected types UM 101 PSL assume directives UM 365 endpoint directives UM 400 standard supported UM 30 PSL assertions UM 361 see also assertions pulse error state CR 390 push command CR 239 pwd command CR 240 Q quick reference table of ModelSim tasks UM 23 QuickSim II logfile format CR 415 Quiet ini file variable VCOM UM 529 Quiet ini file variable VLOG UM 528 quietly command CR 241 quit command CR 242 R race condition problems with event order UM 132 radix changing in Objects Locals Dataflow List and Wave windows CR 243 character strings displaying CR 356 default DefaultRadix variable UM 533 List window UM 260 of signals being examined CR 165 of signals in Wave window CR 55 specifying in Memory window GR 189 Wave window UM 255 radix command CR 243 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ range checking UM 74 disabling CR 317 enabling CR 318 reactive testbenches PSL endpoints UM 400 readers and drivers UM 303 readers command CR 244 real type converting to time UM 99 rebuilding supplied libraries UM 65 reconstruct RTL level design busses UM 234 record command CR 245 record field selection syntax CR 13 records values of changing GR 173 recovery UM 150 redirecting messages TranscriptFile UM 536 reference region UM 276 refreshing library images CR 318 CR 367 UM 66 registered function c
404. pt lt filename gt Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the name of the output file where the data is to be written Optional If the lt filename gt is omitted the transcript is written to a file named transcript See also do CR 153 ModelSim SE Command Reference write tssi Syntax Arguments Description write tssi CR 431 The write tssi command records the contents of the default or specified List window in a TSSI format file The file contains simulation data for all HDL objects displayed in the List window that can be converted to TSSI format VHDL signals and Verilog nets A signal definition file is also generated The List window needs to be using symbolic radix in order for write tssi to produce useful output write tssi window lt wname gt lt filename gt window lt wname gt Specifies an instance of the List window that is not the default Optional Otherwise the default List window is used Use the view command CR 334 to change the default window lt filename gt Specifies the name of the output file where the data is to be written Required TSSI format is documented in the Fluence TDS Software System Chapter 2 of Volume I Getting Started R11 1 dated November 15 1999 In that document TSSI format is called Standard Events Format SEF If the lt filename gt has a file extension e g listfile lst then the definition file is given the same file name with the extension def
405. ptional lt node_name gt Disables checking for the named node s Required check contention add command CR 85 check contention config command CR 87 ModelSim SE Command Reference check float add CR 89 check float add Syntax Arguments Description See also The check float add command enables float checking for the specified nodes The allowed nodes are Verilog nets and VHDL signals of type std_logic and std_logic_vector other types are silently ignored You can set a time limit the default is zero for float checking using the time lt limit gt argument to the check float config command CR 90 If you choose to modify the limit you should do so prior to invoking any check float add commands check float add r in out inout internal ports lt node_name gt r Specifies that float checking is enabled recursively into subregions Optional If omitted float check enabling is limited to the current region i Enables checking on nodes of mode IN Optional out Enables checking on nodes of mode OUT Optional inout Enables checking on nodes of mode INOUT Optional internal Enables checking on internal non port objects Optional ports Enables checking on nodes of modes IN OUT or INOUT Optional lt node_name gt Enables checking for the named node s Required Bus float checking detects nodes that are in the high impedance state for a time equal to or exceeding
406. ptional noannotate Removes source code from the output report Optional package lt pkgname gt Prints a report on the specified VHDL package body Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference coverage report CR 135 recursive Reports on the instance specified with instance and every included instance recursively Can also be used with lines and totals but cannot be used with zeros Optional select beces tx Specifies which coverage statistics to include in the report Optional By default the report includes statistics for all categories you enabled at compile time The characters are as follows b Include branch statistics c Include condition statistics e Include expression statistics s Include statement statistics t Include toggle statistics Valid only when reporting on instances not files x Include extended toggle statistics Valid only when reporting on instances not files setdefault byfile byinstance bydu Sets the coverage report default mode for the current invocation of ModelSim Report modes are by file default by instance and by design unit Optional source lt filename gt Writes a summary of statement coverage data for a specific source file Optional Environment variables may be used in the pathname totals Writes out a top level summary of the number of files statements branches conditions expressions and signal toggles for both file based and instance based views of the curr
407. quotes when specifying a string value Multiple g options are allowed one for each generic parameter Name may be prefixed with a relative or absolute hierarchical path to select generics in an instance specific manner For example Specifying g top ul tpd 20ns on the command line would affect only the tpd generic on the top ul instance assigning it a value of 20ns Specifying gu 1 tpd 20ns affects the tpd generic on all instances named uw Specifying gtpd 20ns affects all generics named tpd ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 378 vsim If more than one g option selects a given generic the most explicit specification takes precedence For example vsim g top ram ul tpd_hl 10ns gtpd_hl 15ns top This command sets tpd_hl to 10ns for the top ram u instance However all other tpd_hl generics on other instances will be set to 15ns Limitation In general generics parameters of composite type arrays and records cannot be set from the command line However you can set string arrays std_logic vectors and bit vectors if they can be set using a quoted string For example gstrgen This is a string gsilv 01001110 The quotation marks must make it into vsim as part of the string because the type of the value must be determinable outside of any context Therefore when entering this command from a shell put a forward tick around the string For example gstrgen This is a string If working within the ModelSi
408. r 15 Functional coverage with PSL and ModelSim ModelSim SE Command Reference fcover configure CR 171 fcover configure Syntax Arguments The fcover configure command enables disables and sets coverage targets for PSL functional coverage directives If you invoke it without any optional arguments the command reports the current settings for the specified directive s fcover configure at_least lt count gt lt coverage_directive gt disable enable exclude include log on off recursive weight lt integer gt at_least lt count gt Specifies a target count for the selected coverage point s The lt count gt value must be a positive integer value A directive is considered 100 covered when the AtLeast count is reached Optional The default value is 1 You can change the permanent default by editing the CoverAtLeast UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file lt coverage_directive gt Identifies the functional coverage directive s to which the configuration parameters should be applied Multiple directives may be specified Wildcards are allowed Required disable Disables incrementing on the specified directive s Optional Disabled directives still count toward overall coverage if they had coverage events prior to being disabled You can change the permanent default by editing the CoverEnable UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file enable Enables incrementing on the specified directive s
409. r changing pathname CR 163 error can t locate C compiler UM 553 Error ini file variable UM 538 errors bad magic number UM 227 getting details about messages CR 331 getting more information UM 548 libswift entry not found UM 557 multiple definition UM 186 onerror command CR 218 out of line function UM 186 SDF disabling CR 382 SystemC loading UM 184 Tcl_init error UM 554 void function UM 186 VSIM license lost UM 557 errors changing severity of UM 548 escape character CR 15 event order changing in Verilog CR 360 in optimized designs UM 128 in Verilog simulation UM 132 event queues UM 132 event watching commands placement of UM 489 events tracing UM 306 examine command CR 164 examine tooltip toggling on off GR 262 exclusion filter files UM 349 excluding udp truth table rows UM 350 exclusions lines and files UM 348 exit codes UM 551 exit command CR 168 expand net UM 303 Explicit ini file variable UM 529 export TFs in DPI UM 553 Exporting SystemC modules to Verilog UM 214 exporting SystemC modules to VHDL UM 224 exporting top SystemC module UM 165 Expression Builder UM 253 configuring a List trigger with UM 267 saving expressions to Tcl variable UM 253 extended identifiers CR 16 in mixed designs UM 203 UM 223 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ F f CR 362 F8 function key UM 609 fast CR 362 fcover clear command CR 169 fcover comment command CR 170 fcover configure command CR 171 fcover reload command CR 173 f
410. r made during or subsequent to this Agreement including those based partly or wholly on your feedback will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics Mentor Graphics will have exclusive rights title and interest in all such property The provisions of this subsection shall survive termination or expiration of this Agreement RESTRICTIONS ON USE You may copy Software only as reasonably necessary to support the authorized use Each copy must include all notices and legends embedded in Software and affixed to its medium and container as received from Mentor Graphics All copies shall remain the property of Mentor Graphics or its licensors You shall maintain a record of the number and primary location of all copies of Software including copies merged with other software and shall make those records available to Mentor Graphics upon request You shall not make Software available in any form to any person other than employees and contractors excluding Mentor Graphics competitors whose job performance requires access You shall take appropriate action to protect the confidentiality of Software and ensure that any person permitted access to Software does not disclose it or use it except as permitted by this Agreement Except as otherwise permitted for purposes of interoperability as specified by applicable and mandatory local law you shall not reverse assemble reverse compile reverse engineer or in any way derive from Software any source code You
411. r more properties of the specified signal net or register in the List window The properties correspond to those you can set by selecting View gt Signal Properties List window At least one argument must be used property list window lt wname gt label lt label gt radix lt radix gt trigger lt setting gt width lt number gt lt pattern gt window lt wname gt Specifies a particular List window when multiple instances of the window exist e g list2 Optional If no window is specified the default window is used the default window is determined by the most recent invocation of the view command CR 334 label lt label gt Specifies the label to appear at the top of the List window column Optional radix lt radix gt Specifies the radix for List window objects Optional Valid entries or any unique abbreviations are binary ascii unsigned decimal octal hex symbolic and default If no radix is specified for an enumerated type the default representation is used You can change the default radix for the current simulation using the radix command CR 243 You can change the default radix permanently by editing the DefaultRadix UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file If you specify a radix for an array of a VHDL enumerated type ModelSim converts each signal value to 1 0 Z or X trigger lt setting gt Valid settings are 0 or 1 Setting trigger to 1 will enable the List window to be triggere
412. r of simulation units or as lt num gt lt timeUnit gt where lt num gt can be integer or with a decimal point and lt timeUnit gt is one of the standard VHDL time units fs ps ns us ms sec lt pattern gt Specifies one or more signal names or wildcard patterns of signal names to search on Required unless the expr argument is used See also virtual signal CR 353 virtual log CR 345 virtual nolog CR 348 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 266 seetime seetime The seetime command scrolls the List or Wave window to make the specified time visible For the List window a delta can be optionally specified as well Returns nothing Syntax seetime list wave window lt wname gt select delta lt num gt lt time gt Arguments list wave Specifies the target window type Required window lt wname gt Specifies an instance of the Wave or List window that is not the default Optional Otherwise the default Wave or List window is used Use the view command CR 334 to change the default window select Also moves the active cursor or marker to the specified time and optionally delta Optional Otherwise the window is only scrolled delta lt num gt For the List window when deltas are not collapsed this option specifies a delta Optional Otherwise delta 0 is selected lt time gt Specifies the time to be made visible Required ModelSim SE Command Reference setenv CR 267 seten
413. r related functionality The procedure for using left entails three steps click on the desired waveform click on the desired starting location issue the left command The seetime command CR 266 can initially position the cursor from the command line if desired Returns lt number_found gt lt new_time gt lt new_delta gt left expr lt expression gt falling noglitch rising value lt sig_value gt window lt wname gt lt n gt expr lt expression gt The waveform display will be searched until the expression evaluates to a boolean true condition Optional The expression may involve more than one signal but is limited to signals that have been logged in the referenced Wave window A signal may be specified either by its full path or by the shortcut label displayed in the Wave window See GUI _expression_format CR 22 for the format of the expression The expression must be placed within curly braces falling Searches for a falling edge on the specified signal if that signal is a scalar signal If it is not a scalar signal the option will be ignored Optional noglitch Looks at signal values only on the last delta of a time step For use with the value option only Optional rising Searches for a rising edge on the specified signal if that signal is a scalar signal If it is not a scalar signal the option will be ignored Optional value lt sig_value gt Specifies a value of the signal
414. r simulator control variables ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 18 Syntax and conventions Simulation time units You can specify the time unit for delays in all simulator commands that have time arguments For example force clk 1 50 ns 1 100 ns repeat 1 us run 2 ms Note that all the time units in a ModelSim command need not be the same Unless you specify otherwise as in the examples above simulation time is always expressed using the resolution units that are specified by the UserTimeUnit variable See UserTimeUnit UM 536 By default the specified time units are assumed to be relative to the current time unless the value is preceded by the character which signifies an absolute time specification Comments in argument files Argument files may be loaded with the f lt filename gt argument of the vcom vlog sccom and vsim commands The f lt filename gt argument specifies a file that contains more command line arguments Comments within the argument files follow these rules e All text in a line beginning with to its end is treated as a comment e All text bracketed by is treated as a comment Also program arguments can be placed on separate lines in the argument file with the newline characters treated as space characters There is no need to put at the end of each line Command shortcuts e You may abbreviate command syntax but there s a catch the minimum number of characters requi
415. racters CR 17 ModelSim SE Command Reference describe Syntax Arguments Examples describe CR 149 The describe command displays information about the specified HDL object C variable or design region The description is displayed in the Transcript pane The following kinds of objects can be described Design region VHDL signals variables and constants Verilog nets and registers eC variables SystemC signals ports FIFOs and member variables of modules VHDL signals Verilog nets and registers and SystemC signals and ports may be specified as hierarchical names C variables can be described if you are running C Debug UM 401 and the variables are local to the active call frame for the line in the function in the C source file where you are stopped For specific information related to viewing SystemC objects see SystemC object and type display in ModelSim UM 180 describe lt name gt lt name gt The name of an HDL object SystemC signal or C variable for which you want a description HDL object names can be full hierarchical names or relative names describe x Prints the type of C variable x describe p Prints the type of what p points to describe clk prw prdy Prints the types of the three specified signals ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 150 disablebp disablebp The disablebp command turns off breakpoints and when commands To turn the breakpoints or when statements back
416. ranscribe command CR 287 Transcribe will also echo the results to the Transcript pane Required Disable NoDisable If Disable the button will be grayed out during a run and not active If NoDisable the button will continue to be active during a run Optional The default is Disable lt option gt lt value gt A list of option value pairs that will be applied to the button widget Optional Any properties belonging to Tk button widgets may be set Useful options are foreground color fg background color bg width width and relief relief For a complete list of available options use the configure command addressed to the newly created widget For example dockbar tbf0 standard tb button_51 config gt Note Because the arguments are positional a Disable NoDisable option must be specified in order to use the options argument ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 46 add button Examples add button pwd transcribe pwd NoDisable Creates a button labeled pwd that invokes the transcribe command CR 287 with the pwd Tcl command and echoes the command and its results to the Transcript pane see graphic below The button remains active during a run yj Modelsim File Edit View Format Compile Simulate Add Tools Window Help Library oft vital2000 Library MODEL_TECH vi jeee Library MODEL_TECH ie Biri modelsim_lib Library MODEL_TECH m EY std Library MODEL_TECHY st ASH std develov
417. rches up for an expression that evaluates to a boolean 1 when the upper 8 bits of the 32 bit signal top u3 addr equals hex ac up expr NOW gt 23 us amp amp NOW lt 54 us amp amp clk rising amp amp mode writing Searches up for an expression that evaluates to a boolean 1 when logfile time is between 23 and 54 microseconds clock just changed from low to high and signal mode is enumeration writing GUI_expression_format CR 22 view CR 334 seetime CR 266 down CR 154 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 294 vcd add vcd add The ved add command adds the specified objects to a VCD file The allowed objects are Verilog nets and variables and VHDL signals of type bit bit_vector std_logic and std_logic_vector other types are silently ignored All ved add commands must be executed at the same simulation time The specified objects are added to the VCD header and their subsequent value changes are recorded in the specified VCD file By default all port driver changes and internal variable changes are captured in the file You can filter the output using arguments detailed below Related Verilog tasks dumpvars fdumpvars Syntax vcd add r in out inout internal ports file lt filename gt lt object_name gt Arguments Specifies that signal and port selection occurs recursively into subregions Optional If omitted included signals and ports are limited to the current re
418. reating a design library UM 73 delay file opening UM 541 dependency checking UM 73 field naming syntax CR 13 file opening delay UM 541 foreign language interface UM 100 hardware model interface UM 630 instantiation criteria in SystemC design UM 217 instantiation from Verilog UM 207 instantiation of Verilog UM 193 language templates GR 207 language versions UM 75 library clause UM 64 mixed designs with SystemC UM 188 mixed designs with Verilog UM 188 object support in PLI UM 593 Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ optimizations inlining UM 74 port direction UM 201 port type mapping UM 200 sc_signal data type mapping UM 200 simulating UM 78 SmartModel interface UM 620 source code viewing GR 205 standards UM 30 timing check disabling UM 78 VITAL package UM 65 VHDL utilities UM 96 UM 97 UM 424 UM 434 get_resolution UM 96 to_real UM 98 to_time UM 99 VHDL 1987 compilation problems UM 75 VHDL 1993 enabling support for CR 313 UM 530 VHDL 2002 enabling support for CR 313 UM 530 VHDL93 ini file variable UM 530 view command CR 334 view_profile command UM 324 viewing library contents UM 61 waveforms CR 384 UM 225 viewing FIFOs UM 181 virtual count commands CR 336 virtual define command CR 337 virtual delete command CR 338 virtual describe command CR 339 virtual expand commands CR 340 virtual function command CR 341 virtual functions in SystemC UM 175 virtual hide command CR 344 UM 234 virtual log command CR 345 virtu
419. red to execute a command are those that make it unique Remember as we add new commands some of the old shortcuts may not work For this reason ModelSim does not allow command name abbreviations in macro files This minimizes your need to update macro files as new commands are added e Multiple commands may be entered on one line if they are separated by semi colons For example ModelSim gt vlog nodebug ports level3 v level2 v vlog nodebug top v The return value of the last function executed is the only one printed to the transcript This may cause some unexpected behavior in certain circumstances Consider this example vsim c do run 20 simstats quit f top You probably expect the simstats results to display in the Transcript window but they will not because the last command is quit f To see the return values of intermediate commands you must explicitly print the results For example vsim do run 20 echo simstats quit f c top ModelSim SE Command Reference Command shortcuts CR 19 Command history shortcuts The simulator command history may be reviewed or commands may be reused with these shortcuts at the ModelSim VSIM prompt Shortcut Description repeats the last command repeats command number n n is the VSIM prompt number e g for this prompt VSIM 12 gt n 12 abc repeats the most recent command starting with abc xyz ab replaces xyz in the last comma
420. reporting on a code coverage database Optional details Includes details associated with each cover directive e g count in the output Not a valid option when reporting on a code coverage database Optional Default instance lt pathname gt Writes out the source file summary coverage data for the selected instance Optional lines Writes out the source file summary data and after each file it writes out the details for each executable line in the file Not a valid option when reporting on a functional coverage database Optional noaggregated Excludes aggregated statistics from the output The statistics are included by default Not a valid option when reporting on a code coverage database Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference vcover report CR 325 nocomment Excludes comments from the report Not a valid option when reporting on a code coverage database Optional Default nodetails Excludes details associated with each cover directive e g count from the output Details are included by default Not a valid option when reporting on a code coverage database Optional package lt pkgname gt Creates a report on the specified VHDL package body Needs to be of the form lt lib gt lt pkg gt Not a valid option when reporting on a functional coverage database Optional recursive Reports on the instance specified with instance and every included instance recursively Can also be used with lines and totals
421. resentatives of the parties Waiver of terms or excuse of breach must be in writing and shall not constitute subsequent consent waiver or excuse The prevailing party in any legal action regarding the subject matter of this Agreement shall be entitled to recover in addition to other relief reasonable attorneys fees and expenses Rev 040401 Part Number 221417 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 440 License Agreement ModelSim SE Command Reference ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ Index CR Command Reference UM User s Manual GR GUI Reference Symbols comment character UM 478 acc option design object visibility UM 126 typdelays CR 367 So Shared object file loading PLI VPI C applications UM 570 loading PLI VPI C applications UM 577 CR 15 hasX hasX CR 24 Numerics 1076 IEEE Std UM 30 differences between versions UM 75 1364 IEEE Std UM 30 UM 113 2001 keywords disabling CR 368 64 bit libraries UM 66 64 bit ModelSim using with 32 bit FLI apps UM 601 64 bit time now variable UM 545 Tcl time commands UM 483 A acc option design object visibility UM 126 abort command CR 44 absolute time using CR 18 ACC routines UM 594 accelerated packages UM 65 access hierarchical objects UM 419 limitations in mixed designs UM 190 Active Processes pane GR 114 see also windows Active Processes pane add button command CR 45 Add file to Project dialog GR 49 Add Folder dialog GR 52 add list command CR 48 ad
422. restart Prevents the simulator from unloading reloading any FLI PLI VPI shared libraries during a restart Optional The shared libraries will remain loaded at their current ModelSim SE Command Reference vsim CR 379 positions User application code in the shared libraries must reset its internal state during a restart in order for this to work effectively We recommend using this option if you ll be doing warm restores after a restart and the user application code has set callbacks in the simulator Otherwise the callback function pointers might not be valid if the shared library is loaded into a new position keepstdout For use with foreign programs Instructs the simulator to not redirect the stdout stream to the Main window Optional 1 lt filename gt Saves the contents of the Transcript pane to lt filename gt Optional Default is taken from the TranscriptFile UM 536 variable initially set to transcript in the modelsim ini lib lt libname gt Specifies the default working library where vsim will look for the design unit s Optional Default is work lt license_option gt Restricts the search of the license manager Optional Use one of the following options lt license_option gt Description lic_nomge exclude any MGC licenses from the search lic_nomti exclude any MTI licenses from the search lic_noqueue do not wait in queue when license is unavailable lic_plus checks out ModelSi
423. ribed GR 15 Design Optimization dialog GR 75 design portability and SystemC UM 168 design units UM 58 report of units simulated CR 428 Verilog adding to a library CR 360 details Index ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ code coverage GR 129 dialogs GR 54 Add file to Project GR 49 Add Folder GR 52 C Debug setup GR 105 Change Memory GR 185 Change Selected Variable GR 173 Combine Selected Signals GR 167 Compare Memory GR 187 Compile Order GR 74 Compiler Options GR 65 Configure cover directives GR 155 Coverage Report GR 95 Create a New Library GR 43 Create Project GR 42 Create Project File GR 48 Customize Toolbar GR 112 Dataflow Options GR 146 Dataflow Page Setup GR 144 Define Clock GR 194 Design Optimization GR 75 File Breakpoint GR 104 Filter instance list GR 98 Find in Assertions GR 119 Find in dataflow GR 145 Find in FCovers GR 154 Find in List GR 162 Find in Locals GR 174 Find in memory GR 188 Find in Process GR 115 Force Selected Signal GR 192 Functional coverage filter GR 157 Functional coverage reload GR 151 Functional coverage report GR 152 List Signal Properties GR 165 List Signal Search GR 163 Load Coverage Data GR 94 Macro GR 108 Modify Breakpoints GR 101 Modify Display Properties GR 168 Optimization Configuration GR 50 Preferences GR 110 Print GR 141 Print Postscript GR 143 Profile Report GR 99 GR 203 Project Compiler Settings GR 55 Project Settings GR 62 Properties memory GR 189 R
424. rning lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt wlf lt filename gt wlfcollapsedelta wlfcollapsetime wlfcompress wlfopt wlfnocollapse wlfnocompress wlfnoopt wlfslim lt size gt wlftlim lt duration gt absentisempty foreign lt attribute gt nocollapse nofileshare noglitch no_glitch_msg std_input lt filename gt std_output lt filename gt strictvital vcdread lt filename gt vital2 2b talt_path_delays delayed_timing_checks dpiexportobj lt objfile gt extend_tcheck_data_limit lt percent gt extend_tcheck_ref_limit lt percent gt hazards int_delays L lt library_name gt Lf lt library_name gt saal tmaxdelays mindelays no_cancelled_e_msg no_neg_tchk t no_notifier tno_path_edge no_pulse_msg no_risefall_delaynets no_show_cancelled_e no_tchk_msg nosdferror nosdfwarn tnospecify nowarn lt CODE gt ntc_warn pli lt object list gt lt plusarg gt pulse_e lt percent gt pulse_e_style_ondetect ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 376 vsim pulse_e_style_onevent pulse_r lt percent gt sdf_nocheck_celltype show_cancelled_e sv_lib lt shared_obj gt sv_liblist lt filename gt sv_root lt dirname gt transport_path_delays typdelays v2k_int_delays sclib sc_arg lt string gt lt library_name gt lt design_unit gt VSIM arguments are grouped by language e Arguments
425. rts the specified file to the current ModelSim format Optional install lt path gt Adds lt path gt as additional hierarchy on the front end of instance and object names in the input file Optional This argument allows you to create a new coverage file with a different level of hierarchy strip lt n gt Removes lt n gt levels of hierarchy from the front of the instance and object path names in the data files Optional This argument allows you to create a new coverage file with a different level of hierarchy log lt filename gt Specifies the file for outputting progress messages Optional By default these messages are output to vcover log lt out file gt Specifies the name of the new file you want to output Required lt file gt Specifies the file you want to convert Required vcover merge command CR 322 vcover stats command CR 327 Chapter 13 Measuring code coverage ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 322 vcover merge vcover merge The vcover merge command merges multiple code or functional coverage data files that were created with the coverage save command CR 137 or the feover save command CR 177 respectively The command adjusts its functionality to the type of coverage files functional coverage or code coverage given on its command line The command can be invoked within the ModelSim GUI or at the system prompt A Important Code coverage databases and functional coverage databases are not int
426. s below for further information e If an instance is not Level 1 optimized you cannot set values for individual TCPs You can set values only for the entire instance tcheck_status reports ALL for instances that aren t Level 1 optimized See Examples below for further information tcheck_set lt instance gt quiet gt r lt tcheck gt lt Stat gt lt MsgStat gt lt XStat gt lt instance gt Specifies the instance for which you want to change the reporting or X generation status Required quiet Suppresses printing the new setting to the Transcript pane Optional Attempts to change all checks on this instance and instances below this instance Optional lt tcheck gt Specifies a specific timing check to change Optional If you don t specify lt tcheck gt or r or you specify ALL for lt tcheck gt ModelSim attempts to apply the change to all timing checks in the instance You can specify either the integer that is assigned to each timing check and reported via tcheck_status or the actual timing check name enclosed in double quotes see Examples below Note that the integer number may change between library compiles ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 278 tcheck_set Examples See also lt Stat gt Enables disables both X generation and violation message reporting for the specified timing check s Optional Specify either ON enable or OFF disable lt MsgStat gt Enables disables viola
427. s ModelSim to ignore the input edge specified in a path delay Optional The result of this argument is that all edges on the input are considered when selecting the output delay Verilog XL always ignores the input edges on path delays no_pulse_msg Disables the warning message for specify path pulse errors Optional A path pulse error occurs when a pulse propagated through a path delay falls between the pulse rejection limit and pulse error limit set with the pulse_r and pulse_e options A path pulse error results in a warning message and the pulse is propagated as an X The no_pulse_msg option disables the warning message but the X is still propagated ModelSim SE Command Reference vsim CR 389 no_risefall_delaynets Disables the rise fall delay net delay negative timing check algorithm Optional This argument is provided to return ModelSim to its pre 6 0 behavior where violation regions must overlap in order to find a delay net solution In 6 0 versions and later ModelSim uses separate rise fall delays so violation regions need not overlap for a delay solution to be found no_show_cancelled_e Filters negative pulses on specify path delays so they don t show on the output Default Use show_cancelled_e to drive a pulse error state no_tchk_msg Disables error messages issued by timing check system tasks when timing check violations occur Optional Notifier registers are still toggled and may result in the propagation of Xs f
428. s control to the calling function Optional next Causes the simulator to run to the next event time Optional step Steps the simulator to the next HDL statement Optional 0ver Specifies that VHDL procedures functions and Verilog tasks are to be executed but treated as simple statements instead of entered and traced line by line Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference run CR 255 Examples run 1000 Advances the simulator 1000 timesteps run 10 4 ms Advances the simulator the appropriate number of timesteps corresponding to 10 4 milliseconds run 8000 Advances the simulator to timestep 8000 See also step CR 274 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 256 sccom sccom Compile syntax Link syntax Arguments The sccom command is actually two commands in one sccom interacts with a C C compiler to compile SystemC source code into the work library and sccom link takes the compiled source code and links the design This command may be invoked from within ModelSim or from the operating system command prompt This command may also be invoked during simulation Compiled libraries are platform dependent If you move between platforms you need to run vdel allsysteme on the working library and then recompile your SystemC source Compiled libraries are version dependent For example you cannot use a library compiled with 5 8 in a simulation using 5 8a vsim You have to re compile your design with the update
429. s down for an expression that evaluates to a boolean when object clk just changed from low to high and object mystate is the enumeration reading and object top u3 addr is equal to the specified 32 bit hex constant down expr top u3 addr and 32 hff 000000 32 hac000000 Searches down for an expression that evaluates to a boolean when the upper 8 bits of the 32 bit object top u3 addr equals hex ac down expr NOW gt 23 us amp amp NOW lt 54 us amp amp clk rising amp amp mode writing Searches down for an expression that evaluates to a boolean when logfile time is between 23 and 54 microseconds clock just changed from low to high and object mode is enumeration writing GUI_expression_format CR 22 view CR 334 seetime CR 266 up CR 292 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 156 drivers drivers Syntax Arguments See also The drivers command displays the names of all drivers of the specified object The driver list is expressed relative to the top most design signal net connected to the specified object If the object is a record or array each subelement is displayed individually drivers lt object_name gt lt object_name gt Specifies the name of the signal or net whose drivers are to be shown Required All signal or net types are valid Multiple names and wildcards are accepted readers CR 244 command ModelSim SE Command Reference dumplog64 Syntax Arguments
430. s messages Optional vdel all Deletes the work library vdel lib synopsys all Deletes the synopsys library vdel xor Deletes the entity named xor and all its architectures from the work library vdel xor behavior Deletes the architecture named behavior of the entity xor from the work library vdel base Deletes the package named base from the work library ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 330 vdir vdir The vdir command lists the contents of a design library This command can also be used to check compatibility of a vendor library If vdir cannot read a vendor supplied library the library may not be ModelSim compatible SystemC modules are listed with this command Syntax vdir help 1 r all lib lt library_name gt lt design_unit gt Arguments help Displays the command s options and arguments Optional 1 Prints the version of vecom vlog or sccom with which each design unit was compiled Also prints the object code version number that indicates which versions of vcom vlog secom and ModelSim are compatible This example was printed by vdir l for the counter module in the work library Library Vendor Model Technology MODULE ram_tb Verilog Version DPV 432Jc Q 7 lt 3 gt lt C OKO Version number CRW2 lt UhheaW LIL2_B5031 Source modified time 1064511064 Source file ram_tb v Opcode format 5 8 Beta 2 VLOG SE Object version 172 Optimized Verilog design root 1 Language st
431. s radix of the data specified by filldata option Valid entries or any unique abbreviations are binary decimal unsigned octal hex symbolic and default skip lt Nwords gt Specifies the number of words to be skipped between each fill pattern value lt Nwords gt is specified as an unsigned integer Optional Used with filltype and filldata truncate Ignores any most significant bits msb in a memory word which exceed the memory word size By default when memory word size is exceeded an error results Optional startaddress lt st gt Specifies the start address for a range of addresses to be loaded The lt st gt can be specified as any valid address in the memory Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See also lt path gt mem load CR 203 The hierarchical path to the memory instance If the memory instance name is unique shorthand instance names can be used Optional The default is the current context as shown in the Structure tab of the Workspace pane Memory address indexes can be specified in the instance name also If addresses are specified both in the instance name and the file only the intersection of the two address ranges is populated with memory data mem load infile vals mem format bin filltype value filldata 1 b0 top m mem Loads the memory pattern from the file vals mem to the memory instance top m mem filling the rest of the memory with the fixed value 1 b0 When you
432. s the Transcript pane The behavior is the same as selecting Edit gt Clear when the Transcript pane is active main clear None Main window GR 17 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 44 abort abort Syntax Arguments See also The abort command halts the execution of a macro file interrupted by a breakpoint or error When macros are nested you may choose to abort the last macro only abort a specified number of nesting levels or abort all macros The abort command may be used within a macro to return early abort lt n gt all lt n gt all An integer giving the number of nested macro levels to abort all aborts all levels Optional Default is 1 onbreak CR 216 onElabError CR 217 onerror CR 218 ModelSim SE Command Reference add button Syntax Arguments add button CR 45 The add button command adds a user defined button to the Main window button bar New buttons are added to the right end of the bar You can also add buttons via the GUI see Customize Toolbar dialog GR 112 Returns the path name of the button widget created add button lt Text gt lt Cmd gt Disable NoDisable lt option gt lt value gt lt Text gt The label to appear on the face of the button Required lt Cmd gt The command to be executed when the button is clicked with the left mouse button To echo the command and display the return value in the Main window prefix the command with the t
433. s the speed and delay of macro DO file playback plus the level of debugging feedback If invoked without any options macro_option returns all current settings returns a specific setting if invoked with an option and no argument returns the previous setting if invoked with both an option and an argument macro_option speed fast demo delay lt delay_time gt debug lt level gt speed fast demo Set the macro playback speed to fast or demo Optional delay lt delay_time gt Set the delay time in milliseconds delay is the time between events in demo mode Optional debug lt level gt Set the debug level from 1 to 9 9 giving the most feedback Optional play CR 220 run CR 254 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 198 mem display mem display Syntax Arguments The mem display command prints to the Transcript pane the memory contents of the specified instance As a shorthand if the given instance path contains only a single array signal or variable the signal or variable name need not be specified Address radix data radix and address range for the output can also be specified as well as special output formats You can redirect the output of the mem display command into a file for later use with the mem load command The output file can also be read by the Verilog readmem system tasks if the memory module is a Verilog module and Verilog memory format hex or binary is specified The format settings are
434. s to the screen all occurrences of the pattern 16 Hbeef in uut u0 mem3 Returns 7845 beef 7846 beef 100223 beef mem search p 16 Hbeef d hex replace 16 Hcafe st 7846 end 150000 uut ul mem3 Searches for and prints only the first occurrence of 16 Hbeef in the address range 7845 150000 replacing it with 16 Heafe in uut ul mem3 Returns 7846 cafe mem search p 16 Hbeef r 16 Habe addressadix hex all uut ul mem3 Replaces all occurrences of 16 Hbeef with 16 Habe in uut ul mem3 Returns lea5 2750 lea6 2750 1877 2750 mem search p f Searches for and prints the first occurrence any pattern ending in f mem search p abe cafe uut ul mem3 Searches for and prints the first occurrence of this multiple word pattern ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 208 modelsim modelsim Syntax Arguments See also The modelsim command starts the ModelSim GUI without prompting you to load a design This command is valid only for Windows platforms and may be invoked in one of three ways from the DOS prompt from a ModelSim shortcut from the Windows Start gt Run menu To use modelsim arguments with a shortcut add them to the target line of the shortcut s properties Arguments work on the DOS command line too of course The simulator may be invoked from either the MODELSIM prompt after the GUI starts or from a DO file called by modelsim modelsim do lt macrofile gt proje
435. s viewed in the Wave window comparison objects The delay is not applied to signals specified in compare when expressions ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See also compare start CR 121 testDelay lt delay gt Delays the test dataset relative to the reference dataset Optional If lt delay gt contains a unit it must be enclosed in curly braces Delays are applied to signals specified with the compare add command CR 95 For each signal compared a delayed virtual signal is created with _d appended to the signal name and these are the signals viewed in the Wave window comparison objects The delay is not applied to signals specified in compare when expressions lt reference_dataset gt The dataset to be used as the comparison reference Required lt test_dataset gt The dataset to be tested against the reference Optional If not specified ModelSim uses the current simulation The reference and test datasets may be the same compare start gold Begins a waveform comparison between a dataset named gold and the current simulation Assumes the gold dataset was already opened dataset open gold_typ wlf gold dataset open bad_typ wlf test compare start maxtotal 5000 maxsignal 1000 gold test This command sequence opens two datasets and starts a comparison between the two using greater than default limits for total differences encountered compare add CR 95 compare options CR 109 compare stop CR 122 Wav
436. s with SystemC UM 188 mixed designs with VHDL UM 188 parameter support instantiating SystemC UM 214 parameters UM 193 port direction UM 198 sc_signal data type mapping UM 197 SDF annotation UM 446 sdf_annotate system task UM 446 simulating UM 129 delay modes UM 144 XL compatible options UM 136 simulation hazard detection UM 135 simulation resolution limit UM 129 SmartModel interface UM 627 source code viewing GR 205 standards UM 30 system tasks UM 146 TF routines UM 596 UM 598 to SystemC channel and port type mapping UM 196 XL compatible compiler options UM 119 XL compatible routines UM 600 XL compatible system tasks UM 150 verilog ini file variable UM 527 Verilog 2001 disabling support CR 368 UM 528 Verilog PLI VPI 64 bit support in the PLI UM 601 compiling and linking PLI VPI C applications UM 570 compiling and linking PLI VPI C applications UM 577 debugging PLI VPI code UM 602 PLI callback reason argument UM 588 PLI support for VHDL objects UM 593 registering PLI applications UM 563 registering VPI applications UM 565 specifying the PLI VPI file to load UM 583 Verilog XL compatibility with UM 111 UM 561 Veriuser ini file variable UM 536 UM 564 Veriuser specifying PLI applications UM 564 veriuser c file UM 592 verror command CR 331 version obtaining via Help menu GR 37 obtaining with vsim command CR 383 obtaining with vsim lt info gt commands CR 394 vgencomp command CR 332 VHDL compiling design units UM 73 c
437. search specified with the recursive argument to a certain level of hierarchy lt level gt is an integer greater than or equal to zero For example if you specify depth 1 the command descends only one level in the hierarchy Optional in For use with wildcard searches Specifies that the scope of the search is to include ports of mode IN if they match the object_name specification Optional inout For use with wildcard searches Specifies that the scope of the search is to include ports of mode INOUT if they match the object_name specification Optional internal For use with wildcard searches Specifies that the scope of the search is to include internal objects non port objects if they match the object_name specification VHDL variables are not selected Optional label lt name gt Specifies an alternative signal name to be displayed as a column heading in the listing Optional This alternative name is not valid in a force CR 182 or examine CR 164 command however it can be used in a search command CR 262 with the list option nodelta Specifies that the delta column not be displayed when adding signals to the List window Optional Identical to configure list delta none ModelSim SE Command Reference add list CR 49 notrigger Specifies that objects are to be listed but does not cause the List window to be updated when the objects change value Optional optcells Makes Verilog optimized cell ports visible
438. set open CR 143 dataset save CR 145 ModelSim SE Command Reference dataset clear CR 139 dataset clear The dataset clear command removes all event data from the current simulation WLF file while keeping all currently logged signals logged Subsequent run commands will continue to accumulate data in the WLF file Syntax dataset clear Example add wave run 100000ns dataset clear run 100000ns Clears data in the WLF file from time Ons to 100000ns then logs data into the WLF file from time 100000ns to 200000ns See also WLF files datasets UM 226 log CR 193 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 140 dataset close dataset close The dataset close command closes an active dataset To open a dataset use the dataset open command Syntax dataset close lt logicalname gt all Arguments lt logicalname gt Specifies the logical name of the dataset or alias you wish to close Required if all isn t used all Closes all open datasets including the simulation Optional See also dataset open CR 143 ModelSim SE Command Reference dataset info CR 141 dataset info The dataset info command reports a variety of information about a dataset Syntax dataset info lt option gt lt dataset_name gt Arguments lt option gt Identifies what information you want reported Required Only one option per command is allowed The current options include name Returns the actual name of the da
439. sim ini file enable Turns on failure tracking for the specified assertions Optional Default You can change the permanent default by setting the AssertionFailEnable UM 531 variable in the modelsim ini file limit lt count gt none Sets a limit on the number of times ModelSim responds to an assertion failing Optional By default the limit is set to 1 One of the following values is required lt count gt Specify a whole number none No limit failure tracking remains enabled for the duration of the simulation Once the limit is reached for a particular assertion ModelSim disables failure tracking on that assertion ModelSim continues to respond to others if their limit has not been reached You can change the permanent default by setting the AssertionFailLimit UM 531 variable in the modelsim ini file ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See also assertion fail CR 65 log onloff Specify whether to write a transcript message when an assertion fails This option may be specified multiple times it applies to all paths that follow it in the command line One of the following values is required on Enable transcript logging Default off Disable transcript logging You can change the permanent default by setting the AssertionFailLog UM 531 variable in the modelsim ini file recursive For use with wildcard matching Specifies that the scope of the matching is to descend recursively into subregions Optio
440. sim_trace environment variable UM 523 mti_inhibit_inline attribute UM 74 MTI_SYSTEMC macro UM 168 MTI_TF_LIMIT environment variable UM 524 multiclocked assertions UM 371 multiple document interface UM 274 GR 20 multiple drivers on unresolved signal GR 58 GR 67 Multiple simulations UM 225 multi source interconnect delays CR 380 N n simulator state variable UM 544 name case sensitivity VHDL vs Verilog CR 15 Name field Project tab UM 45 name visibility in Verilog generates UM 123 names modules with the same UM 118 negative pulses driving an error state CR 390 Negative timing setuphold recovery UM 150 negative timing algorithm for calculating delays UM 136 check limits UM 136 extending check limits CR 387 nets Dataflow window displaying in UM 300 GR 134 drivers of displaying CR 156 readers of displaying CR 244 stimulus CR 182 values of displaying in Objects window GR 190 examining CR 164 saving as binary log file UM 226 waveforms viewing GR 217 new features UM 272 next and previous edges finding UM 612 next command CR 209 Nlview widget Symlib format UM 313 no space in time literal GR 58 GR 67 no_risefall_delaynets CR 389 NoCaseStaticError ini file variable UM 529 NoDebug ini file variable VWCOM UM 529 NoDebug ini file variable VLOG UM 528 nodebug argument vcom CR 316 nodebug argument vlog CR 365 noforce command CR 210 NoIndexCheck ini file variable UM 529 nolibcell CR 365 nolog command CR 211
441. specified time lt time gt The time at which the edge to stretch or move occurs Required lt object_name gt The pathname of the waveform on which you are stretching or moving an edge Required ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 404 wave edit Arguments for change_value end lt time gt The end of the section of waveform of which you are changing the value Required start lt time gt The beginning of the section of waveform of which you are changing the value Required lt value gt The new value Must match the type of the lt object_name gt Required lt object_name gt The pathname of the waveform on which you are changing a value Required Arguments for extend extend to by Specify whether you are extending waves to a specific time or by a certain amount of time Required time lt time gt The time to extend waves to or the amount by which to extend the waves Required Arguments for driveType driver freeze deposit driver expectedoutput The type of driver to which you want the specified section of the waveform changed Required end lt time gt The end of the section of waveform of which you are changing the drive type Required start lt time gt The beginning of the section of waveform of which you are changing the drive type Required Arguments for undo and redo lt number gt The number of editing operations to undo or redo If omitted only one editing operation is undon
442. specified nodes transcribe CR 287 displays a command in the Transcript pane then executes the command transcript CR 288 controls echoing of commands executed in a macro file also works at top level in batch mode transcript file CR 289 sets or queries the pathname for the transcript file tssi2mti CR 290 converts a vector file in Fluence Technology formerly TSSI Standard Events Format into a sequence of force CR 182 and run CR 254 commands unsetenv CR 291 deletes an environment variable up CR 292 searches for signal transitions or values in the specified List window vcd add CR 294 adds the specified objects to the VCD file vcd checkpoint CR 295 dumps the current values of all VCD variables to the VCD file vcd comment CR 296 inserts the specified comment in the VCD file ved dumpports CR 297 creates a VCD file that captures port driver data ved dumpportsall CR 299 creates a checkpoint in the VCD file that shows the current values of all selected ports ved dumpportsflush CR 300 flushes the VCD buffer to the VCD file ved dumpportslimit CR 301 specifies the maximum size of the VCD file ved dumpportsoff CR 302 turns off VCD dumping and records all dumped port values as x ved dumpportson CR 303 turns on VCD dumping and records the current values of all selected ports vcd file CR 304 specifies the file
443. sted order Optional For example using this argument will cause vcover stats to print the statistics for lt file gt then any incremental coverage after merging lt file2 gt and then any incremental coverage after merging lt file3 gt into the merge of lt filel gt and lt file2 gt and so forth At the end it prints the total statistics for the full merge The statistics are written to both stdout and vcover log Not a valid option when merging functional coverage databases install lt path gt Adds lt path gt as additional hierarchy on the front end of instance and object names in the data files Optional This argument allows you to merge coverage results from simulations that have different hierarchies log lt filename gt Specifies the file for outputting progress messages Optional By default these messages are output to vcover log ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 328 vcover stats See also strip lt n gt Removes lt n gt levels of hierarchy from instance and object names in the data files Optional This argument allows you to merge coverage results from simulations that have different hierarchies verbose Enables summary code coverage statistics to be computed and directed to the log file each time a file is merged into the base The statistics are instance based Not a valid option when merging functional coverage databases lt filel gt lt file2 gt lt filen gt Specifies the file s for which you
444. stomized menus It adds a menu containing a top level item labeled Do My Own Thing which prints my_own_thing signals and adds a cascading submenu labeled changeCase with two entries To Upper and To Lower which echo my_to_upper and my_to_lower respectively A checkbox that controls the value of myglobalvar signals one is also added set myglobalvar 0 set wname view wave Gets the path to the Wave window proc AddMyMenus wname global myglobalvar set cmdl echo my_own_thing Swname set cmd2 echo my_to_upper Swname set cmd3 echo my_to_lower Swname WindowName Menu MenuItem label Command Raye E EA Rees ee ee add_menu Swname mine 0O Oth letter M is underlined add_menuitem Swname mine Do My Own Thing cmdl add_separator wname mine JAP SSS Pe Se Se SS ee See add_submenu Swname mine changeCase add_menuitem Swname mine changeCase To Upper cmd2 add_menuitem Swname mine changeCase To Lower cmd3 add_submenu Swname mine vars add_menucb Swname mine vars Feature One variable myglobalvar onvalue 1 offvalue 0 indicatoron 1 AddMyMenus wname This example is available in the following DO file lt install_dir gt modeltech examples addmenu do You can run the DO file to add the Mine menu shown in the illustration or modify the file for different results To execute the DO file select Tools gt Execute Macro Main window or use the do command CR 153 See also add_menucb CR 59 add_men
445. stored at the top of this file as a pseudo comment so that subsequent mem load commands can correctly interpret the data Do not edit this data when manipulating a saved file By default identical data lines are printed To replace identical lines with a single line containing the asterisk character you can enable compression with the compress argument mem display format bin hex mti addressradix lt radix gt dataradix lt radix gt wordsperline lt Nwords gt startaddress lt st gt endaddress lt end gt noaddress compress lt path gt format bin hex mti Specifies the output format of the contents Optional The default format is mti For details on mti format see the description contained in mem load CR 201 addressradix lt radix gt Specifies the address radix for the default mti formatted files The lt radix gt can be specified as d decimal or h hex Optional If the output format is mti the default is d dataradix lt radix gt Specifies the data radix for the default mti formatted files Optional If unspecified the global default radix is used Valid entries or any unique abbreviations are binary decimal unsigned octal hex symbolic and default If no radix is specified for an enumerated type the symbolic representation is used You can change the default radix for the current simulation using the radix command CR 243 You can change the default radix permanentl
446. t Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file Optional If omitted the command is executed on all open VCD files See also See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 304 vcd file vcd file Syntax Arguments The ved file command specifies the filename and state mapping for the VCD file created by a ved add command CR 294 The ved file command is optional If used it must be issued before any ved add commands Related Verilog task dumpfile gt Note ved file is included for backward compatibility Use the ved files command CR 306 if you want to use multiple VCD files during a single simulation ved file dumpports lt filename gt map lt mapping pairs gt nomap dumpports Capture detailed port driver data for Verilog ports and VHDL std_logic ports Optional This option works only on ports and any subsequent ved add command CR 294 will accept only qualifying ports silently ignoring all other specified objects lt filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file that is created the default is dump vcd Optional map lt mapping pairs gt Affects only VHDL signals of type std_logic Optional It allows you to override the default mappings The mapping is specified as a list of character pairs The first character in a pair must be one of the std_logic characters UX01ZWLH and the second character is the ch
447. t Clears the current compare differences allowing another compare run command to be executed Does not modify any of the compare options or any of the signals selected for comparison This allows you to re run the comparison with different options or with a modified signal list Syntax compare reset Arguments None See also compare add CR 95 compare run CR 115 and Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference compare run CR 115 compare run Syntax Arguments Examples See also The compare run command runs the difference computation on the signals selected via a compare add command Reports in the Transcript pane the total number of errors found compare run lt startTime gt lt endTime gt lt startTime gt Specifies when to start computing differences Optional Default is zero If a unit e g ps is used with the time value the time must be in curly braces The default units are determined by the simulation resolution Default simulation resolution is nanoseconds Simulation resolution can be changed with the t argument of the vsim command CR 375 lt endTime gt Specifies when to end computing differences Optional Default is the end of the dataset simulation run that ends earliest If a unit e g ps is used with the time value the time must be placed in curly braces compare run Computes differences over the entire time range compare run 5 3 ns 57 ms Computes diff
448. t vcover report The vcover report command produces textual output of coverage statistics from a previously saved code or functional coverage run This allows you to produce reports in an offline manner i e without having to load a simulation You can choose from a number of report output options using the arguments listed below Syntax vcover report above lt percent gt below lt percent gt aggregated append comment details lines totals instance lt pathname gt recursive noaggregated nocomment nodetails output lt pathname gt package lt pkgname gt select bces t x toggles all xml lt file gt Arguments above lt percent gt Specifies that only objects with coverage values above this percentage be included in the output Optional below lt percent gt Specifies that only objects with coverage values below this percentage be included in the output Optional aggregated Includes aggregated statistics in the output Not a valid option when reporting on a code coverage database Optional Default all When used with toggles creates a report that lists both toggled and untoggled signals Not a valid option when reporting on a functional coverage database Optional append Appends the report data to the named output file Optional comment Specifies that comments should be included with the report Comments are excluded by default Not a valid option when
449. t and you want the same behavior across all macros ModelSim SE Command Reference pause Syntax Arguments Description See also pause CR 219 The pause command placed within a macro interrupts the execution of that macro pause None When you execute a macro and that macro gets interrupted the prompt will change to VSIM paused gt This pause prompt reminds you that a macro has been interrupted When a macro is paused you may invoke another macro and if that one gets interrupted you may even invoke another up to a nesting level of 50 macros If the status of nested macros gets confusing use the status command CR 273 It will show you which macros are interrupted at what line number and show you the interrupted command To resume the execution of the macro use the resume command CR 251 To abort the execution of a macro use the abort command CR 44 abort CR 44 do CR 153 resume CR 251 run CR 254 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 220 play This command is available for UNIX only excluding Linux The play command replays a sequence of keyboard and mouse actions that were previously saved to a file with the record command CR 245 Returns nothing Play returns immediately the playback proceeds in the background Caution must be used when putting play commands in do macro files Syntax play lt filename gt Arguments lt filename gt Specifies the recorded file to
450. t lt suffix gt libmap lt pathname gt libmap_verbose librescan line lt number gt lint maxdelays mindelays nocheckALL nocheckCLUP nocheckDELAY nocheckDNET nocheckOPRD nocheckSUDP nocoverage nodebug ports pli noincr nolibcell nologo nopsl nospecify note lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt notimingchecks novopt nowarn lt CODE gt 0O0 01 04 O5 opt lt lib gt lt module gt pslfile lt filename gt quiet R lt simargs gt refresh source sv suppress lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt time typdelays u y lt library_file gt version vlog95compat vopt warning lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt work lt library_name gt y lt library_directory gt lt filename gt 93 Specifies that the VHDL interface to Verilog modules use VHDL 1076 1993 extended identifiers to preserve case in Verilog identifiers that contain uppercase letters Optional help Displays the command s options and arguments Optional compat Disables optimizations that result in different event ordering than Verilog XL Optional ModelSim Verilog generally duplicates Verilog XL event ordering but there are cases where it is inefficient to do so Using this option does not help you find event order dependencies but it allows you to ignore them Keep in mind that this option does not account for all event order
451. t values shown below Optional literal Displays the waveform as a box containing the object value if the value fits the space available Optional logic Displays values as 0 1 X or Z Optional height lt number gt Specifies the height in pixels of the waveform Optional offset lt number gt Specifies the waveform position offset in pixels Valid only when format is specified as analog Optional radix lt radix gt Specifies the radix for Wave window objects Optional Valid entries or any unique abbreviations are binary ascii unsigned decimal octal hex symbolic and default If no radix is specified for an enumerated type the default representation is used You can change the default radix for the current simulation using the radix command CR 243 You can change the default radix permanently by editing the DefaultRadix UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file If you specify a radix for an array of a VHDL enumerated type ModelSim converts each signal value to 1 0 Z or X ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 238 property wave scale lt float gt Specifies the waveform scale relative to the unscaled size value of 1 Valid only when format is specified as analog Optional lt pattern gt Specifies a name or wildcard pattern to match the full path names of the signals nets or registers for which you are defining the property change Required ModelSim SE Command Reference push Synta
452. t does not apply to VHDL or Verilog testbenches For comparing VHDL std_logic std_ulogic objects ModelSim uses the table shown below An entry of 0 in the table is no match an entry of 1 is a match an entry of 2 is a match only if you set the Tcl variable STDLOGIC_X_MatchesAnything to 1 Note that X will match a U and will match anything Search Matches as follows mney 0 1 Z WwW L H U 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 Z 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 W 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 L 0 2 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 H 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 30 Syntax and conventions For comparing Verilog net values ModelSim uses the table shown below An entry of 2 is a match only if you set the Tcl variable VLOG_X_MatchesAnything to 1 Search Matches as follows Entry This table also applies to SystemC types sc_bit sc_bv sc_logic sc_int sc_uint sc_bigint sc_biguint ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 31 Commands Chapter contents Command reference table CR 32 The commands here are entered either in macro files or on the command line of the Main window Some commands are automatically entered on the command line when you use the ModelSim graphical user interface Note that in addition to the simulation commands documented in t
453. t for the new region Required See also virtual function CR 341 virtual signal CR 353 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 gt Note Virtual regions cannot be used in the when CR 409 command ModelSim SE Command Reference virtual save CR 351 virtual save The virtual save command saves the definitions of virtuals to a file Syntax virtual save kind lt kind gt append lt filename gt Arguments kind lt kind gt Specifies a subset of virtuals to look at Optional lt kind gt can be any of the following signals functions designs implicits and explicits Unique abbreviations are accepted append Specifies to save only virtuals that are not already saved or weren t read in from a macro file These unsaved virtuals are then appended to the specified or default file Optional lt filename gt Used for writing the virtual definitions Optional If you don t specify lt filename gt the default virtual filename virtuals do will be used You can specify a different default in the pref tcl file See also virtual count CR 336 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 352 virtual show virtual show The virtual show command lists the full path names of all explicitly defined virtuals Syntax virtual show kind lt kind gt Arguments kind lt kind gt Specifies a subset of virtuals to look at Optional lt kind gt can b
454. t from zero delay events Those events are normally processed in the next iteration or delta of the current timestep fast and opt implement optimizations that can remove delta delays and process an event earlier L lt libname gt Searches the specified resource library for precompiled modules The library search options you specify here must also be specified when you run the vsim command CR 375 Optional Argument has an effect only when compiling with fast see above ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 364 vlog Lf lt libname gt Same as L but the specified library is searched before any uselib directives See Library usage UM 117 and Verilog XL compatible compiler arguments UM 119 for more information Optional t libext lt suffix gt Works in conjunction with the y option Specifies file extensions for the files in a source library directory Optional By default the compiler searches for files without extensions If you specify the libext option then the compiler will search for a file with the suffix appended to an unresolved name You may specify only one libext option but it may contain multiple suffixes separated by The extensions are tried in the order they appear in the libext option libmap lt pathname gt Specifies a Verilog 2001 library map file Optional You can omit this argument by placing the library map file as the first option on the vlog invocation e g vlog top map top v top
455. t is not considered an error condition and the time of the farthest match is returned with the count of the matches found Arguments count lt n gt Specifies to search for the nth occurrence of the match condition where lt n gt is a positive integer Optional deltas Indicates to test for a match on simulation delta cycles Otherwise matches are only tested for at the end of each simulation time step Optional env lt path gt Provides a design region in which to look for the signal names Optional expr lt expr gt Specifies a general expression of signal values and simulation time Optional searchlog will search until the expression evaluates to true The expression must have a boolean result type See GUI_expression_format CR 22 for the format of the expression reverse Specifies to search backwards in time from lt startTime gt Optional rising falling anyedge Specifies an edge to look for on a scalar signal Optional This option is ignored for compound signals If no options are specified the default is anyedge startDelta lt num gt Indicates a simulation delta cycle on which to start Optional value lt string gt Specifies to search until a single scalar or compound signal takes on this value Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference searchlog CR 265 lt startTime gt Specifies the simulation time at which to start the search Required The time may be specified as an integer numbe
456. t on the component and for which there is no error otherwise 3 a direct recursive subprogram call and 4 in cases involving class SIGNAL formal parameters as described in IEEE Standard VHDL Language Reference Manual 1076 1993 section 2 1 1 2 entitled Signal parameters line 115 This last check only applies to designs compiled using 87 If you were to compile in 93 it would be flagged as a warning or error even without the ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 316 vcom lint argument Can also be enabled using the Show_Lint UM 168 variable in the modelsim ini file n01164 Causes the source files to be compiled without taking advantage of the built in version of the IEFE std_logic_1164 package Optional This will typically result in longer simulation times for VHDL programs that use variables and signals of type std_logic noaccel lt package_name gt Turns off acceleration of the specified package in the source code using that package nocasestaticerror Suppresses case statement static warnings Optional VHDL standards require that case statement alternative choices be static at compile time However some expressions which are globally static are allowed This switch prevents the compiler from warning on such expressions If the pedanticerrors switch is specified this switch is ignored nocheck Disables index and range checks Optional You can disable these individually using the noindexcheck and norangecheck arguments
457. t the WildcardFilter Tcl preference variable identifies types to ignore when matching objects with wildcard patterns Variables may be added if preceded by the process name For example add wave myproc int1 lt object_name gt sigl sig2 sig3 Creates a user defined bus with the specified object name The sigi entries are signals to be concatenated within the user defined bus Optional p Note You can also select Tools gt Combine Signals Wave window to create a user defined bus ModelSim SE Command Reference add wave CR 55 offset lt offset gt Modifies an analog waveform s position on the display Optional The offset value is part of the wave positioning equation see scale below optcells Makes Verilog optimized cell ports visible when using wildcards Optional By default Verilog optimized cell ports are not selected even if they match the specified wildcard pattern out For use with wildcard searches Specifies that the scope of the search is to include ports of mode OUT if they match the object_name specification Optional ports For use with wildcard searches Specifies that the scope of the listing is to include ports of modes IN OUT or INOUT Optional lt radix gt Specifies the radix for the objects that follow in the command Optional Valid entries or any unique abbreviations are binary ascii character unsigned decimal octal hex symbolic and default If no radix is specifi
458. t variable shift CR 268 shifts macro parameter values down one place show CR 269 lists objects and subregions visible from the current environment simstats CR 270 reports performance related statistics about active simulations splitio CR 272 operates on a VHDL inout or out port to create a new signal having the same name as the port suffixed with __o0 status CR 273 lists all currently interrupted macros step CR 274 steps to the next HDL statement stop CR 275 stops simulation in batch files used with the when command CR 409 tb CR 276 displays a stack trace for the current process in the Transcript pane tcheck_set CR 277 modifies a timing check s reporting or X generation status tcheck_status CR 279 prints the current status of timing checks to the Transcript pane toggle add CR 281 ModelSim SE Command Reference enables collection of toggle statistics for the specified nodes Command name Command reference table CR 39 Action toggle disable CR 283 disables collection of toggle statistics for the specified nodes toggle enable CR 284 re enables collection of toggle statistics for the specified nodes toggle report CR 285 displays to the Transcript pane a list of all nodes that have not transitioned to both 0 and at least once toggle reset CR 286 resets the toggle counts to zero for the
459. t you cannot compare the value of two signals i e Name Name is not possible lt command gt Specifies one or more commands that are to be executed at the breakpoint Optional Multiple commands must be separated by semicolons or placed on multiple lines The entire command must be placed in curly braces Any commands that follow a run CR 254 or step CR 274 command will be ignored A run or step command terminates the breakpoint sequence This applies if macros are used within the bp command string as well A restore CR 250 command should not be used If many commands are needed after the breakpoint they can be placed in a macro file query lt filename gt lt line_number gt lt line_number gt Returns information about the breakpoints set in the specified file The information returned varies depending on which arguments you specify See the examples below for details ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 78 bp Examples bp Lists all existing breakpoints in the design including the source file names line numbers breakpoint id s and any commands that have been assigned to breakpoints bp alu vhd 147 Sets a breakpoint in the source file alu vhd at line 147 bp alu vhd 147 do macro do Executes the macro do macro file when the breakpoint is hit bp disable test vhd 22 echo exa varl echo exa var2 Sets a breakpoint on line 22 of test vhd When the breakpoint is hit the values of variables var
460. ta of example v Models compiled with nodebug cannot use any of the ModelSim debugging features any subsequent user will not be able to see into the model vlog nodebug ports level3 v level2 v vlog nodebug top v The first line compiles and hides the internal data plus the ports of the lower level design units Jevel3 v and level2 v The second line compiles the top level unit top v without hiding the ports It is important to compile the top level without ports because top level ports must be visible for simulation vlog nodebug portstpli level3 v level2 v vlog nodebug pli top v The first command hides the internal data and ports of the design units Jevel3 v and level2 v In addition it prevents the use of PLI functions to interrogate the compiled modules for information either ports pli or plit ports works fine for this command The second line compiles the top level unit without hiding the ports but restricts the use of PLI functions as well Note that the pli switch may be used at any level of the design but ports should only be used on lower levels since you can t simulate without visible top level ports vlog L work L libA L libB top v This command demonstrates how to compile hierarchical modules organized into separate libraries that have sub module names that overlap among the libraries Assume you have a top level module top that instantiates module modA from library JibA and module modB from library libB Furt
461. tance to defend or settle the action and c grant Mentor Graphics sole authority and control of the defense or settlement of the action 9 2 If an infringement claim is made Mentor Graphics may at its option and expense a replace or modify Software so that it becomes noninfringing b procure for you ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 438 License Agreement the right to continue using Software or c require the return of Software and refund to you any license fee paid less a reasonable allowance for use 9 3 Mentor Graphics has no liability to you if infringement is based upon a the combination of Software with any product not furnished by Mentor Graphics b the modification of Software other than by Mentor Graphics c the use of other than a current unaltered release of Software d the use of Software as part of an infringing process e a product that you make use or sell f any Beta Code contained in Software g any Software provided by Mentor Graphics licensors who do not provide such indemnification to Mentor Graphics customers or h infringement by you that is deemed willful In the case of h you shall reimburse Mentor Graphics for its attorney fees and other costs related to the action upon a final judgment 9 4 THIS SECTION 9 STATES THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS AND YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY WITH RESPECT TO ANY ALLEGED PATENT OR COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT OR TRADE SECRET
462. taset Useful for identifying the real dataset name of an alias file Returns the name of the WLF file associated with the dataset exists Returns 1 if the dataset exists 0 if it doesn t lt dataset_name gt Specifies the name of the dataset or alias for which you want information Optional If you do not specify a dataset name ModelSim uses the dataset of the current environment see the environment command CR 163 See also dataset alias CR 138 dataset list CR 142 dataset open CR 143 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 142 dataset list dataset list The dataset list command lists all active datasets Syntax dataset list long Arguments long Lists the filename corresponding to each dataset s logical name Optional See also dataset alias CR 138 dataset save CR 145 ModelSim SE Command Reference dataset open CR 143 dataset open Syntax Arguments Examples See also The dataset open command opens a WLF file representing a prior simulation and assigns it the logical name that you specify To close a dataset use dataset close dataset open lt filename gt lt logicalname gt lt filename gt Specifies the WLF file to open as a view mode dataset Required lt logicalname gt Specifies the logical name for the dataset Optional This is a prefix that will identify the dataset in the current session By default the dataset prefix will be the name of the specified WLF file d
463. tation that had been suspended compare delete CR 105 deletes a signal or region from the current comparison compare end CR 106 closes the currently open comparison compare info CR 107 lists the results of the comparison compare list CR 108 lists all the compare add commands currently in effect compare options CR 109 sets defaults for options used in other compare commands compare reload CR 113 reloads a comparison previously saved with the compare savediffs command compare reset CR 114 clears the current compare differences ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 34 Command reference table Command name Action compare run CR 115 runs the comparison on selected signals compare savediffs CR 116 saves comparison differences to a file that can be reloaded later compare saverules CR 117 saves comparison setup information to a file that can be reloaded later compare see CR 118 displays a comparison difference in the Wave window compare start CR 120 starts a new dataset comparison compare stop CR 122 halts active difference computation compare update CR 123 updates the comparison differences configure CR 124 invokes the List or Wave widget configure command for the current default List or Wave window context CR 128 provides several operations on a context s name coverage clear CR 129
464. tats command computes and prints to stdout summary statistics for previously saved code or functional coverage databases It can be invoked within the ModelSim GUI or at the command line For functional coverage databases vcover stats creates coverage statistics output that is roughly equivalent to the output from this command fcover report config details aggregated r The format and filtering of the report output produced by veover stats is not as flexible as that of the feover report command CR 175 vcover stats and append incremental inputs lt pathname gt install lt path gt log lt filename gt strip lt n gt verbose lt filel gt lt file2 gt lt filen gt and Excludes statements in the output merge file only if they are excluded in all input files Optional By default statements are excluded in the output file if the statement is excluded in any of the input files Not a valid option when merging functional coverage databases append Specifies that progress messages are to be appended to the current log file Optional By default a new log file is created each time you invoke the command Not a valid option when merging functional coverage databases inputs lt pathname gt Specifies a text file containing input filenames for which you want to produce statistics Optional incremental Prints statistics for the specified files as if the files were merged one after the other in the li
465. tedly tiled to initialize the memory block specified The pattern can contain multiple word values for this option e For incrementing or decrementing patterns each memory word is treated as an unsigned quantity and each successive memory location is filled in with a value one higher or lower than the previous value The initial value must be specified e For a random pattern a random data sequence will be generated to fill in the memory values The data type in the sequence will match the type stored in the memory For std_logic and associated types unsigned integer sequences are generated A seed value may be specified on the command line For any given seed the generated sequence is identical The interpretation of the pattern data is performed according to the default system radix setting However this can be overridden with a standard Verilog style lt radix_char gt lt data gt specification mem load infile lt infile gt format bin hex mti filltype lt filltype gt filldata lt patterndata gt fillradix lt radix gt skip lt Nwords gt truncate startaddress lt st gt endaddress lt end gt lt path gt ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 202 mem load Arguments infile lt infile gt Updates memory data from the specified file Required unless the filltype argument is used endaddress lt end gt Specifies the end address for a range of addresses to be loaded The lt end gt can be
466. temC master slave library Optional If you specify this argument when compiling your C code with sccom you must also specify it when linking the object files with sccom link suppress lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Prevents the specified message s from displaying Optional You cannot suppress Fatal or Internal messages Edit the suppress UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information NN Prints all subprocess invocation information Optional An example is the call to gec along with the command line arguments verbose Prints the name of each sc_module encountered during compilation Optional Related modelsim ini variable SccomVerbose version Displays the version of sccom used to compile the design Optional warning lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Changes the severity level of the specified message s to warning Optional Edit the warning UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information work lt library_name gt For the compiler Specifies a logical name or pathname of a library that is to be mapped to the logical library work Optional by default the compiled object files so are added to the work library The specified pathname overrides the pathname specified for work in the project file For the linker Spec
467. tential errors or mismatches caused by the dependency recompilation you should recompile the dependent design unit s source rather than use this switch help Displays the command s options and arguments Optional ignoredefaultbinding Instructs the compiler not to generate a default binding during compilation Optional You must explicitly bind all components in the design to use this switch ignorevitalerrors Directs the compiler to ignore VITAL compliance errors Optional The compiler still reports that VITAL errors exist but it will not stop the compilation You should exercise caution in using this switch as part of accelerating VITAL packages we assume that compliance checking has passed just abcep Directs the compiler to just include a architectures b bodies c configurations e entities p packages Any combination in any order can be used but one choice is required if you use this optional switch line lt number gt Starts the compiler on the specified line in the VHDL source file Optional By default the compiler starts at the beginning of the file lint Optional Enables better checking on case statement rules Also enables warning messages for the following situations 1 the result of the built in concatenation operator amp is the actual for a subprogram formal parameter of an unconstrained array type 2 the entity to which a component instantiation is bound has a port that is no
468. th lt level gt Restricts a recursive search specified with the recursive option to a certain level of hierarchy lt level gt is an integer greater than or equal to zero For example if you specify depth 1 the command descends only one level in the hierarchy Optional divider lt divider_name gt Adds a divider to the Wave window Optional When a divider name is specified that name appears in the pathnames column One or more names can be specified All names listed after divider are taken to be divider names Names that begin with a hyphen are not allowed however names beginning with a space are valid if enclosed with quotation marks or curly braces If a divider name is not specified ModelSim will insert an unnamed divider expand lt signal_name gt Causes a compound signal to be expanded immediately but only one level down Optional The lt signal_name gt is required and may include wildcards lt format gt Specifies the display format of the objects ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 54 add wave literal logic analog step analog interpolated analog backstep Optional Literal waveforms are displayed as a box containing the object value Logic signals may be U X 0 1 Z W L H or The way each state is displayed is specified by the logic type display preference see Preference variables located in INI files UM 526 Analog signals are sized by scale and by offset Analog step chan
469. th the simulator state option tag lt string gt Specifies a string tag to append to foreign trace filenames Optional Used with the trace_foreign lt int gt option Used when running multiple traces in the same directory See the ModelSim FLI Reference for more information title lt title gt Specifies the title to appear for the ModelSim Main window Optional If omitted the current ModelSim version is the window title Useful when running multiple simultaneous simulations Text strings with spaces must be in quotes e g my title trace_foreign lt int gt Creates two kinds of foreign interface traces a log of what functions were called with the value of the arguments and the results returned and a set of C language files to replay what the foreign interface side did The purpose of the logfile is to aid the debugging of your FLI PLI VPI code The primary purpose of the replay facility is to send the replay file to MTI support for debugging co simulation problems or debugging problems for which it is impractical to send the FLI PLI VPI code See the ModelSim FLI Reference for more information transport_int_delays Selects transport mode with pulse control for single source nets one interconnect path Optional By default interconnect delays operate in inertial mode pulses smaller than the delay are filtered In transport mode narrow pulses are propagated through interconnect delays This option works for both Veril
470. the command line If the do command is executed from another macro file pathnames are relative to the directory of the calling macro file This allows groups of macro files to be moved to another directory and still work lt parameter_value gt Specifies values that are to be passed to the corresponding parameters 1 through 9 in the macro file Optional Multiple parameter values must be separated by spaces If you want to make the parameters optional i e specify fewer parameter values than the number of parameters actually used in the macro you must use the argc UM 544 simulator state variable in the macro See Making macro parameters optional UM 490 Note that there is no limit on the number of parameters that can be passed to macros but only nine values are visible at one time You can use the shift command CR 268 to see the other parameters do macros stimulus 100 This command executes the file macros stimulus passing the parameter value 100 to 1 in the macro file do testfile design vhd 127 If the macro file testfile contains the line bp 1 2 this command would place a breakpoint in the source file named design vhd at line 127 Chapter 20 Tcl and macros DO files ModelSim modes of operation UM 27 Using a startup file UM 540 DOPATH UM 523 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 154 down down Syntax Arguments The down command searches for object transitions or values in the specified List windo
471. tible compiler arguments UM 119 for more information After all explicit filenames on the vlog command line have been processed the compiler uses the v option to find and compile any modules that were referenced but not yet defined Modules and UDPs within the file are compiled only if they match previously unresolved references Multiple v options are allowed See additional discussion in the examples version Returns the version of the compiler as used by the licensing tools such as Model Technology ModelSim SE vlog 5 5 Compiler 2000 01 Jan 28 2000 vlog95compat Disables Verilog 2001 keywords which ensures that code that was valid according to the 1364 1995 spec can still be compiled By default ModelSim follows the rules of IEEE Std 1364 2001 Some requirements in 1364 2001 conflict with requirements in 1364 1995 Optional Edit the vlog95compat UM 528 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default vopt Notifies vlog that the vopt command CR 373 will be run As a result vlog will not produce code Optional warning lt msg_number gt lt msg_number gt Changes the severity level of the specified message s to warning Optional Edit the warning UM 538 variable in the modelsim ini file to set a permanent default See Changing message severity level UM 548 for more information work lt library_name gt Specifies a logical name or pathname of a library that is to be mapped to the logical
472. tics collection on nodes of mode OUT Optional inout Disables toggle statistics collection on nodes of mode INOUT Optional internal Disables toggle statistics collection on internal non port objects Optional ports Disables toggle statistics collection on nodes of modes IN OUT or INOUT Optional F Specifies that toggle statistics collection is disabled recursively into subregions Optional If omitted the disable is limited to the current region lt node_name gt Disables toggle statistics collection for the named node s Required Multiple names and wildcards are accepted Toggle coverage UM 344 toggle add CR 281 toggle enable CR 284 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 284 toggle enable toggle enable Syntax Arguments See also The toggle enable command re enables toggle statistics collection on nodes whose toggle coverage had previously been disabled via the toggle disable command toggle enable all in out inout internal ports r lt node_name gt all Enables toggle statistics collection for all nodes that have toggle checking disabled Optional Must be used alone without other arguments in Enables toggle statistics collection on disabled nodes of mode IN Optional out Enables toggle statistics collection on disabled nodes of mode OUT Optional inout Enables toggle statistics collection on disabled nodes of mode INOUT Optional internal Enables
473. time unit ns in this case would vary depending on your simulation resolution when Snow lns set NumericStdNoWarnings 1 run all The when command below is labeled a and will cause ModelSim to echo the message b changed whenever the value of the object b changes when label a b echo b changed The multi line when command below does not use a label and has two conditions When the conditions are met an echo CR 158 and a stop CR 275 command will be executed when b 1 and c 0 echo b is 1 and c is not 0 stop ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 412 when In the example below for the declaration wire 15 0 a the when command will activate when the selected bits match a 7 when a 3 1 3 h7 echo matched at time Snow If you encounter a vectored net caused by optimizing with vopt CR 373 use the event qualifier to prevent the command from falsely evaluating when unrelated bits of a change when a 3 1 3 h7 and a 3 1 event echo matched at time Snow In the example below we want to sample the values of the address and data bus on the first falling edge of clk after sstrb has gone high strobe is our state variable set strobe Zero This signal breakpoint only fires when sstrb changes to a 1 when label checkStrobe top sstrb 1 Our state Zero condition has been met move to state One set strobe One This signal breakpoint fires each time
474. tion message reporting for the specified timing check s Optional Specify either ON enable or OFF disable lt xStat gt Enables disables X generation for the specified timing check s Optional Specify either ON enable or OFF disable tcheck_set top yl u2 WIDTH negedge CLK OFF Turns off message reporting and X generation for the WIDTH negedge CLK check in instance top y u2 Creates the following output in the Transcript pane 0 WIDTH negedge CLK MsgOff XOff tcheck_set top yl u2 1 OFF ON Turns off message reporting for timing check number in instance top y u2 Creates the following output in the Transcript pane 1 WIDTH posedge CLK MsgOff XOn VSIM 2 gt tcheck_status dffl 1 PERIOD CLK MsgOn XOn WIDTH posedge CLK MsgOn XOn WIDTH negedge CLK MsgOn XOn VSIM 3 gt tcheck_set dffl WIDTH posedge CLK off on 1 PERIOD CLK MsgOff XOn WIDTH posedge CLK MsgOff XOn WIDTH negedge CLK MsgOff XOn Shows how period and hold checks work with VHDL VITAL In this case specifying off on for WIDTH posedge CLK also sets PERIOD CLK and WIDTH negedge CLK to the same values VSIM 3 gt tcheck_status dff5 ALL MsgOn XOn VSIM 4 gt tcheck_set dff5 on off ALL MsgOn XOff Instance dff5 is from an unaccelerated model so tcheck_set can only toggle message reporting and X generation for all checks on the instance tcheck_status CR
475. tional If omitted the command is executed on the file designated by the ved file command CR 304 or dump vcd if ved file was not invoked See Chapter 19 Value Change Dump VCD Files for more information on VCD files Verilog system tasks are documented in the IEEE 1364 standard ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 312 vcd2wif vcd2wlf Syntax Arguments ved2wif is a utility that translates a VCD Value Change Dump file into a WLF file that can be displayed in ModelSim using the vsim view argument ved2wlf splitio splitio_in_ext lt extension gt splitio_out_ext lt extension gt lt vced filename gt lt wlf filename gt splitio Specifies that extended VCD port values are to be split into their corresponding input and output components by creating 2 signals instead of just 1 in the resulting w f file Optional By default the new input component signal keeps the same name as the original port name while the output component name is the original name with __o appended to it splitio_in_ext lt extension gt Specifies an extension to add to input component signal names created by using splitio Optional splitio_out_ext lt extension gt Specifies an extension to add to output component signal names created by using splitio Optional lt vcd filename gt Specifies the name of the VCD file you want to translate into a WLF file Required lt wlf filename gt Specifies the name of the output WLF file
476. tly selected difference Optional Performs the same action as the Previous Difference button in the Wave window prevanno Shows the previous annotated difference in time before the currently selected difference Optional Performs the same action as the Previous Annotated Difference button in the Wave window wavepane lt n gt Specifies the pane of the Wave window in which the difference should be shown Optional wavewin lt name gt Specifies the name of the Wave window in which the difference should be shown Optional ModelSim SE Command Reference compare see CR 119 Examples compare see first Shows the earliest difference in time in the default Wave window compare see next Shows the next difference in time in the default Wave window See also compare add CR 95 compare run CR 115 Waveform Compare UM 271 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 120 compare start compare start Syntax Arguments The compare start command begins a new dataset comparison The datasets that you Il be comparing must already be open compare start batch hide show maxsignal lt n gt maxtotal lt n gt refDelay lt delay gt testDelay lt delay gt lt reference_dataset gt lt test_dataset gt batet Specifies that comparisons will not be automatically inserted into the Wave window Optional hide Hides all comparisons except those that have at least one difference Optional You can c
477. to display or change the current dataset and region signal environment environment dataset nodataset lt pathname gt dataset Displays the specified environment pathname with a dataset prefix Optional Dataset prefixes are displayed by default if more than one dataset is open during a simulation session nodataset Displays the specified environment pathname without a dataset prefix Optional lt pathname gt Specifies the pathname to which the current region signal environment is to be changed See Object name syntax CR 12 for information on specifying pathnames Optional If omitted the command causes the pathname of the current region signal environment to be displayed env Displays the pathname of the current region signal environment env dataset test Changes all unlocked windows to the context of the test dataset env test top foo Changes all unlocked windows to the context test top foo env blk1 u2 Moves down two levels in the design hierarchy env Moves to the top level of the design hierarchy ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 164 examine examine The examine command examines one or more objects and displays current values or the values at a specified previous time in the Transcript pane It optionally can compute the value of an expression of one or more objects If you are using C Debug UM 401 examine can display the value of a C variable as well The following objects can b
478. to match Must be specified in the same radix in which the selected waveform is displayed Case is ignored but otherwise the value must be an exact string match don t care bits are not yet implemented Only one signal may be selected but that signal may be an array Optional window lt wname gt Specifies an instance of the Wave window that is not the default Optional Otherwise the default Wave window is used Use the view command CR 334 to change the default window ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 192 left Examples See also lt n gt Specifies to find the nth match If less than n are found the number found is returned with a warning message and the cursor is positioned at the last match Optional The default is 1 left noglitch value FF23 2 Finds the second time to the left at which the selected vector transitions to FF23 ignoring glitches left Goes to the previous transition on the selected signal The following examples illustrate search expressions that use a variety of signal attributes paths array constants and time variables Such expressions follow the GUI_expression_format CR 22 left expr clk rising amp amp mystate reading amp amp top u3 addr 32 habcd1234 Searches left for an expression that evaluates to a boolean 1 when signal clk just changed from low to high and signal mystate is the enumeration reading and signal top u3 addr is equal to the specified 32 bit h
479. toggle statistics collection on disabled internal non port objects Optional ports Enables toggle statistics collection on disabled nodes of modes IN OUT or INOUT Optional r Specifies that toggle statistics collection is enabled recursively into subregions Optional If omitted the enable is limited to the current region lt node_name gt Enables toggle statistics collection for the named node s Required Multiple names and wildcards are accepted Toggle coverage UM 344 toggle disable CR 283 ModelSim SE Command Reference toggle report CR 285 toggle report Syntax Arguments See also The toggle report command displays a list of all nodes that have not transitioned to both 0 and 1 at least once Also displayed is a summary of the number of nodes checked the number that toggled the number that didn t toggle and a percentage that toggled You can also collect and view toggle statistics in the ModelSim GUI See Chapter 13 Measuring code coverage for details The toggle report command is intended to be used as follows 1 Enable statistics collection with the toggle add command CR 281 2 Run the simulation with the run command CR 254 3 Produce the report with the toggle report command p gt Note If you want to ensure that you are reporting all signals in the design use the nocollapse argument to vsim when you load your design Without this argument the simulator collapses certain ports that ar
480. ts only inputs Optional inout Resets only inouts Optional 0 t Resets only outputs Optional internal Resets only design internal signals or nets Optional ports Resets only design ports Optional E Searches recursively on a wildcard specified for the signal or net Optional lt signalsOrNets gt Specifies the signal or net to reset Required Multiple names or wildcards may be used See also power add CR 222 power report CR 223 See the Synopsys Power documentation for more information ModelSim SE Command Reference precision Syntax Arguments Examples precision CR 225 The precision command determines how real numbers display in the graphic interface e g Objects Wave Locals and List windows It does not affect the internal representation of a real number and therefore precision values over 17 are not allowed Using the precision command without any arguments displays the current precision setting precision lt digits gt lt digits gt Specifies the number of digits to display Optional Default is 6 Trailing zeros are not displayed unless you append the sign See examples for more details precision 4 Results in 4 digits of precision For example 1 234 or 6543 precision 8 Results in 8 digits of precision including trailing zeros For example 1 2345600 or 6543 2100 precision 8 Results in 8 digits of precision but doesn t print trailing zeros For exampl
481. ts the alias definition for the specified name if one exists alias myquit write list mylist save quit f Creates a Tcl procedure myquit that when executed writes the contents of the List window to the file mylist save by invoking write list CR 426 and quits ModelSim by invoking quit CR 242 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 64 assertion fail assertion fail The assertion fail command configures simulator behavior in response to an assertion failure Syntax assertion fail action continue break exit disable enable limit lt count gt none log on off recursive lt path gt Arguments action continue break exit Specify the action to take when an assertion fails This option may be specified multiple times it applies to all paths that follow it in the command line One of the following values is required continue No action taken This is not the same as disabling an assertion since logging may still be enabled for the directive This is the default value break Halt simulation and return to the ModelSim prompt exit Halt simulation and exit ModelSim You can change the permanent default by setting the AssertionFailAction UM 531 variable in the modelsim ini file disable Turns off failure tracking for the specified assertions Optional Assertion failure tracking is enabled by default You can change the permanent default by setting the AssertionFailEnable UM 531 variable in the model
482. tus enabled or disabled e fail count e pass count e attempted flag indicates whether the assertion has ever attempted evaluation e fail action e fail log e pass log e fail limit e pass limit Normally the report is formatted for users with one line of the report reserved for each assertion specified by the path s For a more interactive look at this data open the Assertion Browser in the ModelSim GUI See Viewing assertions in the Assertions pane UM 378 for details assertion report recursive tcl_list verbose lt path gt append Appends this report to the named report file Optional file lt filename gt Specifies a file name for the report The default is to write the report to the Transcript GUI mode or stdout batch mode Environment variables may be used in the pathname Optional recursive For use with wildcard matching Specifies that the scope of the matching is to descend recursively into subregions Optional if omitted the search is limited to the selected region ModelSim SE Command Reference tcl_list Format the report as a Tcl list Optional verbose assertion report CR 69 Produces the detailed report as noted in the command description above Optional lt path gt Specifies the assertions on which to report Required Multiple names and wildcards are allowed The path specifies assertions or a design region containing multiple assertions Example VSIM 1
483. uitem CR 60 add_separator CR 61 add_submenu CR 62 change_menu_cmd CR 84 ModelSim SE Command Reference add_menucb CR 59 add _menucb Syntax Arguments Examples See also The add_menucb command creates a checkbox within the specified menu of the specified window A checkbox is a small box with a label Clicking on the box will toggle the state from on to off or the reverse When the box is on the Tcl global variable lt var gt is set to lt onval gt When the box is off the global variable is set to lt offval gt Also if something else changes the global variable its current state is reflected in the state of the checkbox Returns nothing add_menucb lt window_name gt lt menu_name gt lt Text gt variable lt var gt onvalue lt onval gt offvalue lt offval gt indicatoron lt val gt lt window_name gt Tk path of the window containing the menu Required The path for the Main window must be expressed as All other window pathnames begin with a period lt menu_name gt Name of the Tk menu widget Required lt Text gt Text to be displayed next to the checkbox Required variable lt var gt Global Tcl variable to be reflected and changed Required onvalue lt onval gt Value to set the global Tcl variable to when the box is on Required offvalue lt offval gt Value to set the global Tcl variable to when the box is off Required indicatoron lt val gt 0 or
484. ulation Examples report simulator control Displays all simulator control variables UserTimeUnit ns RunLength 100 IterationLimit 5000 BreakOnAssertion 3 DefaultForceKind default IgnoreNote 0 IgnoreWarning 0 IgnoreError 0 IgnoreFailure 0 CheckpointCompressMode 1 NumericStdNoWarnings 0 StdArithNoWarnings 0 PathSeparator DefaultRadix symbolic DelayFileOpen 0 WLFFilename vsim wlf report simulator state Displays all simulator state variables Only the variables that relate to the design being simulated are displayed now 0 0 delta 0 library work entity type_clocks architecture full resolution Ins ModelSim SE Command Reference report CR 247 Viewing preference variables See also Preference variables have more to do with the way things look but not entirely rather than controlling the simulator You can view preference variables from the Preferences dialog box Select Tools gt Edit Preferences Main window Preference variables located in INI files UM 526 and Preference variables located in Tcl files UM 542 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 248 restart restart The restart command reloads the design elements and resets the simulation time to zero Only design elements that have changed are reloaded Note that SDF files are always reread during a restart Shared libraries are handled as follows during a restart e Shared librar
485. uld use up too much memory Optional multisource_delay min max latest Controls the handling of multiple PORT or INTERCONNECT constructs that terminate at the same port Optional By default the Module Input Port Delay MIPD is set to the max value encountered in the SDF file Alternatively you may choose the min or latest of the values If you have a Verilog design and want to model multiple interconnect paths independently use the multisource_int_delays argument multisource_int_delays Enables multisource interconnect delay with pulse handling and transport delay behavior Works for both Verilog and VITAL cells Optional Use this argument when you have interconnect data in your SDF file and you want the delay on each interconnect path modeled independently Pulse handling is configured using the pulse_int_e and pulse_int_r switches described below The multisource_int_delays argument cannot be used if you compiled using the novital argument to vcom The novital argument instructs vcom to implement VITAL functionality using VHDL code instead of accelerated code and multisource interconnect delays cannot be implemented purely within VHDL noassume Prevents PSL assume directives from being simulated Optional This option may also be specified with the SimulateAssumeDirectives UM 535 variable in the modelsim ini file See Processing assume directives in simulation UM 365 for more information nocompress Causes
486. up in the incorrect copy of the modelsim ini del Deletes the mapping specified by lt logical_name gt from the current project file Optional lt logical_name gt Specifies the logical name of the library to be mapped Optional lt path gt Specifies the pathname of the directory to which the library is to be mapped Optional If omitted the command displays the mapping of the specified logical name ModelSim SE Command Reference vopt Syntax Arguments vopt CR 373 The vopt command performs global optimizations on Verilog and mixed HDL designs after they have been compiled with vcom or vlog The vopt command produces an optimized version of your design in the working directory You provide a name for this optimized version using the o argument You can then invoke vsim directly on that new design unit name In the course of optimizing a design vopt will remove objects that are deemed unnecessary for simulation For example line numbers are removed processes are merged nets and registers may be removed etc If you need visibility into your design for debugging purposes use the acc argument to conditionally enable visibility for parts of your design Note however that using acc may reduce simulation speed vopt acc lt spec gt lt module gt L lt libname gt Lf lt libname gt work lt library_name gt lt design_unit gt o lt name gt acc lt spec gt lt module gt Allows you t
487. v The setenv command changes or reports the current value of an environment variable The setting is not persistent it is valid only for the current ModelSim session Syntax setenv lt varname gt lt value gt Arguments lt varname gt The name of the environment variable you wish to set or check Required lt value gt The value for the environment variable Optional If you don t specify a value ModelSim reports the variable s current value See also unsetenv CR 291 printenv CR 226 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 268 shift shift Syntax Arguments Description See also The shift command shifts macro parameter values left one place so that the value of parameter 2 is assigned to parameter 1 the value of parameter 3 is assigned to 2 etc The previous value of 1 is discarded The shift command and macro parameters are used in macro files If a macro file requires more than nine parameters they can be accessed using the shift command To determine the current number of macro parameters use the argc UM 544 variable shift None For a macro file containing nine macro parameters defined as 1 to 9 one shift command shifts all parameter values one place to the left If more than nine parameters are named the value of the tenth parameter becomes the value of 9 and can be accessed from within the macro file do CR 153 ModelSim SE Command Reference show Syntax Argum
488. ve do Below is an example of a saved Wave window format file onerror resume quietly WaveActivateNextPane 0 add wave noupdate format Logic cntr_struct ld add wave noupdate format Logic cntr_struct rst add wave noupdate format Logic cntr_struct clk add wave noupdate format Literal cntr_struct d add wave noupdate format Literal cntr_struct q ModelSim SE Command Reference See also TreeUpdate SetDefaultTree quietly WaveActivateNextPane write format CR 425 add wave noupdate format Logic cntr_struct pl add wave noupdate format Logic cntr_struct p2 add wave noupdate format Logic cntr_struct p3 SetDefaultTree WaveRestoreCursors 0 ns TreeUpdate WaveRestoreZoom 0 ns 1 us configure configure configure configure In the example above wave wave wave wave namecolwidth 150 valuecolwidth 100 signalnamewidth 0 justifyvalue left five signals are added with the noupdate argument to the default window pane The TreeUpdate command then refreshes all five waveforms The second WaveActivateNextPane command creates a second pane which contains three signals The WaveRestoreCursors command restores any cursors you set during the original simulation and the WaveRestoreZoom command restores the Zoom range you set These four commands are used only in saved Wave format files therefore they are not documented elsewhere add list CR 48 add wave CR 53 ModelSim SE Command R
489. virtual delete kind explicits Deletes all of the virtuals you have explicitly created See also virtual signal CR 353 virtual function CR 341 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference virtual describe CR 339 virtual describe Syntax Arguments Examples See also The virtual describe command prints to the Transcript pane a complete description of the data type of one or more virtual signals Similar to the existing describe command virtual describe kind lt kind gt lt pathname gt kind lt kind gt Specifies a subset of virtuals to look at Optional lt kind gt can be any of the following signals functions designs implicits and explicits Unique abbreviations are accepted lt pathname gt Specifies the path to the virtual s for which you want descriptions Required Wildcards can be used virtual describe kind explicits Describes the data type of all virtuals you have explicitly created virtual define CR 337 virtual show CR 352 Virtual Objects User defined buses and more UM 233 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 340 virtual expand virtual expand The virtual expand command produces a list of all the non virtual objects contained in the specified virtual signal s This can be used to create a list of arguments for a command that does not accept or understand virtual signals Syntax virtual expand base lt pathname gt
490. vital Causes vecom to use VHDL code for VITAL procedures rather than the accelerated and optimized timing and primitive packages built into the simulator kernel Optional Allows breakpoints to be set in the VITAL behavior process and permits single stepping through the VITAL procedures to debug your model Also all of the VITAL data can be viewed in the Locals or Objects windows novitalcheck Disables Vital level 1 checks and also Vital level 0 checks defined in section 4 of the Vital 95 Spec IEEE Std 1076 4 1995 Optional nowarn lt number gt Selectively disables a category of warning message Optional Multiple nowarn switches are allowed Warnings may be disabled for all compiles via the Main window Compile gt Compile Options menu command or the modelsim ini file see the vcom VHDL compiler control variables UM 529 The warning message categories are 1 unbound component 2 process without a wait statement 3 null range 4 no space in time literal 5 multiple drivers on unresolved signal 6 VITAL compliance checks 7 VITAL optimization messages ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 318 vcom 8 lint checks 9 signal value used in expression evaluated at elaboration 10 VHDL 1993 constructs in VHDL 1987 code 11 PSL checks 00 01 04 05 Lower the optimization to a minimum with O0 capital oh zero Optional Use this to work around bugs increase your debugging visibility on a specific
491. w It executes the search on objects currently selected in the window starting at the time of the active cursor The active cursor moves to the found location Use this command to move to consecutive transitions or to find the time at which an object takes on a particular value or an expression of multiple objects evaluates to true See the up command CR 292 for related functionality The procedure for using down includes three steps click on the desired object click on the desired starting location issue the down command The seetime command CR 266 can initially position the cursor from the command line if desired Returns lt number_found gt lt new_time gt lt new_delta gt down expr lt expression gt falling noglitch rising value lt sig_value gt window lt wname gt lt n gt expr lt expression gt The List window will be searched until the expression evaluates to a boolean true condition Optional The expression may involve more than one object but is limited to objects that have been logged in the referenced List window An object may be specified either by its full path or by the shortcut label displayed in the List window See GUI _expression_format CR 22 for the format of the expression The expression must be placed within curly braces falling Searches for a falling edge on the specified object if that object is a scalar object If it is not a scalar object the option will be ig
492. when using wildcards Optional By default Verilog optimized cell ports are not selected even if they match the specified wildcard pattern out For use with wildcard searches Specifies that the scope of the search is to include ports of mode OUT if they match the object_name specification Optional ports For use with wildcard searches Specifies that the scope of the search is to include all ports Optional Has the same effect as specifying in out and inout together lt radix gt Specifies the radix for the objects that follow in the command Optional Valid entries or any unique abbreviations are binary ascii unsigned decimal octal hex symbolic and default If no radix is specified for an enumerated type the default representation is used You can change the default radix for the current simulation using the radix command CR 243 You can change the default radix permanently by editing the DefaultRadix UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file If you specify a radix for an array of a VHDL enumerated type ModelSim converts each signal value to 1 0 Z or X recursive For use with wildcard searches Specifies that the scope of the search is to descend recursively into subregions Optional If omitted the search is limited to the selected region You can use the depth argument to specify how far down the hierarchy to descend trigger Specifies that objects are to be listed and causes the List window to be upd
493. which indicates a range from 0 to lt n gt lt topindex gt Specifies the vertical scroll position of the window Optional Zoomrange must be specified if you want to specify topindex The number identifies which object the window should be scrolled to For example specifying 20 means the Wave window will be scrolled down to show the 20th object window lt window_name gt Specifies the window to which the bookmark will be added Optional If this argument is omitted the bookmark is added in the current default Wave window bookmark add wave foo 10 ns 1000 ns 20 Adds a bookmark named foo to the current default Wave window The bookmark marks a zoom range from 10ns to 1000ns and a scroll position of the 20th object in the window bookmark delete wave CR 73 bookmark goto wave CR 74 bookmark list wave CR 75 write format CR 424 ModelSim SE Command Reference bookmark delete wave CR 73 bookmark delete wave Syntax Arguments Examples See also The bookmark delete wave command deletes bookmarks from the specified Wave window bookmark delete wave lt label gt all window lt window_name gt lt label gt Specifies the name of the bookmark to delete Required unless the all switch is used all Specifies that all bookmarks in the window be deleted Optional window lt window_name gt Specifies the window from which bookmark s will be deleted Optional If this argument is omitted bookmar
494. win gt deletecursor window lt win gt interrupt window lt win gt refresh window lt win gt seecursor window lt win gt seetime window lt win gt zoomin window lt win gt zoomout window lt win gt zoomfull window lt win gt zoomlast window lt win gt zoomrange window lt win gt window lt win gt All commands default to the active Wave window unless this argument is used to specify a different Wave window Optional lt cursor num gt Specifies a cursor number Optional Positions the wave display such that the specified time appears at the specified percent from the left edge of the display 0 is the left edge 100 is the right edge lt cursor num gt time lt time gt lt cursor num gt time lt time gt lt cursor num gt at lt percent gt lt cursor num gt lt time gt at lt percent gt lt factor gt lt factor gt lt start time gt lt end time gt ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 398 wave time lt time gt Specifies a time Optional lt factor gt A number that specifies how much you want to zoom into or out of the wave display Optional Default value is 2 0 lt start time gt lt end time gt start time and end time are times that specify a zoom range If neither number is specified the command returns the current zoom range If only one time is specified then the zoom range
495. x Arguments Examples See also push CR 239 This command is used with C Debug See Chapter 16 C Debug UM 401 for more information The push command moves the specified number of call frames down the C callstack push lt _of_levels gt lt _of_levels gt Specifies the number of call frames to move down the C callstack Optional If unspecified 1 level is assumed push Moves down 1 call frame push 4 Moves down 4 call frames pop CR 221 Chapter 16 C Debug UM 401 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 240 pwd pwd The Tcl pwd command displays the current directory path in the Transcript pane Syntax Arguments None ModelSim SE Command Reference quietly CR 241 quietly The quietly command turns off transcript echoing for the specified command Syntax quietly lt command gt Arguments lt command gt Specifies the command for which to disable transcript echoing Required Any results normally echoed by the specified command will not be written to the Transcript pane To disable echoing for all commands use the transcript command CR 288 with the quietly option See also transcript CR 288 ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 242 quit quit The quit command exits the simulator If you want to stop the simulation using a when command CR 409 you must use a stop command CR 275 within your when statement DO NOT use an exit command CR 168 or a quit command The stop comm
496. x notepad lt filename gt r edit Arguments lt filename gt Name of the file to be displayed Optional r edit Selects the notepad editing mode r for read only and edit for edit mode Optional Edit mode is the default ModelSim SE Command Reference CR 214 noview noview Syntax Arguments Examples See also The noview command closes a window pane in the ModelSim GUI To open a window pane use the view command noview lt window_name gt lt window_name gt Specifies the window pane to close Wildcards and multiple window pane types may be used At least one type or wildcard is required Available window types are assertions dataflow fcovers list locals memory objects process profile profile_details signals structure variables wave watch and workspace noview wavel Closes the Wave window named wavel noview 1 Closes all List windows view CR 334 ModelSim SE Command Reference nowhen CR 215 nowhen The nowhen command deactivates selected when CR 409 commands Syntax nowhen lt label gt Arguments lt label gt Specifies an individual when command Optional Wildcards may be used to select more than one when command Examples when label 99 b echo b changed nowhen 99 This nowhen command deactivates the when CR 409 command labeled 99 nowhen This nowhen command deactivates all when CR 409 commands ModelSim SE Command Reference
497. xample The profile on command enables runtime memory allocation and statistical performance profiling After this command is executed every subsequent run command will be profiled profile on m p file lt filename gt fileonly lt filename gt m Enables memory allocation profiling only Optional p Enables statistical performance profiling only Optional file lt filename gt Allows creation of a raw profile data file that can be post processed later Saves memory profile data into both an external file and internal data structures Optional fileonly lt filename gt Allows creation of a raw profile data file that can be post processed later Saves memory profile data into an external file only not to internal data structures Optional Chapter 12 Profiling performance and memory use UM 317 profile clear CR 227 profile interval CR 228 profile off CR 229 profile option CR 231 profile reload CR 232 profile report CR 233 profile on run 1000 ns profile report hier file perf rpt This set of commands enables the profiler runs the simulation for 1000 nanoseconds and outputs the profiling data to perf rpt ModelSim SE Command Reference profile option CR 231 profile option Syntax Arguments See also The profile option command changes how profiling data are reported The command acts like a toggle invoking it once turns on the option invoking it a second time turns the option
498. y by editing the DefaultRadix UM 533 variable in the modelsim ini file wordsperline lt Nwords gt Specifies how many words are to be printed on each line with the default assuming an 80 column display width lt Nwords gt is an unsigned integer Optional startaddress lt st gt Specifies the start address for a range of addresses to be displayed The lt st gt can be specified as any valid address in the memory Optional If unspecified the default is the start of the memory ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples See Also mem display CR 199 endaddress lt end gt Specifies the end address for a range of addresses to be displayed The lt end gt can be specified as any valid address in the memory Optional If unspecified the default is the end of the memory noaddress Specifies that addresses not be printed Optional compress Specifies that identical lines not be printed Optional Reduces the file size by replacing exact matches with a single line containing an asterisk These compressed files are automatically expanded during a mem load operation lt path gt Specifies the full path to the memory instance Optional The default is the current context as shown in the Structure tab of the Workspace Indexes can be specified mem display startaddress 5 endaddress 10 top c mru_mem This command displays the memory contents of instance top m mru_mem addresses 5 to 10 to the screen as follows 5 110
499. y the add list add wave or log commands in the simulator and converts it to the QuickSim II logfile format A Important This command should be invoked only after you have stopped the simulation using quit sim or dataset close sim wlf2log bits fullname help inout input internal l lt instance_path gt lower o lt outfile gt output quiet lt wlffile gt bits Forces vector nets to be split into 1 bit wide nets in the log file Optional fullname Shows the full hierarchical pathname when displaying signal names Optional help Displays a list of command options with a brief description for each Optional inout Lists only the inout ports Optional This may be combined with the input output or internal switches input Lists only the input ports Optional This may be combined with the output inout or internal switches internal Lists only the internal signals Optional This may be combined with the input output or inout switches 1 lt instance_path gt Lists the signals at or below the specified HDL instance path within the design hierarchy Optional lower Shows all logged signals in the hierarchy Optional When invoked without the lower switch only the top level signals are displayed o lt outfile gt Directs the output to be written to the file specified by lt outfile gt Optional The default destination for the logfile is standard out output L
500. yed is the system default all Searches the specified memory range and prints out all matching occurrences to the screen Optional By default only the first matching occurrence is printed replace lt word gt lt word gt Replaces the found patterns with a designated pattern Optional If this option is used each pattern specified by the pattern argument must have a corresponding pattern specified by the replace argument Multiple word patterns are accepted separated by a single white space No wildcards are allowed in the replaced pattern startaddress lt address gt Specifies the start address for a range of addresses to search The lt address gt can be specified as any valid address in the memory Optional endaddress lt address gt Specifies the end address for a range of addresses to search The lt address gt can be specified as any valid address in the memory Optional lt path gt Specifies the hierarchical path to the location of the memory instance Optional The default is the current context value as shown in the Structure tab of the Workspace pane pattern lt word gt lt word gt Specifies the value of the pattern for the search Required Multiple word patterns are accepted separated by a single white space Wildcards are accepted in the pattern ModelSim SE Command Reference Examples mem search CR 207 mem search pattern 16 Hbeef dataradix hex uut u0 mem3 Searches for and print
501. yntax disable_menuitem lt window_name gt lt menu_path gt lt label gt Arguments lt window_name gt Tk path of the window containing the menu Required nu Note that the path for the Main window must be expressed as All other window pathnames begin with a period as shown in the example below lt menu_path gt Name of the Tk menu widget path The path may include a submenu as shown in the example below Required lt label gt Menu item text Required Examples disable_menuitem mywindow file save Save Results As This command locates the mywindow window and disables the Save Results As menu item in the save submenu of the file menu See also add_menuitem CR 60 enable_menuitem CR 162 ModelSim SE Command Reference do Syntax Arguments Examples See also do CR 153 The do command executes commands contained in a macro file A macro file can have any name and extension An error encountered during the execution of a macro file causes its execution to be interrupted unless an onerror command CR 218 onbreak command CR 216 or the OnErrorDefaultAction Tcl variable has specified the resume command CR 251 do lt filename gt lt parameter_value gt lt filename gt Specifies the name of the macro file to be executed Required The name can be a pathname or a relative file name Pathnames are relative to the current working directory if the do command is executed from

Command - Electrical and Computer Engineering

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents